Home

LinSig Version 3 user Guide

1. The Phase defining the SCOOT Stage Some SCOOT systems allow SCOOT Stages to be defined in terms of Controller Phases rather than Controller Stages the SCOOT Stage being deemed to run from the start to the end of the Phase To define a SCOOT Stage as a Controller Phase choose Define by Phase and select the Controller Phase from the drop down list When the SCOOT Stage is correctly defined click OK to close the Edit SCOOT Stage dialog box and apply any changes to the SCOOT Stage Clicking Cancel will discard any changes made in the Edit SCOOT dialog box or if adding anew SCOOT Stage discards the Stage 4 21 1 2 The Interstage and Minimums Results Matrix The Interstage and Minimums Results Matrix displays the following A SCOOT Interstage Matrix This shows the range of values the Interstage between two SCOOT Stages may take This is calculated from the range of Controller Interstages occurring when different alternative Controller Stages or Phases are used for the SCOOT Stage A SCOOT Stage Minimums Table This shows the range of SCOOT Stage minimums which can occur for a SCOOT Stage taking into account the different Controller Stages or Phases which can be represented by the SCOOT Stage Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 22 Network Results View 237 4 22 Network Results View The Network Results View displays a range of detailed performance statistics and data for the Network and Network items such as Junctions Lanes and Pe
2. Add Zone from the Zones pop out menu on the Network menu Zones are not required for Lane Based Flow Network regions unless Routes are required for calculating journey times through Lane Based Flow Network regions e Create Traffic Flow Groups Flow Groups can be created and managed in the Traffic Flow View Remember that Flow Groups can be defined as a combination of other Flow Groups using a formula to specify how they are combined e Enter Traffic Flow Information into the Origin Destination Matrix Traffic Flow information in LinSig is entered in Passenger Car Unit PCU flows between Zones Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 5 The LinSig Modelling Process 27 The Traffic Flow View provides a Desired Flow OD Matrix in which the Traffic Flows for each Zone to Zone movement are entered The Actual and Difference Matrices are used to display assigned flow information not to enter data This is described in more detail in Definitions above If the OD matrix isn t Known and only Junction turning counts are available LinSig s Matrix Estimation procedure can be used to estimate a Matrix which is a best fit to the counts If used Matrix Estimation is carried out later in the modelling sequence after Scenarios have been created e Add Traffic Counts If traffic counts are being used either to estimate the OD matrix or just to validate the Network s assignment they can be entered using the Edit Junction Turning Counts dialog box which i
3. As well as viewing Stage and Phase timings the Signal Timings View also shows detailed Interstage structure Stage Minimums and allows signal timing optimisation of individual Controllers or Stage Streams to be carried out The Signal Timings View is comprised of two panels e The Stage Stream List This allows timing and display settings for each Stage Stream to be controlled When multiple Stage Streams are disabled a single line showing the only Stage Stream is displayed e The Signal Timings Panel This shows the Stage and Phase Times for the current Scenario over the Network Cycle Time A wide range of other information such as Intergreens are also shown as described below 4 15 1 Selecting which Controller to View It is possible to have one or more Signal Timings Views open in a LinSig model at any one time Each Signal Timings View shows the signal timings for a single LinSig traffic Signal Controller The Controller being displayed is set using each View s Controller Selector drop list as follows e LinSig always has a Current Controller which is used by several Views to ensure they are all displaying information for the same Controller The Current Controller is selected using the Controller List View or using the Controller drop down list on the main LinSig toolbar If the Controller drop down list on the Signal Timings View s title bar is set to Current Selection the Signal Timings View will display the signal timing
4. At low and medium levels of flow on a Lane the above method is quite realistic and real life random variations in traffic do not greatly atfect the overall levels of delay predicted by the model However it becomes increasing less accurate as flows increase as the assumption that each cycle is the same becomes less realistic When the flow on a Lane is greater than its capacity this assumption is obviously incorrect as at the end of each cycle the queue will have permanently increased by the difference between the flow arriving in the cycle and the Lanes capacity over the cycle Each subsequent cycle would then add a similar amount to the Lane s queue and as the flows are assumed to be the same for each cycle throughout the modelled period the queue will never discharge during this period This problem is resolved by taking advantage of the fact that the additional delay per cycle due to over saturation on a Lane can be separated from the delay caused by transient queuing within the typical cycle The oversaturated delay component is relatively easy to calculate using a mathematical formula This is then added to the transient delay calculated from the cyclic flow profile of the typical cycle which is termed the uniform delay An attempt is also made to allow for the fact that when the degree of saturation on a Lane is around 80 100 the real life randomness of traffic flows on a Lane will cause the delay to be higher than the uniform delay A rand
5. O O O e Phase View The Phase View graphically displays the Phase layout for a single signal Controller The View can be used to Select which Controller to display in this View Create delete and edit Phases Create delete and edit Stage Streams Define the Phases allocated to each Stage Stream O O O e Intergreen View The Intergreen View is used to enter and edit the Phase Intergreen Matrix for each Controller The Intergreen Matrix s cells are colour coded to indicate cells where it may be inappropriate to have an Intergreen for example where two Phases are configured to run together in the same Stage This View can be used to carry out the following tasks Select which Controller to display in this View Enter and edit Phase Intergreens View matrix cells where LinSig indicates an Intergreen would be incorrect o Select which set of Intergreens to use Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 18 LinSig Basics e Stage View The Stage View is used to construct Stages for each Controller These are subsequently used in the Controllers Stage Sequence View to construct Stage orders for each Stream The View can be used to carry out the following tasks Select which Controller to display in this View Define the Phases allocated to each Stage Stream Create and delete Controller Stages Renumber Stages by reordering them with the mouse Add and remove Phases from a Stage by double clicking Use colour to display Phase
6. Pedestrian Links pop out menu on the Network menu It is important to remember that deleting a Pedestrian Link also deletes any Pedestrian Link Connectors and Pedestrian Routes associated with the Pedestrian Link Undo is of course available in case of accidental deletion Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 126 View Reference 4 3 11 Joining Pedestrian Links with Link Connectors Pedestrian Link Connectors are used in LinSig to define possible movements between Pedestrian Links when Pedestrian need to use more than one crossing to cross from one side of a junction to another For example Pedestrian Link Connectors are used as shown below to define the movements possible through a pedestrian island Triangular Pedestrian Island The diagram above shows three Pedestrian Link Connectors joining three Pedestrian Links to define which pedestrian movements can be carried out on the island 4 3 11 1 Creating Pedestrian Link Connectors Pedestrian Link Connectors can either be created between two existing Pedestrian Links or can be created between an existing Pedestrian Link and a new Pedestrian Link created at the same time as the new Pedestrian Link Connector The facility to create new Pedestrian Link Connectors on the fly allows Pedestrian Networks to be built more speedily To create a Pedestrian Link Connector between two existing Pedestrian Links e Drag the starting Pedestrian Link s Connection Point with the mouse A Pedestrian L
7. Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 57 The Inter Junction Lane Connectors in LinSig are used to control the Lane changes allowed between Junctions Where no lane changing is possible as is often the case at closely spaced junctions Lane Connectors simply join Lanes on the previous Junction s Exit Lanes to the equivalent Lanes on the downstream Junction s Entry Lanes Where lane changing can take place additional diagonal weaving connectors are used to represent traffic changing lanes between junctions In Matrix Based Network regions this will create additional Routes which provide LinSig s assignment procedure with more scope to balance traffic between Lanes Avoiding Excessive Weaving Care should be taken with the modelling of weaving as excessive use of weaving connectors can create very large numbers of Routes in Matrix Based Network regions many of which are not strictly necessary These excessive Routes can significantly slow down optimisation and assignment within LinSig Often the excessive Route numbers are due to LinSig creating Routes which weave backward and forwards between Lanes many times along a corridor Unfeasible Routes can be quickly located and marked as non permitted using the Route List View This will prevent LinSig from incorrectly assigning traffic to them and also significantly speed up the model Automatic Identification of Excessive Weaving Routes LinSig 3 1 introduces a new method
8. menu LinSig transmits no personal information to JCT Consultancy when checking for updates Automatic Update Technical Note The automatic update notification uses your computers Internet connection and should operate correctly provided your computer or company s firewall allows access to http over port 80 Please contact us if automatic update does not work correctly on your computer as it MAY be possible with the agreement of your IT department for us to reconfigure LinSig to work with your firewall Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 314 Examples B Appendix B Third party licences B 1 Crashrpt http code google com p crashrpt Copyright c 2003 Michael Carruth All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the author nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS
9. x Find Arm ba Fy g a East Junction West Junction ry A inn 176 9 A AN iaa sate Delay 6 1 pcuHr Total Traffic Delay 3 9 pcuHr es I 5 m eo A I Arm 5 poe l pega High St EB fra n E iy Arm 2 High St WB AN p 2 al S 4i Arm 4 High St EB COA _ __s 1 2 l 11 l 1 2 2 0 E EAE E E E E R Arm 2 High St WB g Wy 4S ynos wuy Arm 5 51 l Lie l ZIE exc al gt _y Arm All yv Lane All v Destinatior Two Separate LinSig Models before Importing Importing refers to the process of adding a LinSig network to another Network It does not refer to the process of loading and converting LinSig files from earlier versions 4 29 1 Points to Consider before Merging Networks Whilst planning whether and how to merge Networks the following sometimes contradictory points need to be considered With LinSig 3 1 and above different Junctions within the model can now operate at different cycle times Merging two Networks into a larger Network will increase the run time of optimisation and assignment Merging two Matrix Based Networks will generally increase run times by a larger factor than merging two Lane Based Networks as the number of routing options increases disproportionately Merging Matrix Based Networks may be desirable as it allows rerouting due to signal timing or Network
10. 4 Total Traffic Delay 19 4 pcuHr Ave Route Delay Per Ped 63 6 s Ped T 2 gt Q a Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm All LanelAll Contains Junc All Arm all Lane All Connector all Destination Zone 4 3 1 Network Building Overview The section The LinSig Modelling Process in the LinSig Basics chapter describes a suggested sequence of steps for building a LinSig model The Network Layout View is used for a number of steps in this process The key tasks carried out in the Network Layout View are e Create LinSig Junctions for each real Junction e Add Arms to each Junction to reflect the Network Structure The Network Arm Structure described below is recommended e Add Lanes to each Arm to reflect the Lane layout within each Junction e Join Lanes on different Arms using Lane Connectors e Edit Lanes to set Saturation Flows and give way settings e f using a Matrix Based Flows add Zones to define the entry and exit points for the Network Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 55 e If using Lane Based Flows specify flows using the drag and drop interface to drag flows around the Network e Create LinSig Controllers using other Views before returning to the Network Layout View to specify each Lane s controlling Phase s e Create a Pedestrian Network for each Junction as desired e Use the Network Layout View to display results as text an
11. 450 670 2 3 250 200 450 Total T50 370 650 1770 For comparison with Counts the Modelled Flow does not include Lane Based flow or Bus Flow Cancel e Using the Turning Count List in the Matrix Estimation View Counts can be entered as a list of counts in the Matrix Estimation View as described in the next section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 206 View Reference e Using the graphical Turning Counts View The Turning Counts View is new in LinSig 3 1 and displays the Turning Counts graphically Consistency checking information is also provided allowing rogue counts to be quickly located This is described in more detail in the Turning Count View section below For all methods counts are entered as PCUs 4 13 4 1 Managing Counts using the Matrix Estimation View Count List The Count List can be used to enter and delete counts for the Current Scenario s Traffic Flow Group Movements for which no Count is defined are still shown in the Count list but obviously have no count value A value of zero should not be used for non existent Counts as this would imply the Count has been observed to have zero PCU rather than not observed at all Entering or Editing a Count A Count can be edited in the Count List by clicking on the Count s value and entering a new value in PCUs Deleting a Count A Count s value can be deleted by right clicking with the mouse and choosing Delete Count Any implied Zone totals which a
12. Cancel 4 13 6 Validating an Estimated Matrix or Assignment The Matrix Estimation View can be used to validate a Matrix Based model by comparing Traffic Counts to assigned flows This can be based on either an estimated or manually entered OD Matrix which is assigned either automatically or manually to the Network The Matrix Estimation View is simply comparing counted and modelled flows regardless of how they are modelled and providing goodness of fit statistics Counts and assigned Flows can be compared in two ways These are e Using the Matrix Estimation View This provides the most comprehensive way of comparing Counts and modelled flows across the whole Network e Using the Traffic Count Matrix in the Network Layout View This provides less detail than the Matrix Estimation View but allows Counts and modelled flows to be quickly compared using a Junction Turning Count Matrix 4 13 6 1 Model Validation using the Matrix Estimation View As described above the Matrix Estimation View displays a list of Turning Counts together with a range of statistics comparing the Counts with the modelled flows from the Current Scenario Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 13 Matrix Estimation View 211 A Matrix Estimation View a fo 6 Flow Group fam Peak Current Scenario Import counts Export counts rake pein Traffic Routes BusRoutes Lane based Traffic Counts Zone Totals PEU J1
13. More information is given in the section on the Scenarios View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 97 e Any Lane Based Flows passing through the Lane Connector The deleted traffic flow should be added back into the model onto a different Lane Connector to reflect how traffic will use Lanes after the Lane Connector has been deleted The Network Layout View s Flow Consistency Mode is useful for checking that all flows have been correctly added back Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 98 View Reference 4 3 8 Defining Network Entry and Exit Points using Zones Zones are used in LinSig to define entry and exit points to and from Matrix Based regions of a LinSig Network Zones define the start and end point of traffic movements through the Network All Matrix Based traffic flows start from a Zone and end at a Zone Zones are also used in the Traffic Flows View to reference the start and end points of traffic movements entered in the Traffic Flow Views Origin Destination matrices Network Layout View A ee ee W aa al aeee S S WR SPSS IS SIS elle A Sal Al Find Junction Pf Find Arm Eo ma g ie sa a an i000 Saat m Arm 5 Arm 1 London Road igs B Tei Fi 1 Ala d w aaj aj Amdi Arm 2 High Str en 600 SN A 200 High St London Rd Park St PRC 26 0 Total Traffic Delay 19 4 pcuHr T Cad I U pat I o Ei om a rr Route Filter Reset Origin
14. Unlocked 2 iea Chimur Alena 1347 1a inina Policy settings for permitted routes lf Make circular routes non permitted W Make U turn routes non permitted etmese re cne mo 14 8 1 Fi 3 L Ln omrFPreoarwriAaar oa oo he et mn J e The permitted status column can be changed to one of three settings These are o Allow The Route can be used by LinSig regardless of the policies o Disallow The Route cannot be used regardless of the policies o Use Policy Whether the Route is allowed is governed by the Policies selected in the Policy Settings for Permitted Routes box at the bottom of the Edit Permitted Routes dialog box The result of applying the policy to a Route is shown in the Permitted Status column as either Use Policy Allow or Use Policy Disallow as appropriate Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 5 The Route List View 155 o Currently two policies are available These are Make Circular Routes non Permitted and Make U turn Routes non permitted It is recommended that both policies are kept switched on unless problems are encountered with a particular Network Remember the explicit Allow or Disallow can always be used to override the policies e The Lock Route Flow column can be used to lock the flow on the Route e Click OK to save the permitted and locked status for the Routes Any Route which is disallowed will have its Route Flow set to zero This will cause a
15. below Editing a Flow Group s Details Editing a Flow Group s traffic flow information is covered below in the section Origin Destination Matrices A Flow Group s general details other than traffic flow information can be edited as follows e Select the Flow Group in the Flow Group List e Choose Edit Flow Group from the Traffic Flows menu e The Edit Flow Group dialog box is displayed Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 144 View Reference Edit Flow Group 23l Flow Group Flow Group Title AMM Peak Flow Group Stark Time 08 00 Flow Group End Time 09 00 Oooo e The Edit Flow Group dialog box allows the following Flow Group settings to be edited o Flow Group Number A Flow Group can be renumbered by changing its Flow Group Number Flow Group numbers must be sequential with no gaps in the sequence If the Flow Group is given the same number as an existing Flow Group the Flow Group will be inserted into the sequence and the existing and higher number Flow Groups will be renumbered o Flow Group Title Each Flow Group should be given a meaningful title o Flow Group Start Time The Flow Group Start Time should be specified using the 24 hour clock in the format hh mm o Flow Group End Time The Flow Group End Time should be specified using the 24 hour clock in the format hh mm o Component Flow Group A Component Flow Group is a Flow Group which is used only as a component of another Flow Group in a
16. training software consultancy LinSig 3 2 User Guide Paul Moore JCT Consultancy Ltd JCT Consultancy Ltd LinSig House Deepdale Enterprise Park Nettleham Lincoln LN2 2LL Tel 44 0 1522 751010 Fax 44 0 1522 751188 Email sales jctconsultancy co uk support jctconsultancy co uk Website www jctconsultancy co uk JCT Consultancy Ltd 2009 2013 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 This User Guide is Copyright by JCT Consultancy Ltd 2009 2011 All copying of this document is prohibited except in the following circumstances Licensed Users of LinSig Version 3 and unlicensed users trialling the software may copy a single copy of the document to their computer when installing the software Licensed users of LinSig Version 3 may copy this document within their own company an unlimited number of times provided it is copied in full and no fee or other charge is made for any copies Employees of licensed users of LinSig Version 3 may make a single copy of this document for use at home provided it is only used for personal study or in connection with their employer s business Licensed users of LinSig Version 3 may use small extracts from the document for use in technical reports provided the source of the extract is fully acknowledged This does not include course notes used for commercial training All Requests for copying other than the above should be made to JCT Consultancy Ltd in writing Windows Windows 98
17. 12 oe m sie SERP S aleei AAalAlsle alela sicie ae eh a re A eo z5 35 Ss i 2 S gt as Arm J2 4 Use Arm J2 1 High St EB 7 Q e weer OO A Arm J1 1 High St EB Arm J1 2 Am J1 2 High Stw e AMRS e o E E o ga ngs ction Ve y J2 East Junction Tow Tart lie PRO GOS Total Ti Y 35 ynog EP uy _ 9 hp Wy gt T ta i e tu Cer Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm All wv Lane All Contains Junc All w Arm All wv Lane All Destination Zone All Arm All v Lane e The Lane Connectors are coloured red or green depending on whether a movement is allowed at the current point in the cycle e Any graphs appearing on the Network Layout View display a time cursor at the current point in the cycle e Queues at the current point of the cycle are shown as a bar overlaid on the Lanes The length of the bar is scaled in one of two ways o The queue is scaled so that when the queue is 100 of the Lanes true length it is shown as 100 of the Lane s graphical length o The queue is scaled so that queues on all Lanes are scaled the same but queue length shown does correspond to the Lanes graphical length 4 33 3 Viewing Animation in the Phase View The Phase View displays the Phases configured in the Controller When animation is active the Phases are shown as red or green depending on whether they are running or not at the current p
18. An invalid Sequence is indicated in two ways These are e A large red cross over a Stage Change This indicates that the Stage Change has been prohibited If you wish to use this Stage Change in a Stage Sequence first use the Interstage View to investigate why the Stage Change is prohibited and remove the prohibition if appropriate e A large blue cross over a stage change This indicates that although the Stage Change has not been explicitly prohibited it cannot take place due to a problem typically a Filter or Indicative Arrow Phase is not being terminated correctly If you wish to use this Stage Change in a Stage Sequence first use the Phase View and Interstage View to investigate the relationship between associated phases and amend as necessary to make the Stage Change legal Current Selection Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 10 Stage Sequence View 183 As you build up a Stage Sequence the unfinished sequence will usually show a number of sequence errors This is quite normal and reflects the fact that the Stage Sequence is not valid until it is complete All of the traffic model calculations in LinSig depend on the Stage Sequence associated with the Current Scenario s Network Control Plan containing a valid Stage Sequence If a valid Stage Sequence is not defined many of the results views will be unable to show any results In this case error messages are shown indicating the possible cause of the problem As soon as a Scenar
19. Arm J4 2 Main Road WB at Ped X 4 N Arm J3 2 Main Road Westbound Paa need 650 These Lane Connectors do not i carry traffic between A Network regions Inherit Cyclic Profile from 5 3sPed AN Upstream Exit Lane set on F these Lanes Network Region 2 Network Region 1 e The use of the this method maintains cyclic flow profiles and coordination across the Network region boundary but greatly limits the number of Routes in the model by only modelling Routes within each Network Region and not modelling Routes between each Network region The lack of Routes crossing the region boundary means that cyclic flow profiles of traffic crossing the region boundary would be lost if the above setting was not used 4 29 3 2 Joining Two Lane Based Network Regions Two Lane Based regions are much simpler to join as there are no Routing issues to resolve The Network regions can be joined as follows e Create Lane Connectors joining Lanes immediately upstream and downstream of the region boundary e Add Lane Based Flows on the new Lane Connectors using the Network Layout View s Lane Based Flow Edit Mode 4 29 3 3 Joining a Matrix Based and a Lane Based Network Region Where the two Network regions being joined are of different types they can be joined using a combination of the above techniques This involves Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 268 View Reference e Create Lane Connectors joining Lanes immedi
20. Create Timing Dial dialog box and display the new Timing Dial e The Timing Dial will always show the Stage lengths for the current Scenario If the current Scenario is changed the Timing Dials will change to reflect the Stage lengths in the new current Scenario 4 3 15 2 Editing the Settings for a Timing Dial An existing Timing Dial s settings can be edited at any time by double clicking the Timing Dial This will open the Edit Timing Dial dialog box which can be used to change its settings as described above in Adding a Timing Dial to the Network Layout View 4 3 15 3 Deleting a Timing Dial To delete a Timing Dial select the Dial with the mouse and choose Delete Timing Dial from the Timing Dials pop out on the Network Menu Alternatively right click on the Dial and choose Delete Timing Dial from the pop up menu 4 3 15 4 Adjusting Signal Settings using a Timing Dial As well as displaying the Stage lengths for the current Scenario the Timing Dial can be used to adjust the Stage Lengths as follows e Click on any Timing Dial stage change point handle and drag with the mouse LinSig will update the other views with the new stage times Alternatively the arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to incrementally change a Stage Change Point e All minimums intergreens etc are complied with as part of the dragging process e f Flow Profile and Queue Graphs are also displayed on the Network Layout View
21. Creating a New Controller above 4 6 3 4 Deleting Controllers A Controller can be deleted by selecting the Controller in the Controller List View and clicking delete on the Controller List View s toolbar Remember that deleting a Controller will also delete all of its Phases Phase Intergreens Stages Stage Sequences etc and also leave any Lanes controlled by the Controller as uncontrolled Lanes 4 6 4 Managing Stage Streams in the Controller List View The Controller List View can also be used to create and manage Stage Streams belonging to Controllers 4 6 4 1 Adding a Stage Stream to a Controller A new Stage Stream can be created on a Controller by right clicking the Controller in the Controller List View and choosing Add New Stage Stream The new Stage Stream will Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 162 View Reference always be added to the end of the Stage Stream list but can be subsequently moved within the list as described below 4 6 4 2 Reordering Stage Streams on a Controller Stage Streams on a Controller can be reordered as follows Select the Stage Stream in the Controller List View Right click on the Stage Stream and choose Renumber Stage Stream from the pop up menu This opens the Renumber Stage Stream dialog box Select the new Stage Stream number in the dialog box The Stage Stream is renumbered Phases are not automatically renumbered to reflect the new Stage Stream order but can be done
22. Edit Lane from the pop up menu will also open the Edit Lane dialog box As well as being used to edit Lane Based Flows the Edit Lane dialog box can be used to edit a wide range of other settings on a Lane Details of using the Edit Lane dialog box for editing other settings are provided in the Configuring Lane Settings section above Two of the tabs provided by the Lane Edit View can be used to edit Lane Based Flows These are e Lane Based Flow Summary The Lane Based Flow Summary tab is only present if Lane Based Flows are defined on a Lane with two or more Layers This tab summarises the Lane Based Flows across all Layers and allows Layers to be managed e Lane Based Flow Layers A separate tab is shown for each Lane Based Flow Layer using the Lane The tab allows the total flow and incoming and outgoing flows to be specified for the layer Lane Based Flow Summary The Lane based Flow Summary tab is only used where Lane Based Flows are being defined on a Lane and two or more Flow Layers are defined The tab shows a summary of the total flow incoming flows and outgoing flows across all Layers on a Lane and allows non layer specific settings to be altered 1a Edit Lane J2 1 1 Lane Based Flows Applies to this Lane Based Flow Groupi AM Peak Lane Based Flows Total Flow 100 Manage Layers Available Lane Based Flow Entry Mode To This Lane When enabled this allows Uniform Flaw lo m viewing and direct editi
23. Essential Background This section looks at some aspects of the modelling in LinSig in more detail and provides background in a number of areas 3 1 The LinSig Traffic Model LinSig uses Cyclic Flow Profiles CFP to model traffic moving through the Network This section explains the theory underlying Cyclic Flow Profiles and how they are used to calculate queues and delays The concept of using Cyclic Flow profiles to model traffic behaviour is often misunderstood and assumed to be far more complex than it actually is Although the model incorporates many details which allows it to model more complex situations with greater accuracy the underlying concept is relatively straightforward 3 1 1 1 Model Structure A fundamental feature of the model is to represent traffic flowing along a section of road as a Lane or Lane Group Each Lane represents a single independent stream of traffic travelling between two junctions A Lane Group represents a Long and Short Lane which interact and potentially block each other and is modelled as a group of interacting Lane Segments For a basic Lane traffic enters at its upstream end from other Lanes or from outside the Network and leaves at its downstream end at a rate dependent on the Lane s control for example whether it is a signal or give way controlled Lane The rate at which traffic enters or leaves the Lane varies over time with the model calculating queues and delays based on profiles of the arriv
24. LinSig will increase the degree of saturation of the Lane as seen by the optimiser when a Lane s queue exceeds the Excess Queue Limit on the Lane When this occurs LinSig biases the optimiser to attempt to reduce the real degree of saturation on the Lane more than it otherwise would This has the effect of reducing the queue on the Lane LinSig increases the degree of saturation by the Degree of Saturation Weighting multiplied by the average queuing exceeding the Excess Queue Limit A higher value will cause the optimiser to be more aggressive in reducing the queue Too high a value however may prevent the optimiser from finding optimal signal settings It is recommended to experiment with different values for each model o Delay Weighting pcuHr The delay weighting serves the same purpose as the Degree of Saturation Weighting but is used when optimising for minimum delay Again a higher value will cause the optimiser to reduce queues more aggressively e Optimiser Weightings The Optimiser weightings allow aspects of a Lane s importance to be increased or decreased causing the optimiser to find different timings The two weights available include o Optimiser Stops Weighting This weight allows the Stops calculated by the traffic model for this Lane to be factored up or down when used by the optimiser A value of 100 will have no effect a value greater than 100 will factor the number of Stops up and a value of less than 100 will fact
25. More Advanced Report Editing using Repeat Select Options The Repeat Select facility allows sophisticated control over how a LinSig Report handles repeating Fragments for example a table of traffic flows which is required to be repeated for a number of different Flow Groups As well as allowing individual Fragments to be repeated the Report Builder also allows groups of Fragments to be repeated making the design of Reports very flexible The repeating of Fragments or groups of Fragments are controlled using Repeat Select blocks A Repeat Select Block encloses one or more Fragments in the Report Definition The Report Builder then repeats these Fragments multiple times for a chosen criterion such as Controller or Scenario The following example illustrates the principle of Repeat Select Blocks In the example it is desired to have the following report layout e Project and User Details Table e Phase Diagram Controller 1 e Phase Intergreen Matrix Controller 1 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 3 The LinSig Report Builder 287 e Phase Diagram Controller 2 e Phase Intergreen Matrix Controller 2 e Phase Diagram Controller 3 e Phase Intergreen Matrix Controller 3 e Repeat for all Controllers The following shows how this Report layout is defined in the Report Builder Current Report Definition Title Ad 27 Oe rrr Phases amp nbengreens Available Fragments Report Definition Page He
26. Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Microsoft Office Word Excel and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation WinZip is a registered trademark of WinZip International LLC SCOOT is a registered trademark of Siemens Pic TRL Limited and Peek Traffic Ltd SCATS is a trade mark of the Roads and Traffic Authority of New South Wales Australia Google is a trademark of Google Inc Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 Contents Me MEP O CUCU OO ead catecacrctascisence saute reateae pen cated a 1 ded VV AUIS ENNSIO txaccnnstinecsuascseesnaseeuasnass EE EE E O E ones 1 1 2 W ats N w in Version 3 OF LINSIG accscccc2ecesncede cde ends a a a aE 2 1 3 Whats New in Version 3 1 Of LINSIQ cccccccceeceeeceeceeeceecaeeceecaeeceecaeeseesaeeseeeaeesaes 2 1 4 Whats New in Version 3 2 of LinSig saciieeean ctw nese Grecian teeerearretadeeaneceeanieeedies 3 To DOMWARS SUPPO eana 3 1 5 1 Accessing Software Support s nnssnnssnnnsnnnsennsernoerrrerrrnrrnerrrrnrennrrsnrrsnrrnnrennrrnenee 3 1 5 2 International Software SUpport iisranaer nnna nn n na naet 4 EO KANN errei E E ea aniedate 4 lrs Model AUGNN Osni E dt ten Nee ina eh leds ces tartans Ela dent es cote 4 TE GONSUIAASS IS bias ssceiet ase deere eG eae ete otal ated aos be 5 2 LNSO BASICS siccin a tasmaceunuweedtduaeectinn 6 2 Wie DEHORS eed ae ieee te a esate nena aes ee 6 2 2 VWONKING WIE ENSO FIGS cues Sees So eee Sa eee ceed cr ed cee
27. Zone All Arm all Lane All Contains Junc All Arm all Lane All Connector All A Zone should be created for every point traffic enters or exits a Matrix Based Network or Matrix Based regions of a Network Zones are not required for Lane Based Flow Network regions unless journey times are being calculated on Routes through the region Further information is given on structuring a Network using Matrix Based and Lane Based Flow regions in the Essential Background section Three types of Zones exist in LinSig These are e External Zones External Zones feed traffic into the end of an Arm which contains only Lanes with no incoming Lane Connectors or receive traffic from an Arm which contains only Lanes with no outgoing Lane Connectors They are typically used at entry and exit points around the edge of the Network Most if not all Zones in the majority of models will be External Zones In LinSig 3 1 and above more than one External Zone can be connected to the same Network Entry or Exit Arm e Internal Zones Internal Zones feed traffic along an Arm which contains Lanes with incoming Lane Connectors and are used for two purposes These are o To represent traffic entering the Network from on street parking or from a series of minor side roads which aren t important to model explicitly Traffic is fed uniformly across allowed Lanes and Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 99 uniformly over the modelled
28. before adding the development traffic A Flow Group does not have to be defined as a Component Flow Group to be used in a formula Component Flow Groups are Flow Groups which are used only in formulae Flow Group Formula Formula FA F2 The formula can contain any of the standard mathematical symbols Other Flow Groups can be referenced as F1 Fe etc Examples F1 1 6 of 2 4 F1 Fey A Formula based Flow Group can be defined choosing Formula Flow Group when creating the Flow Group and specifying a formula in the Edit Flow group dialog box Any common mathematical operators such as and can be used as can brackets to specify precedence Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 146 View Reference 4 4 4 Working with the Origin Destination Matrices LinSig uses Origin Destination OD matrices to display and edit the following for the Flow Group selected in the Flow Group List on the left side of the Traffic Flows View e Total Zone to Zone traffic movements through the Network e Total Zone to Zone Pedestrian movements through each Junction Edit Lane Based Layers Traffic Ongin Destination Matrix Auto Assign Desired Flows Actual Flows Difference Destination A B C A o so 297 203 MEE oian E 200 0 153 o7 E e ar as o aso s20 D 2 203 500 Cro eso 370 eso a50 2120 lf Auto Assign is enabled any changes made to the Desired Flows data in th
29. can be selected using the Controller Selector drop down list on the View s title bar as described in the Phase View section The information shown is for the current Stage Stream which can be changed if necessary in the View s toolbar The Stage Minimums View has two main displays as shown below These are e The Stage Minimum Matrix This shows the Stage minimums for a Stage for all possible 3 Stage sequences of preceding and succeeding Stages e The Minimum Stage Minimums Summary This shows a summary of the Minimum possible Stage Minimum when considering all possible Stage orders E Stage Minimums sal a el Es ish Stage Minimums sal oo er es Stage Stream Select Stage Minimums Stage Stream Stream 1 Select Stage Stage 1 stage 2 Stage 3 via Stage 1 Sr 4 20 1 1 The Stage Minimum Matrix LinSig shows a Stage Minimum Matrix for each Stage in the Current Stage Stream As Stage Minimums are calculated from Phase Minimums a Stage s minimum may be different depending on the Stages running before and after it The Stage Minimum Matrix shows the Stage Minimum for the subject Stage for all combinations of preceding and succeeding Stages allowing the spread of minimums to be ascertained For example for Stage 1 LinSig will calculate the Stage Minimums for Stage 1 in the sequences 3 1 2 and 3 1 3 Normally sequences 2 1 2 and 2 1 3 would also be considered but the Stage change 2 1 is prohibited in this exampl
30. e Right click on the Junction and choose Edit the Junction s Turning Counts from the pop up menu The Edit Turning Counts dialog box will open e Inthe Edit Turning Counts dialog box ensure the Desired tab is selected This tab allows the desired Turning Counts measured on site to be specified in PCU e AS many or as few counts as desired can be entered however more counts will provide better matrix estimates and more robust validations The use of the Modelled Flow and Difference tabs to compare counts and assigned flows is described in more detail in the Matrix Estimation View section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 62 View Reference Inter Junction Traffic Counts The Junction Turning Count Matrix by default only shows Turning Counts between Arms belonging to the same Junction This is the normal recommended usage of Turning Counts where Junction Exit Arms have been specified For Networks imported from previous versions or those with unusual geometries it may sometimes be necessary to enter a Count between two Arms at different Junctions To display Turning Counts between different Junctions in the Junction Turning Counts Matrix the Show Junction to Junction Counts option should be selected This is located in the Graphic Options tab of the Graphics Settings dialog box which is opened from the File menu 4 3 4 5 Deleting a Junction A Junction can be deleted by selecting the Junction with the mouse and ch
31. the Stage Stream o A Stage Sequence with a different Cycle Time to the Controller Set s Cycle Time has been created or imported into the Scenario Attempt to Maintain Cycle Time When Attempt to Maintain Cycle Time is ticked LinSig will attempt to maintain the Stream s Cycle Time equal to its parent Controller Set s Cycle time when making changes to traffic signal related data in LinSig For example if an Intergreen is changed which lengthens an Interstage LinSig will if possible reduce one of the Stage lengths to maintain the Cycle Time Allow Edit Timings When Allow Edit Timings is un ticked LinSig does not allow Stage Timings to be changed in the Stage This is useful to prevent making inadvertent changes to signal timings Multi cycling The Multi Cycling setting provides a quick way of implementing simple equal length double and triple cycling It allows a Stage Sequence to be repeated twice or three times within the Stream s overall Cycle Time Each half or third cycle will be of equal length This option is not suitable for implementing unequal length double cycling which should be implemented by repeating Stages in the Stage Sequence Reduce to Minimum Click the Reduce to Minimum button to reduce the Stage Streams Cycle Time to its minimum length This will automatically untick Maintain Cycle Time as the link with the parent Controller Set s Cycle Time is broken The parent Controller Set s Cyc
32. they are dynamically updated as the stage change points are changed This makes the combination of Timing Dials and embedded graphs very powerful for manually adjusting signal timings to achieve a specific result For example using the Timing Dials and graphs it is easy to manually coordinate Lanes to achieve front end or back end coordination and to monitor limit queues on specific Lanes Signal Offsets for a Stage Stream can be changed as follows e Click on any Timing Dial stage change point handle and whilst holding the Shift key down drag with the mouse The Offset of the Stage Stream relative to other Stage Streams will be changed without changing any Stage Lengths LinSig will update the other views with the new signal times Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 138 View Reference 4 3 16 Displaying Lane Bandwidths on the Network Layout View Lane Bandwidths display the Traffic Flows passing through a Network by using variable width bands on each Lane and Lane Connector where the width of the band is proportional to the traffic flow on the Lane or Connector Although useful in any size of Network the Bandwidths are particularly useful for larger networks with more complex flow patterns 3 Network Layout View A oS Se Sle Ha aaaea OLS MALE SSS Sfe SJ elle AAA BIZ 2 SLES e EES pod Find uncio gt Find Arm z mja Jea es Le g Es f A 2 N M N ge nt A Mia eee ret 2 a e s N N BA
33. without warranty of any kind express or implied In no event shall Info ZIP or its contributors be held liable for any direct indirect incidental special or consequential damages arising out of the use of or inability to use this software Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 315 Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the above disclaimer and the following restrictions Redistributions of source code in whole or in part must retain the above copyright notice definition disclaimer and this list of conditions Redistributions in binary form compiled executables and libraries must reproduce the above copyright notice definition disclaimer and this list of conditions in documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Additional documentation is not needed for executables where a command line license option provides these and a note regarding this option is in the executable s startup banner The sole exception to this condition is redistribution of a standard UnZipSFX binary including SFXWiz as part of a self extracting archive that is permitted without inclusion of this license as long as the normal SFX banner has not been removed from the binary or disabled Altered versions including but not limited to ports to new operating systems existing ports with new graphica
34. 4 1 23 104 14 44 14 A B 2 J1 4 1 24 104 09 54 09 A Route Filter can contain any or all of the following criteria e Route Origin Zone Arm or Lane e The Route Destination Zone Arm or Lane e An Arm or Lane which a Route passes through Only Traffic Routes which match all three criteria will be included in the Filtered Route List Pedestrian cannot currently be filtered The Route Filter can be set using either the toolbar in the Route List View or the toolbar in the Network Layout View If a Route Filter has been set it can be removed by clicking the Reset button in the Route Filter toolbar The Route Filter can also be set in the Network Layout View by right clicking on a Lane and selecting Apply Route Filter For This Lane or right clicking on a Lane Connector and selecting Apply Route Filter For This Connector and also in the Matrix Estimation View and Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 156 View Reference the Turning Count View by right clicking on a Turning Count and selecting Filter Routes on Turning Movement Refining the Route Journey Times The journey time shown on the Routes can be further refined by choosing one of the following options e All Traffic Displays the travel times experienced by all traffic travelling on the Route e Routed Traffic Only Displays the journey times experienced by routed traffic travelling along the Route Delays experienced by any Lane Based Traffic encountered along the Route are
35. 72 84 0 12 24 36 46 60 72 84 Inflows Only Outflows Only A graph can be set to show either inflows or outflows as follows e Select the graph using the mouse Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 254 View Reference e Either Right Click the graph with the mouse and choose from the pop up menu or use the Flow Profiles menu to choose Show In Profile or Show Out Profile as appropriate Showing Separate Graphs for each Route through a Lane Whilst LinSig is modelling a Lane it keeps Traffic Flows on the Routes passing through the Lane separate This allows LinSig to display the flow profiles on a Lane not just for the whole Lane but also for individual Route components on the Lane For example the Flow Profiles shown above could be split into their component profiles as shown below Wal Flow Profiles View woe s T Diagram Size Lane J2 2 2 Flows Route 14 Lane J2 2 2 Flows Route 15 Lane J2 2 2 Flows Route 17 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 A ETON ATAGATATTATATATACTOTATOTETTT MMMM 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 Viewing separate profiles is sometimes useful when analysing a complex model and trying to identify the effects of different signalling arrangements on different traffic movements rather than on the Lane as a whole A Flow Profile graph for a single Route t
36. 9 Show Error View Compass w Status Bar Toolbars Find Arm Scale Bandwidths to All Flow Groups 7 Display Lane Connectors Display Lane Text Key On Diagram Display Results Block on Diagram Display PCUs and Capacity Per Cycle 7 Display DeSliver on Lanes Display Lane Based Layer Key on Diagram Manage Lane Text Display Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 139 4 3 16 2 Bandwidth Options A number of options are available to control the display of Bandwidths These include e Show Bandwidths Only Hide Decorations Choosing Show Bandwidths Only from the View Menu or ticking Hide Decorations on the Network Layout View s toolbar hides the display of Lanes in Bandwidth Mode This sometimes useful in displaying a cleaner less cluttered view e Scale Bandwidths to All Flow Groups If Scale Bandwidths to All Flow Groups is selected on the Network Menu LinSig will scale all Bandwidths so as to ensure Bandwidth scales for different Flow Groups are comparable If this option is set the Bandwidth scale is set so the highest Lane flow in all Flow Groups will sensibly fit on the Bandwidth diagram If this option is not set the diagram will be scaled to the highest flow in the current Scenario s Flow Group e Manual Scale If the Manual Scale option is selected on the Network Layout View Toolbar the Bandwidth scale can be set manually This scale will apply to all Flow Groups 4 3 16
37. Am Mame West St OF Cancel e The following settings are available for an Arm o Arm Number The Arm Number will default to one more than the maximum Arm Number of the existing Arms Arms can be numbered in any order but all Arm Numbers must be used with no Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 64 View Reference gaps in the sequence If the new Arm is allocated the same number as an existing Arm the new Arm will be inserted into the Arm numbering sequence and higher numbered Arms renumbered o Junction The Junction the Arm belongs to The Junction is used to group Arms and other Junction related items so that they can be moved as a group rather than one by one The Junction is also used to organise Network input data and results o Arm Name The Arm Name is a simple text name to describe the Arm Usually this will be the road name of the street the Arm represenis e Click OK to finish creating the Arm 4 3 5 2 Moving and Repositioning Arms Arms can be freely positioned using the mouse as follows e Select the Arm with the mouse The Arm turns red indicating it is selected e Use the circular handles at each end of the Arm to reposition the Arm The direction of traffic on the Arm is indicated by the arrow on the Arm e If you have a number of Arms which you want to move together for example all the Arms at a Junction they can be moved by dragging the Junction rather than one by one Tip To assist with positioning g
38. Arm J1 1 Main Road EB at Ped X Arm J1 3 Arm J2 1 Main Road Eastbound A a eee a 77 S _______ __ a T H Arm J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Arm J3 1 Main Road Eastbound A Arm J3 5 Main Road Eastbound _ A K rairai NI Arm J1 2 Main Road WB at Ped X___Arm J2 6 Main Road Westbound Y A j Arm J3 2 Main Road Westbound S s Arm J2 2 Main Road Westbound Arm J3 4 Main Road Westbound g D a ee i 7 N Zz J1 Ped Crossing PRO 101 7 7 ee eee ee J3 East Junction Tots Trafic Delay 2 0 pourr J2 West Junction PRC 14 0 bs Ave Route Delay Per Ped 39 8 s Ped PRO 540 Tots Trafic Delay 17 1 pour i Conmoller 4 Tetai Tratte Deisy 3 2 pour pears A an Controler 181 E B Mode Bandwidths 7 Hide Decorations Manual Scale 400 E C Diff by Fo Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm All vy Lane All Contains Junc All f Arm All v Lane All Destination Zone All gt Arm All v Lane All v 4 3 16 1 Displaying Bandwidths Bandwidths can be displayed by choosing Bandwidth Mode from the View Menu The Network Layout View will change its appearance to display the Bandwidths with a simplified display of Lanes to avoid obscuring the Bandwidths The Bandwidths can be removed by choosing Standard Mode from the Network Menu 188 LinSig 3 1 1 2 UG Multi Junction Example No Graphs lsq3x C Snap To Grid Cyde Animation Mode
39. BA 2 el lB So SR MS elele sla ae Find Junction v Find Arm 51 ae Arm 5 S Arm 1 London Road Arm 2 High Street m Arm 4 Pa Bld ss AN KN Sota k t 5 ho U 2 2 Oi 4 2A os n ns gt a PS w k rz Ra E 4 High StLondon Rd Park St PRO 30 Total Traffic Delay 20 8 pouHr Ave Rout Delay PerPed 60 7 s Ped Print Zone WAS Wed E Wy Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All v Arm All v Lane All Contains Junc All v Arm All v Lane All Destination As shown in above a Print Zone is a rectangular area of a View and defines the content that will be included on the printed page corresponding to the Print Zone Any number of Print Zones can be defined with each Print Zone corresponding to a Printed Page Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 280 Reporting and Printing 6 1 1 1 Creating Print Zones All creation and editing of Print Zones is carried out with the View in Print Layout Mode This special mode allows Print Zones to be created and edited but does not allow changes to be made to the Network e To switch a View into Print Layout Mode choose Print Layout from the File menu and choose Print Layout Mode from the pop out menu Print Layout Mode can be switched off at any point by choosing Print Layout Mode again Alternatively the Print Layout button on the View s toolbar can be used A new Print Zone Printable Page can be created as f
40. Bonus effect from vehicles waiting in the junction prior to the start of an indicative arrow This concept which is unique to LinSig requires careful consideration but is easily observed at any existing junction with a right turn indicative green arrow When right turners are controlled in this way there are no stationary vehicles in front of the stop line at the end of green which can then clear the junction in the following Intergreen period However an equivalent storage effect applies because of the way in which vehicles move off at the start of the arrow phase green period This effect is controlled by the Right Turn Factor The above figure illustrates the concept of the Right Turn Factor At the start of the indicative arrow effective green Phase E the first car will move off to clear the junction However it will be about 3 seconds later when the fourth car shown in red is able to move over the stop line Effectively the first 3 seconds of arrow time have discharged 3 cars after which cars can cross the stop line at the saturation flow Without this storage effect the first 3 seconds would only have discharged 1 5 cars Compared with an ordinary phase such as a fully signalled right turn there is an additional capacity of 1 5 PCUs per cycle which is half the number of right turners waiting in front of the stop line corresponding to the default value of the right turn factor of 0 5 Bonus Capacity Junction Storage x Right Tu
41. Does the Lane have Right Turn Storage in front of Stop Line box is ticked indicating this Lane is a Right Turn Lane with Storage in front of the Stop Line e The Right Turn Storage the Maximum Turns in the Intergreen and the Right Turn Factor are entered as specified above e he Right Turn Move up Time is set to use Auto Calc to estimate the Right Turn Move Up time from the Right Turn Storage Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 299 7 1 5 1 Signalling Conditions LinSig will calculate the capacity of the right turn according to the method of control set in the Stage Sequence For example the diagram below shows a simple Stage arrangement where there are no special opportunities for right turning traffic to turn except during gaps in Stage 1 and during the Intergreen at the end The capacity is simply calculated as The number turning in gaps the number turning during the Intergreen lf the method of control is modified to provide an early cut off Stage indicative arrow as shown below then right turners can turn in gaps during Stage 1 at full saturation flow during Stage 2 and will also receive a bonus for the number of vehicles stored in front of the stop line prior to Stage 2 starting The capacity is simply calculated as The number turning in gaps the number turning during the Indicative Arrow the bonus for storage in front of the stop line 3 in this case Ver 3 2 10 Janu
42. East Controller f Intergreen Set 1 C Intergreen Set 2 0 Intergreen Set 3 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 174 View Reference 4 9 Stage View The Stage View is used to create Traffic Signal Stages for each Controller and to display and edit the Phases running in each of the Controllers Stages Each Stage represents a Stage configured in the controller and available for use in Stage Sequences The Stage View is opened by choosing Stage View from the LinSig Controllers menu Each Stage View shows the Stages for a single Controller and works slightly differently depending on whether the Controller being displayed contains more than one Stage Stream 4 9 1 Selecting which Controller to View lt is possible to have one or more Phase Views open in a LinSig model at any one time Each Phase View shows the Phases for a single LinSig traffic Signal Controller The Controller being displayed is set using each View s Controller Selector drop list as follows e LinSig always has a Current Controller which is used by several Views to ensure they are all displaying information for the same Controller The Current Controller is selected using the Controller List View or using the Controller drop down list on the main LinSig toolbar If the Controller drop down list on the Phases View s title bar is set to Current Selection the Phase View will display the Phases for the Current Controller as selected in the Controller List View If
43. Flow Group Formula Typically running or reporting a model using just a single Flow Group Component would not be correct Marking a Flow Group as a Component Flow Group prevents the Flow Group from being selected as the Flow Group for analysis and also omits them where relevant from reports Setting a Flow Group to be a component Flow Group has no affect on calculations o Flow Group Formula This is covered below in Defining Flow Groups using Formulae e Click OK to finish editing the Flow Group Deleting a Flow Group A Flow Group can be deleted by selecting it in the Flow Groups List and choosing Delete Flow Group from the Traffic Flows menu Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 4 Traffic Flows View 145 Deleting a Flow Group also deletes all associated traffic information such as Origin Destination matrices and Lane based Flows Items using the Flow Group such as Scenarios will not be deleted but will show an error until a new Flow Group is set Deleting unused Flow Groups Any Flow Groups that are not used in an Scenarios or referenced in any formulae Flow Groups are indicated as unused in the Traffic Flow Group List These Flow Groups can be deleted in a single action using the Delete all unused Flow Groups button Removing Lane Based Traffic Flows Lane Based traffic flows can be deleted in bulk using the Clear Lane Based Flows button The granularity to which the Lane Based traffic flows will be deleted can be set by selec
44. Flow Profiles View 253 4 27 3 1 Creating Flow Profile Graphs Flow Profile Graphs are created as described above and selecting Flow Graph as the Graph Type 4 27 3 2 Controlling the Display of Flow Profile Graphs The display of Flow Profile Graphs can be customised in a number of ways These include e Graph Scaling and Sizing e Showing Inflows and Outflows on separate graphs e Showing separate graphs for each Route through a Lane e Showing the individual Route Flow Components on one aggregate graph Scaling Graphs Each graph is displayed at the same size but the flow axis can be scaled separately To change a graph s scale e Right click on the graph and choose Set Scale from the pop up menu e Either enter a maximum value for the graph s flow axis or tick Autoscale for LinSig to calculate a flow axis scale that will accommodate the graph Autoscale is less useful when presenting a number of graphs as scales may all be different making the graphs difficult to compare Sizing Graphs All graphs are shown at the same size The size of the graphs can be adjusted using the Slider on the Cyclic Flow Profiles View toolbar Showing Inflows and Outflows Separately For complex graphs it is possible to show just the Inflows or Outflows for a Lane For example Link 6 1 All Routes Link 6 1 All Routes 4000 4000 4000 4000 3000 3000 3000 3000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1000 1000 1000 1000 0 0 0 0 0 12 24 36 46 60
45. Flow matrix it is only shown when the Current Modelled Scenario s Flow Group matches the Flow Group being displayed in the Traffic Flows View The Difference Matrix represents Zone to Zone movements for which too little or too much flow has been allocated to Routes Where the Difference Matrix is non zero this should be investigated and corrections made to Route Flows using the Route List View This will ensure the total Zone to Zone route flows for a Scenario equal the Flow Group s desired Zone to Zone traffic movements H eee Traffic Origin Destination Matrix Auto Assign Desired Flows Actual Flows Difference Copy Paste Destination Pt A B c D Tot EE Tat 50 Flow Deficit due to een insufficient flow on a E o a Route between B and A lf Auto Assign is enabled any changes made to the Desired Flows data in the Flow Matrix will automatically be assigned to Routes using the current Traffic Flow Assignment Options This will overwrite any existing route flows you may have lf Auto Assign is not enabled the Desired Flows will not be assigned to Routes until the Assign OD Flows To Routes menu option is selected Auto Assignment of OD Matrix to Routes when OD Matrix Changes When traffic data in the Desired Flows OD Matrix changes it is necessary to re assign the new OD flows to the Routes The assignment process is described in detail in the Scenario View section If Auto Assign is se
46. Fragments from the list Click the Add Repeat Select Options for selected fragment s button below the Report Definition List The Report Builder will try to determine what criterion to repeat the fragments for based on the fragment types being repeated The repeating fragments are shown indented in the Report Definition List emphasising that they are part of the Repeat Select Block To review the Repeat Select Options for the block select the Repeat Select Fragment in the Report Definition List The right pane in the Report Builder shows the Repeat Select Options If desired these options can be changed either to repeat the block based on a different criterion or to select only a subset of items for example Controllers for which to repeat the block for If necessary a Report Fragment can be nested within two or more Repeat Select Blocks to repeat the fragment for combinations of two different criteria For example the Stage Timings fragment needs to know both which Controller and which Scenario to use and would therefore be enclosed in two Repeat Select Blocks one repeating for Controller and one for Scenario Report Fragment Repeat Select Criteria some Fragments which are based around a particular Flow Group Controller or Scenario must be located in a Repeat Select Block so that the Report Builder knows which Flow Group etc to base the Fragment on Fragments which are required to be within a Repeat Select block within the report defi
47. Hel BA 2 8 81 SLE ALE SE fsa elle AAE BE SE m EELS Find Junction _y Find Arm ind m g Junction Inbound Junction Exit A Arm Lanes Arm Lanes Junction Turning Lane Non Weaving Inter Junction A Lane Connectors Junction Turning Connectors Weaving Inter Junction Lane Connectors Connectors J3 5 1 J3 5 2 Ot bamean Arm J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Arm J3 1 Main Road Eastbound Arm J3 5 Main Road Esstbound A Arm J3 2 Main Road Westbound e awa AJ3 2 2 l J3 2 1 l Arm J2 2 Main Road Westbound Arm J3 4 Main Road Westbound J3 East Juncti PRC WO A Tak Deb Cortraler 2 Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All v Arm All v Lane All Contains Junc al Arm all _y Lane All Destination Zone All Arm All Lane All v Recommended Network Structure Modelling Lane Changing Weaving between Junctions In many networks of closely space signal junctions there is little opportunity for traffic to change lanes between junctions In fact in many cases it is good practice to try to design the networks lane structure to minimise the need for traffic making disruptive lane changes There is a balance to be had however as sometimes the ability to change lanes between junctions means that traffic can distribute between lanes more evenly improving capacity
48. High St EB pe Am J2 1 High StEB g A 1 2 t Pe i e A e e p e e p PAT a J1 2 2 n 2 51 Dan J1 2 1 Ji Junction J2 Eas t Junction aol Traffic Dewy ai Conraier 1 Total Traffic Delay Comrollier 282 Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All v Arm All Lane all Contains Junc Al Arm All v Lane All Destination Zone All Arm All v Lane Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 266 View Reference Merging Zones with manual specification of Lane Connectors By default the Zone Merge Wizard will automatically create new Lane Connectors to replace the merged Zones Where the Arms have multiple lanes it may be preferable to be able to manually specify how the lanes move from Arm to Arm and whether any weaving is required This can be achieved by adding the Lane Connectors prior to starting the Zone Merge Wizard The Zone Merge Wizard will only add new Lane Connectors to Lanes that do not already have a Lane Connector added Re Estimating a Combined Matrix for Merged Matrix Based Networks After importing and merging Networks an improved matrix can sometimes be obtained by using matrix estimation to re estimate a combined matrix for the whole of the merged Network lf the imported Networks all contain Turning Counts this is relatively easy to carry out If however the original component Networks were all simple possibly just single Junctions they may not contain
49. Interstage and Flow Profile Diagrams 281 e Page Scaling Each Page either can scale the section of the View within its Print Zone to fit onto the current printer s default paper size or can specify an absolute scale Absolute scales are less flexible than scale to fit but are useful in ensuring each page s text and detail sizes are identical e Page Orientation Allows each page s orientation to be set independently The shape of the Print Zone has no bearing on its page orientation e Title Block Optionally inserts a title block onto each page populating it with the project information defined in File Settings which can be found on the File Menu Each page can also have a separate Page Title defined 6 1 1 3 Printing the View Having defined the desired number of Print Zones the View can be printed as follows e Choose Print from the LinSig File menu LinSig will display the Print dialog box e If necessary select the desired printer from the drop down list e If necessary specify which pages are to be printed e f necessary click on Properties to display and change any printer specific settings such as paper size colour or print quality e Click OK to send to the printer 6 2 Printing Multiple Interstage and Flow Profile Diagrams The Multiple Interstage View and Flow Profile View allow multiple diagrams to be laid out and printed direct to a printer They can also be included in a Report but direct p
50. Lane Saturation Flows can be specified manually or can be calculated from a Lane s geometry using the formulae published in the TRRL report RR67 Saturation flows are always specified in Passenger Car Units PCU in LinSig Although using saturation flows calculated from geometry may seem like an easy option it is recommended that wherever possible at least a brief saturation flow survey is done for an existing junction The RR67 formula although a good starting point does not allow for all significant factors when estimating saturation flow For example no allowance is made for regional variations in saturation flow leading to the same estimate for Central London and rural Lincolnshire Additionally the data underlying RR67 was collected over 20 years ago and tratfic conditions may well have changed significantly in the mean time Before using saturation flows calculated from geometry in LinSig it is advisable to obtain and read RR67 and satisfy yourself that the methodology used is acceptable It is good practice to consult the Local Authority Traffic Signals Department for a junction s location as most will have considerable local knowledge as to what constitutes an acceptable estimate of saturation flow for similar junctions in the area If you choose to use RR6 saturation flows please bear in mind that as queue predictions are very sensitive to inaccurate saturation flows the possibly small differences between estimated and true saturat
51. Lengths can easily be changed by dragging Stage Change Points with the mouse LinSig dynamically updates model results for the new Stage lengths as the times are changed e Checking for Errors using the Error View If Errors or Warnings exist in the Model an indicator on the Status Bar at the bottom of the LinSig main Window will indicate so The Error View can be opened by double clicking on the Error Indicator This View lists all Errors and Warnings and wherever possible indicates their location Errors prevent the model from calculating results Warnings allow results to be calculated but indicate that LinSig thinks some data or setting may be dubious and needs checking Information Warnings are LinSig bringing your attention to something you need to be aware of Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 5 The LinSig Modelling Process 29 e Estimate Matrix If LinSig s matrix estimation procedure is being used to estimate the OD Matrix it can be carried out at this point in the modelling sequence as Scenarios have now been defined e Assign OD Matrix to a Scenario s Routes Each LinSig Route is assigned a traffic flow for each Scenario These Route Flows are then used to calculate Lane Flows and other detailed flow information required for modelling A Scenarios OD Matrix can be assigned to the Scenario s Routes by choosing Assign OD Flows to Routes based on Current Scenario from the Traffic Flows menu This will assign the OD matrix to t
52. LinSig Views can be animated to dynamically show how signal timings change and coordinate throughout a typical cycle LinSig steps through a typical cycle showing the situation for each time step in a number of views The Views which can be animated include e The Network Layout View animates the display of turning movements on green and queue build up and decay on Lanes e The Phase View animates the display of running and non running Phases e The Staging Plan View shows the running Stage at the current animation time e The Signal Timings View shows the current animation time within the cycle e The Flow Profile Graphs show the current animation time within the cycle The purpose of the animation is twofold e Provide an easy way for the engineer to visually check aspects of the model such as coordination e Provide a way of presenting a scheme to semi technical users Although the animation is obviously not as effective as some software packages capable of 3D photo realistic visualisation it does provide a resource free method of demonstrating exactly how schemes will work to semi technical colleagues 4 33 1 Controlling the Animation The Animation is controlled using the Animation Toolbar This is opened by choosing Animation Mode from the LinSig View menu Animation Control z Stream 1 Stream 2 The different sections of the Animation Control Toolbar are e The Start Stop Pause buttons These respectively
53. Ped Crossing J1 Ped Crossing J1 3 gt J1 2 625 650 0 96 J2 West Junction J2 1 gt J2 4 513 500 1 03 J2 West Junction J2 1 gt J2 5 152 150 1 01 J2 West Junction J2 2 gt J2 5 220 220 1 00 J2 West Junction J2 2 gt J1 3 447 450 0 99 J2 West Junction J2 3 gt J2 4 367 250 147 J2 West Junction J2 3 gt J1 3 220 200 1 10 J2 West Junction J2 4 gt J3 1 740 750 0 99 J3 East Junction J3 1 gt J3 5 424 450 0 94 J3 East Junction J3 1 gt J3 6 300 300 1 00 B Eastluntion _ B2 gt B4 CO S S CSOSC NSNNNCNC DCALO Sns Ci asw 00 0 J3 East Junction J3 2 gt J3 6 150 150 1 00 J3 East Junction J3 3 gt J3 4 297 300 0 99 J3 East Junction J3 3 gt J3 5 200 200 1 00 J3 East Junction J3 4 gt J2 2 670 670 1 00 The statistics available for each Count are e The Percentage Difference This compares the count and modelled flow in relative terms and is defined as the percentage of the Count by which the modelled flow exceeds it This is useful for comparing larger flows for example checking that all significant flows are within x of the Count e The Actual Difference For Counts where flows are small the percentage difference between Counts and modelled flows can often be very large even though the flows in actual terms are very close For example a comparison of a count of 25 and an assigned flow of 20 would be regarded as reasonably good but the percentage difference o
54. Reserve Capacity Range The range of Practical Reserve Capacity PRC is shown on the left hand axis This range is automatically adjusted to show the full range of PRCs for the junction over the cycle time range e The PRC Curve The red curve shows the PRC for each cycle time within the cycle time range Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 26 Cycle Time Optimisation View 249 The Total Delay Curve The blue curve shows the Total Delay for each cycle time in the cycle time range The curve is shown without units as only the shape of the curve is significant in this view not the absolute values of delay If you would like to know the absolute values of Total Delay refer to the Network Results View There is no significance to the crossing point of the PRC and delay curves The Current Cycle Time Indicator If the option Allow Selection of Cycle Time and Signal Timings from Graph is ticked a Current Cycle Time Indicator is shown at the top of the view as a dark blue rectangle containing the current cycle time The Cycle Time Indicator can be dragged with the mouse to change the cycle time for the current Scenario 4 26 1 2 Settings and Options The Cycle Time Optimisation View has the following Settings and Options which control how the View works Allow Selection of Cycle Time and Signal Timings from Graph If this box is ticked the Cycle Time Optimisation View displays a cursor which can be dragged with the mouse to set the Cycle Time
55. Scenario Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 12 Scenario View 189 4 12 Scenario View The Scenario View allows Traffic Flow Groups and Network Control Plans to be associated together to define particular modelling scenarios Each Scenario brings together all the information needed for a single LinSig run This includes e Traffic Flow Group Specifies the traffic wishing to pass through the Network during the modelled period e Network Control Plan Specifies the signal stage order for each Controller in the Network e Cycle Times Specifies the cycle times at which Controllers will run Cycle times are managed using Controller Sets All Controllers in each Controller Set run at the same cycle time e Signal Stage Times The signal timings for each Controller as manually defined or as calculated by the signal optimiser e Traffic Route Flows The Route Flow pattern for models using Matrix Based Flows These are based on the assignment of the Scenario Traffic Flow Group s Origin Destination Matrix to Routes These are defined either by manually assigning traffic flows to Routes or by using delay based assignment or lane flow balancing to automatically assign traffic to Routes The Route Flows can be different for each Scenario as different signal settings in each Scenario will often lead to different delays and therefore different routing patterns within the Network When Lane Based Flows are used the flow pattern is by definition fixed
56. Set by dragging it to a new Controller Set in the Controller List View The Controller will adopt the cycle time of its new Controller Set Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 160 View Reference 4 6 3 Working with Controllers LinSig can model one or more Controllers each of which can contain one or more Stage Stream Controllers can also be grouped into Controller Sets as described above to allow multiple cycle times to be used within the same Network Each Controller adopts the cycle time of its parent Controller Set 4 6 3 1 Selecting the Current Controller LinSig will use the Current Controller in a number of Views to determine which Controller to display information for The Current Controller can be selected in either of the following ways e Select the Current Controller from the Controller drop down list in the main LinSig toolbar e Select the Current Controller by clicking on a Controller in the Controller List View e Right clicking on a Junction in the Network Layout View and choosing Make this Junctions Controller the Current Controller 4 6 3 2 Creating New Controllers A new LinSig Network always includes an initial single Stage Stream Controller in the default Controller Set Additional Controllers can be created as follows e Right Click the Controller Set where the new Controller is to be added and choose Add New Controller to this Controller Set from the pop up menu e Anew Controller will be created and
57. The Error s Severity This describes the consequences of the error The two levels of severity are o Error An Error prevents results from being calculated until the error is fixed o Report Generator Error This indicates a serious error in a report Model results can still be obtained but reports cannot be run o Warning A Warning does not prevent results from being calculated but indicates something that LinSig thinks is Suspicious and requires investigating It is completely acceptable for a LinSig model to have warnings provided they have been checked and you have satisfied yourself that they do not affect the validity of results o Information An Information entry in the Error List indicates something which LinSig wishes to bring to your attention about an aspect of the Network or Network Item The information entry does not necessarily imply that anything is wrong with the model but is just LinSig prompting with reminders of issues to consider e The Error s Description This provides a detailed description of the error or warning A User Comment on a Warning or Information Entry This allows a comment to be added to a warning or Information Entry when it is hidden as described below Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 260 View Reference rR Total Traffic Delay Controller 1 AN Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All v Arm All v Lane All Contains Junc All v Arm All Lane All Des
58. The settings governing the Right Turn Lane are entered using the following tabs of the Lane 1 1 Edit Lane dialog box e Movement tab for Ahead movement to Lane 5 1 e Movement tab for Right Turn movement to Lane 6 1 e Storage in Front of Stop Line tab e Non Blocking Storage tab Ahead Movement Tab The Ahead Movement tab is simply used to specify that the Anead movement is non give way This is done by unticking the This Movement Gives Way box aH Edit Lane 1 1 General Movement Give Way Data T S R low when opposing traffic is Lane Details This movement gives way ai diga Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed D __ z BE Flows General Traffic i Movmt to 5 1 Ahead D Opposing Lanes Storage in front of Stopline Non blocking Storage Clr Conflict lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Right Turn Movement Tab The Right Turn Movement tab is used to enter the give way parameters for the Right Turn in a similar manner to Example 5 above Hae Edit Lane 1 1 Movement Give Way Data Flow when sing traffic is stopped Soe low when opposing traffic is stoppe Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed f Use Maximum Flaw while Giving Way Value Sat flow data Use Data Specified Below f Use Lane Saturation Flow Value Flows General Traffic Maximum Flow while Giving Way pou Hr 1439 t Use Custom Value pcu Hr Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Minimum Flow while Giving Way pcu Hr 0 Opposing Lanes Storage in front of Stop
59. Title E tage Timings Stage Timings Reporting Options Portrait C Landscape days Sie cn new page W Show Report Fragment Title Table Options Maxinur number of _ i 0 al stages per table The dependency indicators show which dependencies apply to this fragment and which have currently been fulfilled In this case the Stage Timings Fragment requires a Scenario SN and a Controller CT to be specified The Controller has been satisfied by including the Fragment within a Controller Repeat Select Block or only a single Controller exists but the Scenario has not been satisfied indicating that a further Scenario Repeat Select Block is required before the Fragment will work correctly When a LinSig model contains only a single Flow Group Controller or Scenario the dependency indicator will automatically be shown as green without the need to use a Repeat Select Block for that criterion 6 3 4 Viewing and Printing a Report As LinSig Reports are created in RTF format they are viewed edited and printed using an external RTF compatible Word Processor or viewer It is anticipated that almost all users will have a modern word processor available to them on their PC however for users who do not have such software available a free Microsoft Word Viewer can be downloaded from Microsofts web site www microsoft com You may need to consult your IT department before downloading or installing the viewer Although JCT will always try to assist
60. To Insert a Stage select an existing Stage in the Stage Sequence and choose Insert Stage before after selected Stage from the Stage Sequences Menu The Select Stage dialog box will again ask which Stage to insert Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 184 View Reference e Arrange the Views so that both the Stage View and Stage Sequence Views are visible Stages can be dragged from the Stage View and dropped at any position within the Stage Sequence View s Stage Sequence The Stage Sequence View will display an insertion point where the Stage will be inserted Providing the new Stage Sequence is valid LinSig will update model results for Scenarios using this Network Control Plans containing this Stage Sequence to reflect the new sequence LinSig will adjust the signal timings in each Scenario using the changed Stage Sequence to ensure legal signal timings are used but these timings will not necessarily be sensible or optimal Moving a Stage within the Stage Sequence A Stage can be moved within the Stage Sequence by dragging the Stage to its new position with the mouse Provided the Stage s new position creates a valid Stage Sequence LinSig will update the model calculations for Scenarios using Network Control Plans containing the changed Stage Sequence Removing a Stage from the Stage Sequence A Stage can be removed from the Stage Sequence by selecting it with the mouse and choosing Remove Selected Stage from Stage Sequence from the S
61. Turning Counts This would require Turning Counts to be entered for all Junctions in the merged Network before matrix estimation could be carried out LinSig 3 1 and above avoids having to enter Turning Counts by providing a method to create Turning Counts from an existing Scenario s traffic flows These Turning Counts can then be used to re estimate the matrix for the merged model For each of the component Networks prior to importing into the merged model carry out the following e Right click on the Scenario in the Scenario View and choose Copy this Scenario into Turning Counts e LinSig will produce a copy of the Scenario and a copy of the Flow Group used by the Scenario The new copy Scenario will also be set to use the copy Flow Group e The new copy flow Group will contain Turning Counts calculated from the Route Flows in the original Scenario e Choose whether tidy up the model by deleting any of the old Scenarios and or Flow Groups e When the models are combined together by importing and Zone merging the component networks as described above the new combined Network will contain a full set of Turning Counts e Matrix estimation can be run on the combined network to produce an improved combined matrix Connecting Two Matrix Based Regions without Merging Zones Two Matrix Based Network regions can also be joined without merging the Zones at the region boundary This has advantages and disadvantages as discussed above
62. Views cccccccseecceeecceeeceueeceecccecsueeseeeseueessuesseeesseeens 279 6 2 Printing Multiple Interstage and Flow Profile Diagrams c cccsecessecseeeeeeeeeeenees 281 6 3 TNE LINSIG Report BUNO SN sisisi a Rey a aai 281 6 3 1 Report Definitions and Templates cccceccceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeseeeseeeseeenes 282 6 3 2 Quickly Printing a Default REDON errire E 282 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 3 3 Using the Report Builder cccccsecccseeceeeeceeeceeeceuceceeeceeessusesseeseaeessusensess 283 6 3 4 Viewing and Printing a REDOMT cccceccceecceeeceeeseeeceeeceeeseeeceeeceeeneeeseeeneeenes 289 6 42 IE XOON ING GAIN IC Saige ssc shoes ase ss nadicnaenaatecaeanetenatnatenadanasatce agteaadaaeteanensatenadanaeasce sate 290 0A Tie EXPONO A VIEW UO E eb ae ee eee des 290 6 4 2 Exporting Views to DTP and Word ProcCeSSOls cccccceeceeeeseeeseeeneeeneeeneeenes 290 Ms AUC S aa a ome sesssecenenuccuens 291 PAM SUCUS EXAM DIGS cebu iea search celle easing el Chiat oo ahs 291 TArt Example t Flared ENY eee erie eer ee a en ne Ser ee 291 T12 EXAaMple 2 Lent MUM Bayeri E EER REEE 292 7 1 3 Example 3 Left Turn Give Wal ccccccseccceeecceeeceececeeeeneeecsusenseeeeaeesausenaess 293 7 1 4 Example 4 Left Turn Give Way from a Short Lane sssessseessesenseeerreerrrrerrnen 295 7 1 5 Example 5 Right Turn Opposed Movement at Signals cece
63. _ _ 7a a 2 2 i n m High St London Rd Park St C 26 0 PRC 26 Total Traffic Delay 19 4 pcuHr Ave Route Delay Per Ped 63 6 s Ped ies Lie wie Lot ONS MEd UL Stream 1 Timing Interstage Dial Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm All v Lane All Contains Junc All w Arm All Lane All Destination Zone All f Arm All vi la 4 3 15 1 Adding a Timing Dial to the Network Layout View To add a Timing Dial to the Network Layout View e Choose Add Timing Dial from the Timing Dials pop out on the LinSig Network Menu e Position the Timing Dial on the Network Layout View and click to drop the Dial The Create Timing Dial dialog box opens allowing options to be set e Set the options for the new Timing Dial Available options include o Controller The Controller for which the Timing Dial displays timing information o Stage Stream The Stage Stream on the specified Controller for which the Timing Dial shows information o Show Title Select whether to display the Controller and Stream name next to the Timing Dial o Show Timings in Grab Handles If the Timing Dial is large enough this option can be used to display the stage change point values in each of the stage change point handles o Set Timing Dial Size Sets the size of the Timing Dial Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 137 e Click OK to close the
64. a right turning vehicle to get from the stop line to the front position in the storage area A rule of thumb is to estimate the move up time as 1 second for each PCU of storage space in front of the stop line Clear Conflict Times The Queue Clear time is used to ensure that right turning traffic cannot clear during the Intergreen until the last opposing vehicle has travelled from the stop line to the queue clear point Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 3 Give Way Lanes in LinSig 49 4 View Reference LinSig maintains a detailed model of the Network being studied and the traffic signal controllers controlling Junctions within the Network The model is displayed and edited using a series of Views Each View displays the model in a different way or allows different aspects of the model to be worked on The LinSig Views were introduced briefly in Section 2 LinSig Basics where their purposes are briefly summarised This section covers each View in more detail describing how they are used to edit the model and to interpret results The LinSig Network Views are e Network Layout View e Traffic Flows View e Route List View e Turning Counts View e Matrix Estimation View e Lane Timings View The Controller Views are e Controller List View e Phase View e Intergreen View e Stage View e Stage Sequence View e Network Control Plans View e Network Control Layout View e Interstage amp Phase Delays View e Signal Timings V
65. a single Controller at once in a similar manner to other Controller related Views and is used the same way regardless of whether Multiple Stage Streams are being used for the Controller being viewed For more information on using Multiple Stage Streams see the Phase View section The View is opened by choosing Interstage amp Phase Delays View from the Controllers Menu 4 17 1 Selecting which Controller to View lt is possible to have one or more Interstage Views open in a LinSig model at any one time Each Interstage View shows the Interstage details for a single LinSig traffic Signal Controller The Controller being displayed is set using each View s Controller Selector drop list as follows e LinSig always has a Current Controller which is used by several Views to ensure they are all displaying information for the same Controller The Current Controller is selected using the Controller List View or using the Controller drop down list on the main LinSig toolbar If the Controller drop down list on the Interstage View s title bar is set to Current Selection the Interstage View will display the Interstages for the Current Controller as selected in the Controller List View If the Current Controller changes the Controller displayed in this View will also change to reflect the new Current Controller e In some instances you may wish to view the Interstages for several controllers at the same time To allow this each Interstag
66. activated If the OK button is clicked the activation process will be cancelled and LinSig will run in demonstration mode It can still be activated later by choosing About LinSig from the Help Menu and proceeding as below About LinSig I LI E LinSig Version 3 0 16 0 M Copyright 2010 JCT Consultancy Ltd AI Rights Reserved Warning This software is protected by copyright law Unauthorised copying is explicit prohibited Activation Details Activation Status Demo Mode Activate Operating System Windows Vista Service Pack 2 eae Display Technical Support Diagnostics Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 308 Examples 2 Clicking the Activate button will start the activation process by requesting the type of activation In this case select the first option labelled 1PC 4PC or 10PC Licence Activation for Unlimited Network Licences is covered later in this section Choose Activation Method f 1 PC 4PC or 10 PC licences In order to activate this product please enter your licence ID below then click Continue to proceed with the activation process Your licence ID will have been supplied to you as part of pour software package Licence ID Office Location Computer User Ret This should be something that can be used to reference this installation later for example a Computer Name or the User s Name or just an 3 internal reference number Continue
67. all of these 100 PCU are to be allocated to this Lane Connector This action can be confirmed without having to edit any options in the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 112 View Reference Case 5 Multiple Flow Layers No existing Flows on Source and Destination Lanes Where multiple Lane Based Flow Layers are being used as described in Managing Lane Based Flow Layers above the drag and drop interface can also anticipate which Layers are being edited For a Lane with two Flow Layers General Traffic and Bus Traffic 200 PCU are to be added to the General Traffic Layer and 50 PCU to the Bus Layer Before editing Lane Flows the Flow Layers must first be set up using the Edit Lane Flow Layers dialog box as described above in Managing Lane Based Flow Layers The default Layer is left unchanged as General Traffic and coloured black A new Layer is created coloured red and named Buses Edit Lane Based Flow layers 1 Bil General Traffic 2 WlBuses In a similar manner to Case 1 above drag from the Source Lane to the Destination Lane As there are now multiple Layers LinSig cannot predict which Layer you are using and displays the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box to allow this information to be added The Source and Destination Layers are set to General Traffic and the flow is entered as 200 PCU This is displayed in black as it is on the General T
68. also be displayed disaggregated by Route to show the detail of different platoons passing through the Lane An alternative to the Cyclic Flow Profiles View is to embed mini Flow Profiles in the Network Layout View e Phase Data View The Phase Data View simply lists the Phases currently defined in the Controller model together with input data and results for each Phase e Undo History View The Undo History View displays all the previous editing steps and when they occurred in the current editing session The View can be used to revert back to any point within the current editing session e Lane Data Grid View The Lane Data Grid View displays Lane data in a spreadsheet style grid view Where possible data items can be edited directly on the grid allowing rapid bulk data changes albeit with a less informative user interface Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 22 LinSig Basics 2 4 International Options LinSig includes a number of features to make it easier to use outside of the UK These include e Drive on the Right Graphical Views When the Drive on the Right option is set LinSig displays graphical Views using Drive on the Right logic e SCATS Based Terminology LinSig can display Traffic Signal Controller based views using terminology and labelling consistent with the SCATS adaptive traffic control system developed by New South Wales Roads and Traffic Authority e SCATS Controller specification LinSig allows you to specif
69. and Printing LinSig can print information in three ways These are e Directly printing the Network Layout Network Control Layout View and Phase Views to a printer e Directly printing groups of Interstage and Flow Profile diagrams to a printer e Building a Report using the Report Builder This can include both tables and graphics 6 1 Printing Graphical Layout Views The Network Layout View Network Control Layout View and Phase View show the graphical layout of the Network the Network wide control and each Controller s Phases As these diagrams can often be larger than an A4 page LinSig allows them to be printed directly to a printer possibly a large format printer as well as being included in a LinSig Report LinSig includes a sophisticated multi page printing system that allows Print Zones to be defined to specify which part of the View is printed on each page Each Print Zone can have scaling defined independenily and pre defined title blocks can be added to each page Most Views can of course also be embedded in a LinSig Report and printed with the rest of the report via a word processor This is covered in the Reporting section LinSig allows multi page print layouts to be set up and stored enabling consistent layout and scaling between print sessions Print Zones are used to set up the scaling and other settings for each printed page each Zone corresponding to one page k ceeegrerye w fo e ss ee SE olaja
70. and care should be taken not to use the De Sliver Mechanism to unjustifiably fiddle queue lengths If a Lane has had a De Sliver Threshold value set it will be shown in the Network Layout View with a blue indicator at the front of the Lane Arm J2 1 Main Roa De Sliver Indicator e Entry Profiles The Inherit Cyclic Profile from Upstream Exit Lane setting is used when joining two Network regions The boundary between two Matrix Based Network regions is shown below Similar principles apply when joining a Matrix Based region to a Lane Based region Inherit Cyclic Profile from Upstream Exit Lane set on these Lanes A FE Traffic Starts or ends in Fones at H each side of boundBry l d x gt S 650 tS S NS ha These Lane Connectors do not 1 carry traffic between A Inherit Cyclic Profile from Network regions G Upstream Exit Lane set on these Lanes Network Region 2 Network Region 1 At the boundary of two Network regions where either region is Matrix Based Zones model traffic starting or terminating at the region boundary when in reality the traffic is crossing the region boundary Zones at each side of the boundary exist only to support the splitting of the model into regions This allows routes within each region to be modelled while avoiding having to model routes between regions Normally traffic entering a Lane from a Zone has a flat profile over a signal cycle Where t
71. and therefore cannot change between Scenarios Typically a number of Scenarios will be set up with each Scenario representing a different combination of the above information for which LinSig model results are required Using Scenarios makes changing between different model runs very easy as the current Scenario can simply be changed rather than having to remember to change each of the above individual settings 4 12 1 Working with Scenarios The Scenario View is used to create select edit and delete Scenarios It can be opened by choosing Scenario View from the Scenario Menu amp Scenarios View H ose C3 2 Automatically recalculate results for All Scenarios z When optimising optimise for All Scenarios I ee y EA faa Network Corte Plan Flows Tmo Oae Tne PRC 2 Daley Bou 1 AM Peak AM Peak All Stages Assign Flows 08 00 09 00 90 14 0 26 76 Delay Optimised 2 PM Peak PM Peak All Stages Assign Flows 16 30 17 30 90 443 20 16 Delay Optimised 3 AM Peak 2015 AM Peak 2015 All Stages Assign Flows 08 00 09 00 90 111 30 08 Delay Optimised 4 PM Peak 2015 PM Peak 2015 All Stages Assign Flows 16 30 17 30 90 33 6 22 79 Delay Optimised The Scenario View lists all the Scenarios displaying the following for each Scenario e The Scenario Name This should be a descriptive name for the Scenario For example AM Peak with Right Turn Stage e The Scenario Flow Gro
72. are e Optimise All Scenarios When either the Optimise Scenarios for Delay or Optimise Scenarios for PRC button on the Scenario View s toolbar is clicked LinSig will optimise the signal times for all Scenarios For complex models or large numbers of Scenarios this may take a few seconds or even some minutes in extreme cases e Optimise Current and Marked Scenarios When either of the optimise buttons on the Scenario View s toolbar are clicked LinSig will optimise the signal times for both the currently selected Scenario and any Scenarios ticked in the Scenario View s Marked column This allows a subset of Scenarios to be batch optimised which can be useful when optimising larger models or when a large number of Scenarios exist e Optimise Current Scenario When either of the optimise buttons on the Scenario View s toolbar are clicked LinSig will optimise the signal times for the currently selected Scenario only This is equivalent to choosing Optimise Current Scenario from the Optimiser menu Regardless of the above option chosen LinSig will give any optimised Scenario a status of either delay optimised or PRC Optimised indicating the results shown are optimal If any model data is changed which means one or more Scenarios may no longer be optimal LinSig will change their status to Calculated reflecting the fact they need to be re optimised Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 202 View Reference 4 13 Matr
73. are 1439 for the Maximum Flow when giving way sometimes Known as the intercept and 1 09 for the Coefficient for each opposing movement These values are chosen to give a similar right turn give way capacity relationship as used in the Webster amp Cobbe method in LinSig V1 e The Flow When Opposing Traffic is stopped section is set to Use Lane Saturation Flow Value This reflects the fact that in this case when the opposing traffic is clearly stopped for example when a right turn IGA is running traffic on the right turn will run at a much higher saturation flow equal to the Lane s main Saturation Flow specified on the Saturation Flow Data tab This is due to right turning traffic not needing to pause and check for oncoming traffic e Clear Conflict times of 2 seconds have been entered for each of the Opposing Lanes As this Lane includes Storage in front of the stop line the Storage in Front of Stop Line tab is also used to enter the Lane s settings Edit Lane 1 2 General Lane Details Sat How Data Advanced Movmt to 6 1 Right Storage In Front of S L This is a signal controlled Right Tum giving way to oncoming traffic If Does the lane have Right Tum Storage in front of the stopline AEE PCL i 3 00 Right Tum Move Up s 3 i Auto Cale Using Storage Max Right Tums In Ro 5 Intergreen FCU 20 Right Tum Factor Points to note on the Storage in Front of Stop Line tab include e The
74. are a feature of traffic signal controllers which allow more than one junction or independent parts of a single Junction to be operated in parallel by a single traffic signal controller As it is used in only a small proportion of junction designs LinSig allows the feature to be switched off simplifying the interface By default Multiple Stage Streams are switched off Every valid LinSig Controller must contain at least one Stage Stream The maximum number of Stage Streams allowed depends on the controller type being used but is typically in the range four to eight with some newer controllers potentially allowing more Remember that using multiple Stage Streams is usually associated with complex designs and the stream structure requires careful thought Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 9 Stage View 177 4 9 3 1 Switching on Multiple Stage Streams Multiple Stage Streams are switched on as follows e Select the Controller in the Controller List View e Click Edit in the Controller List View to edit the Controller s settings e Tick Allow Multiple Stage Streams in the Controller Settings This enables this Controller to support multiple Stage Streams The Stage View will now be displayed as shown in the figure below 4 9 3 2 The Multiple Stage Stream Stage View When Multiple Stage Streams are switched on the Stage View displays an additional panel to the left of the main Stage panel showing Stage Streams and the Phases allocated to ea
75. be edited to reassign the lost Pedestrian Flow either to other existing Routes or to new Routes when the Junction s Pedestrian Network is complete Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 128 View Reference 4 3 12 Defining Pedestrian Start and End Points using Pedestrian Zones Pedestrian Zones are used in LinSig to define points where Pedesirians start and end their walk through a LinSig Junction All Pedestrian movements start from a Pedestrian Zone and end at a Pedestrian Zone Pedestrian Zones are also used in the Traffic Flows View to reference the start and end points of Pedestrian movements entered in the Traffic Flow View s Pedestrian Junction Origin Destination matrices Network Layout View a 5 fea SIR gaa B22 2 818 Sie ALE SSSI IO SIS Bll 4 2 al ala x BZ 24 Find Junction Find Arm mia g 800 g 300 4 INT Arm 1 London Road Arm 4 100 1000 Arm 5 Arm 2 High Street A OO g S DA High St London Rd Park St PRC 26 0 Total Traffic Delay 19 4 pcuHr Ave Route Delay Per Ped 63 6 s Ped Pedestrian Zones A JPNS Wed E uy Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm all Lane jAll Contains Junc All Arm A Lane All Connector All A Pedestrian Zone should be created for each point a pedestrian may start or finish a walk through a Junction 4 3 12 1 Creating Pedestrian Zones To c
76. be obtained Information discarded by LinSig as there is no close equivalent in LinSig 3 includes Lane Turn Arrows These are derived directly from Lane Connectors in LinSig 3 Geometric Saturation Flow Turn Radii Turn Radii are used in a more sophisticated way in LinSig 3 which is dependent on Lane Connectors and therefore should be re entered after adding Lane Connectors LinSig 1 Link Flows As flows are represented in a radically more sophisticated way in LinSig 3 the conversion process cannot reliably convert the LinSig 1 flows without more information on the Network structure It is therefore safer and nearly as quick to simply re enter the original LinSig 1 Link Flows in the LinSig 3 Origin Destination Matrix using the Traffic Flows View lt is suggested the following sequence is followed after opening a LinSig 1 file Further details on how to carry out each step are available from the Views Reference section Check Loaded LinSig 1 Model LinSig will indicate any LinSig 1 multi Lane Links which require splitting into Lanes and highlights them in red or orange This indicates o Red LinSig has determined the Link requires splitting but is unable to split the Link automatically Resolve any issues with ambiguous Link structures as described below When the issues are resolved the Link will be highlighted in orange and can be split as below o Orange LinSig has determined the Link requires splitting and is able to do so automatica
77. but may not be sufficiently detailed for complex situations for example a signal roundabout Remember that the size of Network and other factors as discussed above may mean that it is sometimes simpler and more efficient to model the whole Network using either Matrix Based or Lane Based flow definition methods If it is easy to model the whole Network using a Matrix this will often be the best choice as full accuracy is maintained across the Network 3 2 3 1 Determining Regions which may Require more Detailed Modelling Generally Lane Based Flow Methods will be sufficiently accurate when the turning proportions of flow leaving a Lane or larger section of Network do not depend significantly on the where the flow has come from For example this would occur if all traffic turned 30 left 70 right from a Lane regardless of where it has come from lf the situation is more complex and traffic turning left INTO the Lane will exit 30 left 70 right but traffic turning right INTO the Lane will exit 80 left 20 right this indicates routing is important and should be considered This can be done using either Matrix Based methods if flows are unbalanced over a wider area eg a signal roundabout or Lane Based Flow Layers if only a small area is affected eg a staggered pair of T junctions 3 2 3 2 Defining Network Regions Each Traffic Flow Group contains an OD Matrix a set of Lane Based Flows or both LinSig uses the combination of the OD Matrix an
78. can be shown as described below Long Lane within a Long Lane Short Lane Group This graph shows the traffic entering and leaving the Long Lane of a Lane Group in front of the point where traffic splits into the Short Lane This graph takes into account whether traffic queuing in the Short Lane prevenis traffic from entering the section of the Long Lane in front of the split point Short Lane This graph shows the traffic entering and leaving the Short Lane in a Lane Group Similar to above this graph takes into account whether traffic queuing in the Long Lane prevents traffic from entering the Short Lane Right Turn Storage Area The Right Turn Storage Area is the space within the centre of a junction where right turning traffic can wait in front of the stop line to turn in gaps in the oncoming traffic This graph shows the traffic entering and leaving the Storage Area Each of the above graphs is presented in the same way A typical LinSig Flow Profile graph shows the following information This example is for a constant arrival rate although more complex examples follow exactly the same principles Queue Traffic arriving and Discharging immediately leaving on at Saturation _ s _ s Green Flow Link 2 1 All Rouges 1800 1800 1500 1500 1200 1200 ERON 900 900 600 600 300 300 0 0 AMANAN 000000000 CO 4 36 48 60 72 84 j Time in Green cycle Traffic arriving on Period Red and Queueing Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 27 Cyclic
79. changes to be modelled Remember LinSig isn t intended to be a large area model though like SATURN or VISUM Merging Networks reduces the number of model files and assists with version control For complex models which take some time to run it is often possible to structure the model into separate semi independent Network regions which will provide large improvements in run time without a great loss of accuracy This is particularly beneficial for Matrix Based Networks as routing is then only modelled within each region as opposed to between regions as well This dramatically reduces the number of Routes without necessarily reducing accuracy lf merging an existing LinSig 2 model it is recommended to first convert the existing model to LinSig 3 Although this is not absolutely necessary it simplifies the merging process by avoiding having to convert the model from LinSig 2 to LinSig 3 and merge all in the same step Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 262 View Reference Where Networks being merged contain different Scenario s it is recommended that before importing each Network is first set up so that any Scenarios required in the merged model are present in all imported files and are given the same name lf a number of Matrix Based component Networks are being merged together by merging Zones as described below it is useful for all models to contain Turning Counts prior to merging This allows matrix estimation to be run on the combined model
80. checking 6 4 Exporting Graphics Several LinSig Views can be exported to a number of graphics file formats to allow them to be used in engineering drawings or Desk Top Publishing DTP applications 6 4 1 Exporting a View to CAD A View is exported to CAD using the universal DXF Drawing Interchange Format file format This file can then be imported to any CAD software that supports DXF import 6 4 2 Exporting Views to DIP and Word Processors Many DTP packages support DXF and this can be used in this case As a quicker alternative LinSig allows a View to be copied to the Windows Clipboard as a scalable metafile This can then be pasted into many Desktop Publishing and Word Processing packages using standard Windows cut and paste techniques As the format used is a scalable metafile the pasted diagram can be resized within the DIP software with no loss of quality Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 291 7 Examples 7 1 Arm Structure Examples This section provides a series of examples to illustrate how different junction geometries and traffic scenarios are coded into LinSig Arm Structures 7 1 1 Example 1 Flared Entry In the example below the Approach on Arm 1 is configured as having one long offside lane and one short nearside lane The inside lane can hold 5 PCUs this represents approximately 30 meters e The Short Lane is created by selecting the Long Lane right clicking and choosing Cr
81. convenient time for us to ring you 1 6 Training JCT Consultancy provides a wide range of training courses covering both the use of our software and general traffic signal design Full details of all our courses are available on our web site www jctconsultancy co uk 1 7 Model Auditing JCT can provide a comprehensive model auditing service at a level of detail to suit needs and budgets This can vary from a basic check of the model with a brief note on issues arising to an in depth audit with a full report Details of our fixed cost auditing of LinSig models are available on our web site www jctconsultancy co uk Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 1 8 Consult Assist 5 1 8 Consult Assist Consult Assist is an increasingly popular option for new LinSig users especially in smaller organisation where there are no other experienced LinSig users With Consult Assist JCT will help you design and or model a scheme whilst teaching you how use of LinSig on the job to build a model of the scheme At the end of the process you will have a scheme designed by traffic signal experts which you will be fully familiar with through being intimately involved in the process As well as having learnt how to apply LinSig to a particular scheme you will also have learnt skills which are focused to your particular use of LinSig but are also easily transferable to other schemes Consult Assist can be provided in your own offices or at JCT s offices and
82. current LinSig data file s folder before opening the file in your default word processor lf you wish to rebuild the report at any stage you do not need to re import the template Simply select the Report Definition in the Report Definitions List and click Save and View This Report 6 3 3 Using the Report Builder The Report Builder shown below is used to design and work with reports Each Report consists of a sequence of Report Fragments each Fragment representing a component of the Report such as a diagram or table Report Builder Report Definitions Network Layout Fragment Dependencies Basic Results Summary Diagram Signal Configuration Data Report Fragment Title Network Layout Diagram Add New Report Definition Delete Curent Report Definition Network Layout Diagram Reporting Options Current Report Definition f Portrait C Landscape Title E Always start on Ad 2106297 aaa 210x253 From W Show Report Fragment Tithe Basic Results Summan 3H CT CT 9999999 Display Entire Diagram Available Fragments Report Definition Page Header Page Header Scale Fit To Page Width Page Footer Project and User Details Project and User Details FRepeat Select For All Scenarios Text Format Capacity Results Network Layout Diagram 7 Network Layout Diagram Phase Input Data Network Results Display PCUs and Capacity Per Cycle Phase Diagram End Display Text Format Kep Key position has not yet been
83. definition Assuming an upstream Lane contains a Total Flow of 200 PCU Lane Based Flows can be added to downstream Lane Connectors and Lanes using the following procedure e Click on the 200 on Source Lane the traffic is leaving from e Drag with the mouse to the Destination Lane where traffic is moving to e Release the mouse button while pointing at the Destination Lane As a Flow Value was dragged LinSig knows more information about what is happening and attempts to speed up the process by offering a guess at what action is being attempted instead of displaying the Specify Lane Based Flow Details as happened in Case 1 above e The guessed action is displayed on a popup menu and if correct can be confirmed by selecting the guessed action in the menu If the guessed action is not correct the action can be edited by choosing Change Flow Details from the popup menu Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 110 View Reference O which displays the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box which allows settings to be customised as described above in Case 1 a Confirm Add all 200 PEU General Traffic to Lane J2 4 1 General Traffic Change flow details J3 EastJunction J2 West Junction f PRC 4 0 PRC 3 9 Total Traffic Delay 16 5 pouHr AM teartartc Delay 7 5 pouHr Controller 2 Controller 1 amp 1 e If Confirm action is chosen from the pop up menu LinSig adds 200 PCU to the Lane Connec
84. descriptive name for the Junction Is Signal Controlled Setting This setting specifies whether Controller and Stage Stream associations in the next two settings can be specified for this Junction Junction Controller This specifies the traffic signal controller s which control the Junction Normally a Junction will only be controlled by a single Controller however in rare cases a large or complex junction may be controlled by two or more Controllers Junction Stage Streams In some cases a Junction may be operated by only one of the Stage Streams running on a Controller In this case only the Stream s controlling this junction should be selected e Click OK to finish creating the Junction Remember that Junctions and many other Items can also be added using right click pop up menus as well as from the main menu This may be quicker in some circumstances 4 3 4 2 Moving and Repositioning Junctions Junctions can be manipulated as follows e Select a Junction with the mouse The Junction outline turns red indicating the Junction is selected and LinSig indicates which Arms belong to the selected Junction e The selected Junction can be dragged with the mouse to move the Junction and its associated Arms Lanes etc Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 61 e lf the SHIFT key is held down whilst dragging the Junction the Junction can be moved independently of its Arms Lanes etc 4 3 4 3 Editing Junc
85. desired the LinSig CD may be copied to a networked server and LinSig installed over the network however setup must be run on each Workstation whether locally or using a remote installation system such as SMS A 4 3 2 Installing and Activating the Licence Server The Licence Server installation files are located in the LicServer folder on the LinSig installation CD The Licence Server can run on Windows Vista Windows Server 2003 2008 Windows XP and Windows 2000 To install the Licence Server run setup exe from the relevant subfolder and follow the on screen prompts Once the Licence Server has been installed it needs to be activated to give out LinSig licences to Workstations This process is carried out using the Licence Server Administration Utility that is located on the Windows Start menu under JCT Consultancy LinSig Licence Server on the Licence Server PC This utility allows an administrator to activate the Licence Server for LinSig using a similar procedure to that described above for activating an Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 312 Examples individually licensed Workstation Once activated no further activation is required for the Licence Server or Workstations except for major product upgrades or software support renewals The PC on which the Licence Server is installed should be continuously available to Workstations over the network whenever they are in use however each Workstation will store a local
86. display Graphical Views using Drive on the Right logic as follows e Choose Network Settings from the LinSig Network Menu This will open the Network Settings dialog box e Click the Graphical Settings tab of the Network Settings dialog box e Choose Right for the Drive Side Option This setting should be set before beginning to build a model as LinSig cannot convert a Drive on the left model to a Drive on the right model or vice versa 4 2 2 Using SCATS Based Controllers and Terminology Full details of using SCATS based Controllers and Terminology can be found in the SCATS specific version of this User Guide Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 54 View Reference 4 3 Network Layout View The Network Layout View is the most important View in LinSig The View is used to build a detailed model of the Network s geometric structure and layout This is carried out by combining components such as Junctions Arms Lanes and Zones to define the Junction s layout and to specify how traffic can flow through the Junction Network Layout View 4a ol e SIR gt P eleda amp SDS KO SIS El AZAlAl A RX l SEZ lm Find uncon a r a OE po i t o IX Arm 1 London Road x A aa Arm 2 High Street lt lt 2 2 p 2 1 be EAS a a da ey od AN te WSS ete PON eT Tee a a B g gt E o l V 3 High St London Rd Park St wo PRC 26 0
87. flow deficit between the total Route flows in the Actual Flows OD matrix and the Desired Flows OD matrix This should be checked and remedied either by reassigning the OD matrix or by manually editing Route flows Multiple Routes can have their permitted or locked status changed at once as follows e Select several Routes whilst holding down the Shift or Ctrl key e Click Allow Disallow Policy Selected Routes button to set the status of the selected Routes e Click Lock Unlock Selected Route Flows to lock or unlock the selected Routes e Click OK to save the permitted and locked status for the Routes The Route Filter The Route Filter allows the Route List to be filtered to show only Routes matching a filter criterion defined in the Route Filter This is useful with larger Networks which contain many Routes As well as showing only filtered Routes in the Route List the Network Layout View also highlights the currently filtered Routes Route List View Route Filter Reset Origin zone T Arm 13 2 Lane Al Contains Junc All Arm All Lane All Destination zone A Arm 31 4 Lane All im Traffic Mode A Pedestrian Mode All Junction Options for Journey Times and Delays Show Journey arier All Traffic z Show Non Permitted Routes Edit Permitted Routes Kii Route t Ong e Route 1 Joume Delay Total Total fone ane Fi ocked Route CU f JPEU f s DelayipcuHr Joumey pcuHr A 32 1 Ji
88. follows e Select the Zone with the mouse e Choose Edit Zone from the Zones pop out menu on the Network Menu e The Edit Zone dialog box is displayed which is identical to the Create Zone dialog described in Creating Zones above Edit one Fone Arm Entering Network Arm Exiting Network Bus Zone all routes will be Bus Routes Bus flows should stil be entered in PCUs Cancel e The Zones settings can be changed in the same way as described above in Creating Zones Disconnecting a Zone from its entry or exit Arm will delete all Routes starting from or ending at the Zone depending on which Arm is disconnected Any traffic flow allocated to Routes which are deleted will be de allocated and the Actual Flows Matrix in the Traffic Flows View will show a flow deficit reflecting this The flow on Routes through the disconnected Zone Connector should be reallocated to the new Routes created when the Zone is reconnected possibly to a different Arm This can be done either manually using the Route List View or by reallocating all flows to Routes by choosing Allocate OD Flows to Routes from the Routes menu More information is given in the section on the Traffic Flows View 4 3 8 4 Deleting Zones A Zone can be deleted by selecting it with the mouse and choosing Delete Zone from the Zones pop out menu on the Network Menu Deleting a Zone also deletes any Routes originating or ending at
89. for the current Scenario The Stage lengths in the current Scenario will be reset to the optimal settings for the Cycle Time if they have been calculated If the Stage Lengths are subsequently changed in the Signal Timings View to non optimal settings the cursor will disappear and this box will be unchecked indicating that the Scenario s timings do not match the optimal ones for the cycle time as represented in the Cycle Time Optimisation View Only Allow Selection of Cycle Times for which Optimised Timings have been calculated If the calculation of the Cycle Time Optimisation View has been aborted part way through some cycle times will have been optimised and some will not If this box is ticked LinSig will only allow the cycle time cursor to select timings which have been optimised If the box is un ticked all cycle times can be selected with the cursor but un optimised cycle times will use estimated Stage Lengths instead of true optimums 4 26 1 3 Cycle Time Optimisation for Larger Networks The Cycle Time Optimisation View does a considerable amount of optimisation work and for a large or complex Network may take some time to run In this case we recommend assessing Cycle Time options using several Scenarios using the same Traffic Flow Group and Network Control Plan but different cycle times This allows better control of the number of cycle times assessed and hence optimisation time Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 250 View Reference 4 2
90. it is allocated e A Phase cannot be removed from a Stage Stream if it is running in a Stage in that Stream It is recommended to allocate Phases to Stage Streams as soon as possible in the design as this will assist LinSig with error checking when working in other Views particularly when defining which Phases run in which Stages in the Stage View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 9 Stage View 179 4 9 3 4 Managing Stage Streams using the Stage View Although the Controller List View is the main place to manage Stage Streams the Stage View can also be used as follows Selecting Stage Streams and the Current Stage Stream When carrying out an action on a Stream LinSig needs to know which Stream to use The Stage Stream panel allows a Stage Stream to be selected highlighting it in red This selected Stage Stream will be used in all situations where an action is performed on a Stage Stream for example when adding a Stage in the Stage View it will be added to the Current Stage Stream Creating a new Stage Stream To create a new Stage Stream choose Add a Stage Stream from the Stages Menu A new Stage Stream will be shown in the Stage Stream panel This will initially have no Phases allocated to it Deleting Stage Streams To delete a Stage Stream select the Stream you wish to delete and choose Delete Stage Stream from the Stages Menu or right click pop up menu Allocating Phases to a Stage Stream Phases are allocat
91. junction where a left turn is controlled on a give way basis The left turn Lane is assumed to be long enough not to block or be blocked by the ahead traffic in the adjacent Lane The left turners must give way to two movements Lane 2 1 and Lane 3 1 Assuming an Intercept of 715 and coefficient of 0 22 the parameters are entered into the left turns Movement tab of the Lane 1 1 Edit Lane dialog box as shown below Clear Conflict o Network Layout View co JL I es SB alala BA 1 2 21El SS alre SSX OS El Find Junction Pag Find Arm Pe Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm All Lane All Contains Junc All Arm All Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 294 Examples aH Edit Lane 1 1 General Movement Give Way Data Lane Details Flow when opposing traffic is stopped lw This movement gives way Use Data Specified Below C Use Lane Saturation Flow Value MM Flows General Traffic Movmt to 4 1 Left Maximum Flow while Giving Way pcu Hr 715 Use Custom Value pcu Hr Minimum Flow while Giving Way pou Hr 0 Opposing Lanes Clr Conflict Movements Movement 1 2 Allopposing To 4 1 Ahead 2 W Al opposing To 4 1 Right lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Points to note are e The section marked Flow when opposing Traffic is stopped if left set to Use Lane Saturation Flow Value will mean that during periods of the cycle where the passing traffic is stop
92. menu HF Lane Timings View Number 1 Junction Display Ji Ped Crossing a J2 West Junction J3 East Junction e 10 15 20 25 30 3 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 amp 90 a a 1 72 oA O 2 1 ory o ho ho ad s 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 5 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 Time in cycle sec Its principal purpose is to allow the effective green times of individual Lanes to be adjusted using Bonus Greens to allow for effects such as underutilised green time and demand dependency The Lane Timings View is comprised of two panels 4 16 1 Junction List The Junction List lists all Junctions in the Network and allows the Junctions to be displayed in the Lane Timings View to be selected by ticking the Display column Lane Timings Panel This shows the Stage and Lane Green periods for the current Scenario over the cycle time Bonus Greens can also be set for each Lane s green periods 1 Lane Timings Panel The Lane Timings Panel shows the following information Lane Green Bars Each Lane s green period is represented as a bar showing the times when the Lane is running Stages Each Traffic Signal Stage is displayed using a blue cursor above the main Lane Greens area to show each Stage Change point The exact time of the Stage Change Point is shown above the Stage Change Point Cursor Stage Change points can be dragged with the mouse to change Stage lengths LinSig will ensure constraints such
93. non bus traffic Deleting a Flow Layer To delete a Flow Layer select the Layer and click Delete Layer in the Edit Flow Layers dialog box Any Lane Based Traffic flows present on the Layer are deleted when the Layer is deleted 4 3 9 3 Lane Based Flow Display Lane Based Flows are displayed in Lane Based Flow Mode using several different visual components These include Lane Flow A Lane Flow is shown on each Lane where a Lane Based Flow is defined It represents the traffic flow across the stop line for a Lane Based Flow Layer One value will be displayed for each Layer used by the Lane Total Stop Line Flow The Total Stop Line Flow is display in front of each Lane It is the total Lane Flow across all Layers Lane Connector Flow The Lane Connector Flow is displayed numerically on each Lane Connector This represents a flow of traffic between two Lanes for a Flow Layer An outflow from one Lane is always also an Inflow to another Lane Uniform Flow A Uniform Flow is shown on a Lane prefixed by U Uniform flows represent a source of traffic onto the Lane not incoming from another Lane It feeds traffic onto the Lane at a constant rate throughout the signal cycle and is sometimes used to represent on street parking or other source of traffic along the Lane It is relatively uncommon practice to use Uniform Flows as it is usually better to model sources of traffic explicitly in more detail Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4
94. not included This option is useful for displaying delays to buses on Bus Routes where general traffic is specified using Lane based Flows e Lane Based Flow Traffic Only Displays the journey times experienced by Lane Based Traffic If multiple Lane Based Flow Layers are used this option aggregates delays over all Layers e Layer Layer Name One option will be available for each Lane Based Flow Layer in the model Each option will display only delay incurred by traffic on the individual Layer This is useful for displaying journey times for a specific class of Lane Based traffic Route List View A oe ee Route Filter Reset Origin Zone C Arm 33 2 Lane All Contains Junc All Arm Al Lane All Destination Zone A Arm 34 4 Lane All am Traffic Mode Pedestrian Mode Al Junctio Options for Journey Times and Delays Show Non Permitted Routes Edit Permitted Routes Route f Org Dest Ong Dest Route Zone Zone Lane Lane Fow C A Bai 41 125 104 14 44 14 E A JA22 J41 124 104 09 54 09 4 5 2 Assigning the Desired Traffic Flow Matrices to Routes using the Route List The Desired Flows Matrix as displayed in the Traffic Flows View defines the total desired movements between Zones The process of assignment to Routes specifies which Routes through the Network traffic will use to travel between two Zones The Route List View is used to display the Routes through the Network and allows
95. often possible to allow for platoon compression on some movements by changing the Start End Displacement on the Lane Flow Detail The Flow Detail tab provides access to the traffic flow components on the Connector Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 94 View Reference Edit Lane Connector General Flow Detail Overides Routed Layers Through The Lane Connector Scenano 2006 AM Peak Fi A a00 Total Routed Aow Lane Based Layers Through the Lane Connector Selected How 2006 Friday AM Peak Total Lane Based Layer The Flow Details tab displays the following Eeim e Routed Layers Through this Lane Connector The Routed Layers through this Lane Connector box lists all Routes through the Connector Each Route is modelled as a separate Layer on the Lane e Lane Based Flow Layers through this Lane Connector When Lane Based Flows are used on a Lane Connector this lists all Lane Based Traffic Flows through the Connector It also allows the Traffic Flows on each Layer to be edited using the Edit Flow button however care should be taken to maintain Flow Consistency Overrides The Overrides tab provides fine control over cruise speed times on the Connector Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 95 Edit Lane Connector General How Detail Ovemides Route or How Layer amet FTTH Edit Overnide Delete Overnide E pe Mean Cruise time 10 3 A5 Uses default lane length for TRE
96. order before running the optimiser The diagrams below shows the same Interstage before and after it has been optimised by adding a two second Phase Delay to Phase A Even though the Interstage is longer it is more efficient as the separation of Phases A and D has been reduced to the minimum possible In this case the IGA Phase E is also extended as it terminates when it s associated Phase A terminates r B Interstage View 4a o amp s amp s lt Previous 2 gt 3 v Next gt Edit Critical Phase Order Optimise Find Spare Green Prohibited Moves Interstage Diagram Stage Change 2 gt 3 Phase Delays C Show Phase Delays for selected Stage Change only Show Phase Delays for all Stage Changes Term Start Cont Value Stage Stage Phase Type Value Type Sms os iene EEA eee ee Time in Interstage sec Stage Change is OK Before Interstage Optimisation Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 17 Interstage amp Phase Delays View 229 F B Interstage View lt Previous 2 gt 3 Next gt Edit Critical Phase Order Find Spare Green Prohibited Moves Interstage Diagram Stage Change 2 gt 3 Phase Delays C Show Phase Delays for selected Stage Change only Show Phase Delays for all Stage Changes Term Start Cont Yalue Stage Stage Phase Type Value Type Sms 2 3 A Losing 2 2 n eat peee conver Time in Interstage sec Stage Change i
97. remains at the end of the modelled typical cycle The next cycle then adds to this residual queue by the same amount This leads to a constantly increasing residual queue throughout the modelled period For example assume a Lane s arrival flow is 400 PCU hr 10 PCU cycle for a 90s cycle and its capacity is 320 PCU hr 8 PCU cycle and the queue is zero at the start of the modelled hour The queue at the end of the modelled hour will be approximately 8600 90 x 10 8 80 PCU plus the maximum uniform queue The mean queue will be approximately half the queue at the end of the hour in this case 40 PCU Random Queuing When a Lane has a degree of saturation less than 80 the uniform queue will be a good estimate of queuing In cases where the degree of saturation is greater than around 110 the oversaturated case will also be fairly accurate albeit sensitive to small changes or inaccuracies in input data However in most cases in traffic assessments the Lanes of most interest will be in the middle of these two zones in the 90 105 saturated range In these cases in real life the queue will randomly clear some cycles and not clear other cycles leaving a residual queue As the degree of saturation increases a higher proportion of cycles will result in a residual queue which will gradually accumulate over the modelled period As LinSig only models a single typical cycle it is unable to directly model this random effect LinSig therefore indirectly all
98. seconds The last vehicle through A will be travelling at the cruise speed and will therefore just clear the stop line at B However the first vehicle at A will be starting from rest and the time it takes to get from A to B will be one or two seconds more This means that the signals at B could start two seconds later and run from time 8 to 15 representing only 8 seconds of green If this is modelled in a conventional way the stop line on B will be shown to be overloaded even though this effect can be clearly seen to happen without overloading in practice The way to overcome this is to set the traffic at B to have no starting displacement since the traffic will already be moving when the signals turn green Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 36 Essential Background 2 15 0 10 Cruise time 5 seconds Platoon Compression Hence if the traffic at A is set to run green from 0 to 10 seconds with the usual start and end displacements of 2 and 3 seconds respectively then the signals at B will need to be set at 7 to 15 with zero start displacement and 3 seconds end displacement The effective green at both stop lines will be 11 seconds giving the same degree of saturation Generally the rule is that if you are coordinating the signals in such a way that the first vehicle arrives on an opening green without needing to stop then you can remove the starting displacement 3 1 1 4 Model Accuracy and Queue and Delay Calculations
99. secs Ped e The Junction s Controller s The Controller or Controllers associated with the Junction 4 3 4 1 Creating New Junctions When a new LinSig file is created LinSig automatically creates a new Junction If your model only contains a single Junction you can use this initial Junction and there is no need to create any further Junctions Where your model contains several Junctions additional Junctions can be created as follows e Choose Add Junction from the Junctions pop out menu on the Network menu A new Junction will be created which can be dragged into its desired position and dropped by clicking with the mouse Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 60 View Reference e When the Junction is dropped the Edit Junction dialog box will be displayed This allows the Junction s settings to be entered 2 Edit Junction Junction Number Junction Name Is Signal Controlled C1 stage Stream 1 1 High St London Rid Park St e The following settings are available for the Junction O Junction Number The Junction Number will default to one more than the maximum Junction Number of the existing Junctions Junctions can be numbered in any order but all Junction Numbers must be used with no gaps in the sequence If the new Junction is allocated the same number as an existing Junction the new Junction will be inserted into the Junction numbering sequence and higher numbered Junctions renumbered Junction Name A
100. short left turn Lane The interaction of the Short and Long Lanes in this way means that many results which LinSig calculates only make sense when reported for the Long and Short Lanes grouped together rather than been broken down Lane by Lane For example the Mean Max Queue is a measure of how far the queue extends back from the stop line and may comprise of traffic using either the Long Lane the Short Lane or a mixture of traffic from both Lanes However it can t be split into separate values for the Long and Short Lanes and therefore LinSig will report a single value for the Lane Group comprised of the Short and Long Lanes Prior to LinSig version 3 2 10 0 LinSig will only report a single combined capacity value for a Lane Group comprised of a Long and Short Lane In LinSig version 3 2 10 0 onwards it is possible to further refine this value into separate capacity values for the Long and Short Lanes You can enable this feature for any model using the Network Settings Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 68 View Reference 1af Network Settings Traffic Model Cruise Time if not specified Cruise Speed if not specified Bus Speed if not specified New Lane Saturation Flow PCU Hr 1800 pou Hr Calc Delay and Stops per pou based on Demand Flow F Pedestrian Crossing Saturation Flow ped Hr 36000 ped Hr PCU Length 5 75 meters Increase modelled time to find typical cycle F Default method for lane based inflow outfow entry As PCU values Defa
101. the Edit Controller dialog box opens allowing the Controllers initial settings to be made Edit Controller Controller Number Type Generic Name West Controller SCN Phase minimum type Treat Phase minimums as Street minimums Allow multiple Stage Streams Allow non standard filters C Motes Controller Set Default Controller Set e Controller Settings which can be changed are o Controller Number The Controller Number is LinSig s reference number for the Controller Controllers can be numbered in any order but all Controller numbers must be used with no gaps in the sequence If a new Controller is given the same number as an existing Controller the new Controller will be inserted into the Controller numbering sequence and higher numbered Controllers will be renumbered Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 6 Controller List View 161 o Controller Type The Controller Type setting allows the Controller to be set to follow traits of a particular controller manufacturer Controller Name A descriptive name for the Controller SCN System Code Number A standard code number identifying the Controller in the UTC system o Phase Minimum Type The Phase Minimum Type can be set to Street Minimums or Controller Minimums Street minimums are usually used when designing the controller to achieve a particular set of observed minimum values on the street Controller Minimums are usually used when inputting minimum vales from a Cont
102. the Stage Sequence running on each Controller Network Control Plans avoid the need to re specify each Controllers Stage Sequence for every Scenario Typically a Network Control Plan will be created for each different Network wide signal sequencing strategy e Define Modelling Scenarios A Scenario associates together a Traffic Flow Group Network Control Plan Cycle Time Stage lengths and Route Flows providing LinSig with all the information it needs to calculate model results Providing there are no errors in the model LinSig will always display model results for the current Scenario which can be selected from the main toolbar or in the Scenario View LinSig will initially use arbitrary Stage Lengths but these can easily be changed for the current Scenario either manually using the Signal Timings View as detailed below or automatically using the optimisation facilities LinSig will then recalculate the model results for the new Stage Lengths The Scenario View can also be used to optimise a number of Scenarios at once as a batch and to assign OD matrices to the Scenario s Routes e Changing Signal Times using the Signal Timings View The initial results displayed by LinSig will be calculated using an initial effectively random set of Stage Lengths for each Controller or Stage Stream The current Stage times being used can be displayed using the Signal Timings View which also shows the duration of Phases and details of Interstage structures Stage
103. the Zone and also deletes any traffic flows originating from or travelling to the Zone in the Traffic Flow View s Origin Destination Matrix Zones should not be deleted unless you wish to delete its associated traffic flow data When restructuring the Network instead of deleting the Zone a better option may be to disconnect the Zone from its entry and or exit Arms and reconnect it to new Arms as appropriate This will retain OD flow information but Route flows will need to be recreated either by automatic assignment or by manually editing route flows Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 102 View Reference 4 3 9 Working with Lane Based Flows Lane Based Traffic Flows are new in LinSig 3 1 and are an alternative simpler way of defining traffic flows compared with an OD Matrix and Routes as used by Matrix Based Networks Traffic Flows are defined as a Total Traffic Flow for each Lane together with Incoming and Outgoing Turning Flows Other than the immediate previous and next Lanes for each Lane Lane Based Flows contain no information on how traffic routes over the wider Network Further details of Lane Based Flows including how to decide when to use them in preference to Matrix Based Flows is given in the Essential Background Section This section describes the different ways Lane Based Flows can be entered and edited once the decision to use them has been taken 4 3 9 1 Methods for Entering and Editing Lane Based Traffic Flows Lane Based Traf
104. the available Stages configured in the Controller for one Stage Stream The Stages are ordered by Stage number and are therefore not necessarily in the order in which the Stages are run o Show Stage Sequence This option shows the Stage Sequence for the Stage Sequence associated with the current Scenario As the current Scenario changes the Stage Diagram changes to reflect the Stage Sequence for the new current Scenario e Select the Layout of the Stage Diagram This setting governs how the different Stage boxes are laid out within the overall Stage Diagram This setting can usually be set to Auto but where this does not provide a sensible layout the Layout option can be used to provide several alternative layouts e Click OK to create the Staging Diagram 4 3 13 2 Repositioning and Resizing a Stage Diagram A Stage Diagram can be repositioned by dragging the diagram with the mouse It can also be resized by dragging any or the diagram s borders or corners with the mouse 4 3 13 3 Editing a Stage Diagram A Stage Diagram can be edited by double clicking with the mouse This will open the Edit Stage Diagram dialog box which can be used to edit the Stage Diagram s settings as described in Adding a Stage Diagram to the Network Layout View above 4 3 13 4 Changing the Appearance of the Stage Diagram The graphical appearance of the Stage Diagram is inherited from either the appearance of the Stage View or the Stage Sequen
105. the give way capacity of a Lane at each modelled time step based on the flow in that time step on any number of opposing Lanes or movements In each model time step LinSig calculates the capacity of a Give Way Lane using the formula F max Fmin FO A1 Q1 A2 Q2 An Qn Where e F is the give way capacity of the Lane in a time step e Fp is the maximum flow when the Lane is potentially opposed but no opposing traffic is present e Fmin is the minimum flow when the Lane is opposed e Q Is the flow in the current time slice on the first opposing Lane e lt A is a coefficient for the first opposing Lane which specifies by how much the Capacity is reduced by flow on the first opposing Lane e Q is the flow in the current time slice on the second opposing Lane e Az is a coefficient for the second opposing Lane which specifies by how much the Capacity is reduced by flow on the second opposing Lane e Q Is the flow in the current time slice on the second opposing Lane e A is a coefficient for the second opposing Lane which specifies by how much the Capacity is reduced by flow on the second opposing Lane Guidance on the values to use for the above parameters is given in Give Way Lanes in LinSig in Section 3 Essential Background Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 85 Movement Settings The Movement tabs contain settings relating to an individual movement leaving the Lane for example
106. this button aborts the optimisation process and sets the Scenario s signal settings to the best signal settings found so far during the optimisation process This option is useful if you feel the optimiser has achieved sufficient accuracy for your purposes and you don t wish it to run to completion 4 12 3 6 Controlling Batch Signal Time Optimisation in the Scenario View The Scenario View can be used to optimise signal times for a number of Scenarios at once This avoids having to optimise each Scenario individually by selecting each Scenario in turn before clicking the Optimise button on the main toolbar If desired each Scenario can still be optimised individually using Optimise Current Scenario for Delay PRC on the Optimiser menu The batch optimisation in the Scenario View is controlled using the When optimising optimise for drop down list in the Scenario View s toolbar r 4 Scenarios View BQ Automatically recalculate results for all Scenarios v au ee oe ee ERER ied Network Control Plan a rn is 1 AM Peak AM Peak All Stages Assign Flows 08 00 09 00 90 70 14 0 26 33 Delay Optimised 2 PM Peak PM Peak All Stages Assign Flows 16 30 17 30 90 70 443 22 12 Calculated a 3 AM Peak 2015 AM Peak 2015 All Stages Assign Flows 08 00 09 00 90 70 9 5 33 62 Calculated E PM Peak 2015 PM Peak 2015 All Stages Assign Flows 16 30 17 30 90 70 33 6 24 98 Calculated The options available
107. though that software support isn t a substitute for a proper training course 1 5 2 International Software Support As LinSig is becoming more popular overseas particularly in Australasia we get an increasing number of software support queries from around the world lf you are submitting a software support query from a location with a significant time difference to the UK the following will help us give you a rapid response e Always email us a copy of your model with your query e Explain your problem clearly to avoid us having to come back to you with simple questions which may have been overlooked Remember that when you have been concentrating on a problem for some time it is easy to miss out basic facts which may be important for someone coming to the problem for the first time e If you are asking questions about how to model a particular traffic situation please provide a basic description of the behaviour particularly if it is custom to your location e If relevant please provide us with a Google Maps link to a intersection you are asking questions about as although not perfect it is a useful way of gaining a basic insight to a intersection e If a query is urgent please mark it as so explaining what aspects are urgent We may be able to get back to you out of UK office hours if the query is concise enough e In some circumstances it may be easier to discuss an issue on the phone If this is the case we will arrange a mutually
108. traffic assigned to it and suppresses obviously unfeasible Routes from being built and consuming computing resources Unfeasible routes can be suppressed as follows e Click the Advanced Route Building Options button in the Route List View Route Building Options Route Building Options W Do not build obviously unfeasible routes Route length ratio threshold L5 Always retain existing Route if fow is greater than PEU 2 Assumed Connector cruise time if not yet specified 5 a Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 154 View Reference e Select the Don t Build Obviously Unfeasible Routes option e The Route Length Ratio Threshold setting controls how severely LinSig will suppress unfeasible Routes This can be increased to make LinSig build more routes or decreased to suppress further Routes from being built e If an existing Route has a flow greater than the Always retain existing Route is Flow is greater than setting LinSig will never suppress this Route even if it meets the criterion for Suppression due to changes in Network data or the suppression criteria Setting Non Permitted Traffic Routes Even if LinSig is set to suppress unfeasible routes as described above some Routes are deemed feasible are undesirable and wouldn t in practice be used by traffic LinSig allows Routes to be defined as non permitted meaning that LinSig will never allow any traffic to be assigned to the Route Setting non per
109. traffic uses road space which may not necessarily be the same as lane markings Newly created Lanes will not show Lane arrows at this point as no Lane Connectors have been added yet e Add Exit Arms Add Junction Exit Arms at the points where traffic leaves the Junction e Add Exit Arm Lanes On each Junction Exit Arm add any additional Lanes required Remember that Junction Exit Lanes are always Long Lanes and are used to structure the Network not to model capacity issues such as merges immediately after a Junction e Add Lane Connectors Lane Connectors define which traffic movements are allowed between Lanes on different Arms If the recommended Arm structure discussed later is used Lane Connectors within a Junction define which turning movements can take place from an Entry Lane to an Exit Lane at the same Junction Lane Connectors between Junctions specify which Lane changes can take place between junctions Lane Connectors are added in the Network Layout View by dragging with the mouse from one Lane to another Lane e Set Cruise Speeds Times on Lane Connectors For each Lane Connector set a cruise time or speed Where multiple Lane Connectors between Arms all have the same cruise time or speed they can be edited in one step by selecting all the Lane Connectors between the Arms right clicking on the Lane Connectors and choosing Edit Multiple Lane Connectors from the pop up menu e Set Lane Lengths amp Saturation Flows For each L
110. use the information in the old file Essential new information which LinSig 2 files do not contain includes Junctions Junctions were called Arm Groups and were optional in LinSig 2 LinSig 3 will use Arm Groups if available attaching all previously unattached Arms to a new Single Junction Lane based Control Information Controlling traffic signal Phases were set by Link in LinSig 2 Lane by Lane Connectors LinSig uses a Lane Connector for each Lane LinSig 2 multi lane Links will require new Lane Connectors creating for each Lane in LinSig 3 The above information must be added to a LinSig 2 file after loading into LinSig 3 before results can be obtained lt is suggested the following sequence is followed after opening a LinSig 2 file Further details on how to carry out each step are available from the Views Reference section Check Loaded LinSig 2 Model LinSig will indicate any LinSig 2 multi Lane Links which require splitting into Lanes and highlights them in red or orange This indicates o Red LinSig has determined the Link requires splitting but is unable to split the Link automatically Resolve any issues with ambiguous Link structures as described below When the issues are resolved the Link will be highlighted in orange and can be split as below o Orange LinSig has determined the Link requires splitting and is able to do so automatically without any additional information Right click on each Link with the mouse and choo
111. used just to connect Entry Lanes to Exit Lanes This will also create Lane turn arrows Review Signalling on Lanes Any LinSig 3 Lanes created by splitting LinSig 1 multi Lane Links will have the same signal control on each Lane LinSig 3 allows different control on each Lane providing opportunities for improving the model Check Geometric Saturation Flow Settings Enter the geometric saturation flow turn radii on Lanes where appropriate Add Zones Add Zones in the Network Layout View at each point traffic enters and leaves the Network Each Zone caters for an Entry and an Exit LinSig will create Routes between Zones automatically as Zones are created Enter Traffic Flows as OD Matrix LinSig has created an empty Flow Group for each Flow Group existing in the LinSig 1 file Enter origin destination flows into the OD Matrix for each Flow Group If the Auto Allocate option is selected in the Traffic Flows View LinSig will attempt to automatically assign the OD Matrix to Routes as they are entered Check Route Flows Use the Route List View to review the Route Flows Check Lane Flows Use the Network Layout View to review the Lane Flows calculated from the Route Flows Save the File in LinSig Version 3 format 2 2 4 2 Loading and Converting a LinSig 2 file to LinSig 3 format LinSig 3 can load amp convert an existing LinSig 2 file simply by opening the file within LinSig 3 LinSig will detect that the file is a LinSig 2 file and
112. using the Lane are using a Turn LinSig combines the saturation flows for traffic on each Turn to produce a combined saturation flow for the Lane As the turning proportion varies according to the Traffic Flow Group used in LinSig LinSig will automatically estimate the turning proportion for each Lane from the current Traffic Flow Group e Turning Radius m The minimum radius of curvature of a turning vehicles path This should be measured very carefully for a left turn as the often small radius can have a large effect on the estimated saturation flow For more detail on the above methodology and parameters see the RR67 report This can be obtained from TRL Limited Specifying Unconstrained Unsignalled Lanes An unsignalled Lane in LinSig can be modelled in two ways e Constrained A Constrained Unsignalled Lane has a Saturation flow to model a Capacity constrained Lane or bottleneck e Unconstrained with an infinite saturation flow This is used when it is unnecessary or unadvisable to model the capacity of the Lane and it is being used ourely to organise good Network structure All Lanes are initially created as unconstrained If it desired to model a Lane as constrained either the Geometric or Manual Saturation Flow option should be selected as described above iSq Edit Lane 5 1 Geometric Calculated Lane Saturation Flow Arm 5Lane 1 Directly Entered Lane Saturation Flow Arm 5 Lane 1 Multi Lane SatFlow Default Advanced oo a
113. where two or more Zones require merging with the existing Network each Zone pair should be merged sequentially Connecting the Network Regions but retaining the boundary Zones This method will create a faster running model and will often involve less work calibrating traffic flows within the model as Routes are only considered within each Network region not between them This means that each Network region can be calibrated in isolation which may be easier than calibrating one larger Network This method retains the Zones at the region boundary and does not create any new Routes between Zones on different sides of the boundary The Lanes downstream of the boundary should be set to inherit the cyclic flow profile of traffic entering the Zone upstream of the boundary This is achieved using the Inherit Cyclic Flow Profile from Upstream Exit Lane option in the Lane Edit dialog box s Advanced tab Merging Zones Zones at the boundary of two Matrix Based Network regions are merged using the Zone Merge Wizard as follows Open the Zone Merge Wizard by choosing Merge Zone Networks from the Network menu fone Merge Wizard This Wizard will guide you through the process of joining two zones together to form a large network There is one step to complete Click Next to move to step 1 of the Wizard Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 29 Importing amp Merging LinSig Networks 265 Second page Select Zones Merge Zone lB
114. 0 39 5 0 7 5 3 3 5 2 1 Main Road Westbound Left U li C1 B 56 220 1800 1140 19 3 0 3 2 2 1 2 Main Road Eastbound Right O 1il C1 A ELE 65 150 1800 555 27 0 148 1 0 0 6 149 18 1 1 Main Road Eastbound Ahead U 11 C1 A 65 500 1800 1320 37 9 12 8 6 7 0 Ji Ped Crossing N A 44 6 0 0 0 18 Ped Link P1 Unnamed Ped Link 1 2 C1 H 8 2 1778 01 0 0 39 8 0 0 2 1 Main Road WB at Ped X Ahead E C1 F 68 650 1900 1457 44 6 08 47 48 1 2 Main Road EB at Ped X Ahead U 12 C1 G 68 150 1800 1380 10 9 0 2 41 1 0 1 1 Main Road EB at Ped X Ahead U 12 C1 G 68 500 1800 1380 36 2 08 54 43 C1 West Controller Stream 1 PRC for Signalled Lanes 8 0 Total Delay for Signalled Lanes pcuHr 9 52 90 C1 West Controller Stream 2 PRC for Signalled Lanes 101 7 Total Delay for Signalled Lanes pcuHr 1 77 90 C2 East Controller Stream 1 PRC for Signalled Lanes 14 0 Total Delay for Signalled Lanes pcuHr 18 40 90 PRC Over All Lanes 9 8 0 Total Delay Over All Lanes pcuHr 29 68 Cycle Time s The Network Results View is divided into three main areas These are e Display Settings This allows settings to be made governing the way the Network Results View displays the results e The Results List This lists each Item for which data can be displayed showing a range of relevant data columns for each Item The list is a hierarchal list allowing which Items are to be displayed and the le
115. 0 75 20 75 107 95 44 95 26 69 36 69 61 80 34 80 125 39 96 39 126 27 89 27 114 90 88 90 115 97 T997 98 94 33 94 102 51 47 51 62 65 35 65 76 08 39 08 47AT 43 77 130 79 66 79 111 47 57 47 76 70 50 70 90 86 54 86 40 10 30 10 A B A C A D B A B C B Cc B D E D C A C A C E C B C D D A D D E D B D C The following tasks can be carried out using the Route List View e Reviewing Traffic Routes through the Network and viewing delay and journey times along Routes e Specifying whether a Route is permitted or not Sometimes LinSig will discover Routes which although logically valid Routes through the Network wouldn t in practice be used by traffic LinSig allows Routes to be defined as non permitted meaning that LinSig will never allow any traffic to be allocated to the Route e Manually editing Route Flows where it is preferred to set a Route Flow rather than allow LinSig to automatically assign it e Lock a Route Flow to prevent the LinSig assigning it a different flow during automatic assignment 4 5 1 Working with Routes in LinSig A Route in LinSig represents a unique path through the Network from one Zone to another Depending on the size and complexity of the Network one or more Routes may exist between two Zones Each of the Routes represents a different choice of Lanes for drivers or Links for Pedestrians travelling or walking between two Zones Routes can be one of two types e Traffic Routes Tra
116. 1 Pass 2 2 Largest Route Transfer 6pcu Deviation from desired equilibrium 0 78 it tt tet et tt Abort with no changes Abort keeping progress so far e The two progress indicators displayed are o Largest Route Transfer This shows the largest amount of traffic the assignment process has moved between Routes on the last iteration This will diminish as the assignment converges If you feel that the amount of traffic being moved is insignificant for your purposes it is possible to terminate the assignment early by clicking Abort keeping progress so far o Deviation from Equilibrium This measures the closeness of the assignment to perfect user equilibrium route flows Generally a value of 1 is considered a good fit for a larger network however it is often possible to achieve 0 25 or lower for a smaller network e Alternatively the assignment can be run for a Scenario by clicking the Assign Flows button for a Scenario in the Scenario View Scenarios View CS D Automatically recalculate results for All Scenarios When pme LEL N ENG optimise for An Scenarios ga pa B f a Nabe Semone fon Gowe Nevotk Conie fons O Tme Cycle Time PRC Delay pcuHr __Status Mark 1 AM Peak AM Peak All Stages Assign Flows 08 00 09 00 14 0 26 76 Delay Optimised 2 PM Peak PM Peak All Stages aa f 16 30 17 30 90 443 20 16 Delay Optimis
117. 10 2 2 1 Creating a new LINSIG File a a 10 2 2 2 Opening an existing LINSIG 3 File cece eecceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeesaeeseeeseeeseesaeees 10 223 SAVING IM SIG FIGS iar a a E E 10 2 2 4 Loading and Converting LinSig files from Earlier Versions ccccseceeeeeeeees 10 2 2 5 Importing and Merging LinSig Files cee cecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseeeseesaeees 14 2 32 NE LNSIOUSEriIntern aCe sssaaa A E A A AN 15 2 3 1 Useful User Interface Concepts eripe a E Ei a 15 2 3 2 New User Interface Concepts in LinSig 3 to Watch Out for cccceeeeeeee eens 16 2 3 3 Important LinSig User Interface Components ccceeceseeeeeeeeceeeeaeeteneeseeeaes 16 2 4 Met nNalOMal ODUOMS tas siechines T E tetany eae eee aa 22 2 5 The Linsig Modelling Pro ess essre siete aesdtianseeidemie 22 2 5 1 Modelling Sequence using Lane Based FIOWS ccccsecceeeceeeseeeseeeeeeseesaeees 22 2 5 2 Modelling Sequence using Matrix Based FIOWS cccccceecceeeeeeeseeeseeseeeeaeees 25 2 5 3 Modelling Combinations of Matrix Based and Lane Based Flows 06 29 3 ESSENI ial BACK Ol OUIIG caine cctiacesascecteres aaa 31 3 1 TNE LINSIG Traffic MOOG icc co csccnetsnsasostatedentactanad nnas 31 3 2 Network Structure amp Defining Traffic Flows in LINSIQ cccceccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesees 39 3 2 1 Background and Version Differences ccccccccseeceececeeecceeeceueecee
118. 10 January 2013 24 LinSig Basics e Edit Lanes to specify Give Way Movements Each Lane s give way turning movements are specified by ticking This Movement Gives Way on the Lane s movement tabs in the Edit Lane dialog box and entering give way settings for the movement Further information on modelling give way movements is provided in the Network Results View section and the Modelling Background section e Add Pedestrian Network If pedestrian delay is being modelled Pedestrian Links Pedestrian Link Connectors and Pedestrian Zones are added using the Network Layout View Remember that each Junction has its own separate Pedestrian Network If it is not required to model pedestrian delay it is not necessary to add Pedestrian Links etc but timing constraints such as Pedestrian Phase Minimums and Intergreens should still be modelled by including Pedestrian Phases in the Controller model e Add Pedestrian Flow Information Pedestrian Flows are specified in the Traffic Flows View using a separate Pedestrian Origin Destination Matrix for each Junction Remember that even if pedestrian flow information isn t available it is still possible to partially model pedestrian delays by entering estimated relative flow weights in the Pedestrian OD Matrices e Add Intergreens to each Controller The Phase Intergreens should now be added to each Controller using the Intergreens View e Add Stages to each Controller Phases can now be grouped in
119. 186 View Reference 4 10 3 5 Working with the Multiple Stage Stream Stage Sequence View Stage Sequences are created and edited for multiple Stage Stream models in an almost identical manner to single Stage Stream models as described above The main differences are e Each Stage Sequence requires a Stage Sequence to be defined for each Stage Stream Each Stage Sequence is created and edited in the same manner as single Stage Stream Stage Sequences e When viewing or entering a Stage Sequence in the Sequence column of the Stage Sequence List the current Stream is viewed or edited To view or edit the Stage Sequence for a different Stage Stream change the current Stage Stream as described above before making changes the same as in the single Stream case also described above e When adding Stages to a Stage Sequence they will be added to the end of the Sequence for the currently selected Stream e When inserting Stages into a Stage Sequence the new Stage will be inserted into the same sequence as the currently selected Stage e When dragging Stages from the Stage view they can only be dropped into the same Stream s Stage Sequence in the Stage Sequence View e An Invalid Stage Sequence for any Stream will prevent LinSig from calculating traffic model results for any Scenarios using Network Control Plans containing the Stage Sequence Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 11 Network Control Plan View 187 4 11 Network Control Plan Vi
120. 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 79 The MultiLane tab has two independent sections e The Number of Lanes This section simply allows the number of Lanes the MultiLane represents to be entered A saturation flow consistent with the number of lanes represented should be entered on the Saturation Flow tab as described above e Additional Short Lanes This section allows additional short lanes to be modelled using a stepped saturation flow profile similar to how short lanes were modelled in LinSig 2 MultiLane with Short Lane Arm 1 London Road The following information is required to define the additional short lanes within the MultiLane o A Saturation Flow for each additional short lane o Each additional short lane s expected usage in each Flow Group Ty Edit Lane 1 1 Multiple Lane Representation General Lane Details lf Enable Flared Saturation Flows Add Flare Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed Number Of Lanes 2 Flare Saturation Flows PCU Hr Sat flow data Enter the number of lanes that this Flare 1 Advanced represents on the street Saturation Flow 1800 Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead A multijane represents a group of lanes that behave and will be modelled in an identical manner Flare Expected Usage pcu You must also ensure that the Saturation Scenario Flow and any give way parameters are 2006 AM Peak values that represent all lanes 2006 AM Peak No IGA lt lt Previous Next gt gt OK Can
121. 3 Scenario Comparison As well as illustrating the absolute level of flow on each Lane the bandwidths can be used to compare two Scenarios The bandwidths displayed represent the difference in flow or delay between two different Scenarios A pair of Scenarios can be compared as follows e Switch the Network Results View into Bandwidth Mode as detailed above e On the Bandwidths toolbar displayed in the Network Results View change the Bandwidths mode setting to Scenario Compare e On the Bandwidths Toolbar select two Scenarios to compare using the drop down lists e Select whether to compare Flows or Delays using the Diff by drop down list Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 140 View Reference 4 3 17 Rotating and Scaling Network Items Segments of the LinSig Network Layout View can be quickly scaled and or rotated as follows e Select the Network Items to be scaled whilst holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard This will select multiple Network Items Many Items can be selected at once by selecting a Junction e Choose Scale and Rotate Selected Items from the Network menu This will open the Rotate amp Scale dialog box Rotate And Scale E Angle to rotate Scale percent W Apply rotation to Phases Close e The selected items can be rotated or scaled dynamically by dragging the Angle to rotate and Scale Percent sliders 37 Network Layout View 7 Rotate And Scale BIB
122. 3 Network Layout View 105 O Where Flows are displayed by Layer each Layer Flow is shown in the colour of the Layer it is on Layer colours are defined using the Edit Layers dialog box which is opened by choosing Edit Lane Based Flow Layers from the Traffic Flows menu Choosing which Lane Based Flows to Show Lane Based Flow Mode will display Lane Based Flows for the Flow Group selected in the Network Layout View toolbar As Lane Based Flows define the assignment of flows to the Network they are defined for each Flow Group not for each Scenario as Route Flows are This is because Route Flows could assign differently for each Scenario depending on signal settings or other Scenario specific criteria Movmt to J2 4 1 Ahead Add Edit Delete Total incoming 170 Add Edit Delete Total outgoing 170 Check Uniform Flow o Total entering downstream flow 170 Apparent flow loss 0 Flow from this lane leaving network o Where a model uses multiple Flow Layers the display can be filtered to only show flows for a specific Layer This can be done by selecting the Layer to display from the Layer Filter in the Network Layout View toolbar Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 106 View Reference Pal te ef Show All Layers Showing Route Flows as well as Lane Based Flows As each Flow Group can potentially define both Lane Based Flows and Matrix Based Flows the Network Layout View can display Route F
123. 7 Cyclic Flow Profiles View The Cyclic Flow Profiles View displays detailed Flow Profile graphs for Lanes or Lane Groups showing flow profiles calculated by the traffic model The graphs are the same graphs as can be shown on the Network Layout View but the Flow Profile View allows them to be laid out on a page for printing at a larger size The Cyclic Flow Profiles View can be opened by choosing Show Cyclic Flow Profiles View from the Cyclic Flow Profiles pop out menu on the Modelling menu lal Flow Profiles View H GEES Diagram Size Lane 1 1 Flows Lane 1 1 Queue T 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 4 12 24 36 48 60 Lane 1 2 Flows Lane 1 2 Storage In Front 900 600 300 0 0 12 24 36 46 60 72 484 4 27 1 Creating Graphs and Controlling their Layout The Flow Profile View allows graphs to be laid out in a rectangular grid This creates flexibility in setting graphs out in sequence horizontally or vertically for example to follow a Route or corridor Creating Flow Profile Graphs Flow Profile Graphs can be added to the Flow Profile View as follows e Right click on the Flow Profile View with the mouse e Choose Add Graph for Lane from the pop up menu and select the Lane to be graphed and the Graph Type as described below Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 27 Cyclic Flow Profiles View 251 e The new graph will be added to the Cyclic Flow Profiles View and can be repositioned as desired as describ
124. 7 2 Single Stage Stream Use cc cccccccececseceseeeesceecccueeecceeesceecescesesceeeesseeesceess 164 4 7 3 Using Multiple Stage Streams with the Phase VieW cccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 167 AB IMCIGK SSI VIEW creires aE lane Oedaiuetedndalath 171 4 8 1 Selecting which Controller to View cccccseececeececeeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeeseeesseeeesaaees 171 4 8 2 Managing Intergreens cccccccscccececseecececeeeceeeceeeceeecsueceuecseesseeseeeneeesseeneeenes 172 4 8 3 Using Multiple Intergreen Sets ccccccccecccssececeeesseeeeseeeesseeeseeeeseasesseeeessaees 173 AG SAGES VICW 2 esstcadenasihascuactseeahscencasastenlond se dad EEE A PETEA EEEE ETE E Eip 174 4 9 1 Selecting which Controller to ViOW ccccccecceceececeeseeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesseeeesaaees 174 4 9 2 Sidle Stage Stearn WSS escoden nna E S 174 4 9 3 Using Multiple Stage Streams with the Stage View cccceecsseeeeseeeseeeeaeeens 176 A NO Stade SEQUENCE VIEW isenana a coe hana ahi aout ahi ioral tials 180 4 10 1 Selecting which Controller to ViOW ccccsecceceeceseeeeeseeeesaeeeeseeeeseesesseeeesaaess 180 4 10 2 Single Stage Stream USE eiaa 180 4 10 3 Using Multiple Stage Streams with the Stage Sequence View c0608 184 Ai Network Control Plan VEW nasisa i Mend torn eeeh ates e sar oro a say a iaaaiilis 187 4 11 1 Managing Network Control Plans cccccccccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeaeee
125. 7 seconds e Controller Minimum The Controller Minimum is the Phase Minimum stored in and used by the controller and the LinSig controller model Controller Phase Minimums are often the same as Street Phase Minimums but where phase delays are used they can be different Controller minimums must always be greater than or equal to the Street Minimum 5 1 1 1 Why are two types of Phase Minimum Required The two types of Phase Minimum are required because of the way traffic signal controllers use Phase Minimums and Phase Delays Phase Minimums entered into the controller are always controller minimums The controller will continue running a Phase and will not consider terminating it until its controller minimum has expired The controller does not however take into account any Phase Losing Delays so if a Phase has a Phase Losing Delay it will continue to run into the Interstage for the duration of the Phase Losing Delay after the controller minimum has expired This means that for the stage changes involving a Phase losing delay the effective minimum will in fact be the controller minimum plus the phase losing delay If the minimum used in the controller is the desired Street Minimum the effective minimum will be too long potentially causing inefficiencies 5 1 1 2 Compensating for Phase Delays Where it can be guaranteed that the Phase Delay will occur on all possible stage changes it is possible to reduce the controller minimum below the Street
126. Based Flows Network does not use and OD Matrix and only requires Zones and Routes to be defined if journey times on Routes are required e Lane Based Traffic Flows Lane Based Traffic Flows are an alternative simpler way of defining traffic flows compared with Matrix Based Flows which use an OD Matrix and Routes Flows are defined as a total traffic flow for each Lane together with incoming and outgoing turning flows Other than the immediate previous and next Lanes for each Lane Lane Based Flows contain no information on how traffic routes over the wider Network e Flow Group A Flow Group represents a set of Flows for a particular period of time for example a Morning Peak hour Each Flow Group can contain one or more set of three different flow types An Origin Destination OD traffic flow matrix which defines traffic flows for Matrix Based Network regions a set of Lane Based Traffic Flows which defines traffic flows for Lane Based regions and a Pedestrian OD Matrix e Origin Destination Matrix Traffic Flows through a Matrix Based Network or Matrix Based regions of a Network are represented by a matrix that specifies the traffic flow between Zones All flows are specified in PCUs The OD matrix does not specify which Route traffic takes between two Zones as the routing is dependent on signal timings and other issues Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 8 LinSig Basics e Route Flow Route Flows are the flows on individual Routes between Zones
127. Based methods include LinSig has detailed information on how traffic routes through the Network This means that each Lane can be modelled with different traffic movements passing through the Lane being kept disaggregated throughout the modelling process This leads to more accurate modelling of cyclic flow profile shapes which are used in the optimisation process and to calculate model results This is particularly important on complex junctions such as signal roundabouts In smaller Networks where little route choice exists the amount of data entry using an OD Matrix and delay based assignment is much less than when using Lane Based Flows When changes are made to the Network possibly as part of scheme development LinSig can quickly reassign traffic to Routes on the changed Network based on modelled delays This process is very quick and allows rapid assessment of the consequences of traffic rerouting due to scheme changes In smaller Networks where the number of Routes is not too large very fine control over traffic routing is available by manual adjustment of Route Flows Disadvantages of Matrix Based Methods include The greater level of detail has a cost in terms of model run times The high level of detail being modelled can lead to longer run times especially in larger Networks An Origin Destination Matrix is required for the region of Network being modelled For larger Networks it is unusual to have a directly counted OD Matrix a
128. CU s PCU s Delay pcuHr Joumey pcuHr 18 A B Ji 1 2 J2 5 1 150 48 65 23 65 0 99 2 03 12 A C fl J33 5 2 297 116 30 58 30 481 9 59 11 A D Ji 1 1 J3 6 1 203 90 04 45 04 2 54 5 08 13 B A J2 3 1 4A 200 54 66 32 66 1 81 3 04 1 B C J2 3 2 J3 5 2 153 87 66 58 66 2 49 3 73 ee 3 B D J2 3 2 36 1 97 74 32 48 32 1 30 2 00 B PO 15 C A J3 2 2 Ji 4 1 124 104 09 54 09 1 86 3 59 oe ee oe a 14 C A 3 2 1 J41 123 104 14 44 14 1 51 3 56 C B 33 2 1 J254 123 55 82 28 82 0 98 1 91 E D J3 2 2 J3 6 1 150 48 70 44 70 1 86 2 03 D A B32 H4 23 12898 799 45 27 J3 33 2 J25 97 96 01 70 01 1 89 2 59 32 40 1 80 4 27 4 Uniform Queue Graphs Uniform Queue Graphs show the Uniform Queue on a Lane over a typical signal cycle It is important to understand that the graphs show only the Uniform Queue and do not include the random and oversaturated queue components which are calculated separately not by the flow profiles More information on the different queues and delays types is given in the modelling section Uniform Queue Graphs can be shown for the following items e Long Lane A Uniform Queue Graph for a simple Long Lane with no associated Short Lane shows how traffic queues on the Lane e Combined Lane Group When a Long Lane has an associated Short Lane the two Lanes are modelled as a combined pair to allow all the blocking and interaction between the two Lanes to be modelled The Combined Lane Group Uniform Queue graph shows how traffi
129. Destination matrices are similar to Traffic OD matrices but are specified as a separate matrix for each LinSig Junction Each Junction OD Matrix specifies Pedestrian movements from each Origin Pedestrian Zone to each Destination Pedestrian Zone in Pedestrians per modelled time period where the modelled time period is specified by the Flow Group The Pedestrian OD Matrices are displayed as follows e Click the Pedestrian Mode button on the Traffic Flow View s toolbar to ensure Pedestrian Flows are being shown e Select the Junction for which the Pedestrian OD matrices are to be displayed in the Junction drop down list on the Traffic Flow View s toolbar e Choose either Desired Flows Actual Flows or Difference to display one of the three OD matrices described below e Only the Desired Flows Matrix can be edited the Actual Flows and difference matrices are for error checking output only The basis of the Desired Flows Actual Flows and Difference Matrix are the same as described above but obviously applying to pedestrians rather than traffic Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 4 Traffic Flows View 149 Modelling Pedestrians when No Pedestrian Flow Data is Available In many cases pedesirian flow data will not be available for one or more Junctions being modelled This is not necessarily a major problem as it is still possible to model pedestrian delay at junctions even when no pedestrian data is available The main po
130. E cruise time speed calculations na When modelling buses ata Mean Bus Stopped Time s 15 Bus Speed km hr 125 This is a list of all the override rules in this model Override rules will be applied in order beginning with the rule at the top of the list and proceeding dovmwards Only the first rule that matches will apply If no rules match then the default rule highlighted in italics will apply The Overrides tab allows different cruise speed time and bus stop times to be specified on the Connector for different Routes Lane Based Flow Layers and or Flow Groups By default the same cruise speed time and bus stop times will apply to all Routes Flow Layers and Flow Groups on the Connector unless otherwise overridden The Overrides tab allows the following settings to be changed e Overrides This lists all Overrides that apply to this Connector Each entry in the list corresponds to a selection of Routes Flow Layers and or Flow Groups to which the Override will apply The final entry in the list is always for the Default settings that will apply to all Routes Lane Based Flow Layers and Flow Groups unless otherwise overridden e Override Data For the Override that is selected in the Overrides list the cruise speed time and bus stop time are displayed These can be edited for the selected Override by using the Edit Override data button lf more than one Override applies to a Route Flow Layer or Flow Group the Overri
131. Error Checking LinSig checks whether an Intergreen is appropriate for each phase to pbhase movement taking into account which Phases run together in Stages and other relationships between Phases such as Filters and their Associated Phases A cell containing a dash indicates that there is currently no conflict between the phase pairs You should enter an Intergreen value if you wish to define the phases as conflicting or leave the cell blank if the phases do not conflict Remember that an Intergreen of zero is not the same as having no Intergreen A cell with a red background indicates that the phases currently run together in a stage and can therefore have no conflicting value You cannot enter a value in this cell A cell with a light blue background indicates that the phases are currently associated and can therefore have no conflicting value You cannot enter a value in this cell A cell with a green background indicates that the intergreen matrix is currently asymmetrical and it is probable that an intergreen is required in this cell Note that it is unusual to have an intergreen from a filter phase to another phase LinSig therefore does not indicate a symmetry problem in this case A cell with a yellow background indicates that the phases are both pedestrian types and therefore are unlikely to have a conflicting value You may enter a value in this cell but are unlikely to need to do so A cell with a blue background indicates that t
132. Group or Network Control Plan can be changed by clicking on the item you wish to change in the Scenario View and entering a new name or choosing a new setting from the resulting drop down list Scenarios can also be created by copying an existing Scenario To copy an existing Scenario select it in the Scenario View and choose Copy this Scenario from the Scenarios pop out on the Modelling menu 4 12 1 2 Selecting a Scenario for Editing A Scenario can be selected for editing either by e Clicking on the Scenario in the Scenario View The selected Scenario will be shown highlighted in red e Choosing a new current Scenario from the drop down list in the LinSig main toolbar When a new Scenario is selected all other Views are updated to display and allow editing of information relating to the new Scenario For example the Signal Timings View will always show the Stage green times relating to the currently selected Scenario 4 12 1 3 Editing a Scenario The following items can be edited on a Scenario e The Scenario s Name The Scenario s name can be changed by clicking on existing name and entering a new one e The Flow Group The Scenario s Flow Group can changed by clicking on a Scenario s existing Flow Group and selecting a new Flow Group from the drop down list e The Network Control Plan The Scenario s Network Control Plan can changed by clicking on a Scenario s existing Network Control Plan and selecting a new Netwo
133. Lane Length PEU 60 0 C Meters Flow Group Custom Occu Default MB Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Network Settings specify 1PCU 5 75m lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Setting the Lane s Length As discussed above in Working with Lanes a Lane can be regarded as either e A Long Lane if it extends back to the previous junction or is long enough that it will not empty during the longest expected green period In this case the Physical Lane Length setting is the length back to the previous Junction If you are using Exit Arms at the previous Junction remember to allow for the length of the Lanes on the Exit Arm Generally it is recommended that Exit Arm Lanes are given a very short nominal length with most of the length being allocated to the Junction Entry Arm e A Short Lane or Flare if it will empty during the green period and will therefore no longer run at full saturation flow The Physical Length setting in this case is the number of PCU s able to use the Lane if it is fully occupied In both cases the Lane s Length can be specified in PCUs or meters If a Lane Length is specified in meters the PCU Length specified in Network Settings on the Network menu will be used to calculate the Lane s Length in PCU Setting Custom Lane Occupancies Normally LinSig will always attempt to make full use of a Short Lane subject to blocking by other adjacent Lanes This is normally sufficientl
134. Layout View to drop the new empty Note e Edit the Note s text as described below in Editing a Note Editing a Note The text of a Note can be edited as follows e Double click on a Note to open the Note Editor The Note Editor displays the Note s text if any and formatting options for the Note Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 134 View Reference Note Editor e Enter the Note s text e Click OK to save the Note s text Inserting a Dynamic Field in a Note A dynamic field can be inserted in a Note as follows e Open the Note for editing as described above e Click on the Add Field toolbar button This opens the Add Field dialog box as shown below Add Field e Select the data type and Lane for the field Currently only Lane based data can be shown Also results for a combined long and Short Lane Group are shown on the Long Lane e Click OK This will insert a field code into the Note e Continue editing the Note or click OK to save the Note e LinSig will replace the field code with the appropriate data e f desired field codes can be typed directly into the Note Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 135 Formatting a Note The Note Editor allows the font colour and size of text to be set for individual paragraphs words and characters as well as the Note as a whole To change the formatting of all or part of the Note e Select the text you wish to change the formatting
135. LinSig on the old PC has now been deactivated and can only be used as demonstration software On the New PC 1 Either take up where you left off the new PC above or if LinSig has been closed follow the activation procedure as described above in Activating LinSig for the first time up to the point where an activation code is required Enter the Activation Code provided from the old PC Click Continue LinSig should now report that the new PC has been successfully activated and provide details of the activated licence Check that the licence details are as expected LinSig is now correctly licensed on the new PC A 4 3 Product Activation for Unlimited Networked PC Licences For users with Unlimited Networked PC Licences UNPCL it is not necessary to activate each PC individually instead workstations obtain a licence from a central licence server which authorises them to run LinSig This benefits users by removing the need to handle large lists of Installation IDs and Activation codes and also avoids the security risk of JCT handing out a potentially unlimited number of individual PC activations for LinSig which may inadvertently migrate away from the licensed site A 4 3 1 Installing LinSig on Workstations LinSig is installed on each workstation the same way as for non networked installations as detailed above in Installing LinSig However Product Activation does NOT need to be carried out on each Workstation If
136. Matrix The Difference Matrix in the Traffic Flows View is useful in checking for any mismatches between the Desired Flows Matrix and total Route Flows between Zones Automatically Assigning the Desired Flows OD Matrix to Routes Traffic from a Desired OD Matrix can be assigned to each Scenario s Routes automatically using LinSig s equilibrium assignment algorithm As the assignment is carried out for each scenario this is described in more detail in the Scenario View section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 158 View Reference 4 6 Controller List View The Controller List View lists all the traffic signal controllers in the Network together with the Stage Streams running on each Controller It is opened by choosing Controller List View from the Controllers menu The View is used to edit Controller settings to group Controllers into Controller Sets and to move Stage Streams between Controllers Controller List View A Add Edit Delete Add New Controller Controler Controller Controller Set E Default Controller Set CT 90 Bi controler C1 West controler Stage Stream 1 Phs 5 Stg 3 Stage Stream 2 Phs 3 Stg 2 l Controller C2 East Controller n Stage Stream 1 Phs 9 Stg 4 4 6 1 Definitions The Controller List View can be used to manage three different signal control items These are e Controller Sets Controller Sets allow Controllers using a common cycle time to be grouped together for easier manag
137. Matrix should be assigned to the Network to produce Route and Lane flows e Check Route Flows Use the Route List View to review the Route Flows e Check Lane Flows Use the Network Layout View to review the Lane Flows calculated from the Route Flows Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 14 LinSig Basics Save the File in LinSig Version 3 format 2 2 5 Importing and Merging LinSig Files As well as allowing Networks to be built from scratch LinSig 3 allows Networks to be built up by merging together existing LinSig files into one larger Network model This process is carried out in several stages These are Create a base model file Import an existing LinSig file containing a Network region to be added to the base Network into the base model This will be imported as a separate Network region Join Network regions together either by merging Zones using the Zone Merge Wizard for Matrix Based Network regions or by joining Lane Based Network regions using Lane Connectors Repeat this process for any additional Network regions to be added Having merged all the Network Segments together optionally refine the combined Origin Destination Matrix for any Matrix Based regions using matrix estimation and check and refine routing in the combined Network Further details are given in Importing amp Merging LinSig Networks in the View Reference section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 3 The LinSig User Interface 15 2 3 The Lin
138. Minimum to compensate for the Phase Delay In the example below a Phase is required to have a Street Minimum design value of 7 seconds The Phase however has the benefit of a 2 second Phase losing delay at the end of the stage Hence if the Controller Minimum is set to 5 seconds the phase will run for at least 7 seconds on street If the phase is given a 7 second controller minimum then it will run for at least 9 seconds Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 33 Animating LinSig Views 277 Fhase has a Street Mirumuim of T seconds 0 l 2 3 4 s T seconds start of Stage End of stage ae Phase Controller Minimum can be 5 seconde Phase Delay 2 seconds 5 1 1 3 Calculating Controller Minimums Like a real controller the LinSig Controller Model only uses controller minimums internally LinSig will however allow you to specify the Street Minimums converting them to controller minimums before they are used in the controller model This allows you to use the street minimums from your design directly with no manual adjustments Whether the entered Phase Minimums are directly entered Controller Minimums or are Street Minimums which require conversion is specified in the Controller Information dialog which can be opened from the Network Menu If you choose to specify street minimums LinSig will compute the lowest possible controller minimum that each phase could have such that the street minimum is not violated w
139. Network and the Arm at the downstream Junction as the Zone s Arm Entering Network Internal P Zone J2 4 1 605 e y J3 1 1 307 C2 A CZE J2 4 2 150 A J3 1 2 448 C2 A _3 Ar oe o m J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Arm J3 1 Main Road Eastbound lt A LS Arm J2 2 Main Road Westbound Arm J3 4 Main Road Westbound o_O oe ___________ ________ _ A 8 c1B 450 J2 2 2 328 J342 2 OD CIB 219 2 2 1 341 J3 4 1 e Enter Zone origin and destination totals in the Matrix Estimation View These should be estimated from the counted loss or gain of traffic between Junctions This step is very important as if not carried out the matrix estimation process will tend to terminate or start and excessive number of OD movements in the Zone 4 13 5 Estimating an Origin Destination Matrix 4 13 5 1 Matrix Estimation Prerequisites LinSig can only estimate an origin destination matrix when the following prerequisites have been satisfied e A Traffic Flow Group has been created which will hold the new estimated matrix It will be necessary to create a Flow Group for each period for which a matrix is to be estimated For example the AM and PM Peak periods e Traffic Turning Counts have been entered in each Traffic Flow Group to be estimated for preferably all Junctions in the Network If any Junctions are omitted LinSig may be unable to estimate some movements in the matrix Ver 3 2 10 J
140. OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE B 2 Info Zip http www info zip org LinSig uses an altered version of Info Zip s Zip Copyright c 1990 2009 Info ZIP All rights reserved For the purposes of this copyright and license Info ZIP is defined as the following set of individuals Mark Adler John Bush Karl Davis Harald Denker Jean Michel Dubois Jean loup Gailly Hunter Goatley Ed Gordon lan Gorman Chris Herborth Dirk Haase Greg Hartwig Robert Heath Jonathan Hudson Paul Kienitz David Kirschbaum Johnny Lee Onno van der Linden Igor Mandrichenko Steve P Miller Sergio Monesi Keith Owens George Petrov Greg Roelofs Kai Uwe Rommel Steve Salisbury Dave Smith Steven M Schweda Christian Spieler Cosmin Truta Antoine Verheijen Paul von Behren Rich Wales Mike White This software is provided as is
141. Opposed Movements and Ahead Traffic in Multiple Flared Lanes In this example the right turning traffic has an exclusive right turn lane but this lane is a short lane This has been difficult to model in many signal design packages for some time including earlier versions of LinSig LinSig Version 3 allows the situation show below to be modelled more intuitively and with significantly better accuracy than previously possible We Ahead Right Turn Mixed Ahead and Right Traffic in Multiple Lanes with flare The Lane structure used to model the above is Arm 1 London Road Some important points to note include e The left lane is assumed to be unaffected by the right turn and is therefore modelled as a separate Lane e The right turn Lane is modelled as a Short Lane This is different from LinSig 2 where this situation was modelled using a right turn bay with non blocking storage greater than the storage in front of the stop line e The right turn lane is modelled using the same settings as Example 7 but is created as a Short Lane Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 305 A Appendix A Installation and Setup A 1 Hardware Requirements The minimum hardware requirements for LinSig are not onerous however as with all computer aided design software a well specified graphics system will make the software much easier to use and more productive The minimum hardware specification should therefore be treate
142. Profile shown below represents the discharge profile of a Lane controlled by traffic signals During the period the traffic signals are on green the Lane can discharge traffic at a maximum rate equal to the Lane s saturation flow During the red period no traffic can leave the Lane 2400 2000 1600 1200 500 400 T 14 2 20 35 42 49 56 Accept Profile Leave Profile The Leave Profile shown below is calculated from the Arrive and Accept Profiles 2400 2000 1600 1200 e010 400 T 14 2 20 35 42 49 56 Leave Profile The initial peak of traffic at the beginning of the green period represents the queue formed during the red period leaving the Lane at the saturation flow rate After the queue has discharged a short gap occurs when there is no traffic on the Lane to discharge before the next platoon of vehicles arrive and immediately leave the Lane as it is still on green At the end of the green period the amount of leaving traffic falls to zero as the signals are now red and further traffic arriving is forced to queue and wait for the next green period Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 34 Essential Background These different periods are identified below Arrivals during the Green Queued Traffic Discharging on the Green Arrivals during the Red 1200 800 400 Start Displacement End Displacement 3 1 1 3 Interactions between Lanes The flow profiles for each Lane are calculated based on the traffic
143. Reset Origin Zone All Arm all Lane All Contains Junc All Arm all Lane All Connector All Pedestrian Links are displayed as follows Pedestrian Link Handles l fone Pedestrian Link Connector Attachment Point Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 124 View Reference Pedestrian Links together with Pedestrian Link Connectors form a Pedestrian Network for each LinSig Junction Pedestrian movements between junctions are not modelled Due to issues such as pedestrian dispersion crossing at places other than a controlled crossing and leaving the Network between Junctions modelling pedestrians over a wider area is complex and beyond what LinSig is intended to model LinSig uses each Junction s Pedestrian Network to model Pedestrian walk and delay times from one side of the Junction to another If this involves several crossings LinSig takes account of Pedesirian coordination when modelling delays 4 3 10 1 Creating New Pedestrian Links New Pedestrian Links can be created in the Network Layout View as follows e Choose Add Pedestrian Link from the Pedestrian Links pop out menu on the Network menu A new Pedestrian Link will be created which can be dragged into its desired position and dropped by clicking with the mouse If necessary the Pedestrian Link can be rotated and repositioned more accurately after it has been created as described below in Moving and Repositioning Pedestrian Lin
144. Results Matrix This displays a SCOOT Interstage matrix and SCOOT Stage Minimum matrix 4 21 1 1 The SCOOT Stage Definition List The SCOOT Stage Definition List lists currently defined SCOOT Stages Adding a new SCOOT Stage To add a new SCOOT Stage click Add to the right of the SCOOT Stage Definition List This will create a new SCOOT Stage and display the Edit SCOOT Stage dialog box for the Stage This can then be used as described below to set up the SCOOT Stage Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 236 View Reference Editing SCOOT Stages To Edit a SCOOT Stage select it in the SCOOT Stage Definition List and click Edit to the right of the List This will open the Edit SCOOT Stage dialog box as shown below Edit SCOOT Stage SCOOT Stage a f Define by controller stages Controller Stages C Define by phase The Edit SCOOT Dialog box allows the following settings to be edited The SCOOT Stage Name The name of the SCOOT Stage being added or edited Generally SCOOT Stages are represented by letters unlike controller Stages which are numbered The Controller Stages defining the SCOOT Stage SCOOT Stages can have one or more alternative Controller Stages allocated to them For example although SCOOT will always run Stage A the Controller may be running either Stage 1 or 2 during this period To add a Controller Stage to the SCOOT Stage select a Controller Stage from the drop down list and click Add
145. S ANPR becomes more widespread and reduces in cost direct measurement will become increasingly more feasible It is recommended that for complex junctions such as signal roundabouts OD matrices are directly measured whenever possible e Estimation of the Matrix from Junction Turning Counts Matrix Estimation uses relatively less expensive junction turning counts to estimate the most likely OD matrix consistent with a set of measured traffic counts Many different techniques have been used in large transportation models for many years to estimate OD matrices and Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 13 Matrix Estimation View 203 LinSig uses one of the most common and tried and tested methods based on a mathematical method called entropy maximisation In simple terms where a set of traffic counts could be reproduced by many different OD matrices the entropy maximisation technique aims to estimate the most probable OD matrix which will fit the traffic counts This does not mean that this is necessarily the correct matrix only that the estimated matrix is the best possible estimate from the information contained within the traffic turning counts Furthermore the use of a prior OD matrix even if it only contains estimated values can provide additional information about the pattern of OD movements However the OD matrix is obtained it should be remembered that accurate traffic flow information is a fundamental first step to any Junction or Network modellin
146. SA elek AAAA AlAs E Angle to rotate Scale percent 1 V Apply rotation to Phases 2 0 pour cma Per Ped 39 2 s Ped Corrroliier e The Rotate and Scale is particularly useful to align several separately imported Junctions prior to merging connecting Zones e If the Apply Rotation to Phases option is ticked LinSig will also rotate and scale any Phases associated with the selected Items Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 4 Traffic Flows View 141 4 4 Traffic Flows View The Traffic Flows View is used to carry out the following tasks e Create and manage Traffic Flow Groups e Specify traffic flows by entering origin destination matrices for each Flow Group e Specify pedestrian flows by entering an OD matrix for each Junction for each Flow Group The View can be opened by choosing Show Traffic Flows View on the Traffic Flows menu Ga Traffic Flows View oo ee eis Traffic Mode Pedestrian Mode v Edit Lane Based Layers Delete all unused Flow Groups Clear Lane based Flows Flow Groups Traffic Origin Destination Matrix Description Type Start End Duration u i Desired Flows Actual Flows Difference Copy Paste AM Peak Current Scenario Standard 08 00 09 00 01 00 OD matrix flows PM Peak Standard 16 30 17 30 01 00 OD matrix flows AM Peak Lane Based Flows Standard 08 00 09 00 01 00 Lane based flows IfAuto Assign is enabled any changes made to the Desired Flows data in the Fl
147. Selected Stage Sequence is the Stage Sequence which is shown and edited in the other panel of the Stage Sequence View It is not necessarily the Stage Sequence being used for model calculations The Selected Stage Sequence can be changed by clicking a Stage Sequence in the Stage Sequence List e The Currently Modelled Stage Sequence The Stage Sequence currently being used for model calculations is inferred from the Network Control Plan being used by the Current Scenario selected in the Scenario View and is shown in bold and labelled current in the Stage Sequence List It is changed either by changing the Current Scenario s Network Control Plan or by selecting a new Current Scenario in the Scenario View When the Current Scenario is changed LinSig will recalculate model results using the Stage Sequence and other settings from the new Current Scenario Creating a New Stage Sequence A new Stage Sequence can be created by choosing Create Stage Sequence from the Stage Sequences Menu or by right clicking on the Stage Sequence List and choosing Create Stage Sequence from the pop up menu The Stage Sequence will be created with a default name but with an empty Stage Sequence Editing a Stage Sequence A Stage Sequence can be edited by selecting it in the Stage Sequence List and choosing Edit Stage Sequence from the Stage Sequences menu This will open the Edit Stage Sequence dialog box which can be used to renumber the Stage Se
148. Sig User Interface The LinSig model is edited using a sophisticated graphical user interface that has been developed to ensure data can be quickly entered and edited The user interface also aims to allow the user to control the amount of information displayed at any one time providing choice between a data display that is very dense but shows a lot of information at a glance and a less dense display that is neater but shows less information at once 2 3 1 Useful User Interface Concepts When editing the LinSig model a number of standard concepts apply These are Data Items A data item is a generic term for the different types of data edited in LinSig For example Arms Lanes Lane Connectors Zones Routes Controllers Phases Stages etc are all Items Selecting an Item Clicking on an item in a LinSig View will select it The selected item will be shown in red Many menu commands require you to first select an item before choosing that command For example before choosing the command Edit Lane you must have selected a Lane Menu commands that cannot be carried out because an ltem has not been selected are shown in grey and cannot be chosen In some instances more than one item can be selected at once by holding the control Ctrl key or shift key down whilst selecting the Items Multi select can also be carried out in the Network Layout View by dragging a multi select rectangle with the mouse whilst holding control Ctrl down A
149. Stage Stream e To maximise PRC for Lanes controlled by a single Stage Stream by adjusting the stage lengths and offset for the Stage Stream 4 12 3 1 Optimising Signal Timings for the Whole Network Either stage lengths and offsets or offsets only can be optimised over the whole Network Optimising Stage Lengths and Offsets for the Whole Network To optimise stage lengths and offsets for the whole Network choose Optimise Stage Lengths and Offsets for Delay or Optimise Stage Lengths and Offsets for PRC from the Optimiser pop out menu on the Modelling menu LinSig will adjust the Stage Lengths and Offsets of the current Scenario to minimise total traffic delay or maximise PRC for the Network Optimising Offsets Only for the Whole Network To optimise offsets only for the whole Network choose Optimise Offsets only for Delay or Optimise Offsets only for PRC from the Optimiser pop out menu on the Modelling menu LinSig will adjust the Offsets of the current Scenario to minimise total traffic delay or maximise PRC for the Network 4 12 3 2 Optimising Signal Timings for a Single Junction To optimise signal timings for a single Junction right click on the Junction and choose Optimise this Junction for PRC or Optimise this Junction for delay as appropriate LinSig will adjust the Stage Lengths and offset of just the Stage Stream or Streams controlling the Junction to minimise traffic delay or maximise PRC over all t
150. The two regions can be joined as follows e Create Lane Connectors joining Lanes immediately upstream and downstream of the region boundary e By default the Lanes immediately downstream of the Network region boundary are fed with traffic from the Zone immediately downstream of the boundary using a flat cyclic flow profile This is because instead of traffic crossing the boundary on the Lane Connectors just created traffic will have exited the Network at the Zone immediately upstream of the Network boundary This is potentially inaccurate as traffic entering the Zone upstream of the Network boundary should really reappear on the downstream Lanes with the same cyclic flow profile This can be rectified using Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 29 Importing amp Merging LinSig Networks 267 the Inherit Cyclic Flow Profile from Upstream Exit Lane setting on Lanes which are fed by the Zones just downstream of the region boundary This setting which can be found on the Advanced tab of the Edit Lane dialog box causes LinSig to take the cyclic flow profile of traffic exiting the Network into the Zone just upstream of the region boundary and apply the profile shape to the traffic exiting the Zone downstream of the boundary Inherit Cyclic Profile from Upstream Exit Lane set on these Lanes A _AS Traffic Starts or ends in Fones at aur each side of boundary Arm J3 5 Main Road Eastbound a Arm J41 Main Road EB at Ped X Et
151. Working WITH AIMS cccceccsecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeessueeeueseeesueteeeseeeseess 63 4 9 6 Working WIRING siete auton cine diate re besten tenets nine ace Gated bile bind eed anid aaa bianis bale abaanneaiaalwls 65 4 3 7 Joining Lanes with Lane COnnectors cccccccsssccceeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeeseseesneeeeseneeens 90 4 3 8 Defining Network Entry and Exit Points using ZONES cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 98 4 3 9 Working with Lane Based FIOWS cccccsececeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeesaeeees 102 4 3 10 Working with Pedestrian LINKS ccccceecesseeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeseeeeseesseeesseesaeeess 123 4 3 11 Joining Pedestrian Links with Link CONNECHOSS ccccccseeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeesanees 126 4 3 12 Defining Pedestrian Start and End Points using Pedestrian Zones 128 4 3 13 Displaying Signal Staging on the Network Layout VieW cccseceeneeeeeeeees 131 4 3 14 Annotating the Network Layout ViCW ccccccsececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeens 133 4 3 15 Displaying and Using Timing Dials cccccceeccceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeseeess 136 4 3 16 Displaying Lane Bandwidiths on the Network Layout View cceeeee 138 4 3 17 Rotating and Scaling Network It MS ccccceccccseeceseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeesaaes 140 AA ME AMNG FIOWS VIEW vedas sist cart bicaiesyesttieanisiedt bs cain a a linia Oe
152. Zones will also lead to longer assignment run times as LinSig will need to balance many more competing traffic movements on Routes Generally Internal Zones should be used judiciously where obvious significant traffic generation is occurring within the Network for example on street parking Remember that the delay based assignment on larger Networks will always be significantly quicker then working out Lane flows on a spreadsheet or piece of paper as has usually been necessary case previously 4 12 3 Signal Optimisation using Scenarios Signal Timings can be optimised for the current Scenario in the following ways To minimise delay in the whole Network by adjusting stage lengths and offsets for all Stage Streams To maximise PRC in the whole Network by adjusting stage lengths and offsets for all Stage Streams Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 198 View Reference e To minimise delay in the whole Network by adjusting offsets only between all Stage Streams e To maximise PRC in the whole Network by adjusting offsets only between all Stage Streams e To minimise delay for a single Junction by adjusting the stage lengths and offset for just the Stage Stream s controlling that Junction e To maximise PRC for a single Junction by adjusting the stage lengths and offset for just the Stage Stream s controlling that Junction e To minimise delay for Lanes controlled by a single Stage Stream by adjusting the stage lengths and offset for the
153. a column is To switch between full and abbreviated headings Right Click on the Results List column headings and choose Show Full Headings or Show Abbreviated Headings from the pop up menu Available Data Columns in the Network Results View The Data Columns available are Item The number or name of the Lane or other Item for which results are being shown Item Description A longer name or description of the Item Lane Type The Type of the Lane Lane Types are U for unopposed Lanes and O for a Give Way Lane which is opposed Controller Stream The number of the Stage Stream controlling this Lane in the format Controller Stage Stream Route Position The sequential position of a Lane along a Route when Lane Results are filtered to display Lanes along a single Route Shown as N A when Lanes are not filtered by Route Full Phase The Full Green Traffic Phase Controlling a Lane All signal controlled Lanes will have a Full Green Phase Arrow Phase The Arrow Phase Controlling a Lane Arrow Phases will only ever be Filter or Indicative Arrow Phases Number of Greens The number of green periods for the Lane per cycle Total Green sec The total time the Lane receives a green signal per cycle Start Green sec The time within the cycle when the Lane receives a green signal End Green sec The time within the cycle when the Lane loses its green signal Arrow Green sec The time an opp
154. a left turn or ahead movement The Edit Lane Dialog Box will contain a separate Movement tab for each movement 38 Edit Lane 1 1 Movement Give Way Data 7 l Flow when opposing traffic is stopped l This movement gives way a ae ae Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed Sat flow data Multi Lane te Advanced ia ee Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Opposing Lanes _ Lane_ Coefficient Cir Confict lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Non Give Way Lane 38 Edit Lane 1 2 Movement Give Way Data Paes F Flow when opposing ratice is stoppe l k This movement gives way Bisa aa s Pye Cruise Time Speed C Use Maximum Flow while Giving Way Value Sat fow data oF Brevihed Relm Use Data Specified Below Use Lane Saturation Flow Value EE Flows General Traffic Maximum Flow while Giving Way pcu Hr 1439 f Use Custom Value pcu Hr tine ete Minimum Flow while Giving Way pcu Hr 0 Emi g i Opposing Lanes Storage in front of Stopline ca Cir Confiict tilly 2 I Al opposing To 6 1 Left 2 2 I Allopposing To 4 1 Ahead lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Give Way Lane The settings available on each Movement tab are e This Movement Gives Way The This Movement Gives Way tick box specifies whether the movement gives way to any other movements from other Lanes or whether it is simply controlled by signals or even free flowing If the movement gives way the box should be ticke
155. ab is used to edit traffic flows on a Lane Based Flow Layer and to manage Layers on the Lane The drag and drop Lane based Flow editing system normally allows Lane Based Flows to be defined much more quickly and should be used in preference to this tab This tab should only be used to edit detailed flow information not available using the drag and drop method 1a Edit Lane J2 1 1 ON Lane Based Flows AM Peak Lane Based Flows WB General Traffic Total Layer 100 Manage Layers Available Lane Based Flow Entry Mode To This Lane When enabled this allows Move to another m Dee er as Uniform Flow jo fs viewing and direct editing of ae sh lane flows using drag and drop Lane Based Flaws in the Network Layout View Incoming Flows Outgoing Flows Flows General Traffic g tgoing BE Flows Buses Movmt to J2 4 1 Ahead Hancina BE 2 4 1 Ahead General Traffic Add Total incoming 0 Add Total outgoing 100 Consistency Check This page displays the Lane Based Flows Total Flow 100 Total incoming o both incoming and outgoing for this layer Use the Add Edit and Delete buttons to i LE E WEN S edit flows on the layers for this lane Uniform Flow 0 Total entering downstream flow 100 The diane bei GG as o Apparent flow loss 100 Flow from this lane leaving network D woe a aa DE pane T a en layer lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel In many cases where multiple Flow Layers
156. ader Project and User Details Repeat Select For All Controllers Phase Diagram Phase Intengreens Matrix al End Page Header Page Footer Project and User Detales _ Network Layout Diagram Phaze Input Data Phase Diagram Network Control Layout Phase Intengreens Matris Phase Delays Prohibited Stage Changes Phases in Stage Stage Diagram lnterstage Diagram Stage Minimums mr F Add Fragment to Curent Report Add RepeatSelect Options for Definition selected tragment s G92 3334393535 The Phase Diagram shows the Phase layout tor a Traffic Signal Controller As the above example shows the Report Definition includes a Phase Diagram Fragment and a Phase Intergreen Matrix Fragment enclosed by a Controller Repeat Select Block The Repeat Select Block s options are shown below and indicate that the Fragments enclosed by the block will be repeated for All Controllers Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 288 Reporting and Printing Repeat Select For Generate Options 0 Generate for each Scenario C Generate for each Flow Group Generate for each Controller Controllers Iw All Controllers CICI West Controller C2 East Controller Repeating a Block of Report Fragments A block of Report Fragments can be repeated as follows In the Report Builders Report Definition List click the fragments you wish to repeat whilst holding the control CTRL key down This will select multiple Report
157. ads to a situation where the model is correct in a mathematical sense but leads to a overestimate of the practical position of the back of queue Link 2 4 10 10 G amp 6 6 4 4 2 2 0 0 The de sliver mechanism detects a sliver queue which is unrealistic and prevents unrealistic back of queue values being reported Exactly what is regarded as unrealistic is governed by the De Sliver Threshold The value of the De Sliver Threshold is used by LinSig to decide when the number of PCU in the queue is unrealistically small For example if the De Sliver Threshold is set to 0 5 PCU LinSig will regard a potential sliver queue containing less than 0 5 PCU as unrealistic and allow traffic to exit the Lane without adding to the queue The exact value for the De Sliver Threshold is best determined by experimenting with its value whilst observing the Lane s Uniform Queue Graph and selecting a value which produces an intuitively sensible queue profile If the value is set too low a sliver queue may form giving unrealistically high mean max queues If the value is set too high the real mean max queue may be smoothed too much leading to an unrealistically high value of mean max queue Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 83 The De Sliver mechanism is intended to allow obviously unintuitive unrealistically long queues to be corrected but the decision whether the queue profile is unrealistic rests as it should do with the engineer
158. al and discharge rate Time Slices LinSig models the arrival and discharge profiles by splitting the profile into time slices usually of one second This fine resolution is necessary to model the detailed behaviour of traffic at a signal junction The amount of traffic arriving at a stop line during a time slice is dependent on the amount of traffic entering the Lane from upstream Lane within the time slice adjusted for the travel time on the Lane The amount of traffic able to leave a Lane during a time slice is dependent on how the Lane is controlled For example a signal controlled Lane will allow no traffic to leave during its red period but will allow traffic to leave at a maximum rate equal to the Lane s saturation flow during its green period The rate at which traffic can leave a give way Lane varies continuously dependent on the traffic flow in the current time slice on its opposing lanes Lane Groups model Long and Short Lanes which interact and potentially block each other LinSig internally models Lane Groups using Lane Segments which behave similarly to Lanes but also models the complex interaction between Short and Long Lanes The application of the above rules enables LinSig to calculate the traffic entering a lane during a time slice and the traffic leaving the Lane during the time slice If the queue length at the start of the time slice is known LinSig can then calculate the queue length at the end of the time slice Mod
159. alternate Phase If the new Phase Name already exists LinSig will rename subsequent Phases 4 9 2 7 Deleting a Stage To Delete a Stage select it with the mouse and choose Delete Stage from the Stages Menu or Right Click on the Stage and choose Delete Stage from the pop up menu The other Stages in the Stream will be renumbered to close the gap in the Stage order created by deleting the Stage Deleting a Stage has the following consequences e lf the Stage is used in any Stage Sequences it will be deleted from the Stage Sequence e lf any Phase Delays exist which are dependent on the Stage they will be deleted Tip Remember that if you accidentally delete a Stage using Undo will completely restore any Staging Plans or Phase Delays affected by deleting the Stage 4 9 2 8 Running or Removing a Phase from a Stage A Phase can be added to or removed from a Stage by double clicking the Phase in the relevant Stage in the Stage View with the mouse This will add a previously non running Phase to the Stage or remove a running Phase A Phase which has a conflict with Phases already running or is subject to some other constraint cannot be run in the Stage and will be shown colour coded as described above to indicate why it cannot be run Double clicking on a Phase which cannot run will display more detail on the reason the Phase cannot run 4 9 3 Using Multiple Stage Streams with the Stage View Multiple Parallel Stage Streams
160. am Lane If necessary this setting can be used to override the Lane Length for this connector only This will most often be necessary for Lane Connectors within Junctions e Delay based Assignment Cruise Time Weighting s When using Delay Based Assignment the average journey time is compared for different routes This setting allows you to alter the cruise time on the connector in order that the Delay Based Assignment will consider routes through the connector as being quicker or slower than in actuality Enter a positive value to increase the cruise time by that number of seconds or a negative value to reduce the cruise time Note that this setting only affects the cruise time used during the Delay Based Assignment process and the modelled cruise time elsewhere will unaffected e Bus Modelling When modelling buses LinSig uses two settings instead of just a Cruise Time or Speed These are the mean time buses are stopped whilst using the Lane Connector and the Bus Cruise Speed on this Lane Connector e Platoon Dispersion Tick the Platoon Dispersion box to model platoon dispersion on the Lane Connector A Platoon Dispersion Coefficient can also be entered but should be left at its default of 35 unless detailed site data suggests otherwise For very Short Lanes such as occur on a signal roundabout s circulatory carriageway platoon dispersion should be switched off LinSig is unable to directly model platoon compression at this time however it is
161. an Matrix for each Junction Link Based Pedestrian Flows from TranEd cannot be used and are discarded Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 0 View Reference 4 31 Importing TRANSYT Files 4 31 1 Importing Version 12 and earlier Files into LinSig Currently TRANSYT files cannot be imported directly into LinSig however TRANSYT 12 models and earlier can be imported into TranEd 2 and the resulting TranEd 2 file imported into LinSig as described above If you would like to use TranEd 2 to load TRANSYT files into LinSig and do not have access to TranEd 2 contact JCT Consultancy Support 4 31 2 Importing TRANSYT 13 Files into LinSig As TRANSYT 13 files are a closed file format LinSig cannot import them directly TRANSYT 13 can however export TRANSYT 12 format files which can be imported into LinSig via TranEd 2 as described above Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 32 VISSIM Interface View 271 4 32 VISSIM Interface View LinSig 3 1 and above provides an interface between LinSig and VISSIM models This interface can be used in two different ways These are e LinSig can Import traffic signal information from a VISSIM model and generate a new LinSig Controller model from the imported timings e A LinSig Controller model which has been generated from a VISSIM model or built within LinSig can be linked to a VISSIM model and used to update signal information within the VISSIM model The VISSIM Interface requires a licensed copy of VISSIM on yo
162. and are used with an OD Matrix in Matrix Based Networks or Matrix Based regions of a Network to specify how traffic travels between Zones A Route Flow can either be entered manually or can be estimated by LinSig using a standard traffic assignment user equilibrium algorithm to distribute traffic between Routes based on calculated delays Different Route Flows are stored for each Scenario reflecting the fact that the same OD Matrix can be assigned to the Network in many ways depending on signal timings and other scenario specific issues e Lane Based Flow Layer Lane Based Flow Layers can be used to separate different traffic tyoes or movements in a Network or region of Network defined using Lane Based Flows For example bus traffic or traffic between two points in the Network can be separated out LinSig models each Layer separately whilst allowing for interaction between traffic in each Layer e Desired Flow A Desired Flow is an origin destination flow specifying the required total flow between two Zones If the OD Matrix has been assigned correctly the Desired Flows should equal the Actual Flows for all Scenarios e Actual Flow An Actual Flow is an origin destination flow that is aggregated from all Route Flows between two Zones Actual Flows may be different for each Scenario using the Flow Group due to differences in routing patterns in each Scenario e Difference Flows The Difference Flows are calculated as the difference between the Desi
163. and clicking the Go button It is also possible to use the lt lt and gt gt to go directly to the first or last difference Remember that the comparison is of the Model Audit information which includes all important engineering data It does not include minor settings such as assignment or optimisation settings so an identical Model Audit Comparison means the traffic engineering behind Scenarios is the same but does not necessarily mean that they are identical Model Audit View aq o a Audit options Display options Audit Current Scenario Hide All Show All Print Audit Compare Two Scenarios C Audit Compare With Another File Differences gt gt gt mm Go to 7s 5 4 osing Stage Sequence Data Hice Back To Top Controller stream Stage Sequence Stage Minimums Ci s1 1 2 3 Ci a 1 2 C2 51 1 2 3 4 Cycle Times Hide Back To Top Compared Controller stream Cycle Time Single Double Audit Data Ci si Els 70 single Ci s2 E 70 single C2 s1 90 single Stage amp Interstage Timings Hice Back To Top Controller stream Stage Interstage Start Time End Time Dup tion 3 1 ERI o Ex 6 6 Dhace Timingne Hides Aarb Ta Tan 4 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 246 View Reference 4 24 1 4 Comparing Two LinSig Models The Model Audit View can compare two LinSig models highlighting the differences between the two models This is done intelligently rather
164. ane in turn edit the Lane s length on the Lane Details tab and the saturation flow on the Sat Flow Data tab Saturation Flows can either be manually entered or calculated from the Lane s geometry e Create Traffic Flow Groups Flow Groups can be created and managed in the Traffic Flow View Remember that Flow Groups can be defined as a combination of other Flow Groups using a formula to specify how they are combined e Add Lane Based Flows Use the Network Layout View s Lane Based Flow Mode and the Edit Lane dialog box to enter Lane Based Flows for the Network e Add Traffic Signal Phases to each Controller The Phase View can be used to add Traffic Signal Phases to each LinSig Controller Each Phase should be given an appropriate Phase Type and Indicative Arrow and Filter Phases must have their associated Phases specified The Street Minimum specified for the Phase refers to the desired minimum observable on the street which may be different from the Controller minimum given in the Controllers specification which will exclude Phase Losing Delays As the Phases do not yet know which Lanes they are controlling the Phases will not yet show any directional arrows e Edit Lanes to Connect to Phases Now Phases exist for each Controller each signal controlled Lane can be edited to specify its controlling Phase The Phases will now show directional arrows based on the turning movements allowed in Lanes controlled by the Phase Ver 3 2
165. anuary 2013 4 13 Matrix Estimation View 209 Zone origin and destination totals have been specified for ALL Zones using the Matrix Estimation View A Scenario has been created based on the Traffic Flow Group containing the counts and a Network Control Plan which contains Signal Sequences for each Junction which are as near as possible to the Signal Sequences running when counts were made This can be difficult as signal information is not often recorded at the time of a count but a best estimate should be made Signal timings in the Scenario should be set to typical stage lengths and offsets at the time the Counts were carried out Again this information is not usually available so a best guess should be made The signal timings are only important to the matrix estimation process when significant route choice occurs within the modelled network Any matrix cells which are accurately known prior to estimation should be specified in the Traffic Flows View and locked as described in the Traffic Flow Views section 4 13 5 2 Estimating the Matrix When the above prerequisites are satisfied the matrix can be estimated as follows Choose Estimate Flow Matrix from Turning Counts based on Current Scenario from the Traffic Flows menu LinSig displays the Matrix Estimation Settings dialog box Make any necessary changes to settings Further details on the settings available are described below LinSig will carry out the matrix estimation fo
166. ar To update Product Activation 1 Choose About LinSig from the Help menu within LinSig 2 Click on Change Activation 3 If your Licence size is not changing confirm your Licence ID by clicking Continue If you are upgrading your licence size a new Licence ID will have been supplied with your upgrade documentation Please ensure any new Licence ID supplied is used as retaining the old Licence ID may lead to inadvertent copy protection issues in the future 4 LinSig will provide a new Installation ID This will be different from the Installation ID Originally used when activating LinSig for the first time Send the Installation ID to JCT as described above 6 JCT will supply a matching Activation Code by return When you receive the new Activation Code enter it in the space provided and click Continue 7 Check the updated licence details displayed are as expected A 4 2 3 Deactivating and or Moving LinSig to a different PC The Product Activation system used by LinSig ensures that the software can only be used on the number of PCs actually licensed If it is necessary to permanently remove LinSig from a PC the licence can easily be transferred to a new PC or parked with JCT Licence Parking If you wish to dispose of a PC containing a LinSig licence before a new replacement PC is available it is possible to Park the PC s licence with JCT until needed for the new PC If you wish t
167. are not required the Edit Lane dialog box will simply show a single Lane Based Flow Layer tab which can be used to edit all flows on the Lane The settings available on the Lane Based Flow Layer tab are e Total Flow PCU The Total Flow is the total flow of traffic represented by this Flow Layer across the downstream stop line of this Lane e Uniform Flow PCU The Uniform Flow displays the total Uniform Flow on this Lane for this Flow Layer e Incoming Flows PCU The Incoming Flow list lists all the Lane Connectors entering the Lane and shows the flow on each Lane Connector on this Flow Layer e Outgoing Flows PCU The Outgoing Flow list lists all the Lane Connectors leaving the Lane and shows the flow on each Lane Connector on this Flow Layer e Consistency Check The consistency check table provides various totals of flows entering and leaving the Lane using this Flow Layer and provides a quick check for flow consistency The Flow Consistency Mode of the Network Layout View provides a much more comprehensive graphical check of flow consistency e Move to another Layer The Move to another Layer button allows the traffic Flows defined on this Layer to be moved onto a different Flow Layer e Manage Layers Available to This Lane This works the same way as on the Lane Based Flow Summary tab e Lane Based Flow Entry Mode This button switches the Network Layout View into Lane Based Flow Entry Mode This allows the Lane Based Flo
168. are shaded grey e Phase Intergreens Phase Intergreens are displayed as green struts between Phases LinSig will normally ensure that all Intergreens are not violated however some uncommon or obscure scenarios for example very long intergreens stretching across several Stages can sometimes be violated If an Intergreen is violated LinSig will display it in red place an error in the error view and will not produce any traffic model results e Interstage and Stage Lengths LinSig displays the Interstage and Stage Lengths numerically in the area between Stage Change Point cursors The times are shown in the format Interstage Stage Length 4 15 3 1 Changing Stage Change Points amp Stage Lengths Stage Change Points and Stage Lengths can all be changed graphically by dragging the blue Stage Change Point Cursors with the mouse This will change the Stage Change Points in the current Scenario whilst keeping the Cycle Time the same 9 30 35 40 45 S50 5 60 6 M A 80 4 60 7 6 7 a mA Vma Stage Change Points 4 15 3 2 Changing Stage Stream Offsets A Stage Stream s Offset can be changed by dragging a Stage Change Point whilst holding the SHIFT key down Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 16 4 16 Lane Timings View 219 Lane Timings View The Lane Timings View displays the period each Lane receives a green signal within the cycle It can be opened by choosing Lane Timings View from the Stage Sequences
169. ario is selected in the Model Audit View s toolbar e Select the Scenario which you wish to Audit in the main LinSig toolbar e The Model Audit View will display auditing information for the selected Scenario 4 24 1 2 Refreshing the Model Audit View If the LinSig model is changed in any way the Model Audit View will be out of date The Audit View is not automatically updated each time the model changes but can be refreshed at any Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 24 Model Audit View 245 point by clicking Refresh on the Model Audit View toolbar A warning will be displayed in the Audit View toolbar whenever the View requires refreshing 4 24 1 3 Comparing Two Scenarios The Model Audit View can compare two LinSig Scenarios highlighting the differences between the two models This is done intelligently rather than just comparing the text of two Model Audit Views To compare two Scenarios e Ensure the Audit Compare Two Scenarios option is selected in the Model Audit View toolbar e Click the Compare button on the Model Audit View toolbar and select the Scenarios you are comparing e LinSig will display the comparison of the Scenarios in the Model Audit View Differences between the two models will be highlighted e Itis possible to step through the differences using the lt and gt buttons and also to go directly to any particular difference by entering its position in the list of differences
170. arriving from one or more upstream Lanes It is important to fully understand how traffic moving between Lanes is modelled Vehicles arrive at Then discharge at Vehicles assumed down stream stop saturation flow to to queue vertically line with dispersed next junction at at stop line profile Cruise speed Queuing and Dispersion Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 1 The LinSig Traffic Model 35 The above diagram illustrates a number of key points These are e Vehicles queuing on a Lane are assumed to queue vertically at the Lane stop line This assumption means that every vehicle travelling along a Lane takes the same cruise time to reach the stop line regardless of the length of the queue on the Lane It also means that the modelled number of vehicles queuing at the stop line may be greater than the maximum number of vehicles that could be accommodated on the Lane e The profile of vehicles leaving a Lane the Leave Profile is used to calculate the Arrival profile at a downstream Lane s stop line The first assumption above could allow this process to be carried out simply by assuming the Arrive Profile of a Lane is the same shape as the Leave Profile of the upstream Lane but displaced in time by the Lane s cruise time e In reality unless Lanes are very short platoons of traffic spread out as they travel along a Lane The shape of the Leave Profile is therefore smoothed as it travels along the Lane to model the effects of platoon
171. ary 2013 300 Examples 7 1 6 Example 6 Mixed Right Turn Opposed Movements and Ahead Traffic in a single lane This example features ahead and right turning traffic sharing the same Lane A critical factor in modelling capacity for situations which have a mixture of ahead and right turning traffic in a single lane is whether or not right turners at the front of the queue block the Ahead vehicles LinSig has a unique feature which allows this to be modelled The area in front of the stop line is known as the Storage Area and represents the number of right turners that can wait in front of the stop line The number of PCU which can store before blocking is used to specify how many of these waiting PCU do not block the Ahead traffic whilst waiting Two Right Turners can store without blocking Ahead Traffic Clear Conflict The LinSig Model Lane Structure used to model the above is lt 7 Network Layout View w olala S l Aeled SLE ALLE SO Sa ele AEA Al Find Junction x Findarm O 1 1 51 gt Arm 5 oe Arm 2 High Street a gt P gt 7 a p eee 21 gt ao Arm 1 London Road 18819 WEY Uy Arm 6 z Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All v Arm All v Lane All Contains Junc All v Arm All v Lane All v Destinati Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 301
172. as Intergreens and Phase minimums are not violated Interstages Interstages between Stages are shaded grey Interstage and Stage Lengths LinSig displays the Interstage and Stage Lengths numerically in the area between Stage Change Point cursors The times are shown in the format Interstage Stage Length Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 220 View Reference 4 16 1 2 Changing Stage Timings using the Lane Timings View Although the Signal Timings View is more appropriate for making changes to Stage times it is also possible to change Stage times in the Lane Timings View by dragging Stage Change Points with the mouse in a similar way to the Signal Timings View 4 16 1 3 Adding Bonus Greens to Lane Green Periods Bonus Greens can be added to a Lane Green Period as follows e Right click anywhere on the Lane Green Period s bar in the Lane Timings Panel e Choose Edit Start Bonus Green or Edit End Bonus Green from the pop up menu This will open the Edit Bonus Greens dialog box e Inthe Edit Bonus Greens dialog box double click the value next to the Bonus Green Type and enter a value for the Bonus Green Positive Bonus Greens always result in more green time and negative Bonus Greens less green time e f more than one Bonus Green Type is added they are summed together to give the total Bonus Green HA Lane Ti mings View Number Junction Display 1 Ji Ped Crossing E J2 West Junction J3 East Jun
173. as the Current Scenario will immediately recalculate model results for that Scenario e Automatically Recalculate Results for Current Scenario only LinSig will immediately recalculate results for the Current Scenario All other Scenarios will be given the Status Not Calculated and will not show results in the Scenario View This setting provides the quickest recalculation time but each Scenario will only be recalculated if it is selected as the Current Scenario e Do not Automatically Recalculate Results This setting prevents LinSig from automatically carrying out model recalculation as soon as model input data changes This can be useful when making a large number of minor input data edits to a very large model which can take a second or two to recalculate All Scenarios will be given the status Not Calculated and will not show any results in the Scenario view When the model editing is complete the recalculation status should be changed to one of the above settings to trigger recalculation of model results Any Scenario which has been successfully recalculated since the last change to any input data affecting model results will show a status of calculated in the Scenario View If for any reason a Scenario cannot be recalculated a status of Error will be displayed The details of what may have caused the error can be found in the Error View 4 12 1 8 Controlling Batch Signal Time Optimisation in the Scenario View The Sc
174. ase enter it below then press Continue Alternatively if you received your Activation Code via email you can copy the ActivationCode from the email and paste it in by clicking the Paste button below then press Continue Paste Activation Code from Clipboard Activation Code Continue Activate Later 5 When you receive your Activation Code it should be entered into the Activation Code section of the Activation dialog Clicking the Continue button will then activate LinSig and display the relevant licence details which you should check to ensure they conform to your LinSig licence agreement Activation Successful Actyvation has completed successtully Licence ID LJICT11 Activation Level Fully featured Licence Size Single PC Roaming Activation Date 13 Map 2010 OK 6 You will now be able to use LinSig with no restrictions on your PC 7 If your licence allows further PCs can be activated using the above procedure Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 310 Examples A 4 2 2 Updating the LinSig Licence Once activated LinSig can be updated with minor updates without the need to reactivate after each update It may however be occasionally necessary to update the product activation details for example when software support is renewed it will be necessary to apply a new activation code to activate software support features such as the ability to download updates for a further ye
175. at any point This Template can then be used to add the Report Definition to any other LinSig file To save a Report as a Template e Click Save this Definition as a Template in the Report Builder e Specify a description for the Template e The Template is saved as a RPX file which can be saved in any location but it is recommended to save most Report Templates in the Custom Report Templates Folder so LinSig can easily find them 6 3 3 2 Editing a Basic Report Definition Any Report Definition can be edited at any point to add or remove Report Fragments to control how repeating fragments operate and to set display options for each fragment Adding Fragments to a Report Definition A Fragment can be added to a Report Definition as follows e Select the Report Definition you wish to add the Fragment to in the Report Definitions List Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 286 Reporting and Printing e Select the Fragment to be added from the Available Fragments List e Select the position where the Fragment is to be inserted in the Report Definition by selecting the Fragment in the Report Definition immediately before the desired insertion position e Click Add Fragment to current Report Definition button or the button between the Available Fragment List and the Report Definition The Fragment will be inserted into the Report Definition e lf the Fragment is shown in Red indicating the Fragment requires Repeat Select op
176. at are controlled by a filter or Indicative green arrow IGA as well as a main three aspect phase The Arrow Phase can only be entered if a Full Green Phase is specified and the Full Green Phase is the associated Phase of a Filter or IGA Phase The LinSig traffic model will take into account which Phase is controlling the Lane at each point in the cycle Remember that LinSig only enforces the standard rules for using Filter and Indicative Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 73 arrows It does not prevent them being used in a technically correct but unsafe or badly designed way The Arrow Phase is used slightly differently when the special non UK Filter with Closing Amber Phase is used In this case the non UK Filter Phases does not have an associated Phase specified therefore the Arrow Phase does not check for the Full Green Phase being associated with the Arrow Phase e Give Way Summary The Give Way Summary lists the different turning movements exiting the Lane and summarises which movements give way to other Lanes Further give way details are contained on each movement s individual tab in the Edit Lane dialog box Lane Details The Lane Details tab contains a number of settings relating to detailed Lane settings such as Lane Length and custom Lane Occupancy SH Edit Lane 1 1 i j Lane Length Arm 1 Lane 1 Custom Occupancy This is a long lane Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed Sat flow data Julti Lane Physical
177. ata View w fo Phase Phase Phase Name Description T gt B C D F E G Type Saturation London Road Ahead Right Traffic High Street Ahead Left Traffic Park Street Left Traffic Park Street Right Traffic London Road Right IGA Ind Arrow Pedestrians across London Road Pedestrian Pedestrians across Park Street Left Turn Pedestrian Pedestrians across Park Street Right Turn Pedestrian Pedestrians across Park Street East side Pedestrian a e a aeea Ln LA Wn The Phase Data View shows information on all of the Phases on a single Controller Which Controller is displayed is selected using the Controller Selector drop down list on the View s title bar as described in the Phase View section The Phase Data View shows the following information for each Phase The Phase Letter The Phase Description This is automatically generated by LinSig using information from the Lanes controlled by this Phase The Phase Type The different Phase Types are explained in the Phase View section The Street Minimum This shows the Street Minimum value for this Phase This is only applicable if the Treat Phase Minimums as Street Minimums option is chosen in the Controller Information Dialog If not LinSig only uses Controller Minimums and Streets Minimums are not relevant The Controller Minimum This Shows the Controller Minimum value for this Phase See Phase Minimums in the Technical Reference for more de
178. ated Phase to set this Phase s Associated Phase e Phase Minimum Enter the Phase Minimum value This value may be either a Street Minimum or a Controller Minimum depending on the Phase Minimum type setting in the Controller Settings More detailed information on Phase minimums is located in the Controller Background Section e Phase Name Additional Text Phase names are generated automatically by LinSig To provide more flexibility in naming Phases you may enter some additional text that will be appended to the generated Phase name This is particularly important for pedestrian Phases as LinSig cannot usually generate a detailed phase name for a pedestrian Phase Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 7 Phase View 167 4 7 2 4 Using a Phase to Control Lanes Each Traffic Phase may control one or more Traffic Lanes A Traffic Phase will display directional arrows in the Phase View based on the turning movements allowed on the Lanes it controls No arrows will be shown if the Phase does not control any Lanes The Phases controlling each Lane are specified whilst editing Lanes in the Network Layout View 4 7 2 5 Deleting Phases To delete a Phase select it with the mouse and choose Delete Phase from the Phases pop out menu on the Controllers Menu or right click on the Phase with the mouse and choose Delete Phase from the pop up menu Any Intergreens or Phase Delays which are dependent on the Phase will also be deleted 4 7 3 Usi
179. ately upstream and downstream of the region boundary e Where traffic leaving the Matrix Based region terminates at the Zone upstream of the Network region boundary its cyclic flow profile must be passed on to the first Lane downstream of the region boundary which has a Lane Based Flow defined on it This is achieved using the Inherit Cyclic Flow Profile from Upstream Exit Lane setting on the Advanced tab of the Edit Lane dialog box Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 30 Importing TranEd 2 Files 269 4 30 Importing TranEd 2 Files LinSig 3 1 and above can import files from TranEd 2 JCT Consultancy s graphical editor for TRANSYT models TranEd 2 files contain all or most of the information required to construct a basic LinSig model and in many cases numerically identical results to running the TranEd 2 file in TRANSYT will be obtained in LinSig 4 30 1 1 Importing a TranEd 2 File A Trankd 2 file can be imported as follows e Choose Import TranEd 2 File from the File menu e Locate the TranEd file using the dialog box and click Open e LinSig will close the current LinSig model and import the TranEd file e f any features used in the TranEd 2 model require modelling differently in LinSig a Import Messages dialog box will be shown detailing any import issues 4 30 1 2 Issues to Resolve after Importing After importing a TranEd file the following issues may require additional changes in LinSig e Mixed Give Way an
180. aturation flows from Lane Geometry Geometric parameters for the Lane and for each turning movement out of the Lane are required waa Edit Lane 1 1 General Geometric Calculated Lane Saturation Flow Arm 1 Lane 1 Lane Details Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed i 1 li I Fait Lm i B Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Calculated Turning Proportions are for Current Flow Group The Lane based geometric parameters are Lane Width m The Lane width Gradient The Lane s gradient Only uphill gradients have an effect on the saturation flow Downhill gradients do not adjust the saturation flow upwards Treat as Nearside Lane This setting reduces the saturation flow by 140 PCU hr due to the frictional effect of potential hazards such as gutters or pedestrians stepping out in the near side Lane There is debate on whether this setting should be used for the right most lane of a multi laned stop line where it could be argued there is also a frictional effect on traffic RR6 gives some guidance on this but if in doubt it is conservative to apply the reduction by setting the Lane as a near side lane LinSig allows turning parameters to be defined for each Lane Turning Movement which are based on Lane Connectors exiting the Lane Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 77 The Turn based geometric parameters are e Turning Proportion Where only a proportion of the total vehicles
181. ave completed Phase Gaining Delays can be specified in two different ways in LinSig as described below LinSig will automatically determine the type of a Phase Delay based on its associated Phase and Stage Change As signal controllers supplied by different manufacturers define a Phase Gaining Delay s value in different ways LinSig has introduced two variants of Phase Gaining Delay to allow all controller types to be accommodated These are e Absolute Phase Gaining Delay An Absolute Phase Gaining Delay delays the start of a Phase by the Phase Delay s value timed from the end of the terminating Stage e Relative Phase Gaining Delays A Relative Phase Gaining Delay delays the start of a Phase by the Phase Delay s value timed from the point the Phase would have started if the Phase Delay did not exist Each Phase Gaining Delay can be entered in either form in LinSig As well as displaying the value of a Phase Gaining Delay as it is defined LinSig will also calculate its value in the native form used by the current Controller Type Controller Manufacturers specify phase gaining delays as follows e Siemens Plessey Absolute but deduct red amber time on traffic phases e GEC Absolute e Peek Ferranti Relative e Microsense Telent Relative e Monitron Relative Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 17 Interstage amp Phase Delays View 225 Creating a New Phase Delay A new Phase Delay is created by clicking New in the P
182. ay terminate within the Interstage when they have Phase Losing Delays defined Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 17 Interstage amp Phase Delays View 227 e Starting Phases The Phases starting in this Interstage are shown to the right of the panel The Phases start when Intergreens from other Phases or Phase Gaining delays terminate e Phase Intergreens The Phase Intergreens are shown as green struts separating Phases 4 oe i ase Order Optimise Find Spare Green lnterstage Diagram Stage Change 2 gt 3 0123 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 r onmmiooO own Ft I nmo u F l 0123 45 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Time in Interstage sec The Interstage Diagram initially accommodates Interstages up to 20 seconds and marks the time axis every two seconds This can be changed if necessary by double clicking on the time axis and entering a new size and scale as appropriate If necessary LinSig will adjust the time axis markings to avoid overlapping Using Phase Delays to Adjust Phase Termination and Start Times The Interstage View can be used to adjust the start and end times of Phases within the Interstage LinSig implements these adjustments using Phase Delays The termination point of a Phase can be delayed by dragging the end of the Phase with the mouse to set a new end time LinSig will create a Phase Losing Delay to implement the new Phase end time This Phase delay wil
183. ayout View add a LinSig Junction for each junction within the modelled network The choice of how Junctions are used will usually be obvious but sometimes it makes sense to create a Junction for network features which are not strictly junctions such as mid block pedestrian crossings Give each Junction a name and specify which Controller s if any and if appropriate Stage Stream s are involved in the Junction s control e Add Entry Arms Using the Network Layout View add Junction Entry Arms to each Junction The Junction Entry Arms will contain the Lanes approaching the Junction s stop lines e Add Entry Arm Lanes On each Junction Entry Arm create additional long and Short Lanes to represent the Arm s Lane structure Remember that it is important to model the Lane structure as traffic uses road space which may not necessarily be the same as lane markings Newly created Lanes will not show Lane arrows at this point as no Lane Connectors have been added yet e Add Exit Arms Add Junction Exit Arms at the points where traffic leaves the Junction e Add Exit Arm Lanes On each Junction Exit Arm add any additional Lanes required Remember that Junction Exit Lanes are always Long Lanes and are used to structure the Network not to model capacity issues such as merges immediately after a Junction e Add Lane Connectors Lane Connectors define which traffic movements are allowed between Lanes on different Arms If the recommended Arm structu
184. ayout View is in Lane Based Flow Mode the background is shown in dark gray to distinguish it from Standard Mode Entering Lane Based Flows using Drag and Drop When Lane Based Flows are edited using drag and drop a number of common cases arise LinSig will always try to use existing flow and Layer information to intelligently anticipate what action Is being carried out and attempts to minimise data entry Case 1 Single Flow Layer No existing Flows on Source and Destination Lanes When a Lane Based Flow is added using drag and drop LinSig will add a Lane Connector Flow and also optionally add the flow to the upstream and downstream Lane s flow A Lane Based Flow can be added using the following procedure e Click on the Source Lane the traffic is leaving from e Drag with the mouse to the Destination Lane where traffic is moving to This must be connected to the Source Lane with a Lane Connector LinSig cannot chain flows over several Lanes and connectors e Whilst dragging LinSig will display a tooltip explaining what will be added if the mouse is released at that point LinSig will make intelligent assumptions about what is intended in order to minimise data entry Source _ Lane Anticipated Action Destination Description Lane han J1 Main Road E K Add PCU General Traffic to Lane J2 4 1 General Traffic ic Arm J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Arm J31 Main Road Eastbound e Release the mouse button while pointing at the Desti
185. background and negative values with a blue background Diff The difference between the count and the total assigned flow on this turning movement in the Current Scenario in PCU Positive values are displayed with a red background and negative values with a blue background Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 13 Matrix Estimation View 205 e GEH The GEH or Geoffrey E Havers GLC transport planner who invented the Statistic in the 1970s Statistic The GEH statistic measures a combination of relative and absolute error between a traffic count and a modelled flow and is commonly used to test the goodness of fit of modelled flows to observed counts Values greater than 5 0 are displayed in red This is explained in more detail below The Zone Totals List The Zone Totals List shows selected Traffic Flow Group s Zone origin and destination totals implied from the turning counts and allows unspecified Zone totals to be entered Zones should always have totals either implied or explicitly entered specified before running matrix estimation If Zone totals are not specified the matrix estimation process will use the Zone to indiscriminately allocate traffic into to better match traffic counts regardless of whether this is sensible This process is often referred to as Zone Dumping and is usually undesirable All traffic flow or count values displayed in the Matrix Estimation View are in PCUs 4 13 4 Working with Traffic Counts The starting p
186. be displayed as shown in the figure below 4 10 3 2 The Multiple Stage Stream Stage Sequence View When Multiple Stage Streams are switched on the Stage Sequence View displays an additional panel to the left of the main Stage Sequence panel showing Stage Streams and the Phases allocated to each Stage Stream This panel is similar to that shown in the Phase View and Stage View when multiple Stage Streams are in use however the Stage Sequence View s Stage Stream display cannot be used to change the Phases allocated to Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 10 Stage Sequence View 185 the Stage Stream As well as using the Controller List View the Stage Stream panel of either View can be used to add and delete Stage Streams f m Stage Sequence View majaz E HESE A Aeaee No Stage Sequence Sequence All Stages Current 1 2 3 Stream With Multiple Stage Streams are switched on LinSig requires a separate Stage Sequence to be defined for each Stage Stream The Stage Sequence for each Stream is made up of Stages defined for that Stage Stream Stages defined for a Stage Stream cannot be used in the Stage Sequences of different Stage Streams 4 10 3 3 The Stage Stream Panel Each Stage Stream shows a reduced size copy of the Phase layout on the Controller Phases are colour coded to show whether they are allocated to the current Stage Stream are unallocated or allocated to a different Stage Stream Phases are disp
187. be used where it is felt that the Saturation Flow would not be different from the Maximum Flow value Give Way Left Turns often require this option as the angle of turn often means it is not obviously apparent to opposed traffic that the opposing movements are stopped o Use Lane Saturation Flow Value The Lane s Saturation Flow specified on the Saturation Flow tab is used when the opposing movements are stopped o Use Custom Value PCU Hr A custom value can be specified if for any reason a value other than the other two options is required e Opposing Lanes Any number of opposing Lanes can be used to oppose a movement Also each movement can have different opposing Lanes Opposing Lanes can be added to the Movement Tab by clicking the button to the left of the Opposing Lanes List Settings for each Opposing Lane can then be changed by clicking the setting to be changed in the List The Settings are o Lane The Lane Reference of the Opposing Lane o Coefficient The A value as described above in LinSig Give Way Model This is used to specify by how much the traffic flow on the Opposing Lane reduces the Give Way Lane s capacity o Clear Conflict Time sec The Clear Conflict Time is the time between a vehicle crossing the opposing Lane s stop line and the time it ceases to oppose traffic on the Give Way Lane It is typically used on large junctions to allow for the fact that traffic on the opposing Lane will take a few se
188. ber of cycles of the maximum queue occurring each cycle Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 2 Network Structure amp Defining Traffic Flows in LinSig 39 3 2 Network Structure amp Defining Traffic Flows in LinSig This section discusses options for structuring the Network and defining traffic flows in LinSig Further details of the techniques discussed are given in the View Reference Section 3 2 1 Background and Version Differences An important decision with any LinSig model especially larger models is how the Network should be structured and the related issue of how traffic flows will be defined Prior to LinSig 3 1 the only option for entering traffic flows was to use an Origin Destination Matrix for the entire Network Although this provided the maximum level of detail it could lead to long run times on large models required the production of a Network wide OD Matrix which could be onerous for larger models and required the same level of detail to be used for the entire model not just the smaller area where detail was required LinSig 3 1 introduces an additional less detailed method with which to define traffic flows called Lane Based Flows and also allows LinSig Networks to be structured to use the existing Matrix Based traffic flow definition methods in areas where detail is required whilst using the simpler Lane Based Flow methods across the rest of the Network 3 2 2 Flow Definition Methods However traffic flows are defi
189. c Only Displays the travel times experienced by Lane Based Traffic If multiple Lane Based Flow Layers are used this option aggregates delays over all Layers e Layer Layer Name One option will be available for each Lane Based Flow Layer in the model Each option will display only delay on the individual Layer This is useful for displaying travel times for a specific class of Lane Based traffic Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 244 View Reference 4 24 Model Audit View The Model Audit View is designed to assist with checking or auditing a LinSig model It brings together all of the important input data and results for a LinSig model and presents it in an easy to check standard format It can also be used to compare two models by highlighting differences between two Models The Model Audit View can be opened by choosing Model Audit View from the File menu 4 Model Audit View H la a Audit options Display options Audit Current Scenario Hide All Show All Print Audit Compare Two Scenarios Audit Compare With Another File comparen cote 32 2 1 Default 33 4 2 to J2 2 2 Default Controller Data Hide Back To Top Controller Controller name SCN Type Street Controller mins Multiple streams Number of Streams Notes 1 West Controller Generic street yes 2 East Controller Generic street no 1 Phase Data Hice Back To Top Phase Description Main Road Eastbound Ahead Right Traffic Main Roa
190. c queues on the combined Lane Group as a whole Uniform Queue Graphs cannot be shown for Short Lanes or Long Lanes within a Lane Group Storage Graphs as described below serve a similar purpose Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 27 Cyclic Flow Profiles View 257 Uniform queue graphs show the following information Link 8 1 Queue clears as front of queue catches up back of i queue 4 A 4 Back of queue building at arrival rate Flow Front of queue 1 discharging at 1 saturation flow rate 0 12 24 36 8 w 60 T2 84 Time in Cycle Queue clearance time Start of End of Traffic arriving after Red Red this time on green does not stop 4 27 4 1 Creating Uniform Queue Graphs Uniform Queue Graphs are created as described above and selecting Queue Graph as the Graph Type 4 27 4 2 Controlling the Display of Uniform Queue Graphs The display of Queue Graphs can be customised by displaying the Random amp Oversaturated Queue on the Graph as well as the Uniform Queue Displaying the Random amp Oversaturated Queue The Random amp Oversaturated Queue can be displayed on a Queue Graph by right clicking on the Graph and choosing Show Random amp Oversat Component Remember that the queue graph is for a typical cycle therefore the level of random amp overstaturated queue is an average value This is discussed in more detail in the Modelling Background section Disaggregating Queue Graphs by Route Uniform Q
191. cal cycle averaged over all the cycles within the modelled time period When a Lane is oversaturated the Maximum Queue within each cycle will grow progressively over the modelled time period This means that the Mean Maximum Queue will be approximately half the final queue at the end of the modelled time period Please read the Modelling Section before attempting to interpret queue predictions Queue De Sliver Threshold PCU The De Sliver Threshold displays the value entered for the Queue De Sliver Threshold on the Edit Lane dialog box s Advanced tab This is useful for indentifying Lanes on which the De Sliver mechanism has been used More details is given in the Network Layout View Section but briefly the De Sliver Mechanism automatically avoid long spurious queues being reported on Lanes when certain conditions occur Average Excess Queue PCU The Average Excess Queue is the average amount the queue exceeds the stacking space on the Lane defined on the Edit Lane dialog box s Advanced tab This is useful for monitoring how Excess Queue weightings are being applied Weighted Deg Sat The degree of saturation for the Lane after weighting for any excess queues or Lane weighting factors This is used mainly for monitoring the optimiser Weighted Delay PCUHr The total delay on the Lane after weighting for any excess queues Lane weighting factors or use of Stops valuation This is used mainly for monitoring
192. can be tuned to match your particular needs and budgets Please contact us if this service is of interest to you Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 LinSig Basics 2 LinSig Basics This section provides preliminary information on a range of LinSig issues including important definitions a suggested sequence of working and a summary of the user interface It is suggested new users read this section before using LinSig It would also be useful for users upgrading from earlier versions of LinSig to review the section as it concisely introduces a number of topics new to LinSig 3 2 1 Definitions This section introduces a number of useful concepts and definitions with which it is helpful to become familiar with before starting to use LinSig LinSig Network The LinSig Network describes the road network being modelled in a single LinSig file The Network size is in theory unlimited but is practically constrained by the time taken for LinSig to recalculate the traffic model and to optimise the signal timings Depending on the complexity of the network Networks modelled with the greatest level of detail using Matrix Based Traffic Flows can be modelled up to around 20 junctions Networks using Lane Based Traffic Flows or split into several Matrix Based regions can model much larger networks The Network uses Junctions Arms Lanes and Pedestrian Links to describe the network being modelled Junction A LinSig Junction is a grouping of Arms Lanes an
193. ce View 4 3 13 5 Deleting a Stage Diagram A Stage Diagram can be deleted by selecting it with the mouse and choosing Delete Stage Diagram from the Stage Diagram pop out on the Network Menu Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 133 4 3 14 Annotating the Network Layout View The Network Layout View can be annotated using Notes and Labels These are used as follows e Notes are used to place paragraphs of formatted text on the Network Layout View They can be formatted in any font size or colour and justification and are displayed in a coloured background rectangle They can be thought of as similar to Post lt notes Notes can also be used on the Phase View As well as static text Notes can contain dynamic fields which show current data from the model updating as the model changes e Labels are used to position single lines of text on the View at any angle They can also be displayed with any font size and colour This View Shows the Network Layout Note Showing Centered Text anor One Ge Label Shown A Selected ae 4 3 14 1 Working with Notes on the Network Layout View and Phase View Notes can be used anywhere on the Network Layout View or Phase View as described below Adding Notes to the Junction Layout and Phase View A Note is added to the Network Layout View as follows e Choose Add Note from the Notes pop out on the Network Menu e Click anywhere on the Network
194. cel The expected usage is the average number of PCU in the additional short lane at the start of green rather than the physical length of the short lane The expected usage will always be shorter than the physical usage due to effects such as traffic in an adjacent lane preventing traffic from reaching the short lane The free utility LINSAT can be used to predict the expected usage from the physical lane length LINSAT is currently available for free download from JCT Consultancy s web site Remember that the new LinSig 3 short lane model automatically allows for a number of issues such as short lane blocking which are not explicitly modelled in the MultiLane additional short lane model Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 80 View Reference Advanced Settings iSq Edit Lane 1 1 General Effective Green Displacements Random Delay Lane Details Start Disp 2 End Disp 5 3 Ignore Random Delay Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed Sat flow data BE Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Optimiser Queue Constraints Queue de sliver Excess Queue Limit pou De sliver threshold pcu Threshold at which LinSig considers the uniform queue to be a Sliver Queue Refer to User Guide before using Optimiser Weightings Entry Profiles Apply Optimiser Stops Weighting 100 00 Inherit cydic flow profile from upstream exit Lane Apply Optimiser Delay DegSat Weighting 4 Apply DegSat Limit 5 lt lt Previous N
195. cenario Control batch signal optimisation of several Scenarios at once O O O O e Network Results View The Network Results View displays a table showing detailed model results at different levels of aggregation The Network Results View can be used to Show aggregate model results for the whole Network Show model results aggregated by Junction Show detailed model results for each Lane or Lane Group Rows can be sorted by clicking on the header above each row Columns can be added and removed by right clicking on the column headers This menu can also be used to abbreviate column headers to save space o Tables showing a lot of Lanes can be filtered to display just a subset of Lanes O O O O e Travel Time Delay Matrix View The Travel Time Delay Matrix View displays a matrix of average travel times between Zones It can o Show average overall travel time between Zones o Show excess delay over cruise time between Zones o For Lane Based Networks display travel times or delays or each Lane based Flow Layer e The Report Builder The Report Builder allows Report Templates to be built and detailed reports produced The reports are in rich text format that can be viewed and edited in most word processors e Model Audit View The Model Audit View is intended to assist with model auditing by showing a subset of the most important input data and results in one place The Model Audit View can be used to o Display input data a
196. ces and avoids IT Staff or users having to separately activate each PC on the network The Licence Server also verifies PCs are actually located on the licensed site It would normally be installed and run on a server or other PC that is switched on all or most of the time users wish to use LinSig e Workstation The users computer on which LinSig is run on Also sometimes referred to as a Client PC A 4 2 Product Activation for Individual PCs Individual PC activation applies only to Single PC Four PC and Ten PC site licences and is not available for Unlimited Networked PC Site Licences Installing LinSig either from CD or by downloading will install a copy of LinSig on your PC The software will however only work as a restricted demonstration copy unless it is activated following the procedure below You may install the software and use it for demonstration purposes on as many PCs as required however only the number of PCs actually licensed may be activated to allow fully functional use Licences can be freely transferred between computers within a Site Licence s site using the procedure described later in this section A 4 2 1 Activating the LinSig Licence for the First Time The activation procedure is as follows 1 When running LinSig for the first time the software will present a dialog box showing information relating to the activation status of the software on the particular PC This will show the activation status to be Not
197. ch Stage Stream This panel is similar to that shown in the Phase View when multiple Stage Streams are in use As well as using the Controller List View the Stage Stream panel of either View can be used to add and delete Stage Streams and to allocate Phases to Streams With Multiple Stage Streams switched on LinSig allows a separate set of Stages to be defined for each Stream with Stages in different Streams being made up of different sets of Phases pe FH Stages View Current Selection v 4a o feiss E x SE oeleallea Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 178 View Reference 4 9 3 3 The Stage Stream Panel Each Stage Stream shows a reduced size copy of the Phase layout on the Controller Phases are colour coded to show whether they are allocated to the current Stage Stream are unallocated or allocated to a different Stage Stream Ri Sta ges View Elaja Slo Be 2 8 ale Stream 1 Stream 2 Phases are displayed as follows e Phases allocated to a Stage Stream are shown in black and have directional arrows e Phases not allocated to any Stage Stream are shown in grey with no arrows e Phases allocated to a different Stage Stream are shown in blue with no arrows When Multiple Stage Streams are being used e The set of Phases defined for the Controller are shared across the Stage Streams e Each Phase can only be allocated to a single stage stream e A Phase can only run in a Stage in the Stage Stream to which
198. ch Junction e Matrix Estimation View The Matrix Estimation View lists all Traffic Turning Counts defined in the Network These counts can be used either for estimating an OD Matrix or as a validation check that whichever method has been used flows have been entered correctly The Turning Count View also provides a graphical view of all Turning Counts The Matrix Estimation View can be used to o View edit and delete Traffic Turning Counts Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 20 LinSig Basics o View edit and delete Zone entry and exit constraints o Compare Traffic Turning Counts with modelled Flows e Turning Count View The Turning Counts View provides a graphical way of viewing and editing Turning Counts used for Matrix Estimation or validation The Turning Counts View can be used to graphically View edit and delete Traffic Turning Counts Check Turning Counts for consistency errors View edit and delete Zone entry and exit constraints Compare Traffic Turning Counts with modelled Flows O O O e Scenario View The Scenario View allows Traffic Flow Groups and Network Control Plans to be associated together to define particular modelling scenarios Each scenario brings together all the information needed for a single LinSig run including cycle time signal timings and Route Flows The Scenario View can be used to Create edit and delete Scenarios Assign Route Flows for a Scenario Control how model results are updated for each S
199. ch traffic is to be added e Enter the Total stop line flow on the Lane on this Layer in Total Flow e Check the Incoming Flows and Outgoing Flows lists As every Incoming Flow is also an Outgoing Flow for another Lane some entries may already exist in either list that were entered earlier when editing other Lanes e Click on Add for Incoming or Outgoing Flows as appropriate This opens the Specify Incoming Flow dialog box allowing either an incoming or outgoing turning movement to be added The Layers in the Specify Incoming Flow dialog box will be defaulted to the Layer currently being edited e Assuming that an Incoming Flow is being added the Specify Incoming Flow dialog box allows the Source Lane for the Incoming Flow and the amount of flow in PCU or as a percentage to be entered e The new Lane Based Flow movement is displayed on the Network Layout View if it is set to Lane Based Flow entry mode When using the graphical Lane Based editing LinSig updates several dependent flow items at once when adding flows However when using the Edit Lane dialog box each flow item must be edited separately Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 121 o 4 3 9 6 Checking Lane Based Flows for Consistency Errors Although Lane Based Flows provide a lot of flexibility it is very easy to introduce flow errors into the Network The Network Layout View provides a Flow Consistency Check Mode which allows flow
200. cking Storage lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Lanes which include Right Turns that have Storage in front of the Stop Line require additional settings to model all the components of right turn capacity modelled by LinSig These settings are contained on the Storage in Front of Stop Line tab They include e Does the Lane have Right Turn Storage in Front of Stop Line This setting specifies whether the Lane contains Storage in front of the Stop Line and hence whether the remaining settings on the tab are required to be validly completed e Right Turn Storage in Front of Stop Line This is the total number of PCUs which can store in front of the Stop Line whilst waiting to turn right LinSig uses this value in calculating right turn capacity bonuses for traffic discharging with an indicative green arrow e Maximum Right Turns in Intergreen PCU This setting specifies how many PCUs waiting in front of the stop line can turn right during the Intergreen after a right turn Lane has terminated It may be different from the Right Turn Storage value as it may not be possible for all vehicles in front of the stop line to turn right during the Intergreen e Right Turn Move Up Time sec This specifies the time for a vehicle at the stop line to reach the point at the front of the storage area in the centre of the junction where it waits for a gap to turn right LinSig can estimate this value by assuming the move up time is one second
201. conds to clear before a Give Way Lane can start to discharge Its value will depend on the size of the junction and should be measured on site where possible The Clear Conflict Time is often ignored in some models and may be a cause of differences between model results The Clear Conflict Time can be specified separately for each opposing Lane o Opposing Movements Each Opposing Lane may itself have a number of Movements each of which may or may not oppose the Give Way Lane The Opposing Movements column allows which of the movements leaving the Opposing Lane actually oppose the Give Way Lane to be defined If all movements oppose the All Opposing box can be left ticked If one or more movements do not oppose the All Opposing box can be unticked and the boxes next to each individual opposing movement ticked or unticked as appropriate Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 87 Storage in Front of Stop Line Settings ia Edit Lane 1 2 General This is a signal controlled Right Turn giving way to oncoming traffic Lane Details Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed lf Does the lane have Right Turn Storage in front of the stopline Sat flow data Multi Lane Right Turn Storage in Front Of Rig ORRI ae Sees tight Turn Move Up s 2 lf Auto Calc Using Storage Advanced Stopline PCU i i Max Right Turns In A SEN TE law Edi Intergreen PCU Right Turn Factor 0 5 Allow Edit Storage in front of Stopline Non blo
202. copy of its licence for a number of days allowing server restarts and maintenance to take place without adversely affecting LinSig users A 4 3 3 Telling Workstations Where to Find a Licence Server As Workstations default to being individually licensed each Workstation must be told to use a Licence Server and also where the Licence Server is located on the network This can be achieved either by manually configuring each Workstation or by using a Software Deployment System to pre configure the licence mode and Licence Server location in each Workstation s registry Manual Configuration of Workstations 1 When running LinSig for the first time the software will present a dialog box showing information relating to the activation status of the software on the Workstation This will show the activation status to be Not activated If the OK button is clicked the activation process will be cancelled and LinSig will run in demonstration mode It can still be activated later by choosing About LinSig from the Help Menu and proceeding as below 2 Clicking the Activate button will start the activation process by requesting the type of activation In this case choose Network Unlimited Licence 3 Click Discover IP Address of Licence Server LinSig will search the local network for a LinSig Licence Server If one is found its IP address is stored as the Workstations default Licence Server If the Licence Ser
203. counted matrix cells as zero Although this won t lead to a direct validation problem as there is no Count to validate against it may lead to incorrect delays being calculated which distort the routing pattern in the Network e Check that capacities and delays are being correctly calculated especially where they affect route choice Incorrect saturation flows which imply incorrect capacity calculation can easily lead to quite large errors in delay which can distort Routing within the Network e Check that signal timings in the Scenario being validated are representative of the timings used for the time period being validated Incorrect signal timings may bias traffic onto different Routes than those used in reality when traffic was counted leading to poor validation Where signal timings are unknown it is worth experimenting to see how signal settings affect the validation 4 14 Turning Counts View The Turning Counts View graphically displays the Turning Counts used for estimating an OD Matrix or validating a traffic assignment in LinSig The information displayed is the same as that shown in the Matrix Estimation View and more detail is given in the Matrix Estimation View section on how Turning Counts are used and managed As Lane Based Flows do not use Turning Counts this View is only relevant when Matrix Based Flows are being used for all or part of the Network The View can be opened by choosing Turning Counts View from the Traffic F
204. create and edit Stage Sequences and to display and edit the Stages running in each Sequence The View is opened by choosing Stage Sequence View from the Stage Sequences Menu The Stage Sequence View is used slightly differently depending on whether multiple stage streams are enabled with LinSig 4 10 1 Selecting which Controller to View It is possible to have one or more Stage Sequence Views open in a LinSig model at any one time Each Stage Sequence View shows the Phases for a single LinSig traffic Signal Controller The Controller being displayed is set using each View s Controller Selector drop list as follows e LinSig always has a Current Controller which is used by several Views to ensure they are all displaying information for the same Controller The Current Controller is selected using the Controller List View or using the Controller drop down list on the main LinSig toolbar If the Controller drop down list on the Phases View s title bar is set to Current Selection the Stage Sequence View will display the Phases for the Current Controller as selected in the Controller List View If the Current Controller changes the Controller displayed in this View will also change to reflect the new Current Controller e n some instances you may wish to view the Phases for several controllers at the same time To allow this each Stage Sequence View may be locked to a particular Controller so its display does not change when the Cu
205. cseeeeeeeees 297 7 1 6 Example 6 Mixed Right Turn Opposed Movements and Ahead Traffic in a single A a acres ateDinaer eae paral Deane aa At A E aaa olesent Tannen 300 7 1 7 Example 7 Mixed Right Turn Opposed Movements and Ahead Traffic in Multiple LANES acun EE A A aut ae Sanya A A 302 7 1 8 Example 8 Mixed Right Turn Opposed Movements and Ahead Traffic in Multiple lS CMM S ana a O 304 A Appendix A Installation and Setup ccscecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 305 Ad Hardware FRCOUIPGING ANS riren a E A 305 A 2 Software Requirements s ersanecaan o R RE E 305 A SASAE eaa a A 306 A 4 Activating the LinSig Software LICENCE cccceccecseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeesaaeees 306 PRA Ve Denton S sieihic ace learhicure neta ae a T incubus maaulkoms 306 A 4 2 Product Activation for Individual PCS scisso 307 A 4 3 Product Activation for Unlimited Networked PC Licences cccceseeeeeeeees 311 A 5 Obtaining and Installing Updates to LINSIG ccccecccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesaaeees 313 B Appendix B Third party liC NCeS cccseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 314 Byte ASI Ol ative sc cttaactsnenau accents tamneh ahem S Alsaaerlaanamare tiiien gacceusne eiawiadalataene aiueieeaacseass 314 EAM ZO crectetest atu sdsa ty aianiateNaaetne ernie a atest aan ata nem eet a camyaramnca et etate ten acanaeas 314 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 1 1 What is LinSig 1 1 Introduction Welcome to
206. cted for each Controller For each Controller the following information is displayed o Controller Name The name of a traffic signal Controller in the LinSig model o Sequence The Stage Sequence selected for this Controller in this Network Control Plan The Stage Sequences are created and edited in the Stage Sequence View 4 11 1 Managing Network Control Plans Network Control Plans can be created selected and deleted using the Network Control Plans List 4 11 1 1 Creating a New Network Control Plan A Network Control Plan can be created as follows e Right click in the Network Control Plans List and choose Create New Network Control Plan from the pop up menu e A new Network Control Plan is created with the first defined Stage Sequence selected for each Controller as default e Each Controllers Stage Sequence can be changed from the default as described below Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 188 View Reference Alternatively a new Network Control Plan can be created by copying as existing Network Control Plan as follows e Select the Network Control Plan to be copied in the Network Control Plans List e Right click on the Network Control Plan e Choose Copy Network Control Plan from the pop up menu e A new Network Control Plan is created with a default name It can be renamed by clicking on the default name in the Network Control Plans List 4 11 1 2 Deleting Network Control Plans A Network Control Plan can be
207. ction 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 iD CY O oy 3 10 15 20 25 30 S 40 45 50 5 60 65 70 75 30 8 90 Time in cycle sec Negative Bonus Green Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 17 Interstage amp Phase Delays View 221 4 17 Interstage amp Phase Delays View The Interstage amp Phase Delays View is used to display and edit Interstage structures in LinSig The Interstages can have a significant effect on junction performance and safety and it is important they are correctly designed The Interstage amp Phase Delays View can be used to optimise Interstage structures by automatically adjusting Phase Delays The View can also be used to manually adjust Phase Delays where necessary f B Interstage View wd ole lee lt Previous 2 gt 3 v Next gt Edit Critical Phase Order Optimise Find Spare Green Prohibited Moves Interstage Diagram Stage Change 2 gt 3 0123 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 S lt lt Tx New 0123 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Phase Delays C Show Phase Delays for selected Stage Change only Show Phase Delays for all Stage Changes Term Start Cont Value Stage Stage Phase Type Value Type Sms 2 3 A Losing 2 2 A gt e D F G l roa 71MM OO DDB Time in Interstage sec Stage Change is OK The Interstage amp Phase Delays View show Interstages and Phase Delays for
208. d Next buttons in the toolbar to cycle through Interstages in sequence The Interstage Structure Diagram will always show the detailed structure of the current Interstage When multiple Stage Streams are in use on the Controller being displayed Interstages are shown for the current Stage Stream only The current Stage Stream can be changed using the drop down list in the Interstage View s toolbar or on the Stage Stream drop down list on the main toolbar Using multiple Stage Streams is covered in more depth in the Phase View section 4 17 2 3 The Phase Delays List The Phase Delays List displays a list of Phase Delays configured on the controller and is also used to create edit and delete Phase Delays For more information on Phase Delays and how they are used see the information on Phase Delays in the Background section Phase Delays f Show Phase Delays for selected Stage Change only f Show Phase Delays for all Stage Changes Term Start Cont Value stage stage Phase Type Value Type Sms 2 3 4 Losing 2 2 pf Ede f uss tom Stage Change is OK The information shown for each Phase Delay is as follows e he terminating and starting stages for which the phase delay is active e The Phase associated with the phase delay e The type of the Phase Delay Phase Delay Types are described below e The Phase Delay value Seconds in the LinSig model e The Phase Delay value seconds for the current controller typ
209. d Time The Entry Lane Cruise Speed Time tab allows cruise speeds times to be specified for an Entry Lane at the edge of the Network Normally cruise speeds are specified on a Lane s incoming Lane Connectors As Entry Lanes have no incoming Lane Connectors the Entry Lane Cruise Speed Time tab is used to specify cruise speeds times iSq Edit Lane 1 1 Default cruise time for all routes and layers through this Entry Lane f Time s 40 Speed km Hr 31 BE Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead When modelling buses Mean Bus Stopped Time s 0 Bus Speed km hr Mean Cruise lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel The cruise speed time and other settings are specified in the same way as on a Lane Connector Further details are given in the Edit Lane Connector section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 75 Saturation Flow Data The Saturation Flow Data tab allows saturations flows to be specified for the Lane iSh Edit Lane 1 1 General 0 Geometric Calculated Lane Saturation Flow Arm 1 Lane 1 Directly Entered Lane Saturation Flow Arm 1 Lane 1 Lane Details 395 0 00 Default Saturation Flow PCU Hr 1800 Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed Flow Group Sat Flow Default 2006 Friday AM Peak 1800 lw MB Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Calculated Turning Proportions are for Current Flow Group Unconstrained Infinite Saturation Flow lt lt Previous Next gt gt OK Cancel
210. d Westbound Left Ahead Traffic Left Traffic Right Traffic Main Road Eastbound Right IGA Ind Arrow Main Road Westbound Ahead Traffic Main Road EB at Ped X Ahead Traffic Pedestrians across Pedestrian Main Road Eastbound Ahead Left Traffic Main Road Westbound Ahead Right Traffic Left Traffic Right Traffic Main Road Eastbound Left Filter Filter Main Road Westbound Right IGA Ind Arrow Pedestrians across Pedestrian Pedestrians across Pedestrian Pedestrians across Pedestrian Controller Stream Phase Phase Type Assoc Phase Phase Minimum s Lanes controlled by this Phase Phase Delays present sl J2 1 1 J2 1 2 J2 2 1 J2 2 2 32 3 1 J2 3 2 J2 1 2 J1 3 1 Ji 1 1 J1 1 2 J1 1 1 J1 2 1 33 1 1 J3 1 2 J3 2 1 13 2 2 33 3 1 33 3 2 33 1 1 J3 2 2 J3 1 1 J3 2 1 J3 3 1 J3 4 1 J3 5 1 J3 6 1 e e N NNNONNA A NNN m A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H I w Phase Intergreens Hide Back To Top Controller C1 The Model Audit View displays e A toolbar which allows options to be set for the View e The main section showing Model input data and results tables for a single LinSig Scenario A Contents List at the top of the Model Audit lists all of the tables displayed Clicking on a table title in the Contents List jumps to the relevant table in the Model Audit View 4 24 1 1 Creating a Model Audit To create a standard Model Audit of the currently open LinSig model e Ensure Audit Current Scen
211. d ahead Lanes In TranEd TRANSYT lanes containing a mix of ahead tratfic and give way traffic usually opposed right turners are modelled using the Opposed by First Opposing Link Only parameter In LinSig mixed movements in Lanes are modelled automatically and this parameter value is calculated from traffic flows on different turns leaving the Lane In order to model this situation correctly in LinSig turning movements leaving the Lane should be checked and non give way Connectors set correctly as non give way in LinSig The total give way flow and total non give way flow on the Lane should also be checked to ensure they are consistent with the Opposed by First Opposing Link Only which is discarded as it is now calculated from turning flows e Multi Lane Arms As a TranEd file defines Lanes indirectly as Links it has no information on how Lanes may be grouped together as Arms in LinSig Lanes will be graphically positioned based on Link positions in TranEd but each is created with its own Arm In cases where a better representation is two Lanes on a single Arm Arms can be merged as follows o Select two adjacent Arms whilst holding the control key Ctrl down o Right click on one of the Arms with the mouse and choose Join Arms from the pop up menu o LinSig will merge the Lanes on the two Arms into a single Arm e Pedestrian Modelling As LinSig currently does not allow Pedestrian Links to be modelled without using a Pedestri
212. d and data entered for the rest of the fields on the tab If the movement does not give way the box can be left unticked and no further data entry is required on this tab e Maximum Flow When Giving Way PCU Hr This is the maximum capacity of the Give Way Lane when it is giving way and therefore potentially opposed but no opposing traffic is present e Minimum Flow When Giving Way PCU Hr This is the minimum capacity of the Give Way Lane when it is giving way This is typically zero but can be specified if it Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 86 View Reference is felt that LinSig is underestimating the amount of traffic able to discharge under high levels of opposing flow e Flow when Opposing Traffic is Stopped PCU Hr This is the Saturation Flow for the opposed movement when the opposing traffic is stopped When it is clear to opposed traffic that the opposing movement is stopped for example when a right turn s indicative arrow is running the Lane may have a higher Saturation Flow than the Maximum Flow value as traffic may not need to check for opposing traffic which is self evidently stopped Often this value is the same as the Lane s main saturation flow but may be different for example if the opposed movement turns through a tight radius the saturation flow would be lower The options available are o Use Maximum Flow when Giving Way Use the same value specified above in Maximum Flow When Giving Way This option should
213. d as just that a minimum on which the software will be useable but some tasks such as optimisation may run quite slowly The suggested hardware specification will significantly increase LinSig s usability and should be adhered to wherever possible Minimum Practical Hardware specification e PC with at least a 2 GHz processor e 1Gb RAM This is mainly used by Windows e 25Mb of free hard disk space e Minimum Graphics resolution of 1280x1024 with 16 7M colours e 19 Monitor e CD Drive required for installation only e A two button mouse Suggested Hardware specification for optimum productivity e PC with a 3 0 GHz processor or multi core running at a lower speed e 2 4Gb RAM e 25Mb of free hard disk space e Graphics resolution of 1920x1200 with 16 7M colours 24 Monitor e An additional monitor with compatible graphics card s significantly speeds up working on larger models e CD DVD Drive required for installation only e A three button wheel mouse Not essential but extremely useful for zooming graphical views Please note that depending on the version of Windows you are using the hardware requirements for Windows may exceed the above A 2 Software Requirements LinSig can be used on any of the following platforms e Microsoft Windows 7 e Microsoft Windows Vista 32 bit e Microsoft Windows XP Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 306 Examples Although LinSig isn t formally tested on 64 bit versions of Win
214. d by clicking on Pedestrian Mode in the Route List View s toolbar The Route List displays the following information for each Pedestrian Route Pedestrian Route Number Each Pedestrian Route is given a unique Index number which identifies it Origin Pedestrian Zone The Pedestrian Zone the Route starts from Destination Pedestrian Zone The Pedestrian Zone where the Route ends Flow The traffic flow on the Route in Pedestrian per Modelled Time Period Flow Locked Whether the Pedestrian Route Flow can be modified by the automatic flow assignment Journey Time sec The average time it takes pedestrians to travel from Zone to Zone along this Route Delay sec Ped The average delay to pedestrians on the Route caused by waiting for a green signal Total Delay PedHr The aggregate delay to all pedestrians on the Route caused by waiting for a green signal Total Journey Time PedHr The aggregate time taken by pedestrians using this Route 4 5 1 3 Managing the Route List Routes in both the Traffic Routes List and the Pedestrian Routes List can be managed in similar ways as follows Selecting a Route A Route is selected by clicking on it with the mouse in the Route List The Route is highlighted in Route List indicating it is selected The Route is also highlighted in the Network Layout View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 5 The Route List View 153 Editing a Route Flow The traffic flow allocated to a Route can b
215. d other items which represent a real junction It is used to graphically manipulate these items as a group and to structure and display results and other Junction related information Junctions are also used to specify subsections of Network on which to carry out actions such as signal optimisation Arms Each Arm represents a one way section of road forming part of the Network Each Arm contains a number of Lanes which are used to represent how traffic uses the Arm Arms are not themselves involved in traffic model calculations but are used purely to group and organise Lanes Lanes Lanes are perhaps the most important item for modelling road space in LinSig and are used to define how traffic moves queues and interacts on an Arm Users of earlier versions of LinSig should note that Lanes now replace and simplify Links and Lanes from earlier versions Lane Connectors Lane Connectors join each Lane to Lanes on other Arms that can provide or receive traffic to or from the Lane The Lane Connectors represent how road markings dictate the way traffic should flow between Lanes When modelling a single junction Lane Connectors are only required to define permitted turning movements from a Lane by connecting an Entry Lane to an Exit Arm s Lanes Junction Exit Arms Junction Exit Arms are simply Arms carrying traffic away from a Junction and are used to graphically define the exit point of traffic from junctions Ina Network containing several junction
216. d profile graphs This section describes how to use the Network Layout View to carry out the above tasks 4 3 2 LinSig Network Structure LinSig uses Junctions Arms Lanes Lane Connectors and Zones to describe a traffic Network A parallel Pedestrian Network can also be modelled within the same model using Pedestrian Links Pedestrian Link Connectors and Pedestrian Zones Network Layout View S e w se aala Ble 21 2 2 5 sE Le Sheps Foss elle AAE aay Find Junction Pag Find Arm fF tis aa g E Fedestrian Link Lane Connector Exit Arm LLL 1 1 125 eF eono eo Arm 1 London Road 4 Pedestrian Link Connector Si Arm 5 Arm 2 High Street 1 UUA FX G A m U ta B Te zie High St London Rd Park St PRC 26 0 Total Traffic Delay 19 4 pcuHr Pedestrian Zone Ave Route Delay Per Ped 63 6 s Ped A PJS Wed E WY Junction Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm all Lane AN Contains Junc All Arm all Lane All Connector all The roles of these key items are described in Definitions in section 2 1 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 56 View Reference 4 3 2 1 Recommended Network Structure A LinSig Network s Arms and Lanes can be structured in any way desired however the following describes a recommended structure for Networks LinSig does not require or enforce this structure but sticking to the structure will make Networks more consistent eas
217. d the Lane Based Flows to define Network Regions which are modelled using either method Creating a Matrix Based Network Region To define a Matrix Based Region e Create Zones around the periphery of the region including at the boundary with the rest of the non Matrix Based Network e LinSig uses a single OD Matrix for the entire Network regardless of any Network regions however only the parts of the matrix relevant to each region are used e Enter the section of the OD Matrix just for the Zones surrounding this region OD Matrix cells representing traffic between Zones in different regions should be left blank e Use Delay Based Assignment to assign the OD Matrix to the Network region Use the Assignment options to select only Zones surrounding the region Only Routes between Zones around the region are used Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 2 Network Structure amp Defining Traffic Flows in LinSig 43 Creating a Lane Based Network Region To Create a Lane Based Flow Region e Do not create Zones around the region which will use Lane Based Flows unless required for measuring journey times Zones are only necessary in Lane Based Flow regions if Routes are required for calculating journey times e Use the Lane Based Flow Drag and Drop editing and the Edit Lane dialog box to define Lane Based Flows on all Lanes in the region Boundaries between Network Regions At a boundary between two regions where either of the regions is Matrix Ba
218. dance at LinSig User Groups To register for your free 12 months Software Support please return the Software Support Agreement sent to you with LinSig After this period has expired paid Software Support is available from JCT Consultancy Ltd Please see the Software Support Agreement or contact JCT Consultancy for more information on Software Support 1 5 1 Accessing Software Support Software Support can be accessed free of charge by any of the following means On our Web Site at www jctconsultancy co uk By Email at support jctconsultancy co uk By Telephone 09 00 to 17 00 UK Time on 01522 751010 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 Introduction e By Fax on 01522 751188 e By Post at JCT Consultancy Ltd LinSig House Deepdale Enterprise Park Nettleham Lincoln LN2 2LL Please have your Licence ID handy before calling Software Support so we can validate your Software Support status If emailing please include your Licence ID Name Office Company and a contact telephone number in case we need to contact you to discuss the problem Your Licence ID is available by choosing About LinSig from the Help menu Please remember that LinSig is a sophisticated technical product and we aim to provide a quality support service to reflect this Please do not hesitate to ask us if you have questions or problems In particular we are happy to help new or inexperienced users with any questions you may be unsure about Please remember
219. datuetecwaa E 141 4 4 1 Defining Traffic Flows in LINSIG cccccecesececeeecceeeseeecceeesaeeeceeesceeeseeeseeeess 141 4 4 2 Defining Pedestrian Flows in LINSIG ccccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeesaeeens 141 4 4 3 Managing Flow Groups using the Traffic Flow Group List ccccseeeeeeeees 142 4 4 4 Working with the Origin Destination Matrices ccccccccseeeceeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeess 146 AS VG RoUe LIST VIG cus sain shits wits raid anna tet ec ects an ees ted ect a nn ees ated nce annie aed iua 150 4 5 1 Working with Routes in LINSIQ cccccscccseeeceeeceeeeceeeeceeceueeceeeseeeseueesseesseeess 150 4 5 2 Assigning the Desired Traffic Flow Matrices to Routes using the Route List 156 A 6 GOMUOIEr LIST VIG W ionos a 158 AO sl CHIMIMOM Stntateds dts inur tus uh a Raa ae Rae Uue Rutan 158 4 6 2 Working with Controller Sets cccccccccssceceeeeeceeeesseeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeesseeesseeeessaees 158 4 6 3 Working With Controllers cccssccccsececeseecceeeeceececeueeececeseueessseessusesseeeessaees 160 4 6 4 Managing Stage Streams in the Controller List ViOW c sesceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 161 Abar NaS WON seed ac seen Sacra aes anio ivatonsed aie anni cillegciitic sco bacitieharttbd tehe kt clsehclnticla nda tarcieehctnimioiavanemtarcitte 163 4 7 1 Selecting which Controller to ViOW cccccseececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeesseeesaaees 163 4
220. de that is highest in the list will be given precedence Overrides can be moved up or down the list using the up and down arrow buttons The Default entry in the list corresponds to the values that will be applied if no matching Override is found The Defaulf entry always remains last in the list Overrides can be added edited and deleted using the Add new Override Edit Override and Delete Override buttons Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 96 View Reference Edit Override rule ka W This rule applies to specific routes or layers This rule applies to specific Flaw Groups Select Routes Layers 2 PM Peak 3 AM Peak Lane Based Flows Edit Override data Select the Flow Groups Rowtes and Layers that this rule will apply te This rule can apply to Routes or Layers but not both Click the Edit Override Data button to specify the cruise speed time values that will be used for this override Cancel The Edit Override Rule dialog box allows you to specify which Routes Layers and or Flow Groups the rule applies to The following settings can be changed All Routes and Layers By unticking the This rule applies to specific routes or layers tick box the Override will apply to all Routes and Flow Layers on the Connector Specific Routes or Layers By ticking the This rule applies to specific routes or layers tick box the Override will apply only to the Routes or Flow Layers select
221. ded to downstream Lane Connectors and Lanes using the following procedure e Click on the 200 on Source Lane the traffic is leaving from e Drag with the mouse to the Destination ahead Lane where ahead traffic is moving to Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 114 View Reference e Release the mouse button while pointing at the Destination Lane e Choose Change Flow Details from the popup menu to display the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box e On the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box click the Switch PCU Percent value button and change the option to Percent of flow leaving upstream lane You can also tick the Remember this as a default etc tick box to remember this option for next time e Inthe Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box you can now enter the flow as a percentage value of 75 Ticking the Automatically maintain on downstream lane tick box will also ensure that the stop line flow of the downstream lane is also automatically maintained to match that percentage value Upstream Lane J1 1 1 General Traffic eo ee Downstream Lane J2 1 1 MM General Traffic Additional Flow 75 of flow leaving upstream Lane M oe Also add same Flow bo Upstream Lane total Flow I Also add same Flow to Downstream Lane total Flow e Click the Add Lane Flow button to complete the action The percentage value will now be displayed on the Lane Co
222. del The Audit History View is opened by choosing Audit History on the File menu Audit History Description Entered By Entered On Read Ony Added New Development Flows Paul Moore Friday May 13 2011 00 30 40 2 Changes Stage Sequence for East Junction in AM Peak Peter Cheng Friday May 13 2011 00 31 00 iii Add a new Audit Record The Audit History shows a list of log entries with each log entry containing e Log Item number e Log Item Description A text description of the log item e Entered By The name of the person entering the log item If a User Name has been entered in Network Information on the Network menu it will be used as a default e Entered On The date and time the log entry was made This is automatically set from the system time when the log entry is made e Read Only After the file has been saved Audit History Log Items are read only and cannot be deleted or changed Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 248 View Reference 4 26 Cycle Time Optimisation View The Cycle Time Optimisation View displays a graph of Practical Reserve Capacity and Delay against the Network s cycle time This allows the effect of cycle time on the Network to be assessed and an appropriate cycle time chosen a ish Cycletime Optimisation Maximum Cycletime 120 Cydetime Label Interval 10 PRC Label Interval 10 Start v Allow selection of cycle time and signal timings from graph Only allow selec
223. del calculations is inferred from the current Scenario selected in the Scenario View and is shown in bold and labelled current Scenario in the Traffic Flow Groups List It is Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 4 Traffic Flows View 143 changed by selecting a new current Scenario in the Scenario View When the Current Scenario is changed LinSig will recalculate model results using the Flow Group and other settings from the new Current Scenario Creating a New Flow Group A new Flow Group can be created as follows e Choose Add Flow Group from the Flow Groups pop out menu on Traffic Flows menu e Select the type of Flow Group to create A Flow Group can be a Standard Flow Group or a Formula Flow Group which is calculated from one or more component Flow Groups e A new Flow Group with a default name and time period is created at the end of the Flow Group List The new Flow Group can be edited as described in Editing Flow Groups below Inserting a Flow Group into the Flow Group List A new Flow Group can be inserted at any position in the Flow Group List as follows e Select a Flow Group next to where the new Flow Group is needed e Choose Insert Flow Group After Selected Flow Group or Insert Flow Group Before Selected Flow Group from the Traffic Flows menu as appropriate A new Flow Group is created and inserted into the Flow Group List e The new Flow Group can be edited as described in Editing Flow Groups
224. deleted as follows e Select the Network Control Plan in the Network Control Plan List e Right click on the Network Control Plan e Choose Delete Network Control Plan from the pop up menu e The Network Control Plan is deleted but Stage Sequences referenced by the Network Control Plan are not Any Scenario using the Network Control Plan will be invalid until a new Network Control Plan is selected for it 4 11 2 Editing Network Control Plans Each Network Control Plan specifies a Stage Sequence for each Controller in the Network Each Stage Sequence is specified as follows e In the Stage Sequence List on the right of the Network Control Plans View click on the Stage Sequence name for any Controller e Click on the edit button which appears to the right of the Stage Sequence name This drops down a Stage Sequence List which lists all available Stage Sequences for this Controller Network Control Plans View No Network Control Plan Network Control Plan All Stages at all Junctions 1 All Stages at all Junctions Controller Sequence Name 2 With Ped All Reds at all Junctions y _ West Controller All Stages 1 1 2 3 S2 1 2 C2 East Controller All Stages 1 2 3 4 All Stages 1 1 2 3 52 1 2 Edit Stage Sequence for Controller in Network Control Plan e Select a Stage Sequence from the drop down list This is the Stage Sequence which LinSig will run for this Controller when this Network Control Plan is used in a
225. destrian Links The View can be opened by choosing Network Results View from the Modelling menu The figure below shows an example of the Network Results View showing a selection of data items Results are always shown for the currently selected Scenario as shown in the scenario View or main toolbar Network Results View w fo 2 es Filter PCUs and Capacity Values gt Tree Columns View Type Al Stream nee Show Exit Lanes Display Per Period Collapse Column Set 1 Use Save Tree View Ctane Route a Display Per Cyde Expand n Column Set2 Use Save C Flat Vie Layers Routes Yy Yy w lie Phs Gm pcu peu Hr pcu Sat pcu pcu pcu pcuh Network 83 3 13 3 297 J3 East Junction N A 78 9 135 12 3 184 3 2 Right Le C2 D 18 300 1800 380 78 9 4 6 55 1 89 3 1 Left U 2il CAC 24 200 1800 380 52 6 23 415 49 2 2 Main Road Westbound Ahead Ri O 2 1 C2 B C2 F 43 274 1800 486 56 4 135 12 3 25 33 3 6 5 2 1 Main Road Westbound Ahead A a C2 B 43 246 1800 880 28 0 aa 16 5 38 1 2 Main Road Eastbound Ahead U 21 C2 A 32 450 1800 660 68 2 48 38 8 11 6 1 1 Main Road Eastbound Left C2 A C2 E 32 300 1800 660 45 5 gt 3 0 35 9 74 J2 West Junction N A 83 3 148 1 0 95 3 2 Right i eR c1 D 14 250 1800 300 83 3 48 69 3 83 3 1 Left uU 1d C1 C 23 200 1800 480 41 7 1 9 33 6 4 5 2 2 Main Road Westbound Ahead U id C1 B 56 450 1800 114
226. dicted to use them are a crucial part of the matrix estimation process The assignment options allow this process to be controlled Further details of assignment options are provided in the assignment section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 210 View Reference e Specify to use the existing OD matrix as a prior matrix for the Matrix Estimation process This allows you to influence the Matrix Estimation process towards the Traffic Flow distribution specified in the existing OD matrix e Specify to process Turning Counts in order of increasing size The Matrix Estimation algorithm processes each Count value in turn which means that the Count values processed later in the sequence may alter OD matrix cells that have been calculated based on Count values earlier in the sequence By processing the larger Turning Counts last this will have the effect of treating them as more significant that smaller Turning Count values Select Zones for Matrix Estimation W Estimate over all Traffic Zones Route Flow Assignment As part of the Matrix Estimation process LinSig will need to assign traffic flow to routes Click Edit Assignment Options if you wish to edit the current traffic flow assignment options Edit Assignment Options Use existing matrix as prior matrix for Matrix Estimation process Process counts in order of increasing size Click Estimate Matrix to continue with the matrix estimation process Estimate Matrix
227. dispersion The level of smoothing is dependent on the Lane length e Inthe case of very Short Lanes platoon dispersion is negligible In reality another effect becomes more prevalent due to the assumptions made about vehicles either being at rest or travelling at cruise soeed This is known as Platoon compression Platoon Compression It is assumed that vehicles start from the stop line at the cruise speed when the signals turn green or at least after the start displacement This assumption is perfectly valid over Long Lanes because traffic will start to disperse However over a Short Lane of say 40 or 50 meters the start up time will effect when the first vehicle arrives at the second stop line Conventional modelling techniques assume that the first vehicle starts at the cruise speed and crosses the downstream stop line after the cruise time has expired In reality this only happens to the last vehicle the first vehicle will take longer because it is starting from rest Whilst the starting displacement takes account of this at the first stop line there will be no Starting displacement at the second stop line because the vehicles are travelling at cruise speed anticipating the green from the starting red amber For example consider the situation below where the signals at A commence green at time 0 and run until time 10 If the cruise speed from A to B is 5 seconds then it may seem reasonable to set the green time at B to be from 5 to 15
228. displayed in red that is a customised code for the installation of LinSig on your PC The Installation ID should be sent to Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 309 JCT Consultancy either by email or by telephone If your email system is compatible a hyperlink is provided in the activation dialog box that will email your details to JCT JCT will provide you with a customised activation code for your PC by return Whilst waiting for your code you can leave the Activation Dialog box if desired using the Activate Later button You can return to the dialog at any point following the same procedure as above i Activate Cx Installation details Product LinSig a 0 1 7 Licence ID LICTA Installation ID KD2HDZ 95MN5Z E2M43U LOZM4C ER3C8H Office Name Lincoln Computer Ref PCO034 Prev Activation Code PEHANS 0152R0 D3T18T DH3CK ORSBID 4X0520 Operating System Windows Vista Service Pack 2 Please contact JCT to obtain your Activation Code quoting the details above For your convenience you can click the link below to compose an email to request an Activation Code Alternatively you can click the Copy button to copy all the installation details to the clipboard ready to be pasted into an email to the email address below activation jctconsultancy co uk Copy all details to Clipboard Activation code Once you have received your Activation Code ple
229. dows it is envisaged that it should run successfully Please inform us if you would like to use LinSig on 64 bit Windows as we will produce a fully supported 64 bit version for Windows 7 if sufficient demand arises Although LinSig is not formally supported on earlier versions of Windows it is envisaged that LinSig should run successfully on Microsoft Windows 2000 with Internet Explorer Version 5 5 or above LinSig will not run on Windows 98 or earlier A 3 Installing LinSig Before attempting to install LinSig please ensure you are logged into Windows as an administrator Sometimes Antivirus Software may also interfere with installation in which case it should be temporarily disabled until installation is complete This may require assistance or permission from your IT department To install LinSig from CD e Insert the LinSig CD into the computers CD Drive e If Setup starts automatically simply follow the on screen prompts from the setup program Alternatively if Setup does not run automatically e Click on the Start Button e Choose Run from the start menu e Enter the command x setup exe where x is the drive letter of your CD drive e Follow the on screen prompts from the setup program When Setup is complete LinSig can be started by choosing LinSig 3 from the Programs section of the Start Menu If LinSig Version 2 is installed on the same PC LinSig Version 3 does NOT affect the Version 2 install and installs a new copy o
230. duce the best matrix possible but it is always better to use local knowledge of the network and Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 208 View Reference judgement to resolve count consistency problems rather than just relying on LinSig doing its best with a poor set of counts 4 13 4 4 Using Internal Zones to Resolve Consistency Issues Where it is identified by inspecting counts that an inconsistency between two counts is due to tratfic entering or leaving the Network between Junctions it can be resolved in one of three ways e Ignoring the inconsistency if it is small and is unlikely to cause problems e Adding a new Junction and Zone s to explicitly model traffic entering from a distinct and significant side road e Adding an Internal Zone when it is unnecessary or undesirable to explicitly model the traffic entry point as a new Junction The Internal Zone will provide a new source and sink for traffic entering or leaving the Network between two Junctions Internal Zones should not be used unnecessarily just to mop up minor differences in counts as this will lead to significantly longer run times The first method is self explanatory and is the preferred option where flow inconsistencies are minor The second method is carried out using standard Network modelling techniques The third method using an Internal Zone is used as followed e Add an Internal Zone with the previous Junction s Exit Arm as the Zone s Arm Exiting
231. e 4 20 1 2 The Minimum Stage Minimums Summary The Minimum Stage Minimums Summary summarises the different Stage Minimum Matrices by showing the Minimum Stage Minimum for each Stage This is useful when configuring fault monitoring and UTC systems Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 21 SCOOT Data Preparation View 235 4 21 SCOOT Data Preparation View The SCOOT Data Preparation View assists with calculating a range of data useful in preparing SCOOT and UTC databases The View can be opened by choosing SCOOT Data Preparation View from the Controllers menu The Controller for which the View displays information can be selected using the Controller Selector drop down list on the SCOOT Data Preparation View s title bar as described in the Phase View section If multiple Stage Streams are being used the View displays information for the current Stage Stream This can be changed either by selecting a new Stage Stream in the main toolbar or by changing the current Stage Stream in the Phase Stage or Signal Timings View E SCOOT Data Preparation J ICIES SCOOT Stage Definition Inters tage Durations stage Min Range SCOOT Definition A Stages 1 2 B Stages 3 Remove The SCOOT Data Preparation View consists of two main components These are e The SCOOT Stage Definition List This allows SCOOT Stages to be defined as either sets of alternative Controller Stages or as Controller Phases e The Interstage and Minimums
232. e The current controller type is shown at the top of the column Controlling the Phase Delay List The Phase Delay List shows the Phase Delays currently configured on the Controller If Multiple Stage Streams are being used only Phase delays for the Current Stage Stream are Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 224 View Reference listed The Phase Delay List can be very long for complex models and can be further filtered by choosing to show Phase Delays for the currently selected Stage Change only Phase Delay Types Phase Delays can be of two basic types These are e Phase Losing Delays These are Phase Delays associated with Phases which lose right of way in the Phase Delay s associated Stage Change These are the most commonly used Phase Delay and are often used to assist with optimising Interstages The Phase Delay s value defines how long the Phase will continue to run for after the terminating Stage ends e Phase Gaining Delays These are Phase Delays associated with Phases which gain right of way in the Phase Delay s associated Stage Change These are much less common than Phase Losing Delays and are typically used to align the starting point of Phases in an Interstage This is sometimes desirable when different Intergreen values would cause Phases to start at different times in a potentially unsafe manner A Phase Gaining Delay delays the start of a Phase after the point it would start normally when all intergreens to the Phase h
233. e Flow Matrix will automatically be assigned to Routes using the current Traffic Flow Assignment Options This will overwrite any existing route flows you may have If Auto Assign is not enabled the Desired Flows will not be assigned to Routes until the Assign OD Flows To Routes menu option is selected Traffic OD movements are specified using a single OD matrix for the entire network however it is less meaningful to model pedestrians over such a large area therefore pedestrian OD matrices are specified using one OD matrix for each LinSig Junction This makes the specification of pedestrian flows simpler 4 4 4 1 Traffic Origin Destination Matrices Each Traffic Flow Group OD matrix shows traffic flows in PCU between Traffic Zones for the duration of the Flow Group s modelled time period For example a Flow Group of duration 15 minutes would have 15 minutes flows entered The Traffic OD Matrices are displayed in the Traffic Flows View as follows e Click the Traffic Mode button on the Traffic Flow View s toolbar to ensure Traffic Flows are being shown e Choose either Desired Flows Actual Flows or Difference to display one of the three OD matrices described below e Only the Desired Flows Matrix can be edited the Actual Flows and difference matrices are for error checking output only The three types of LinSig Matrices are e Desired Flows Matrix This matrix displays and allows editing of the des
234. e G WG Arday Of Pest lsu BE Flows General Traffic a eiciibaans tial Calculated Turn Prop Radius m Calculated Turning Proportions are for Current Flow Group Oene nfnit Sateation Flow Selecting this for exit bottlenecks and lanes exiting the network will ensure no delay is incurred on them lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel To change a Lane with a saturation flow to a unconstrained Lane select the Unconstrained Infinite Saturation Flow option on the Saturation Flow Data tab It is recommended that all Junction and Network Exit Lanes are modelled as unconstrained Modelling a constrained exit from a Junction requires careful thought and it is not adequate just to model this with a constrained Junction exit Lane MultiLane MultiLanes were introduced in LinSig 3 1 and effectively provide a mechanism similar to Links in previous versions of LinSig A MultiLane in LinSig represents a group of Lanes which behave in an identical manner That is e All physical lanes in the MultiLane receive the same green times Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 78 View Reference e Any give way behaviour is identical across all lanes e Traffic distributes equally between each lane MultiLane 2e gt LIN Arm 1 London Road MultiLanes fulfil the following functions e They are directly compatible with models created in earlier versions of LinSig e They implicitly assume traffic equally distributes betw
235. e Lane is potentially opposed but no opposing traffic is present e The Slope A is a coefficient which specifies by how much the capacity is reduced by flow on the opposing Lane e F is the Minimum Flow that is able to discharge regardless of Q4 LinSig allows for any number of opposing Lanes by allowing additional A parameters to be specified for each opposing Lane a Intercept Fo Slope A1 a Minimum Flow F Controlling Flow Q1 Capacity F F Fo Ai Q1 The above parameters can be interpreted in traffic terms as follows e Intercept or Max Flow The Intercept is the maximum flow rate that could exit the give way Lane if no opposing flow was passing the give way Lane It is important to Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 3 Give Way Lanes in LinSig 45 differentiate this value from Saturation flow Saturation flow values assume that the driver will not have to stop The Intercept value assumes the driver may have to stop and will have to slow down to check for opposing traffic even if none is present The Intercept value will usually be much lower than a saturation flow value for a Lane with the same geometry e Slope or Coefficient The Slope relates to the effect the opposing flow has on the capacity of the give way Lane If a give way Lanes capacity drops rapidly as its opposing flow increases the slope will be higher e Minimum Flow The minimum flow represents a minimum value that will be able to di
236. e Larger Network Modelling e Delay Based Traffic Assignment e Matrix Estimation e Pedestrian Modelling These new features are explained in more detail later in this User Guide 1 3 What s New in Version 3 1 of LinSig LinSig 3 1 was released in May 2011 and is the first major update to LinSig since the launch of LinSig 3 in 2009 New features introduced since the launch of Version 3 0 include e New traffic flow definition methods including Lane Based Flows Layered Flows and the ability to mix different flow definition methods in different regions of a modelled Network e Improved modelling of bus traffic including Bus Zones and Bus Routes e New ways of checking input flow and count data using the new Flow Consistency Mode in the Network Layout View and a new graphical Traffic Turning Counts View e Modelling of different cycle times within the same Network model e Improved checking and auditing tools such as the new Model Audit View e Improved facilities for fine tuning network calibration such as the ability to define Bonus Green times for Lanes e SCATS based Terminology Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 1 4 What s New in Version 3 2 of LinSig 3 1 4 What s New in Version 3 2 of LinSig LinSig 3 2 was released in May 2012 and includes Ability to model storage in front of the stopline even if there is an adjacent short lane present In particular a long lane can now be modelled with non blocking storage for rig
237. e LinSig will delete the Lane Flow and any dependent incoming and outgoing Lane Connector Flows 50 200 Deleting Lane Based Connector Flows using Drag and Drop Lane Based Flows can also be deleted from Lane Connectors using drag and drop This can be carried out as follows e Click on the Lane Connector Flow number to be deleted with the mouse e Start dragging the Lane Connector Flow number A small bin icon will appear next to the Lane Connector e Drag over the bin and release the mouse effectively dropping the Lane Connector Flow number into the bin e LinSig will delete the Lane Connector Flow 4 3 9 5 Entering Lane Based Flows using the Edit Lane Dialog Box The Network Layout View s graphical drag and drop method is the easiest and quickest way of editing Lane Based Flows However this method cannot be currently used for every editing action For example Uniform Flows can only be currently edited using the Edit Lane dialog as described below The Edit Lane dialog is not as automated as using the drag and Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 116 View Reference drop method and is therefore not as fast to use but allows finer control when editing Lane Based Flows The Edit Lane dialog is opened by selecting a Lane in the Network Layout View and choosing Edit Lane from the Lanes pop out menu on the Network menu Alternatively double clicking a Lane with the mouse or right clicking on a Lane and choosing
238. e Network Layout View The Network Layout View displays the overall layout of the Network s Junctions Arms and Lanes and how they interconnect The View can be used to carry out the following tasks Create delete and edit Junctions Create delete and edit Arms and Lanes attached to each Junction Join Lanes on different Arms together using Lane Connectors Create delete and edit Zones and connect them to Arms Create delete and edit Pedestrian Links Connectors amp Zones Allow Lane Based Traffic Flows to be edited using Lane Based Flow Mode Display input data and results by Lane Display mini graphs of flow profiles and queues Display mini stage diagrams embedded in the View Display Timing Dials which can be used to edit signal timings Examine and display Routes selected in the Route List View Allow signal times to be edited using timing dials Display flows as bandwidths Compare Scenario Route Flows using Bandwidths Display animated signal sequences and queues Annotate the Network diagram using Notes amp Labels O O O O O O O O O O O O oy O e Controller List View The Controller List View displays all of the signal Controllers in the model and how they are grouped The View can be used to carry out the following tasks Add edit and delete new signal Controllers Group signal Controllers in Controller Sets Add edit and delete Stage Streams on Controllers o Set Cycle Times for Controller Sets
239. e View may be locked to a particular Controller so its display does not change when the Current Controller is changed To lock an Interstage View to a Controller drop down the Controller Selector drop list in Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 222 View Reference the Interstage View s title bar and choose which Controller to lock the Interstage View too 4 17 2 Working with the Interstage amp Phase Delays View The Interstage amp Phase Delays View is comprised of several panels These include e The Prohibited Stage Change and Interstage Length Matrix The Prohibited Stage Change Matrix indicates Stage Changes which are prohibited either automatically by LinSig or manually by the user The matrix also shows Interstage lengths calculated by LinSig for all allowed Stage Changes When Multiple Stage Changes are being used the matrix is shown for the Current Stage Stream as selected in the Interstage View s toolbar or the main LinSig toolbar e The Phase Delays List The Phase Delays List displays a list of Phase Delays configured in the Controller e The Interstage Structure Panel The Interstage Structure Panel shows the Interstage Structure for the Interstage selected in the Prohibited Stage Change Matrix The panel shows terminating and starting Phases Intergreens and Phase Delays which make up the Interstage The Panel can also be used to automatically optimise the Interstage structure 4 17 2 1 The Prohibited Stage Change and Intersta
240. e crossing from kerb to kerb This is used for delay calculations and is not currently used for any intergreen calculations o Crossing Type The Crossing type is for reference and future use only and is not currently used in any modelling e Click OK to finish creating the Pedestrian Link 4 3 10 2 Moving and Repositioning Pedestrian Links Pedestrian Links can be freely positioned using the mouse as follows e Select the Pedestrian Link s handles with the mouse The Pedestrian Link turns red indicating it is selected e Use the square handles at each end of the Pedestrian Link to reposition the Pedestrian Link Remember to use the square handles for dragging rather than the circular connection points e f you have a number of Pedestrian Links which you want to move together for example all the Pedestrian Links at a Junction they can be moved by dragging the Junction rather than one by one 4 3 10 3 Editing Pedestrian Link Settings An Pedestrian Link can be edited by selecting the Pedestrian Link with the mouse and choosing Edit Pedestrian Link from the Pedestrian Links pop out menu on the Network Menu This displays the Edit Pedestrian Link dialog box which can be used to change the Pedestrian Link s settings as described in Creating New Pedestrian Links above 4 3 10 4 Deleting Pedestrian Links A Pedestrian Link can be deleted by selecting the Pedestrian Link and choosing Delete Pedestrian Link from
241. e currently defined Flow Groups and allows new Flow Groups to be created and edited A new LinSig model is always created with an empty Flow Group already defined dft Traffic Flows View am Traffic Mode A Pedestrian Mode Flow Groups Start End A 08 00 09 00 _ 16 30 17 30 The Flow Group List shows the following information for each Flow Group e Flow Group Number A unique reference number for the Flow Group e Description A text description of the Flow Group e Type Whether the Flow Group is a Standard or Formula Flow Group e Start Time The time of day the Flow Group starts e End Time The time of day the Flow Group ends e Duration The duration of the Flow Group e Formula The formula if it is a Formula Flow Group e Component Indicates if the Flow Group is a Component Flow Group e Unused in Scenarios Indicates if the Flow Group is not being used in any Scenarios or referenced in any formulae e Lane Based Flow Indicates if the Flow Group contains Lane Based flow data e The Selected Flow Group The Selected Flow Group is highlighted in red The Selected Flow Group is the Flow Group which for which the OD matrices are displayed in the right panel of the Traffic Flows View It is not necessarily the Flow Group being used for model calculations The Selected Flow Group can be changed by clicking a Flow Group in the Flow Group List e The Current Scenario Flow Group The Flow Group currently being used for mo
242. e fly allows Networks to be built more speedily To create a Lane connector between two existing Arms e Select the Lane Connector s starting Lane Number Circle e Drag the starting Lane with the mouse A Lane connector and new downstream Arm and Lane will tear off of the starting Lane e Drag the mouse pointer over the Lane where the Lane Connector will end The tear off Arm will disappear indicating no new Arm will be created e Drop the Lane Connector on the downstream Lane by releasing the mouse A new Lane Connector will be created between the two Lanes The Lane Connector will be created with no mean cruise time defined and will use the default value of 10 seconds until edited to set a specific cruise time The ability to create a new Arm and Lane simultaneously with a Lane Connector is intended to speed the creation of Junction Exit Arms The feature can however be used to create any Arm To create a Lane Connector with a new Arm and Lane e Select the Lane Connectors starting Lane Number Circle e Drag the starting Lane with the mouse A Lane connector and new downstream Arm and Lane will tear off of the starting Lane e Drop the tear off Arm and Lane anywhere other than on an existing Lane The Edit Arm dialog box will open allowing you to enter the new Arm s Name and Junction e Click OK in the Edit Lane dialog box A new Arm containing a single Lane will be created with a Lane Connector joining it to the
243. e manually edited by selecting the Route in the Route List and choosing Edit Route Flow from the Routes pop out menu on the Traffic Flows menu The Edit Route Flow dialog box appears which allows the Route Flow in PCU to be specified Edit Route Route Flow Route No 11 How Route Flow 203 Lock this flow value when assigning OD flows Lane Flows in the Network Layout View and Network Results View and the Actual Flows matrix in the Traffic Flows View are updated to reflect the new Route Flow The traffic model also calculates new results based on the new Route Flow Locking a Route Flow When editing a Route ticking the Lock this Flow value when balancing box prevents the Route s flow from being changed when carrying out automatic flow assignment as described below This is typically used for Traffic Routes to manually specify and Lock the traffic flow on some Routes on an Arm and balance the remaining flow between the remaining non locked Routes More information is provided in Allocating the Traffic Flow Matrices to Routes using the Route List below Suppressing Unfeasible Routes In larger LinSig Networks the number of possible Routes through the Network is very large and increases exponentially as Network size increases This is particularly so when many route options are available due to the Network Topology Whilst building Routes LinSig monitors how good a Route is and how likely a Route is of having
244. e used 2 5 1 Modelling Sequence using Lane Based Flows Further details of each of the steps below are available in the View Reference section of this Use Guide e Network Information Using the Network Information dialog box Network gt Network Information enter Project and user details for the Model e Add Controllers Add the traffic signal Controllers to the model using the Controller List View Controllers gt Controller List View Set the Controller type naming information and specify whether the Controller will allow multiple Stage Streams e Add Junctions Using the Network Layout View add a LinSig Junction for each junction within the modelled network The choice of how Junctions are used will usually be obvious but sometimes it makes sense to create a Junction for network features which are not strictly junctions such as mid block pedestrian crossings Give Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 5 The LinSig Modelling Process 23 each Junction a name and specify which Controller s if any and if appropriate Stage Stream s are involved in the Junction s control e Add Entry Arms Using the Network Layout View add Junction Entry Arms to each Junction The Junction Entry Arms will contain the Lanes approaching the Junction s stop lines e Add Entry Arm Lanes On each Junction Entry Arm create additional long and Short Lanes to represent the Arm s Lane structure Remember that it is important to model the Lane structure as
245. e whilst the queue is clearing leading to a Maximum Back of Uniform Queue greater than the queue at the end of red The Back of Uniform Queue at the end of Red allows only for the variation of the queue within a typical cycle and does not include Random and Oversaturation queues e Maximum Back of Uniform Queue PCU The maximum extent of the Uniform Queue on a Lane taking into account the effect of traffic continuing to add to the back of the queue whilst traffic is discharging from the front The Maximum Back of Uniform Queue allows only for the variation of the queue within a typical cycle and does not include Random and Oversaturation queues e Random amp Oversaturation Queue PCU The Random amp Oversaturation Queue due to non cyclical effects i e effects which last longer than a typical cycle over the modelled time periods The Random amp Oversaturation Queue estimates the queue which will form due to a some cycles randomly having more or less arrivals than the typical cycle leading to an overall net increase in queue length and b the steadily Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 242 View Reference building queue over the modelled time period when the Lane is oversaturated Further details on this topic are provided in the modelling section Mean Maximum Queue PCU The Mean Maximum Queue is the sum of the Maximum Back of Uniform Queue and the Random amp Oversaturation Queue It represents the maximum queue within a typi
246. eate Short Lane to Left from the pop up menu e The length of the Short Lane is set as 5 on the Lane Details tab of the Short Lane s Edit Lane dialog box Physical Flare length 5 PCU 100 a Dp S 1800 S 1800 600 o ee Edit Lane 1 1 m General Lane Details Sat How Data Advanced Movmt to 2 Lane Length Am 1 Lane 1 This is a short lane Physical Lane Length PCL 5 0 Arm 1 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 292 Examples 7 1 2 Example 2 Left Turn Bay The figure below shows an example where the inside Lane is flared and is designated as an exclusive left turn Lane e The Short Lane is created by selecting the Long Lane right clicking and choosing Create Short Lane to Left from the pop up menu e The length of the Short Lane is set as 5 on the Lane Details tab of the Short Lane s Edit Lane dialog box e Unlike earlier versions of LinSig LINSAT does not need to be used to calculate an expected usage of the Short Lane LinSig 3 s traffic model deals with this internally Physical Flare length 5 PCUs s 1600 la S 1800 Edit Lane 1 1 General Lane Details Sat How Data Advanced Movmt to 2 Lane Length Am 1 Lane 1 This is a short lane Physical Lane Length PCL 5 0 Arm 1 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 293 7 1 3 Example 3 Left Turn Give Way This example is a signal controlled
247. eates merged Scenarios in the existing model based on matched Scenarios in the existing and imported models Any non matched Scenarios are deleted e Creates merged Network Control Plans in the existing model based on the matched Scenarios Any non matched Network Control Plans are deleted e Creates merged Traffic Flow Groups in the existing model Any Traffic Flow Groups not used by new merged Scenarios are still imported but are prefixed as Imported The model now contains two disconnected Networks which can be joined together as described below Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 264 View Reference 4 29 3 Joining Imported Network Regions When a Network is imported into an existing LinSig model it is imported as a separate disconnected Network region After importing the separate Network regions they can be joined together to form a single larger Network How they are joined together depends on the different Network region types being joined 4 29 3 1 Joining Two Matrix Based Regions Two Matrix Based Regions can be joined in two different ways These are Merging two Zones at the join point of the two regions This method is the most detailed and provides greatest modelling accuracy but may involve more work LinSig eliminates the two Zones at the join point creating one large Network with Routes between all remaining Zones in the new joined Network Only one Zone from each Network region can be merged at once In larger Networks
248. eceeeeseueeseeesees 39 22 2 FOW DETININION IMIG OOS sse tie ero tat nana let atc utah th nate ula alle Gigs 39 3 2 3 Using both Matrix Based and Lane Based Methods in the same Model 42 3 3 GIVE Way Lanes in LINSSI esseere ee e nanedenc pede tend anaieved E 44 3 3 1 The LinSig Give Way Model cccccccseccecceeeceeeeeeeeaeeseeeceeeseeeeeeeseueseeseesaeees 44 3 0 2 IMG LNSO Right TUM Mod l si csctestiacs cinatiedieatianlcinalsehcbenteh a N 45 A VIEW Referente nesia nea a iari 49 4 1 General View FOAtureS a a a a aaa 51 ATT AIAN S Ol TO Daa S S SS 51 4 2 Zoom and PaM ee ee a a a 51 4 1 3 Defaults Colours and Visual Settings cccccccseeecseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesseeeeseeeeseeeess 52 4 2 Sing Intemational OPUN Sisirin E 53 4 2 1 Using Drive on the Right for Graphical Views cccceeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeees 53 4 2 2 Using SCATS Based Controllers and Terminology ccccsseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeens 53 AS NCIWONK LAVOUL VO di aieueaneterdecumeeanatehormaueeets 54 4 3 1 Network Building Overview cccccseccceeecceeeceueecseeceuceceueeseeeceusesseeseueessueeseeeseas 54 4 3 2 LinSig Network StrUCture cccccsecccceececeeeeeeeeeceeesseeeeseusesseeeeseusesseeeseeeesseeeess 55 4 3 3 Specifying Network INformation ccccccecccseeeeceeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeesseeeeseeeesseeeeas 58 4 3 A WOKNO WIA JURGIORNS kenieret ea a T e a 59 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 5
249. ecified Route e Show Exit Lanes If Show Exit Lanes is un ticked the Network Results View omits Exit Lanes from the Results List e Show Non Zero Layers Routes Routes Layers break down the results on each Lane to give the delays or other statistics for each individual Route or Lane based Flow Layer passing through a Lane Often this level of detail isn t required and the Show Non Zero Layers Routes option can be un ticked simplifying the Network Results View PCU and Capacity Values The PCU and Capacity Values setting controls whether results are shown for the whole modelled time period or for a typical cycle within the modelled time period The columns affected by this setting are e Demand Flow e Capacity e Flow Entering Lane e Flow Leaving Lane e Right Turners in Gaps e Right Turners in Interstage e Right Turners When Unopposed e Uniform Stops Results which are expressed as a rate for example flow or delay per hour are not affected by this setting Column Sets The Network Results View provides many columns of results of which only a proportion need to be displayed at any one time depending on the level of detail required As it is common to need to view different levels of detail in the Network at different times the Network Results View allows two standard sets of displayed columns to be defined These can then be recalled at any time without having to reselect each individual column to be displayed
250. ections on the Traffic Flows and Route List Views 4 3 12 4 Deleting Pedestrian Zones A Pedestrian Zone can be deleted by selecting it with the mouse and choosing Delete Pedestrian Zone from the Pedestrian Zones pop out menu on the Network Menu Deleting a Zone also deletes any Pedestrian Routes originating or ending at the Pedestrian Zone and also deletes any Pedestrian flows originating from or travelling to the Zone in the Traffic Flow View s Junction Pedestrian Origin Destination Matrices Pedestrian Zones should not be deleted unless you wish to delete its associated Pedestrian flow data When restructuring the Network instead of deleting a Pedestrian Zone a better option may be to disconnect the Pedestrian Zone from its associated Pedestrian Links and reconnect it to new Pedestrian Links as appropriate This will retain Pedestrian OD flow information but Pedestrian Route flows will need to be recreated using the Route List View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 131 4 3 13 Displaying Signal Staging on the Network Layout View LinSig can display a copy of the Stage View or Stage Sequence View on the Network Layout View This is extremely useful when printing the network especially larger networks as it allows the staging of a Junction to be concisely included on the main network diagram Each Network Layout View Stage Sequence displays one of the following e The available Stages from the Stage View
251. ed 3 AM Peak 2015 AM Peak 2015 All Stages 08 00 09 00 90 11 1 30 08 Delay Optimised PM Peak 2015 PM Peak 2015 All Stages T 16 30 17 30 90 33 6 22 79 Delay Optimised Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 196 View Reference 4 12 2 5 Traffic Flow Assignment Options The Traffic Flow Assignment Options dialog box is opened by selecting a Scenario and choosing Assign OD Flows to Routes based on Current Scenario Traffic Flow Assignment Options Delay Based Assignment Traffic Zones to Assign This will assign traffic to routes so that the journey time between i Assign all Traffic Zones routes with the same origin and destination zones are as equal as possible Your LinSig model must be runnable in order to perform this assignment 0 Customised Delay Based Assignment Entry Lane Balancing The options available are e Delay Based Assignment This is the default selection which will be appropriate for most Networks This option uses a standard set of options for the assignment which will achieve an acceptable combination of assignment speed and accuracy for most Networks e Customised Delay Based Assignment This allows various options controlling the assignment process to be customised This is not usually necessary but may be useful for larger networks or networks with unusual characteristics to achieve a faster or more precise assignment The available options are o Thoroughnes
252. ed below e Alternatively choosing Add Graphs for Route from the pop up menu adds a series of graphs in sequence for the Lanes along a LinSig Route Selecting a Graph A graph can be selected by clicking it with the mouse The graph will be highlighted with a red border indicating it is selected Repositioning Graphs A graph can be repositioned in the Flow Profile View by selecting it with the mouse and dragging it into a new position A solid red line will indicate the new position where the graph will be move to If the graph is inserted between existing graphs the existing graphs will be moved to accommodate the new graph Deleting a Graph To delete a Flow Profile Graph select it with the mouse and choose Delete Graph from the Flow Profiles menu 4 27 2 Graph Types The Flow Profile View can display three types of graph These are e Flow Profile Graphs These show the profile of traffic flow into and out of a Lane or Lane Group during a typical signal cycle e Uniform Queue Graph These show the position of the front and back of the Uniform Queue on a Long Lane or Lane Group e Storage Graph Storage Graphs show the amount of traffic currently in a Short Lane or Right Turn Storage Area lal Flow Profiles View sa o S amp Diagram Size Lane 1 1 Flows Lane 1 1 Queue 1800 1500 1200 900 Uniform 8 8 6 600 i a Queue 2 2 0 0 300 Graph FI P fil UT COT TTT OW rF
253. ed in the list underneath You can choose for the Override to apply to either selected Routes or selected Flow Layers by selecting either the Routes or Layers button All Flow Groups By unticking the This rule applies to specific Flow Groups tick box the Override will apply to all Flow Groups Specific Flow Groups By ticking the This rule applies to specific Flow Groups tick box the Override will apply only to the Flow Groups selected in the list underneath Edit Override Data For this Override the cruise speed time and bus stop time can be edited using the Edit Override data button 4 3 7 3 Deleting a Lane Connector A Lane Connector can be deleted by selecting it with the mouse and choosing Delete Lane Connector from the Lanes pop out menu on the Network Menu Deleting a Lane Connector will also delete the following Any Routes passing through the Lane Connector Any traffic flow allocated to Routes which are deleted will be de allocated and the Actual Flows Matrix in the Tratfic Flows View will show a flow deficit reflecting this The flow on Routes through the deleted Lane Connector should be reassigned either to Routes through other Lanes Connectors or to any Routes through new Lane Connectors replacing the deleted Lane Connector This can be done either manually using the Route List View or by reassigning automatically by choosing Assign OD Flows to Routes based on current Scenario
254. ed in any order but there can be no gaps in the sequence of Zone names If a Zone is given the same name as an existing Zone the new Zone is inserted in the sequence and Zones later in the name sequence are renumbered o Arm Entering Network The Network Entry Arm which the Zone feeds traffic too Currently each Zone can only feed traffic to one Arm If the Zone is not providing an entry point into the network this can be set to none o Arm Exiting Network The Network Exit Arm which the Zone receives traffic from Currently each Zone can only receive traffic from one Arm If the Zone is not providing an exit point from the network this can be set to none o Bus Zone This setting defines the Zone as a Bus Zone All Routes created from or too the Zone will be Bus Routes o Only Create Routes with other Bus Zones For Bus Zones if this setting is selected LinSig will only create Bus Routes from this Zone to other Bus Zones In most cases selecting this setting will give the best results as allow buses are then kept separate from non bus traffic e Click OK to create the Zone The Zone displays dotted Zone Feeds in the Network Layout View to indicate which Lanes it is feeding traffic to or accepting it from 4 3 8 2 Repositioning Zones A Zone can be repositioned by dragging it to its new position with the mouse Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 101 4 3 8 3 Editing Zones Zones are edited as
255. ed to a Stage Stream or de allocated if already allocated by double clicking with the mouse If the Phase is already allocated to a different Stage Stream LinSig will not allow it to be allocated to another Stage Stream without first removing it from its current Stream 4 9 3 5 Working with the Multiple Stage Stream Stage View Stages can be created deleted renumbered and their Phases changed in an almost identical manner as the single Stream View The main differences are e Each Stream has a separate set of Stages and inserting or deleting Stages in one Stream does not affect the Stages in another Stream e Each Stage box by default shows only the Phases allocated to the Stream to which the Stage belongs The stage boxes can be set to scale to fit to all Phases or just the Phases in the Stream by clicking the Toggle Fitting of Stage Display to Stream button on the Stage View s toolbar Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 180 View Reference 4 10 Stage Sequence View A LinSig Stage Sequence consists of a running order of Stages for each Stage Stream Stages can run in any order in a Stage Sequence and if necessary can run more than once or not at all This differs from the Stage View which shows the Stages in the order they are configured in the Controller For example typical Stage Sequences may include sequences such as All Stages Early Cut Off or Including Pedestrian All Red The Stage Sequence View is used to
256. een all Lanes in the MultiLane group This can reduce calibration effort when it is known that traffic behaves in this way as it avoids the need to calibrate separate independent Lanes to have an equal distribution of traffic e They make the transition from LinSig 2 to LinSig 3 more straightforward as they avoid the requirement to immediately restructure the model s Lane structure in LinSig 3 Obviously there will often be benefits in restructuring Lanes in LinSig 3 and this should be carried out for most models MultiLanes simply allow this step to be deferred An important point to remember is that if a MultiLane is incorrectly used in a situation where traffic does not split equally between Lanes the model will almost always predict a better performance than reality Wherever a MultiLane is used the above assumptions should be checked to ensure the validity of the model 28 Edit Lane 1 1 Multiple Lane Representation Enable Flared Saturation Flows Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed Number Of Lanes 2 Sat flow data Enter the number of lanes that this represents on the street a B Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead A multijane represents a group of lanes l that behave and will be modelled in an identical manner You must also ensure that the Saturation Scenario Flow and any give way parameters are Not in use values that represent all lanes lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Ver 3 2 10 January
257. elay based assignment cruise time weighting 5 o When modelling buses Mean Bus Stopped Time s o Bus Speed km hr Platoon Dispersion lw Use Platoon Dispersion Platoon Dispersion Coefficient 35 The General tab allows the following settings to be changed e From Lane The Lane the Lane Connector starts from e To Lane The Lane the Lane Connector ends at e Allow Routes to use this Connector This setting governs whether LinSig will use this Lane Connector when building Routes through the Network The setting can be Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 93 used to avoid LinSig building unnecessary or undesired Routes in part of the Network e Default Mean Cruise Time Speed sec or km hr Either the mean cruise time or speed between the downstream ends of two Lanes Whichever setting is provided LinSig will calculate the other using the Lane Connector Length as defined below Where Junction Exit Arms are used the Lane Connector within the Junction should be used to specify the cruise time speed from the stop line of the Lane entering the Junction to a notional point at the exit from the Junction where the Junction Exit Arm is located The Lane Connector between a Junction Exit Arm and the next Junction should specify the Cruise Speed Time from a notional exit point at the upstream Junction to the downstream stop line e Custom Lane Length m By default a Lane Connector will use the Lane Length of its downstre
258. elling a Longer Period A longer time period can be modelled by chaining together a series of time slices to model the evolution of traffic flows into and out of the Lane and the queue on the Lane over time For each time slice the queue at the start of the time slice is assumed to be the same as the Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 32 Essential Background queue at the end of the previous time slice As long as the flow profiles are known for traffic entering the network this method can be used to model a period of any duration 3 1 1 2 Cyclic Flow Profiles The main problem with the above methods is the amount of computation required to model a long time period for example one hour with a sufficiently fine time slice This can lead to large amounts of computation time and although computers have become much faster over the years the effort involved is still significant especially when it is necessary to rerun the model many times for optimisation purposes Cyclic Flow profiles have been used for many years as a way of reducing the number of computations necessary to model a junction This method takes advantage of the fact that when all junctions in a network run at the same cycle time the pattern of tratfic and queues on under capacity Lanes will be very similar during each cycle throughout the modelled period that is the flow and queue profiles on each Lane will repeat cyclically In its simplest case each cycle is assumed to be identical w
259. ement e Controller Each Controller represents a real life signal controller e Stage Stream Each Controller can control one or more Stage Streams Stage Streams can best be thought of as splitting a physical Controller into several virtual Controllers each of which can independently control a Junction or part of a Junction 4 6 2 Working with Controller Sets Each LinSig Model is created with a single default Controller Set containing a Single Stage Stream Controller Multiple Controller Sets are only required if multiple traffic signal cycle times are required in a single LinSig Network If all Junctions share the same cycle time the default Controller Set will be sufficient 4 6 2 1 Creating a New Controller Set A new Controller Set can be created as follows e Choose Add New Controller Set from the Controller Set pop out menu on the Controllers menu or alternatively use the Add New Controller Set button on the Controller List View s toolbar e The Edit Controller Set dialog box is shown allowing the new Controller Set s initial settings to be changed as described below in Editing Controller Sets e When all settings have been set click OK to create the new Controller Set Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 6 Controller List View 159 4 6 2 2 Editing a Controller Set A Controller Set is edited as follows e Right Click on the Controller Set to be edited in the Controller List View and choo
260. enario View can be used to optimise signal times for a number of Scenarios at once This avoids having to optimise each Scenario individually by selecting each Scenario in turn before clicking the Optimise button on the main toolbar If desired each Scenario can still be optimised individually using Optimise Current Scenario for Delay PRC on the Optimiser menu Further details on Batch Optimisation are given in the Signal Optimisation using Scenarios section below 4 12 2 Traffic Assignment using Scenarios The Desired Flows Matrix as displayed in the Traffic Flows View defines the total desired movements between Zones The process of assignment to Routes specifies which Routes through the Network traffic will use to travel between two Zones Each Scenario contains its own distinct set of Route Flows as a Flow Group s OD matrix may potentially be assigned to the same Network with a number of different routing patterns depending on Scenario settings such as signal timings and cycle time 4 12 2 1 Assignment Overview Traffic flows can be assigned to Routes in two ways These are e Manually assigning a traffic flow to each Route This method provides more flexibility and control as the flow patterns can be refined to a high level of detail It can however be time consuming with larger Networks This method is described in more detail in the Route List View section e Automatically assigning traffic flows to each Route based
261. er is being dragged LinSig guesses that it will be allocated to the General Traffic Layer on the Lane Connector and the Destination Lane This allows it to make a guess at the action being carried out which can be confirmed from the pop up menu avoiding the need to enter information in the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box e Drag the red 50 PCU from the Source Lane to the Destination Lane e Again LinSig can guess successfully that the 50 PCU is being added to the red Bus Layer on the Destination Lane 5b 200 a 1 a a e f Arm J21 Main Road Eastbound SSE 7 Arm J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Case 7 Single Flow Layer Existing Flow on Source Lane with Multiple Outgoing Lane Connectors Flows specified as Percentage values When using Lane Based flows LinSig allows you to specify the flow leaving a lane as a turning proportion of the flow on that lane rather than as a fixed PCU value If the flow on the lane is subsequently increased or decreased the modelled flow leaving the lane will automatically be recalculated according to the turning proportion specified Furthermore there is an additional option whereby the stop line flow of the downstream lane will also be automatically maintained to match the turning proportion from upstream Assuming an upstream Lane contains a Total Flow of 200 PCU and we wish to specify 75 aheads and 25 right turners percentage Lane Based turning flows can be ad
262. errors to be quickly located and corrected Flow Consistency Mode can be switched on in the Network Layout View by choosing Flow Consistency Mode from the main View menu When Flow Consistency Mode is switched on the Network Layout View changes to show Lane arrows instead of normal Lanes Lane Based Flows are also shown for the currently selected Flow Group fe S 24 alealea 15 ALLA ARRI SAR elele Aeka alsa SE mer EFIS mucio fw Farm f aE onr fo Fon Group AMPeakLane BasedFows J1 Ped Crossing PRC 101 7 Total Trafic Delay 2 0 sabe pcuHr Ave Route Delay Per Ped 39 8 sP ed Controller 1 A Display Lane Based Flow inconsistencies based on Significance Colour Oo Route Filter Reset Origin Zone an v arm ally Lane all Contains unc An v arm all Lane AI Destination Zone All Arm Al Lane all Flow Consistency errors are highlighted at the upstream and downstream end of each Lane Where a consistency error occurs LinSig displays a coloured circle the size of which depends on the size of the consistency error The size of the circle can be changed using the Display Lane Based Flow Inconsistencies based on option on the Network Layout View s bottom toolbar The options available are e Absolute Difference The circles are scaled by the absolute level of flow inconsistency e Percentage Difference The circles are scaled by the percentage difference of flow inco
263. ers any new Routes created adding them to the Route List 4 5 1 1 Traffic Route List The Traffic Route List is displayed by clicking on Traffic Mode in the Route List View s toolbar The Route List View displays the following information for each Traffic Route e Route Number Each Route is given a unique Index number which identifies it e Origin Zone The Zone the Route starts from e Destination Zone The Zone where the Route ends e Origin Lane The Lane the Route starts from in the format Junction Arm Lane e Destination Lane The Lane where the Route Ends in the format Junction Arm Lane e Route Flow The traffic flow on the Route in PCU e Flow Locked Whether the Route Flow can be modified by the automatic flow assignment e Bus Route Indicates that the Route is a Bus Route e Journey Time sec The average time it takes traffic to travel from Zone to Zone along this Route This value is used extensively in the delay based assignment algorithm e Delay sec PCU The average delay per PCU to traffic on the Route caused by queuing Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 152 View Reference Total Delay PCUHr The aggregate delay to all traffic on the Route caused by queuing Total Journey Time PCUHr The aggregate time taken by traffic travelling on this Route The List can be sorted by any of the above criteria by clicking on a column header 4 5 1 2 Pedestrian Route List The Pedestrian Route List is displaye
264. es detailed information on how to install activate and setup LinSig including how to setup Network Licence Servers You do not need to read this section if LinSig has been set up for you The LinSig software is designed to have functionality to allow you to work with UK Controllers or SCATS controllers or both There are some aspects of the software that are the same whether you are working with UK Controllers or SCATS Controllers however some functionality and nomenclature only apply to either UK or SCATS Controllers This is the UK specific version of the User Guide It assumes that models are built using UK Controller Types only and will not include any detailed information that is specific only to SCATS Controllers Detailed information specific to SCATS Controllers can be found in the SCATS specific version of the User Guide 1 1 What is LinSig LinSig is a computer software package for the assessment and design of traffic signal junctions either individually or as a network comprised of a number of junctions It is used by traffic engineers to construct a model of the junction or network which can then be used to assess different designs and methods of operation Apart from stand alone junctions it can be used for multiple traffic signal junctions complex compound junctions such as signalled roundabouts and road networks which may include traffic signal pedestrian crossings and priority junctions as well as traffic si
265. eseeeeseeeeeaeeesaaess 187 4 11 2 Editing Network Control Plans ccccccccccssececeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeseaeeesaeeessaees 188 ALN Sceni NIEWA 189 4 12 1 Working with SCONALiOS ccccssccccsececeseecceseeceuceceueeececessueeeseeessusessaeeessaees 189 4 12 2 Traffic Assignment using Scenarios sesssesesseeenseerrrerrrrrerrreerrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrene 193 4 12 3 Signal Optimisation using Scenarios ccecccceececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeesanees 197 4 13 Matrix Estimation View cccccceccsecccsecceecceecceeccueceueceuseeeeccueeeueseueeeueseaeseeessenenass 202 4 13 1 Obtaining an Origin Destination Matrix cccccccccseseecseeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeessaees 202 4 13 2 Golden Rules of Matrix Estimation cccccccceecccesececeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeesaaees 203 4 13 3 Working with the Matrix Estimation VieW ccccccssecseeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeneeenes 204 4 13 4 Working with Traffic COUNTS ccccccccsseccceeeeceececeeeeeceseceueeesaneessusessueeensaees 205 4 13 5 Estimating an Origin Destination Matrix ccccccceeceseeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeseeeeseeesaeeens 208 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 13 6 Validating an Estimated Matrix or ASSIQNMENT cccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeseaees 210 414 TWORAING COUNTS VIEW siccessvreen tent enhesdeteaws eam anuesal tase A EOE a aa 212 AAD Sina TININGS VIEW sisaan an ti nalewscisateasdnatenadensieadds ante neha ten adam
266. etails of Interstage structures Stage Lengths can easily be changed by dragging Stage Change Points with the mouse LinSig dynamically updates model results for the new Stage lengths as the times are changed Alternatively Timing Dials can be used to manipulate Stage Length directly from the Network Layout View e Checking for Errors using the Error View If Errors or Warnings exist in the Model an indicator on the Status Bar at the bottom of the LinSig main Window will indicate so The Error View can be opened by double clicking on the Error Indicator This View lists all Errors and Warnings and wherever possible indicates their location Errors prevent the model from calculating results Warnings allow results to be calculated but indicate that LinSig thinks some data or setting may be dubious and needs checking Information Warnings are LinSig bringing your attention to something you need to be aware of e Signal Optimisation Signal Optimisation can be carried out to optimise signal timings for each Controller or Stage Stream individually or to optimise the network as a whole LinSig can optimise the whole Network or individual Stage Streams for either best PRC or minimum delay Whenever an optimisation is carried out the signal times are optimised for the currently modelled Scenario e View Network Results The Network Results View displays a detailed table of performance results for each Lane or Lane Group and also for each Junction and the N
267. etenneeeatee 215 4 15 1 Selecting which Controller to ViOW ccccceccceeeeceeeeeceeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeseaees 215 4 15 2 TNE Stage Stream LSE ecnin aa a aaa 216 4 15 3 The Signal TIMINGS Panel ccccccececseeeceeeceececeeeeceeeseusesseeeeeeeseueeseeessaeess 217 AVG ane TIMINGS VIEW esns 219 4 17 Interstage amp Phase Delays VIOW ccccccceccseccecccseceeeceeeccueceueccueceueeeuescaeseaeenans 221 4 17 1 Selecting which Controller to ViOW cccccecccceececeeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeeteeeeeseeesaaees 221 4 17 2 Working with the Interstage amp Phase Delays View c cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 222 4 18 Multiple Interstages View cccccceccssccseeceeeccecceueceueeeeeceueceueecaeceeeeeaeseaeseeessseenass 231 A NOs MASS Data VICW nanie hauled aindeiey a a 233 4 20 Stage MINIMUMS VIEW c ccccccsecccceececeeeeeceeeeceeeeeseueeceueeeseeeessueeeseeetseeesseeeessees 234 4 21 SCOOT Data Preparation VIEW cccccccccseecccseeeeceeeecseeeseeeesseeesseeeesseeesseeessaes 235 A 22 Network Results VICW stat di ccicclatinines n a dada agatemed daa tie anatemendad and 237 4 23 Travel Time Delay Matrix ViOW ccccccccsececeeeceeeeceeeeseeeseneeseeeeeeeeseueeseeseueeseeeeaes 243 4 24 Model Audit ViOW cccccccccsecceececeeecceeeceueeceeceucecsueesseecsueeceeeseucessueeneeessuseseeesgas 244 4 25 Audit History VIEW sssrinin tenint r LE EEE RELENE ennconacengedesdeaguecs
268. etwork as a whole The table can be sorted by clicking on any column header and columns can be added removed and resized by right clicking on a column header The amount of information shown in the Network Results View can be controlled by expanding and collapsing different Junctions using the plus and minus buttons next to each Junction in the Network Results View e Check Lane Flow Profile Graphs As part of the Traffic Model Calculations LinSig calculates detailed traffic flow profiles of platoons passing through each Lane The flow profiles can be displayed either using the Cyclic Flow Profiles View or embedded on the Network Layout View The Lane Graphs are extremely useful in studying how traffic is using a Lane and can assist with identifying any areas of the model where traffic isn t being modelled correctly 2 5 2 Modelling Sequence using Matrix Based Flows Further details of each of the steps below are available in the View Reference section of this Use Guide e Network Information Using the Network Information dialog box Network gt Network Information enter Project and user details for the Model e Add Controllers Add the traffic signal Controllers to the model using the Controller List View Controllers gt Controller List View Set the Controller type naming information and specify whether the Controller will allow multiple Stage Streams Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 26 LinSig Basics e Add Junctions Using the Network L
269. ew A Network Control Plan is new to Version 3 of LinSig and is used to assist with specifying the signal staging for larger more complex Networks Each Network Control Plan specifies a Stage Sequence for each Controller in the Network and is used to build up a set of compatible signal sequences for all Junctions This means that each Scenario can specify the signal staging for the entire Network simply by specifying a single Network Control Plan The alternative would be to specify a Stage Sequence for each Controller in every Scenario which would become time consuming and error prone as Networks become larger Network Control Plans View sa Network Control Plan Network Control Plan All Stages at all Junctions 1 All Stages at all Junctions Controller Sequence Name 2 With Ped All Reds at all Junctions C1 West Controller All Stages 51 1 2 3 52 1 2 C East Controller All Stages 1 2 3 4 The Network Control Plan View allows Network Control Plans to be viewed and edited The View consists of the following panels e The Network Control Plans List The Network Control Plans List is located to the left of the Network Control Plans View and lists all the Network Control Plans defined in the LinSig model e The Network Control Plan Stage Sequence Selection List This section is located in the right panel of the Network Control Plans View and for the Network Control Plan selected in the Control Plans List allows a Stage Sequence to be sele
270. ext gt gt Cancel The Advanced tab contained the following settings Start Displacement The Start Displacement specifies how long it takes traffic on the Lane to achieve Saturation Flow when the Lane receives a green signal LinSig assumes discharge across the Lanes stop line is zero for the duration of the Start Displacement before jumping to Saturation Flow after the Start Displacement has expired The green duration adjusted for the Start and End Displacements is called the Effective Green In the UK the Start Displacement is commonly set to 2 seconds although where justified by site or regional data this value can be changed Outside the UK where Red Ambers are not used the Start Displacement can be changed to adjust for any difference in effective green Prior to LinSig 3 1 the Start and End Displacements were sometimes used as general adjustments to Lane green times for a range of reasons LinSig 3 1 introduced a new Bonus Green Feature which provides a more flexible way of adjusting green times allowing the Start and End Displacements to be used for their intended purpose End Displacement The End Displacement is similar to the Start Displacement but applies to the end of the green period It specifies how long Saturation Flow is maintained for after the Lane s green has ended In the UK the End Displacement is commonly set to 3 seconds although where justified by site or regional data this value can be changed Optimiser Queue C
271. f Network Unlimited Licence Activate Later 3 Find your LinSig Site Licence ID This is the six character code shown on both the order documentation accompanying LinSig and also on the LinSig CD An example of its format is LJCT14 If you do not know your Licence ID please contact JOT Consultancy at this point to obtain it Having determined your Licence ID enter it as requested LinSig will also request some additional information such as Office Name and Computer User Reference Although this information is not essential it is strongly recommended to enter it as it clearly identifies to us which PC the licence has been installed on We are then able to use this information when your IT department requests a list of installed licences in your organisation when if software support is renewed Click Continue when you have entered all the information Choose Activation Method f 1 PC 4 PE or 10 FE licences In order to activate this product please enter your licence ID below then click Continue to proceed with the activation process Your licence ID wil have been supplied to you as part of your software package Licence ID LICTIA Office Location Lincoln Computer User Ref Pcoo34 Thiz should be something that can be used to reference this installation later for example a Computer Name or the User s Name or just an internal reference number Continue 4 LinSig will provide you with an Installation ID
272. f 20 appears very poor In these cases it is important to also consider the actual difference between Counts and modelled flows e The GEH Statistic The GEH statistic named after Geoffrey E Havers the GLC transport planner who invented the statistic in the 1970s combines the above two measures of relative and absolute difference to provide a single statistic measuring the fit between Counts and modelled flows The value of GEH indicates how different the Count and modelled flow would generally be regarded by a traffic engineer GEH levels in practical terms are o A GEH lt 1 indicates an excellent match between Count and modelled flow o A GEH lt 5 is generally acceptable in a larger network but should be checked in a smaller network to see if improvements can be made o A GEH gt 5 and lt 10 would be unacceptable in a small network but may be acceptable in a larger network if carefully checked and the difference explained o A GEH gt 10 would rarely be acceptable and indicates something is wrong somewhere The most likely cause is poorly matching and inconsistent counts The criteria usually used for the overall acceptability of larger network validation are 85 of Counts being matched with GEH lt 5 It should be easier to meet this criterion with smaller more densely counted Networks and a more rigid criterion may be justified in many cases Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 212 View Reference 4 13 6 2 Validating Co
273. f PCUs on give way movement s that can store without blocking non giving way movement s 12 00 The only setting on the tab is the number of PCU at the front of the storage area which do not block Ahead traffic In this case as shown above this is 2 PCU with the third Right Turn Storage PCU blocking the Ahead traffic 7 1 7 Example 7 Mixed Right Turn Opposed Movements and Ahead Traffic in Multiple Lanes In this example the ahead traffic can choose one of two Lanes In the right Lane however any ahead traffic choosing this Lane must share with the right turning traffic in the Lane Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 303 In modelling this example the difficulty is in deciding on how the Ahead traffic will distribute between the Ahead Lanes bearing in mind that once the offside lane becomes blocked ahead traffic will be reluctant to use it The Lane on the offside can be set up as illustrated in Example 6 In previous versions of LinSig trial and error was required to determine the appropriate split of ahead traffic between Lanes In LinSig 3 the process or more straightforward as the delay based assignment considers the delay to ahead traffic in both Lanes and places just enough ahead traffic in the right Lane to give equal ahead delays in both Lanes s z Arm 1 London Road 4 Lane Allocation Assigned traffic Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 304 Examples 7 1 8 Example 8 Mixed Right Turn
274. f Version 3 A 4 Activating the LinSig Software Licence LinSig includes a sophisticated copy protection mechanism to prevent software theft by unlicensed copying or installation of the software The system has been designed to place as little burden as possible on legitimate licensed users whilst discouraging casual copying of the software We regret having to require activation however it has become increasingly necessary over the past few years due to a high number of often inadvertent but serious multiple breaches of licence conditions The Activation procedure in LinSig 3 is identical to that in LinSig Version 2 A 4 1 Definitions The following definitions are useful in understanding the activation process e Installation ID A 30 character code that is unique for an installation of LinSig on a particular PC The Installation ID is created by LinSig and is based on a number of physical characteristics of the PC e Activation Code A 36 character code provided by JCT Consultancy to unlock or activate the software on the PC The Activation Code is calculated to be a match for an Installation ID and is therefore unique for each PC Only if a copy of LinSig s Installation ID has a correctly matching Activation Code will LinSig run Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 307 e Licence Server A separate program that hands out licences to LinSig Workstations This is only used on sites with Unlimited Network Licen
275. ffic Routes are comprised of a sequence of individual Lanes and Lane Connectors from one Traffic Zone to another e Pedestrian Routes Pedestrian Routes are comprised of a sequence of Pedestrian Links and Pedestrian Link Connectors from one Pedestrian Zone to another The main purpose of Routes is to specify tratfic or Pedestrian flows through the Network at a very detailed level Each Route is allocated a flow either manually or automatically LinSig Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 5 The Route List View 151 then aggregates the Route flows to calculate Lane flows and any other traffic flow information required 25 Network Layout View a ee w 8 x BA A BLE sle ALLE S IO SIS elel AEE Al Find Junction O Find Arm zl m g f TAA i e IOo E J1 1 Main Road EB at Ped X Arm J1 im Arm J21 Main Road Eastbou J2 1 Main Road Eastbound Arm J1 4 e a mad e J1 4 1 e a fe J1 2 1 H 261 Arm J1 2 Main Road WB at Ped X Arm J2 6 Main Road Westbound ___ ap Jt Ped Crossing z PRC 101 i Total Tr ad Delay 2 0 peu 5 Ave Route Delay Per Ped ae s Ped 5 Controller 1 B we Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All v Arm All Lane All Contains Junc All Arm All vi Lane All Destination Zone All Baa The Route List View lists all the Traffic or Pedestrian Routes through the Network LinSig scans the Network whenever its structure changes and discov
276. fic Flows can be entered or edited in two different ways These are e Lane Based Flow Editing Mode on the Network Layout View This graphical drag and drop editing method is the easiest way of quickly entering Lane Based Flows stop Line Lane Flow Outaol Incoming Flow Fiow Flow 150 e 150 A 200 S 200 a Arm J1 3 Arm J2 1 Main Road Eastbound EN J Sea 7 Arm J2 4 Main Roa e Lane Based Flow Tabs of the Edit Lane Dialog Box The Edit Lane dialog box provides one or more tabs which allow detailed editing of Lane Based Flows on a Lane This method is simply an alternative non graphical method of entering the same data as the graphical method 7 ih Edit Lane J2 1 1 3 Gi Lane Based Flows Applies to this Lane Based Flow Group 4M Peak Lane Based Flows st fc corel ms aimake Total Layer Flow 150 aa a resign ray nit h sro yee ustomrion pau fo en eee in the Network Layout View Lane Based Flows Summary Incoming Flows Outgoing Flows Flows General Traffic Ml Flows Buses Movmt to J2 4 1 Ahead Name EE J 1 1 1 Ahead General Traffic EE 32 4 1 Ahead General Traffic EA Ee Eee ee cS a ee Consistency Check This page displays the Lane Based Flove Total Flow 150 Total incoming 150 both incoming and outgoing for this layer Use the Add Edit and Delete buttons to edit flows on the layers for this lane Uniform Flow 9 Total entering do
277. fic passing through each Lane which is used to refine the modelling of queues delays and capacities on each Lane Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 40 Essential Background Lane Based Flows Lane Based Traffic Flows are an alternative simpler way of defining traffic flows compared with an OD Matrix and Routes The following information is used to determine traffic flow on Lanes o Total Lane Stop Line Traffic Flow The total stop line flow for the lane is specified in PCU This is obtained externally from LinSig using traffic counts a strategic traffic model or any alternative manual method o Incoming Turning Movements Turning movements entering a Lane from other Lanes This will also be an Outgoing Turning Movement from an upstream Lane o Outgoing Turning Movements Turning movements leaving the Lane to other Lanes This will also be an incoming Turning Movement from a downstream Lane Lane Based Traffic Flows contain no information on how traffic routes through the Network other than the immediate upstream and downstream Lanes feeding and being fed by a Lane lf necessary Lane Based Flow Layers can be used to disaggregate traffic flow ona Lane by traffic type eg buses by movement or any other criteria 3 2 2 1 Choosing Which Flow Definition Method to Use Each traffic flow definition method has advantages and disadvantages It is important to understand these when choosing how to structure a network The advantages of Matrix
278. for The current format for the selected text is shown in the settings boxes on the Note Editor s main toolbar e Choose anew font font size colour and other options such as bold and underline e Some settings such as justification centring and bullet point only apply to a whole paragraph A background colour can also be selected which applies to the whole Note e When all formatting changes have been made click OK to apply the changes to the Note Repositioning and Resizing a Note Each Note can be moved by dragging with the mouse and resized by dragging the Note s borders or corners with the mouse Each paragraph within the Note will be wrapped to fit within the Note s borders 4 3 14 2 Adding a QuickNote to the Network Layout View A QuickNote is a preconfigured Note containing dynamic fields which can be quickly added to the Network Layout View to display dynamic information regarding a Lane To add a QuickNote e Right Mouse click on the Lane for which the QuickNote is to be added e Choose a QuickNote type from the QuickNotes pop out on the pop up menu e Drag the QuickNote to its desired position and drop it by clicking with the mouse The QuickNote will update to reflect changes in the model s data 4 3 14 3 Working with Labels on the Network Layout View Labels can be used as an alternative to Notes on the Network Layout View Adding Labels to the Network Layout View A Label is added to the Network Layout View as fo
279. for a single Stage Stream on a Controller e The Stage order for a Stage Sequence from the Stage Sequence View for a single Stage Stream If desired multiple Stage Diagrams can be used for more than one Controller or Stage Stream eS Network Layout View W fol ss w BIB 2 S 21 2 2 Se LAE Sah ke SIS Bf AAAA ER A Find Junction Find Arm gla ____ 0 e a Arm 5 5 Arm 2 High Street AN AN A Arm1 London Road TAN Arm 4 4 1 C High StLondon Rd Park St PRC 260 Total TrefficDelsy 19 4 paHr Ave Route Delay Per Ped 63 6 s Ped 7 488S Wed E WY Arm amp Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All v Arm All Lane All Contains Junc All v Arm All Lane All Destination Zone All w A 4 3 13 1 Adding a Stage Diagram to the Network Layout View A Stage Diagram can be added to the Network Layout View as follows e Choose Add Stage Diagram from the Stage Diagram pop out menu on the Network menu e Click on the Network Layout View where you wish to create the Stage Diagram The Edit Stage Diagram dialog box appears to allow you to set the diagram s options e Select the mode of the Stage Diagram The mode governs what the Stage Diagram shows The options are Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 132 View Reference o Show Available Stages This option displays all the Stages defined in the Stage View and represents all
280. for every one PCU of storage in front of the stop line e Right Turn Factor The Right Turn Factor controls the amount of bonus capacity due to right turning traffic storing in front of the stop line The default value is 0 5 and it is generally appropriate to retain this value unless site data suggests a different value The Right Turn Factor is explained in more detail in the Modelling section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 88 View Reference Non Blocking Storage The Non Blocking tab is only available when the Lane contains a mixture of give way and non give way movements It is principally used for situations where an opposed right turn movement may block a non give way movement usually ahead fem Edit Lane 1 2 When mixed giving way and non giving way movements on this link General Lane Details Total number of PCU on give way movenent s that can store without blocking non gring way movement s 2 00 Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed Sat flow data MB Flows General Traffic Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Movmt to 6 1 Right Storage in front of Stopline Non blocking Storage lt lt Previous Next gt gt OK Cancel The only setting on this tab is e Total Number of PCUs on Give Way Movements that can store without blocking Non Giving Way Movements This value is the number of PCUs on the give way movement usually the right turn which can queue before blocking the non giving way movement usually the ahead or ahead left movemen
281. g project The correct pattern of OD movements is also crucial when modelling Networks of closely spaced coordinated signal junctions 4 13 2 Golden Rules of Matrix Estimation Matrix Estimation has been used for many years in larger transportation based models and in some quarters has gained a reputation as being a black art For anyone who has not encountered matrix estimation before the following golden rules will hopefully put the method in context Matrix estimation is the classic garbage in garbage out method Carefully checked and used good quality traffic flows covering a large proportion of the Network will generally produce an acceptably accurate cost effective matrix Poor quality counts which are sparse out of date inconsistent don t allow for all sources or sinks of traffic are unlikely to produce an acceptable matrix Matrix estimation is not a point and shoot method Careful checking of count data is required before using the technique in LinSig Keep refining the matrix until it is sufficiently accurate The first run of matrix estimation should not just be accepted and used Often careful examination of the estimated matrix will suggest adjustments which can be made to the counts prior matrix or Network to produce a better matrix As LinSig Networks tend to be smaller with less route choice than larger transportation models on which matrix estimation has traditionally been used and given that for mo
282. g settings set on Lane Connectors This allows the different behaviour of Buses to normal traffic to be modelled This includes issues such as bus stop times and increased platoon dispersion of Bus traffic Normally Bus traffic will be specified directly on Bus Routes between Bus Zones rather than assigning an OD Matrix to Bus Routes Snas Y r Arm 1 London Road 2 gt o e Bus Zones Arm 5 Arm 2 High Street A gt 600 y N A 200 Arm 4 1000 As the number of movements which LinSig needs to model increases proportional to the square of the number of Zones excessive use of many small Zones will slow down the traffic model and optimiser considerably Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 100 View Reference 4 3 8 1 Creating Zones To create a Zone e Choose Add Zone from the Zones pop out menu on the Network menu e Position the Zone in the Network Layout View and drop it by clicking with the mouse e LinSig will automatically connect the Zone to the nearest possible Entry and Exit Arm e The Create Zone dialog box is displayed to configure the new Zone Create Zone fone Arm Entering ane Network Arm Exiting 3 me Network fone Bus Zone all routes will be Bus Routes Bus flows should still be entered in PCUs e The Create Zone dialog box allows the following settings to be specified o The Zone s Name Zones are always named as a letter Zones can be nam
283. ge Length Matrix The Prohibited Stage Change and Interstage Length Matrix displays an Interstage matrix for the current Stage Stream B Interstage View g Previous 2 5 J Hegt gt Edit Critical Phase Orde Prohibited Moves Stream 1 r eae I The matrix displays the following e The currently Selected Interstage is shown with a yellow background and corresponds to the Interstage shown in the Interstage Structure panel e Interstages which are prohibited are marked with a cross Interstages which are automatically prohibited by LinSig for example to avoid violating rules regarding terminating Filter Phases are shown in blue Interstages which have been explicitly banned by the user are shown in red e Permitted Interstages display the Interstage duration calculated by LinSig This is calculated from the Phase Intergreens and Phase Delays involved in the Interstage 4 17 2 2 The Current Interstage and Selecting an Interstage When LinSig needs to display or perform an action on an Interstage it needs to know which one to use The Interstage View allows an Interstage to be selected by either Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 17 Interstage amp Phase Delays View 223 e Clicking an Interstage in the Prohibited Stage Change Matrix The selected Interstage is highlighted with a yellow background e Selecting an Interstage from the drop down list in the Interstage View toolbar e Using the Previous an
284. ge View toolbar can be used to adjust the screen display size of Interstage Diagrams 4 18 1 5 Adjusting the Interstage Diagrams Time Axis Scaling The scaling of the Interstage Diagrams time axis can be changed by double clicking on the time axis of any Interstage Diagram This allows the time axis width and tick interval to be adjusted 4 18 1 6 Printing the Interstage Diagrams The Interstage Diagrams can be printed by choosing Print or Print Preview from the File menu This will display the Print Options dialog box which allows the layout of Interstage Diagrams on the printed page to be set LinSig will then use the order of Interstage Diagrams in the Multiple Interstage View to determine the position of each Diagram on the printed page More information on Printing and setting general Print options is available in the General View Features section 4 18 1 7 Exporting the Interstage Diagrams to Graphics Software The Interstage Diagrams can be exported to other graphics software either as a Windows Metafile or in DXF format which can be imported into most Cad software Further details are given in the General View Features section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 19 Phase Data View 233 4 19 Phase Data View The Phase Data View shows information for each Phase on a single LinSig Controller in a tabular format The View can be opened by choosing Phase Data View from the Controllers menu iS Phase D
285. gnal junctions Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 Introduction LinSig has been available in a number of versions since 1985 and is the original software package for UK detailed traffic signal design The software is used by the majority of UK highway authorities and consultants at several hundred locations making it the most widely used traffic signal design and analysis software in the UK Throughout its life it has been regularly and extensively upgraded including several complete rewrites as computer technology and user requirements have changed and evolved The idea behind LinSig is straightforward in that it models operation at traffic signal junctions in a similar way to how real traffic signal controllers at junctions actually work This means that LinSig takes account of the features and constraints of the controlling equipment thereby ensuring that all modelling accurately reflects how existing junctions work and how any design proposals would operate if implemented LinSig is particularly appropriate for option testing and has been designed to make it easy to test large numbers of options quickly allowing unfeasible designs or scheme options to be quickly rejected or improved 1 2 What s New in Version 3 of LinSig LinSig for Windows Version 3 was released in 2009 and introduced a number of major new features These include e Multiple Traffic Signal Controllers e Lane based Modelling giving Improved Modelling of Short Lanes
286. h the Multiple Interstage View is primarily intended for printing purposes many of the Interstage Views features such as Phase Delay adjustment and Interstage optimisation can also be carried out in the Multiple Interstage View 16H Multiple Interstages View Diagram Size Stage Change 1 gt 2 12 16 20 12 16 20 12 16 20 poo 12 16 20 Time in Interstage sec Stage Change 2 gt 3 12 16 20 l 12 16 20 12 16 20 12 16 20 Time in Interstage sec Time in Interstage sec 4 18 1 1 Adding Interstage Diagrams Interstage Diagrams are added to the Multiple Interstage View by right clicking on the View and choosing Add Interstage Diagram from the pop up menu LinSig will ask which Interstage to add before displaying the Interstage Diagram in the View Choosing Show all Allowed Interstage Diagrams adds all non prohibited Interstages in one step 4 18 1 2 Deleting an Interstage Diagram To delete an Interstage Diagram right click the diagram with the mouse and choose Delete Interstage Diagram from the pop up menu Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 232 View Reference 4 18 1 3 Repositioning Interstage Diagrams Interstage Diagrams can be repositioned in the View by selecting a Diagram with the mouse and dragging it to a new position The new position will be indicated by a red insertion line 4 18 1 4 Adjusting the size of Interstage Diagrams The Diagram Size slider on the Multiple Intersta
287. hase Delay List panel This will create a new Phase Delay and display the New Phase Delay dialog box New Phase Delay Stage Change 1 3 2 Phase Value Phase Delay Type Gaining Only i a OF Cancel The following information is required for a new Phase Delay e The Phase Delay s Stage Change Select the Stage Change associated with this Phase Delay from the drop down list If a Phase has already been selected only Stage Changes compatible with this Phase are displayed e The Phase Delay s Phase Select the Phase associated with this Phase Delay from the drop down list If a stage change has already been entered only the Phases compatible with this Stage Change are shown e The Phase Delay Value Enter the length of the Phase Delay in seconds e The Phase Delay Type The Phase Delay type is only required for Phase Gaining Delays LinSig will use the Stage Change and Phase to determine whether the Phase Delay being entered is a Phase Gaining Delay More information on Phase Delay Types is given in Phase Delay Types above Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 226 View Reference Editing a Phase Delay Phase Delays are edited by selecting the Phase Delay in the Phase Delay List and clicking Edit This opens the Edit Phase Delay dialog box Edit Phase Delay Stage Change Phase Value Phase Delay Type Gaining Only i a OF Cancel The following information can be edited for Phase De
288. he Zone is used to split the Network into regions the model will be more accurate if traffic leaving a Zone to enter a region uses the cyclic flow profile shape of traffic Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 84 View Reference modelled as terminating on the other side of the region boundary This setting achieves this by profiling tratfic leaving a Zone based on the cyclic flow profile of traffic terminating at the Lane s previous upstream Lane More information on splitting a Network into regions is provided in the Essential Background section LinSig Give Way Model Several of the tabs in the Edit Lane Dialog refer to the LinSig Give Way model The Give Way Model is summarised here and further information is available in Give Way Lanes in LinSig in Section 3 Essential Background The give way model used in LinSig is a standard linear equation model that has been used in a number of modelling packages for many years This method has the advantage of being simple to use as well as being able to closely approximate a range of other give way models such as Tanners Formula and gap acceptance methods The model can be used to model left turn slips at signal junctions opposed right turns within signal junctions as well as purely priority junctions For right turn Lanes the give way model is only one component of the LinSig right turn model The right turn model is described in more detail in the modelling section The model is used to predict
289. he Lanes contained by the Junction 4 12 3 3 Optimising Signal Timings for a Single Stream To optimise signal timings for a single Stage Stream click Optimise for Delay or Optimise for PRC in the Stage Stream List in the Signal Timings View LinSig will adjust the Stage Lengths and offset of just the individual Stage Stream to minimise traffic delay or maximise PRC Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 12 Scenario View 199 4 12 3 4 Controlling the Signal Optimiser using Optimiser Settings The optimisation process can be controlled using optimiser settings which are changed using the Optimiser Settings dialog box Optimiser Settings gt amp Settings for this model W Optimise pedestrian and non traffic Stages to min If Stops Valuation for Delay sec per stop pcu Optimiser Bus Delay Weighting 1000 Grouping of Controllers Streams when optimising offsets Use Offset Optimiser Groups W Display these Optimiser Settings each time you optimise cancel The Optimiser Settings dialog box by default opens every time the optimiser is run This can easily be switched off if optimiser settings are only being used infrequently Alternatively the optimiser settings dialog can be displayed by choosing Optimiser Settings from the Optimiser pop out menu on the Modelling menu The Optimiser Settings available include Optimise Pedestrian and non traffic Stages to minimum Setting this option tells LinSig s op
290. he Routes for this Scenario replacing existing Route Flows e If necessary Fine Tune the Route Flow Distribution In cases where LinSig s estimate of Route Flows is not accurate enough Route Flows can be manually changed to reflect uneven distribution of traffic between Routes Route Flows can be edited by double clicking a Route in the Route List View The Actual and Difference Flow Matrices in the Traffic Flow View should be used to monitor the total Route Flows between Zones for the Scenario to ensure the total amount of traffic on Routes is the same as that specified in the Desired Flows Matrix After editing Route Flows can be locked to prevent subsequent automatic assignments changing them e Signal Optimisation Signal Optimisation can be carried out to optimise signal timings for each Controller or Stage Stream individually or to optimise the network as a whole LinSig can optimise the whole Network or individual Stage Streams for either best PRC or minimum delay Whenever an optimisation is carried out the signal times are optimised for the currently modelled Scenario e Investigate Reassignment After optimising signal timings it will often be appropriate to rerun the traffic assignment to take into account reassignment due to delay changes caused by signal timing changes e View Network Results The Network Results View displays a detailed table of performance results for each Lane or Lane Group and also for each Junction and the Netwo
291. he phases are in different Stage Streams As LinSig does not allow intergreens between Phases in different Streams you cannot enter a value in this cell Bu bee it 4 8 2 3 To Change an Intergreen To change an Intergreen click on the Intergreen Matrix cell you wish to change and enter the new value The Intergreen will be updated when you move away from the cell 4 8 2 4 To Delete an Intergreen To delete an Intergreen select the appropriate cell and delete the value using the delete key The Intergreen will be updated when you move away from the cell Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 8 Intergreen View 173 Tip Remember that a zero length Intergreen is NOT the same as having no Intergreen If no Intergreen exists between two Phases they can overlap If a zero Intergreen exists they do not require any clearance time but they cannot overlap 4 8 3 Using Multiple Intergreen Sets LinSig 3 1 and later allows up to three different Intergreen sets to be defined These can be switched between at any time and are useful when modelling situations with variable intergreens the most common being Puffin pedestrian crossings Multiple Intergreen sets are enabled by selecting the Show Intergreen Set Options option in the Intergreen toolbar The Intergreen View will allow three different sets of intergreens to be used The currently used set is selected in the Intergreen sets section of the Intergreen View Intergreen View Controller 2
292. hen running In the example above the phase delay enables LinSig to suggest that a Phase Controller minimum of 5 seconds is adequate However if we consider the situation on a change to a different Stage upon which there are no phase delays then a controller minimum of 5 seconds would be unsuitable LinSig therefore computes the controller minimum with regard to all permitted stage changes hence adding or deleting prohibited stage changes may well cause controller minimums to be changed 5 1 2 Phase Intergreens A Phase Intergreen is the period of time between the termination of the green signals for one phase and the beginning of the green on another phase Intergreens should be calculated by locating conflict points on a plan and using the procedure detailed in TAL 1 06 to determine Intergreen durations This is available from the DFT s web site Currently http www dit gov uk stellent groups dft_roads documents page dft_roads_611509 pdf The following good practice points should be observed when using Intergreens e It is never normally appropriate to simply guess Intergreens as 5 seconds as sometimes occurs in preliminary junction designs As well as being very bad practice it can lead to unexpected falls in capacity when Intergreens are calculated properly later in the design process e It is important to carefully calculate pedestrian to traffic and traffic to pedestrian intergreens as they can often have a significant impact on
293. here an action Is performed on a Stage for example when deleting a Stage 4 9 2 3 Creating a New Stage To create a new Stage choose Add Stage from the Stages Menu or Right Click at the end of the current Stages and choose Add Stage from the pop up menu The Stage will be created with no Phases running 4 9 2 4 Inserting a Stage To insert a Stage between two existing Stages select one of the Stages and choose Insert Stage before Selected Stage or Insert Stage after Selected Stage as appropriate from the Stages Menu As Stages must always be in numerical order with no gaps in the sequence existing Stages will be renumbered when a Stage is inserted Remember that the numerical order of Stages in the Controller does not imply that they must be run in this order in LinSig Stage Sequences Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 176 View Reference 4 9 2 5 Renumbering a Stage To renumber a Stage select it with the mouse and drag it to its new position in the Stage View The other Stages in the Stream will be renumbered accordingly 4 9 2 6 Changing a SCATS Based Phase Name When using SCATS Based Terminology mode each SCATS Phase equivalent to a UK Stage can be renamed as follows e Click on the Phase to be renamed with the right mouse button and choose Edit Phase Name from the pop up menu The Edit Phase dialog will open e Either choose a new Phase Name for the Phase or the Phase for which this Phase is an
294. hich can then be extrapolated throughout the peak hour For example if the total delay on a Lane in the typical cycle is 2 3 pcuh the cycle time is 90sec and the modelled period is one hour then as there are 3600 90 40 cycles in the modelled period the total delay for the hour is 40 x 2 3 92 pcuh This also results in a reduction in the computing power required for calculating the flow profiles by 40 times There are in fact three different cyclic flow profiles used for each Lane These are e Arrive In Profile This represents the profile of traffic entering the Lane throughout the cycle e Accept Profile This represents the profile of traffic which is allowed to leave the Lane in each time slice The accept profile depends on the whether the Lane is opposed e Leave Out Profile This represents the traffic leaving the Lane in each time slice The Figures below show examples of each of the above profiles Arrive Profile The Arrive Profile shown above shows the arrival profile of traffic at the Lane s stop line This profile is derived from the Leave profiles from one or more upstream Lanes after they have been adjusted to allow for the time to travel between stop lines and for the dispersion of the platoon whilst travelling along the Lane 2400 2000 1600 1200 HOO 400 T 14 2 20 35 42 49 56 Arrive Profile Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 1 The LinSig Traffic Model 33 Accept Profile The Accept
295. hrough a Lane can be displayed as follows e Select the graph for the Lane in question e Right Click on the graph with the mouse A pop up menu will appear e Choose Show Route x Only where x is the Route number of one of the Routes through the Lane e The graph will show the Flow Profile for the individual Route through the Lane e Add additional graphs for the Lane changing each of them to show a different Route as desired Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 27 Cyclic Flow Profiles View 255 Showing the Individual Route Flow Components on a Single Graph As well as splitting a Flow Profile graph into separate graphs for each Route the Flow Profile View can also show a single graph for the Lane or Lane Group as described above in Showing Inflows and Outflows Separately displayed disaggregated by Route Link 6 1 All Routes Link 6 1 All Routes 5000 5000 5000 5000 4000 4000 4000 4000 3000 3000 3000 3000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Each Route Flow Profile is shown as a separate layer in the graph The layered Route Flow Profiles cannot be shown on a combined inflow outflow graph as the display becomes extremely complex and difficult to understand Displaying a Graph Showing Route Flows as Route Layers A graph can be displayed with Route Layers as follows e Right click on a graph and choose to display either Inflows or outflows from the pop up menu e Ensure Aggregate all Routes o
296. ht turners even if the lane also has an adjacent short left turn lane Option to enter lane based turning flows as percentages instead of absolute PCU values Ability to enter Flow Group specific lane connector parameters Option to add a Minimum Flow value for traffic leaving give way lanes Extended the existing VISSIM interface for compatibility with VISSIM 5 30 UK controllers only Many user interface improvements to aid ease of use 1 5 Software Support Full Software Support for LinSig is available free of charge for the first 12 months after purchasing a brand new site When upgrading a site from an earlier version any existing Software Support is carried over to Version 3 Software Support provides the following benefits Free telephone email advice on the use of LinSig Basic design tips amp advice for schemes being designed using LinSig A full consultancy service is available at additional cost if more detailed advice is required Free access to the LinSig Software Support Web Site This web site includes advice on using the software frequently asked questions FAQs and news of software updates Free software updates which can be downloaded from the LinSig Software Support website These include bug fixes minor feature updates and more significant additional feature updates for a limited period after a major release Major new versions are not included Discounts off major new versions of LinSig Free atten
297. ian Link Connector joining it to the starting Pedestrian Link e Edit the new Pedestrian Link and Link Connector as appropriate 4 3 11 2 Editing Pedestrian Link Connectors Pedestrian Link Connectors are edited as follows e Select a Pedestrian Link Connector by clicking it with the mouse e Choose Edit Pedestrian Link Connector from the Pedestrian Link Connectors pop out menu on the Network Menu This opens the Edit Pedestrian Link Connector dialog box Edit Pedestrian Link Connector Mean Walk Time Between Crossings 5 3 OK Cancel e The Edit Pedestrian Link Connector dialog box allows the Pedestrian Link Connector s only setting to be edited o Mean Walk Time Between Crossings The walk time between crossings is the time for a Pedestrian to walk across a pedestrian island or section of footway from the end of one pedestrian crossing to the start of another 4 3 11 3 Deleting a Pedestrian Link Connector A Pedestrian Link Connector can be deleted by selecting it with the mouse and choosing Delete Pedestrian Link Connector from the Lanes pop out menu on the Network Menu Deleting a Pedestrian Link Connector also deletes any Pedestrian Routes passing through the Pedestrian Link Connector Any Pedestrian flow allocated to Pedestrian Routes which are deleted will be de allocated and Junction s Pedestrian Flow Matrix in the Traffic Flows View will show a flow deficit Pedestrian Route Flows should
298. ic Total Layer 100 Manage Layers Available Lane Based Flow Entry Mode To This Lane When enabled this allows Move to another Sear yak iam F jo m viewing and direct editing of Layer lane flaws using drag and drop Incoming Flows Outgoing Flows in the Network Layout View MB Flows General Traffic a tgoing B Flows Buses Movmt to J2 4 1 Ahead Wia ineaminatian BE 2 4 1 Ahead General Traffic Add Total incoming o Add Total outgoing 100 Consistency Check This page displays the Lane Based Flows Total Flow 100 Total incomin o both incoming and outgoing for this layer a Use the Add Edit and Delete buttons to oe Berries E EN i edit flows on the layers for this lane Uniform Flow 0 Total entering downstream flow 100 Te ei bel SE a i a Apparent fow loss 100 Flow from this lane leaving network D Tea a eS Be oe lt lt Previous Next gt gt OK Cancel ji _ L wees Lane Based Flows can be added using the Edit Lane dialog box as follows e Double Click a Lane which requires flows to be added This will open the Edit Lane dialog box for this Lane e As multiple Flow Layers exist within the model LinSig does not know which ones are used by this Lane so the Manage Layers Available to this Lane button must be used to specify which Layers are used A new Lane Based Flow Layer tab will be created for each Layer e Select the Flow Layer tab for the Flow Layer on whi
299. icative green arrow is controlling the Lane e Turners in Intergreen PCU The flow leaving a Give Way Lane during the Intergreen e Uniform Delay PCUHr The total Uniform Delay suffered by traffic over the modelled time period A more detailed description of Uniform Delay is provided in the Modelling Section e Random amp Oversaturation Delay PCUHr The total combined Random amp Oversaturation Delay suffered by traffic over the modelled time period A more detailed description of Random amp Oversaturation Delay is provided in the Modelling section e Storage Area Uniform Delay PCUHr The Uniform Delay suffered by traffic in the Right Turn Storage Area in front of the stop line This is only applicable for right turn give way Lanes e Total Delay PCUHr The sum of Uniform Uniform Storage and Random amp Oversaturation Delay This is the total aggregate delay suffered by traffic using the modelled Network e Average Delay per PCU sec The Average Delay for each PCU on the Lane averaged over the modelled time period e Uniform Stops Stops The Total Uniform Stops over the modelled time period e Average Stops Per PCU Stops PCU The Average number of Stops per PCU averaged over the modelled time period e Back of Uniform Queue at the end of Red PCU The extent of the Uniform Queue on a Lane at the time of the end of the Lane s controlling Phase s red period Traffic may continue to add to the back of the queu
300. ich can be opened by choosing Edit Lane Based Flows from the Traffic Flows menu or from the Network Layout View s toolbar Edit Lane Based Flow layers 1 B ceneral Traffic 2 Euse Creating a New Flow Layer A new Flow Layer can be created by clicking Add layer in the Edit Flow Layers dialog box This creates a new Flow Layer and opens the Edit Layer dialog box which can be used to set its initial settings as described below in Editing Flow Layers Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 104 View Reference Editing a Flow Layer A Flow Layer is editing by selecting the Layer in the Edit Flow Layers dialog and clicking on Edit Layer This opens the Edit Flow Layer dialog box Edit Lane Based Layer Layer Number 2 Name Buses Colour E i This layer models buses OK Cancel The Edit Flow Layer dialog box allows the following settings to be edited Flow Layer Number This allows a Flow Layers number to be changed reordering the list of Flow Layers Flow Layer Name The Flow Layer Name describes the Flow Layer with a title such as Buses Traffic to Development or HCV Traffic Layer Colour The Colour LinSig will use when displaying Flows on the Flow Layer on the Network Layout View This Layer Models Buses This setting tells LinSig to model traffic on this Layer using the bus traffic sub model This allows bus stop times to be modelled and also uses a different platoon dispersion mode to
301. ier to understand and visually tidier The key elements of this structure are e Junction Inbound Arms Lanes These are the Arms amp Lanes on which traffic approaches a Junction s stop line and which model capacity at the stop line e Junction Exit Arms Lanes These Arms amp Lanes are used purely to assist with Network structure and do not need to model capacity queues or delays The Lanes should be modelled with unconstrained infinite saturation flow Lanes and with a nominal length of 1 PCU e Junction Turning Lane Connectors The Junction Turning Lane Connectors are used to represent the turning movements within the Junction The cruise time allocated to these connectors should be the time traffic takes at turning cruise speed from the stop line of the Lane on which it enters the Junction to the point it leaves the Junction This will usually be 2 10 seconds for a typical size of signal junction e Inter Junction Lane Connectors The Inter Junction Connectors represent the road between the exit from one Junction the exit point being the upstream Junction s Exit Arm to the next Junction s stop line Remember that cruise times for the whole distance are specified on the Lane Connectors not the Lanes The cruise time allocated to these Lane Connectors should be the time traffic takes at cruise speed from the exit of the upstream junction to the stop line of the downstream junction f 32 Network Layout View a Eoee Sia
302. iew e Multiple Interstages View e Phase Data View e Stage Minimums View e SCOOT Data Preparation View e Phase Based Design Tool e VISSIM Interface View The Results and Reporting Views are e Scenario View e Network Results View e Travel Time Delay matrix View e Model Auditing View e Audit History View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 50 View Reference e Cycle Time Optimisation View e The Report Builder e Cyclic Flow Profiles View e Time Distance Diagrams View Other Miscellaneous Views e Error View e Undo History View e Lane Data Grid View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 1 General View Features 51 4 1 General View Features Some features are common to a number of Views 4 1 1 Always on Top The Always on top feature allows a View to be kept on top of all other Views This is useful if you wish to prevent a smaller View becoming lost behind a larger View Always on Top can be switched on for a view by clicking the pin icon located to the right of each View s Title Bar Current Selection 8 2 2 21 8 2 Always On Top Off Current Selection i n nET z rae TR Eg Always On Top On If two overlapping Views are both set to always on top the most recently used View will be on top Tip Avoid having a large View with Always on Top switched on as it is very easy to lose smaller Views behind it 4 1 2 Zoom and Pan The ma
303. ifficult networks under guidance from JCT Software Support It is recommended that the advanced settings are not changed unless instructed to do so by JCT Entry Lane Balancing LinSig assigns traffic to Routes by attempting to achieve equal Lane flows on Network Entry Arms No account is taken of flow distribution on arms other than the first Arm on a Route This method is an alternative method to delay based assignment and may be useful in some cases for single Junction models and signal roundabouts Traffic Zones to Assign This option allows only traffic from a subset of Zones to be assigned Generally Zones are assigned in mutually connected sets each set being associated with a Matrix based Network region 4 12 2 6 Improving Assignment Run Times in Larger Networks In larger networks the delay based assignment may take from several seconds to a few minutes to run The following factors are worth considering Assignment run time is heavily influenced by the level of Route choice in the Network If many weaving movements have been allowed and permitted routes have not been checked properly LinSig may have many choices of unlikely Routes on which to place traffic when assigning This can significantly extend run times and also lead to overly complex routing in some cases The best approach is to only allow weaving movements where they are likely to happen rather than allowing weaving to occur in all situations Excessive use of Internal
304. ilar way to LinSig 2 These are modelled in a significantly more basic way than LinSig 3 and should only be used where there is a specific reason to do so for example compatibility with a LinSig 2 model Further information is available in the Configuring Lane Settings section 4 3 6 1 Understanding Lanes in LinSig 3 LinSig 3 includes a range of new more detailed flare and blocking sub models which allow LinSig to model a much wider range of standard lane arrangements without the need for simplifying assumptions than previous versions of LinSig or many other similar models The new sub models mean that model structure is much simplified and more intuitive For example LinSig 3 no longer uses Links to group Lanes Generally lane geometry can be entered directly and LinSig deals internally with issues such as the interaction of short and Long Lanes and Lanes receiving different signalling Whilst LinSig models a much wider range of standard lane arrangements more intuitively there are still a number of golden rules to remember when constructing a model These are e Each real lane is modelled as a single LinSig Lane Real lanes are never grouped together into a single LinSig Lane with a higher Saturation Flow as was the case with Links in earlier versions e A Short Lane is always associated with an adjacent Long Lane which feeds traffic into it Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 67 e A Long Lane can only be a
305. iled data it has the potential for introducing significant inaccuracy into the model It is recommended that a greater emphasis is placed on ensuring capacities are modelled correctly whilst still checking that modelled queues are acceptable LinSig models queue lengths in three components similar to those used to model delay Uniform Queuing The Uniform queue is the cyclic queue which grows and dissipates every cycle when the Lane is below capacity LinSig calculates the maximum queue in the modelled typical cycle and assumes this will be same for all cycles in the modelled period The maximum Uniform queue is the maximum length of the back of the queue as LinSig allows for the fact that vehicles are still joining the back of the queue after vehicles have started leaving the front of the queue The maximum back of queue occurs when the discharging front of the queue catches up the back of the queue which usually will be lengthening more slowly This is illustrated in the figure below Link 8 4 Queue clears as front of queue catches up back of queue 4 A 4 Back of queue building at arrival rate Flow _ Front of queue 1 discharging at 1 saturation flow rate 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 Time in Cycle t Queue clearance time Start of End of Traffic arriving after Red Red this time on green does not stop Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 38 Essential Background Oversaturated Queuing When a Lane is oversaturated a residual queue
306. in graphical layout Views can be zoomed and panned using both the toolbars and the mouse Zooming can be carried out using the zoom toolbar located on the main toolbar of each of the zoomable Views 91 21 82 Zoom Toolbar The toolbar buttons are from left to right e Zoom to fit View contents to Window e Zoom View in e Zoom View out e Zoom to Max e Zoom to Min e Size Window to fit View Contents at current Zoom level Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 52 View Reference lf your mouse is equipped with a mouse wheel the zoomable views can be rapidly zoomed by scrolling the mouse wheel backwards and forwards The direction of zoom can be reversed if desired using Program Options on the File menu 4 1 3 Defaults Colours and Visual Settings LinSig can use a range of default settings many of which can be changed to custom values specific to your individual usage Defaults and Visual settings are split into groups These are e File Specific Settings These settings are located on the Graphical Settings tab of the Network Settings dialog box This can be opened by choosing Network Settings from the Network menu The tab contains settings which relate to the layout of the Network Layout View and other Views which are likely to be specific to an individual file rather than for a user For example a very detailed network may look better with a smaller text size or narrower lanes These settings are therefore sto
307. in the LinSig model being edited Each error is listed together with its location and severity allowing you to get an overview of any problems which require attention This helps to avoid issues such as inadvertently forgetting to enter the Saturation Flow for a Lane and not spotting the problem until after results have been used Please remember though that the Error View is an aid it is not an excuse to neglect proper scrutiny of your work and results i e No errors in the Error View does not imply your model is correct Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 16 LinSig Basics Options and Preferences Many settings such as defaults for new Networks and graphics colours can be customised using the option dialog boxes on the File menu Always on Top Each of the main Views contains a pushpin button to the right of the View s title bar Clicking the pushpin will force the View to remain on top of other Views even if one of the other Views is the active View where data is being edited If two or more Views are set to Always on Top and overlap the most recently active View will be on top When using this option you should be careful not to lose smaller Views behind larger Views set to Always on Top 2 3 2 New User Interface Concepts in LinSig 3 to Watch Out for LinSig 3 makes a number of important additions and changes to the User Interface used in LinSig 2 Some of the most useful ones to watch out for include Lane Based Modelling In
308. ines and the amount of platoon dispersion present on a movement This allows different values for travel time and platoon dispersion to be used for each movement Network Layout View 4 lees w am Ale eledan E mime S IKNIN Al AIA Sag B Find Junction e nds YC la i Lane Give Way Lane Connector Connector REE EE w 1 300 gt ______ a Arm 5 Da IN Arm 1 London Road P Arm 2 High Street 2 O w Sa 200 a Hay 3 High StLondon Rd Park St Opposing Selected Lane w It 1g Ask aa reg a U ofj 2 Total Traffic Delay 19 4 pcuHr Bin jo wo 8 3 gt o x o Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm All vw Lane All Contains Junc All Arm f Al Lane All v Destination Zone All Arm All v Lane All Ed The diagram above shows Lane Connectors joining Lanes to other Lanes Lane Connectors representing traffic movements which give way to other Lanes are shown dashed If a give way Lane or give way Lane Connector is selected with the mouse its opposing Lane Connectors are shown highlighted Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 91 4 3 7 1 Creating Lane Connectors Lane Connectors can either be created between two existing Lanes or can be created between an existing Lane and a new Lane on a new Arm created at the same time as the new Lane Connector The facility to create new Arms on th
309. ink Connector and new downstream Pedestrian Link will tear off of the starting Pedestrian Link Connector Drag the mouse pointer over the Connection Point on the Pedestrian Link where the Pedestrian Link Connector will end The tear off Pedestrian Link will disappear indicating no new Pedestrian Link will be created Drop the Pedestrian Link Connector on the downstream Pedestrian Link by releasing the mouse A new Pedestrian Link Connector will be created between the two Pedestrian Links The Pedestrian Link Connector will be created with a default walk time which can be edited if desired as described below The ability to create a new Pedestrian Link simultaneously with a Pedestrian Link Connector is intended to speed the creation of Pedestrian Networks To create a Pedestrian Link Connector with a new Pedestrian Link e Drag the starting Pedestrian Link s Connection Point with the mouse A Pedestrian Link Connector and new downstream Pedestrian Link will tear off of the starting Pedestrian Link Connector Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 127 e Drop the tear off Pedestrian Link anywhere other than on an existing Pedestrian Link The Edit Pedestrian Link dialog box will open allowing you to enter the new Pedestrian Link s Name Junction Controlling Phase and crossing time as described above e Click OK in the Edit Pedestrian Link dialog box A new Pedestrian Link will be created with a Pedestr
310. ints to consider are e If no pedestrian flow data is available pedestrian flows should be entered as 1 or any other nominal value in the Pedestrian Desired Flows Matrix and on Pedestrian Routes e Only delay per pedestrian results will be meaningful Aggregate pedestrian delay Statistics will obviously not be valid as LinSig does not know how many pedestrians are using the junction e The lack of aggregate pedestrian delay statistics means that when no pedestrian flows are specified it is not possible to compare overall levels of traffic and pedestrian delay e The best comparison where no pedestrian flow data is available is to compare relative delays per pedestrian on important Pedestrian Routes using the Route List View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 150 View Reference 4 5 The Route List View The Route List View is used to work with routing patterns within the LinSig Network and lists information on Routes for the currently modelled Scenario Route List View Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm jal Lane All Contains Junc All Arm All Lane Al Destination Zone All Arm Al r Lane All Options for J ey Times and Delay gis Traffic Mode A Pedestrian Mode eet a nt es eee Soe a Lauter All Traffic Advanced Route Show Non Permitted Routes Edit Permitted Routes Sort By Zones 5 Building Options Route t Org Dest On Total Total fone Lane DelayipcuHr Joumey pcuHr 5
311. io with a valid Stage Sequence is selected or the current Scenario s associated Stage Sequence is changed to define a valid Stage Sequence the result Views will be automatically refreshed with results for the new or corrected Stage Sequence 4 10 2 3 Defining a Stage Sequence s Stage Order A Stage Sequences Stage order is defined by adding inserting and removing Stages into and from the Stage Sequence Quick Stage Sequence Creation The Stage Sequence can be edited graphically as described below or can be created quickly by typing a sequence of Stage numbers into the Stage Sequence column of the Stage Sequence List To enter or edit the sequence for a Stage Sequence double click the Stage Sequence s Sequence column in the Stage Sequence List A new sequence can be entered as a series of Stage numbers for example 123 or 134 If Stage numbers greater than 9 are used they must be separated by commas Stage Sequence View ieee Te el No 1 Stage Sequence All soe a Current Adding or Inserting Stages into the Stage Sequence Stages can be added to the Stage Sequence in several ways The most important include e Choose Add Stage to End of Sequence from the Stage Sequences Menu LinSig will display the Select Stage dialog box allowing you to pick which Stage to add to the end of the Stage Sequence e f a Sequence already contains some Stages additional Stages can be inserted around them
312. ion flows can lead to potentially much more significant differences between modelled and surveyed queues It is not recommended to use RR67 for estimating saturation flows for signalled roundabout circulatory Lanes as the closely spaced entry and circulatory stop lines often affect each other s effective saturation flow Modelling an entry saturation flow that is higher than the immediate downstream circulatory saturation flow will often lead to inaccurate modelling of queuing on the circulatory lanes See Sliver Queues for more information Specifying Lane Saturation Flows Manually Lane Saturation Flows are entered manually by selecting Directly Entered Lane Saturation Flow in the Edit Lane dialog box and entering a default saturation flow rate in PCU Hr If desired a different saturation flow for each Traffic Flow Group can be specified by unticking Default in the Flow Group List below the Default Saturation Flow and specifying a custom Flow Group specific value Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 76 View Reference Directly Entered Lane Saturation How Am 1 Lane 1 Default Saturation Flow PCU Hr 1800 Howgroup 2006 Friday AM Peak Saturation Flows can also be edited using the Lane Grid Data View which is often faster to use when changing a number of saturation flows Calculating Lane Saturation Flows from Lane Geometry As discussed above LinSig uses an extended version of the formulae from TRRL report RR67 to calculate s
313. ious bonus capacity effects applicable only to right turns at signals e Non Blocking Storage This tab is only available when the Lane contains a mixture of give way and non give way movements and is signal controlled It is principally used for situations where an opposed right turn movement may block a non give way movement usually ahead General Settings SH Edit Lane 1 1 J j Lane Control Controller Full Green Phase Arrow Phase Lane Details Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed W Lane ls Signal Contralled C1 Lincoln Road orth ray r Sat fow data BE Flows General Traffic Give Way Summary Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Movement Giving Way Mum Opposing Lanes To 5 1 Ahead No i This lane does not have storage in front of the stopline lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel The General tab contains the following settings e Lane is Signalled Controlled Ticking the Lane is Signal Controlled box specifies the Lane as a signal controlled Lane and allows the Controlling Phases to be specified e Controller The Controller setting specifies which traffic signal controller controls this Lane Normally this will be the Controller controlling the Junction to which the Lane belongs e Full Green Phase The Full Green Phase is the main three aspect phase which controls the Lane All Lanes which are controlled by signals must have a Full Green Phase defined e Arrow Phase The Arrow Phase applies only to Lanes th
314. ired Zone to Zone traffic flows for the entire network As is customary with origin destination OD matrices Origin Zones are shown to the left of the matrix and Destination Zones above Each cell contains the desired total traffic flow by any Route from the Origin Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 4 Traffic Flows View 147 Zone to the Destination Zone The Desired Flows Matrix is the traffic data used by LinSig when automatically assigning traffic flows to Routes e Actual Flows Matrix The Actual Flows Matrix is derived from the traffic flows actually assigned to each Route as described in the Route List View section Each Zone to Zone total is calculated by summing the Route traffic flows for all Routes connecting an Origin and Destination Zone It represents the total Zone to Zone flow actually assigned to Routes rather than the flow that we are aiming to assign to Routes as is shown in the Desired Flows Matrix As the traffic routing pattern in the Network may be different for each Scenario the Actual Flow Matrix will be dependent on the Current Scenario being shown The aim should still be for each Scenario s Actual Flow Matrix to match the Flow Group s Desired Flow Matrix but any differences may vary by Scenario e The Difference Matrix The Difference Matrix shows the numerical differences between a cell in the selected Flow Groups Desired Flows Matrix and the same cell in the Current Scenario s Actual Flows Matrix As with the Actual
315. irst Scenario second Scenario M Peal AM Peak AM Peak with IGA AM Peak AM Peak no IGA PM Peak PM Peak PM Peak with IGA Add a new entry Remove selected entries Select the Scenario mappings The New Scenario column lists the Scenarios that will exist after the merge consisting of the flaw data from the First Scenario merged with the data from the Second Scenario Any scenarios from either network not listed here will beldeleted ew scenanos have been created You may edit the names at this stage by double clicking on the New cance e Click Finish to complete the import process The Import process carries out the following e Adds all the Junctions Arms Lanes and other Network Items from the imported Network to the existing model s Network o Junctions are renumbered to append to the existing Network s Junctions Zones are renumbered to append to the existing Network s Zones Pedestrian Zones are renumbered to append to the existing Network s Pedestrian Zones o Arms and Lanes belong to each Junction and do not need renumbering e Adds the Controllers and all the Controller items belonging to the Controllers to the existing Network o Controllers from each imported model are added in a new Controller Set o Controllers are renumbered to append to the existing Network s Controller List o Phases Stages etc belong to each new Controller and therefore do not need renumbering e Cr
316. is usually due to a Phase intergreen between this Phase and a Phase already running in the Stage No arrows are shown indicating the phase is not running e Blue with no Arrows The Phase cannot run in this stage as it would violate rules relating to the use of filter and indicative green arrow phases No arrows are shown indicating that the Phase is not running e Grey with no Arrows The Phase could run in this stage but is not currently selected to do so No arrows are shown indicating that the phase is not running Stage Minimums LinSig can optionally show the minimum possible Stage Minimum for each Stage In many cases Stages can run in a variety of orders and a Stage could have a different effective minimum for each possible Stage Sequence LinSig therefore calculates Stage minimums for all possible sequences of three stages and displays the lowest Stage Minimum found for the middle Stage The minimum Stage Minimums are useful for specifying Stage Length limits in UTC or monitoring systems The Stage View shows only a summary of the minimum Stage Minimums The Stage Minimum View shows more detail on how Stage Minimums vary for different Stage orders 4 9 2 2 Selecting Stages and the Current Stage When carrying out an action on a Stage LinSig needs to know which Stage to use The Stage View allows a Stage to be selected by clicking on it the selected Stage being highlighted in red This selected Stage will be used in all situations w
317. isk at any point by choosing Save from the File menu or if you wish to change the file name Save As Be careful not to overwrite files you wish to keep as you cannot undo file saves from within LinSig Due to the many changes in the data used by LinSig 3 it is not possible to save files in LinSig 1 or LinSig 2 format 2 2 4 Loading and Converting LinSig files from Earlier Versions LinSig 3 uses a new file format but can load amp convert files from Versions 1 and 2 of LinSig which can then be saved to LinSig 3 format As each version of LinSig has made a number of changes extensions and improvements to the file format it is necessary to provide LinSig with some additional information when loading a file from a previous version This additional information is used by LinSig to convert the file into LinSig 3 format 2 2 4 1 Loading and Converting a LinSig 1 file to LinSig 3 format LinSig 3 can load amp convert an existing LinSig 1 file simply by opening the file within LinSig 3 LinSig will detect the file is a LinSig 1 file and use the information in the old file Essential new information which LinSig 1 files do not contain or cannot be deduced includes e Exit Arms e Lanes Connectors e Zones Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 2 Working with LinSig Files 11 Routes Traffic Flow Origin Destination Matrices The above information must be added to a LinSig 1 file after loading into LinSig 3 before results can
318. ity described above In the example CSV file snippet shown above the last line Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 13 Matrix Estimation View 207 contains a Count of 275 PCUs turning from Arm J1 2 passing through Arm J2 4 and finally reaching Arm J3 2 Note that importing from a CSV file is currently the only way in LinSig to specify Counts that turn through multiple Arms 4 13 4 2 Managing Zone Totals using the Matrix Estimation View Zone totals define the total amount of traffic which has been counted leaving or entering each Zone Zone totals can be specified as follows e Asan implied total calculated from turning counts on the Arm feeding or being fed by the Zone e As an explicit Zone origin or destination total which has been counted or at least estimated It is important when using matrix estimation that all Zone totals are specified If any Zones do not have both origin and destination totals specified the matrix estimation process will tend to add an excess of short trips to and from the Zone as this will allow other turning counts to be matched more closely This can result in unrealistic Zone totals and OD patterns This effect can occur regularly in large transportation models with many uncounted zones and is sometimes referred to as Zone Dumping 4 13 4 3 Count Consistency When preparing counts for use in LinSig or any other matrix estimation process it is very important to check for count consistency between co
319. ix Estimation View The Matrix Estimation View is used as an integral part of LinSig s procedure for estimating traffic Origin Destination matrices from traffic counts It can also be used for validating either a manual or automatic traffic flow assignment against traffic counts The View is opened by choosing Matrix Estimation View from the Traffic Flows menu P Matrix Estimation View A ola e Select the modelled Flow Group AM Peak Current Scenario v 2 Import counts Export counts Paapa i a Traffic Routes Bus Routes Lane based Zone Totals PCU Traffic Counts J1 Ped Crossing J1 Ped Crossing J1 3 gt J1 2 625 650 0 96 ae ae J2 West Junction J2 1 gt J2 4 513 500 1 03 25 13 J2 West Junction J2 1 gt J2 5 152 150 1 01 T433 2 J2 West Junction J2 2 gt J2 5 220 220 1 00 0 0 J2 West Junction J2 2 gt 1 3 447 450 0 99 CE eae Sa J2 West Junction J2 3 gt J2 4 367 250 1 47 319 11 J2 West Junction J2 3 gt J1 3 220 200 1 10 91 J2 West Junction J2 4 gt J3 1 740 750 0 99 14 EW J3 East Junction J3 1 gt J3 5 424 450 0 94 tae EA J3 East Junction J3 1 gt J3 6 300 300 1 00 0 0 __J3 EastJunction ___ S sdd32 gt 34 3N 30 i 00 0 J3 East Junction J3 2 gt J3 6 150 150 1 00 0 0 J3 East Junction J3 3 gt J3 4 297 300 0 99 Dr J3 East Junction J3 3 gt J3 5 200 200 1 00 0 0 J3 East Junction J3 4 gt J2 2 670 670 1 00 0 0 For single Junctions and ver
320. junction capacity Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 278 Detailed Controller Background e Normally intergreens from a Filter Phase to other Phases should not be entered as the intergreen of the Filters associated Full Green Phase is used instead Specifying intergreens between a back to back right Filter and its opposite opposing ahead movements can cause problems in the controllers design This is due to the two Right Filters and associated Ahead Phases all waiting for each other to finish before completing the interstage causing infinite loops in the interstage logic 5 1 2 1 Intergreen Traffic Phase Aspect Sequence The signal sequence during a typical Intergreen is shown below In this example the Intergreen A to C is 6 seconds 0 1 2 4 4 5 6 Eo E nterereen 6 secs 5 1 2 2 Intergreen Pedestrian Phase Aspect Sequence Blackouts are part of the intergreen between a pedestrian phase terminating and a traffic phase starting They have no effect on the intergreen other than to replace part of the red man with no indication Blackouts are not explicitly modelled in LinSig for Windows The signal sequence for a typical pedestrian intergreen is shown below In this example the Intergreen between pedestrian Phase G and traffic Phase A is 9 seconds with a 5 second blackout period U0 1 2 4 4 5 6 F amp GY P Blackout 53 23 Intergreen 9 sec Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 1 Printing Graphical Layout Views 279 6 Reporting
321. k at once Each Controller is shown together with its Stage Streams and Phases e Traffic Flows View The Traffic Flows View is used to define Traffic Flow Groups and edit each group s Origin Destination Matrix The View can be used to carry out the following tasks Create delete and edit Traffic Flow Groups Enter the Desired Flows OD Matrix for each Flow Group View the Actual Flow and Difference Matrices for each Flow Group View and edit Pedestrian Flow Matrices for each Junction for each Flow Group o Define Formula Based Flow Groups O O O e Route List View The Route List View is used to view and manage Routes through the LinSig Network Route management is an important part of LinSig Network model development as poor usage of Routes for example modelling many unlikely weaving routes will slow down the model substantially and possibly give less accurate results The Route List View can be used to o View edit and sort Zone to Zone Traffic Routes through the LinSig Network o Allow and disallow routes through the Network either manually or using automatic policies View Route statistics such as travel times and delays Make manual changes to the traffic flow allocated to each Route Highlight a Route in the Network Layout View by selecting the Route in the Route List o Filter the Route List to display a sub set of Routes in the Route List and in the Network Layout View o View and edit Pedestrian Routes for ea
322. ks e When the Pedestrian Link is dropped the Edit Pedestrian Link dialog box is displayed This allows the Pedestrian Link s settings to be entered Edit Pedestrian Link Pedestrian Link Name Peds across London Road Pedestrian Link Number 1 Assodated Junction High St London Rid Park St Controlling Phase F Crossing Time 10 Seconds Crossing Type Unspecified e The following settings are available for an Pedestrian Link o Pedestrian Link Number The Pedestrian Link Number will default to one more than the maximum Pedestrian Link Number of the existing Pedestrian Links Pedestrian Links can be numbered in any order but all Pedestrian Link Numbers must be used with no gaps in the sequence If the new Pedestrian Link is allocated the same number as an existing Pedestrian Link the new Pedestrian Link will be inserted into the Pedestrian Link numbering sequence and higher numbered Pedestrian Links renumbered o Pedestrian Link Name The Pedestrian Link Name is a simple text name to describe the Pedestrian Link Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 125 o Associated Junction The Junction the Pedestrian Link belongs to All Pedestrian Links must belong to a Junction o Controlling Phase The Phase controlling the Pedestrian Link Only Pedestrian Phases on the Controllers and Streams attached to the Pedestrian Links Junction are available o Crossing Time The time it takes an average pedestrian to cross th
323. l ld Arrow Less Critical Non Traffic Phases Pedestrian Pedestrian Pedestrian Pedestrian More Critical Less Critical Phases are ordered in two separate lists Traffic Phases and non tratffic Phases Traffic Phases are always treated as higher priority than all non traffic Phases To change the order of Phases select a Phase in either list and use the More Critical and Less Critical buttons to adjust its position 4 17 2 5 Checking of Interstages for Safety Issues Interstages should always be checked by a competent engineer as badly designed Interstages can have safety implications LinSig optimises Interstages solely from the point of view of efficiency The subjective assessment of whether an Interstage is safe should always be done by an engineer That is why there is deliberately no Optimise All Interstages button in LinSig It is far better practice to optimise each Interstage in turn reviewing its safety as you proceed Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 18 Multiple Interstages View 231 4 18 Multiple Interstages View The Multiple Interstages View is similar to the Interstage Structure Diagram displayed in the Interstage amp Phase Delays View The key difference is that the Multiple Interstage View displays a number of Interstage Diagrams This allows the Interstages be printed as a set which is useful for reference when undertaking signal controller Factory Acceptance Tests FAT Althoug
324. l Warnings of a Type All Warnings of a particular type can be hidden by selecting a Warning of the type to be hidden in the Error List and clicking the Hide this type of Warning button on the Error View s toolbar Showing Hidden Warnings Warnings which have been previously hidden can be shown by clicking on the Show Suppressed Warnings button in the Error View s toolbar Un Hiding a Previously Hidden Warning A Warning which has previously hidden can be unhidden by displaying hidden warnings in the Error List selecting the warning and clicking the Do not Hide this Item button in the Error View s toolbar Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 29 Importing amp Merging LinSig Networks 261 4 29 Importing amp Merging LinSig Networks Many users will have large numbers of existing LinSig models of single Junctions or small Networks LinSig allows Networks to be merged together to create new larger Networks to allow the modelling of larger areas Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm all x Lane All Contains Junc all y Arm all x Lane All Dest Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm all v Lane All Contains Junc Al 35 Network Layout View A fo S 2 Network Layout View A kelak ie a 2lal gt aLelelelela SLE Ali SPE Sak elel aall E s asel aeee SE ne SSR EE Aall Find Junction x Find Arm xl 2051 fiat Find Junction
325. l also appear in the Phase Delay List If the Phase end time is dragged back to the start of the Interstage the Phase Delay is no longer necessary and is removed by LinSig The start time of a Phase will initially be determined using the end times of terminating Phases and Intergreens from the terminating Phases to the starting Phases The start time of a starting Phase can be delayed by dragging to the right with the mouse LinSig implements this as a Phase Gaining Delay which will be shown in the Phase Delay List As for Phase Losing Delays if the Phase start time is dragged so that the Phase Delay is no longer necessary LinSig will delete the Phase Gaining Delay Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 228 View Reference Optimising Interstages LinSig provides two mechanisms for determining the optimum set of Phase Delays for an Interstage These are e Find Spare Green This is a basic method which simply extends terminating Phases without causing any starting Phases to start later This optimisation is carried out by clicking Find Spare Green in the Interstage View toolbar e Full Optimisation This much more sophisticated method optimises the Interstage to ensure critical terminating and starting Phases have the minimum separation usually equal to their Intergreen between them Interstage Optimisation Interstage optimisation is run by clicking Optimise in the Interstage View s toolbar It is important to setup a Critical Phase
326. l interfaces versions with modified or added functionality and dynamic shared or static library versions not from Info ZIP must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source or if binaries compiled from the original source Such altered versions also must not be misrepresented as being Info ZIP releases including but not limited to labeling of the altered versions with the names Info ZIP or any variation thereof including but not limited to different capitalizations Pocket UnZip WiZ or MacZip without the explicit permission of Info ZIP Such altered versions are further prohibited from misrepresentative use of the Zip Bugs or Info ZIP e mail addresses or the Info ZIP URL s such as to imply Info ZIP will provide support for the altered versions Info ZIP retains the right to use the names Info ZIP Zip UnZip UnZipSFX Wiz Pocket UnZip Pocket Zip and MacZip for its own source and binary releases Ver 3 2 10 January 2013
327. lable Formats list A new Display Format initially called name will be created This should be given a proper name by changing its name in the Name box The Text Display Format can be then be defined as described below in Editing a Text Display Format Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 90 View Reference Copying an Existing Text Display Format An existing Text Display Format can be copied by selecting it in the Available Text Display Formats list and clicking Copy A new Text Display Format called copy of copied Format Name will be created Deleting a Text Display Format A Text Display Format can be deleted by selecting it in the Available Text Display Formats list and clicking Delete Editing a Text Display Format A Text Display Format can be edited by selecting it in the Available Text Display Formats list and using the drop down lists to set the desired data or results items for each position on Lanes Lane Connectors and Pedestrian Links Lanes and Pedesirian Links can display up to three data or result items one at each end and one in the middle Lane Connectors can only show a single item in the middle of the connector Any position can be left blank if desired 4 3 7 Joining Lanes with Lane Connectors Lane Connectors are used in LinSig to define the traffic movements which can take place between Lanes Lane Connectors also specify the travel time or speed between stop l
328. layed as follows e Phases allocated to a Stage Stream are shown in black and have directional arrows e Phases not allocated to any Stage Stream are shown in grey with no arrows e Phases allocated to a different Stage Stream are shown in blue with no arrows The Stage Stream Panel in the Stage Sequence View cannot be used to change the Stage Stream 4 10 3 4 Managing Stage Streams using the Stage Sequence View Although the Controller List View is the main place to manage Stage Streams the Stage Sequence View can also be used as follows Selecting Stage Streams and the Current Stage Stream When carrying out an action on a Stream LinSig needs to know which Stream to use The Stage Stream panel allows a Stage Stream to be selected highlighting it in red This selected Stage Stream will be used in all situations where an action is performed on a Stage Stream for example when adding a Stage in the Stage View it will be added to the Current Stage Stream Creating a new Stage Stream To create a new Stage Stream choose Add a Stage Stream from the Stages Menu A new Stage Stream will be shown in the Stage Stream panel This will initially have no Phases allocated to it Phases can be allocated to Streams using the Phase or Stage Views Deleting Stage Streams To delete a Stage Stream select the Stream you wish to delete and choose Delete Stage Stream from the Stages Menu or right click pop up menu Ver 3 2 10 January 2013
329. lays e The Phase Delay Value Enter the length of the Phase Delay in seconds e The Phase Delay Type The Phase Delay Type is only required for Phase Gaining Delays LinSig will use the existing Stage Change and Phase to determine whether the Phase Delay being entered is a Phase Gaining Delay More information on Phase Delay Types is given in Phase Delay Types above When Editing a Phase Delay the Stage Change and Phase cannot be changed If necessary the Phase Delay should be deleted and a new Phase Delay created with the correct Stage Change and Phase Deleting Phase Delays A Phase Delay can be deleted by selecting it in the Phase Delay List and clicking Delete Converting Phase Gaining Delays Phase Gaining Delays are entered either as Absolute Phase Gaining Delays or Relative Phase Gaining Delays as detailed above A Phase Delay can be permanently converted from one type to the other as follows e Select the Phase Delay in the Phase Delay List e Click the Convert to Relative or Convert to Absolute button as appropriate LinSig will change the type of the Phase Gaining Delay and recalculate its value to reflect its new type 4 17 2 4 The Interstage Structure Diagram The Interstage Structure Diagram shows the following e Terminating Phases The Phases terminating in this Interstage are shown to the left of the panel Each Phase is coloured according to its Phase type as defined in the Phase View Phases m
330. le Time can be re implemented by re ticking Maintain Cycle Time Optimise Delay Clicking the Optimise Delay button optimises the Stage lengths for the Stage Stream to minimise aggregate traffic delay for Lanes controlled by the Stage Stream All other Stage Streams are unchanged More information on optimisation is available in the Scenario View section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 15 Signal Timings View 217 e Optimise PRC Clicking the Optimise PRC button optimises the Stage lengths for the Stage Stream to maximise Practical Reserve Capacity PRC for Lanes controlled by the Stage Stream All other Stage Streams are unchanged More information on optimisation is available in the Scenario View section 4 15 3 The Signal Timings Panel The Signal Timings Panel is located below the Stage Stream List in the Signal Timings View When a junction contains more than one Stage Stream a Signal Timings panel is displayed for each Stage Stream as shown below HF Signal Timings View 47 oo e Display Cycle Time Maintain Cycle Time Allow Edit Timings Double Triple time Reduce To Min Optimise For Delay Optimise For PRC a a Singh Reduce To Min _ Optimise For D Optimise For PRC we Single Reduce To Min Optimise For Del Optimise For PRC Time in cycle sec Each Signal Timings Panel shows the following e Phase Bars Each traffic signal Phase is represented as a bar showing the times when the Phase is running Phase Ba
331. lected using the button on the Traffic Flow View toolbar LinSig will automatically reassign the matrix to the Routes for all Scenarios using this Flow Group whenever the Desired Flows Matrix changes This will of course replace the flows on all affected Routes losing any custom Route Flows This option should only be used with a small model as reassigning a large model after every minor change to the matrix will be very slow Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 148 View Reference Locking Matrix Cells for Matrix Estimation An OD matrix cell can be locked preventing matrix estimation from changing its value To lock a cell e Right click on the matrix cell and choose Lock this value during Matrix Estimation e Only cells in the Traffic Matrix can be locked H bee Traffic Ongin Destination Matris Auto Assign Desired Flows Actual Flows Difference Copy Paste Destination Jafe c m Origin a ae Locked ey ee ee eee ee ee Se ees see foe If Auto Assign is enabled any changes made to the Desired Flows data in the Flow Matrix will Matrix Cell automatically be assigned to Routes using the current Traffic Flow Assignment Options This will overwrite any existing route flaws you may have If Auto Assign is not enabled the Desired Flows will not be assigned to Routes until the Assign OD Flows To Routes menu option is selected 4 4 4 2 Pedestrian Origin Destination Matrices Pedestrian Origin
332. line ame Non blocking Storage Clr Conflict Movement 1 Filia 31 1 09 2 W Allopposing To 6 1 Left 2 2 2 1 09 2 lv Allopposing To 4 1 Ahead lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Storage in Front of Stop Line Tab Similarly the Storage in Front of Stop Line settings are entered the same as for Example 5 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 302 Examples Edit Lane 1 1 x General Lane Details Sat How Data Advanced Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Movmt to 6 1 Right Storage In Front of S L Non Blocking Storage This is a signal controlled Right Tum giving way to oncoming traffic If Does the lane have Right Tum Storage in front of the stopline oe ane in Front Of 3 00 Right Tum Move Up 5 3 W Auto Cale Using Storage Max Right Tums In 20 Right Tum Factor Intergreen FCU Non Blocking Storage Tab LinSig automatically models the interaction between the Ahead and Right turn movements sharing a single lane based on the above settings However as discussed above the Right Turners may block the Ahead movement if they queue back out of the storage area The Non Blocking Storage tab is used to specify how many right turning PCUs can accumulate before blocking the Ahead traffic Edit Lane 1 1 General Lane Details Sat Flow Data Advanced Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Movmt to 6 1 Right Storage In Front of S L Non Blocking Storage When mixed giving way and non giving way movements on this link Total number o
333. ll items in the rectangle will be selected Pop Up Context Sensitive Menus Clicking on a View with the right mouse button will display a pop up menu containing a choice of commands relevant to the item clicked on All commands displayed on pop up menus are also available on the LinSig main menu Not all Views will have a pop up menu Editing an Item by double clicking An Item can always be edited by selecting it and choosing to edit it from the main menu or pop up menu Alternatively for some items as a shortcut you can double click the item to edit it This does not apply where there may be more than one way to edit an item Using a wheel mouse If you have a wheel mouse LinSig will use the wheel for zooming graphical views and scrolling through lists The use of a wheel mouse is strongly recommended as they are inexpensive and make zooming graphical views very easy If you are used to applications which zoom in the opposite direction to LinSig when using the mouse wheel its direction can be reversed in Program Options Undo Any command can be undone by choosing Undo from the edit menu Any number of previous commands can be undone and if necessary redone The Undo History View can also be used to display the sequence of commands Undo will undo Undo is only available for the duration of the editing session and cannot undo past the point when a LinSig model was opened Error View The Error View lists any errors and warnings
334. llowed by an assignment of the new matrix to the Network The length of time taken for the matrix estimation process is dependent on the size of Network the number of Zones the amount of multiple route choice and loops in the network the level of weaving allowed between Junctions and the general traffic level in the Network A simple example with 2 staggered T Junctions 4 Zones no street route choice and full weaving typically takes less than 10 seconds on a modern office PC A larger more complex network may take substantially longer It should be remembered though that doing the process by hand would take substantially longer and the use of an OD matrix leads to time savings when specifying network flows later in the modelling process Please report any models which appear to be taking an excessive amount of time to JCT Software Support Support jctconsultancy co uk as this will assist us in improving the matrix estimation process Check the quality of the estimated matrix and its assignment using the techniques described below 4 13 5 3 Matrix Estimation Options The Matrix Estimation options serve several purposes These are Select an area of the Matrix to estimate This allows an area of the OD Matrix corresponding to a Matrix Based Network region to be estimated Control Assignment options for the assignment part of the matrix estimation process The Routes which traffic uses through the Network and the amount of traffic pre
335. llows e Choose Add Label from the Labels pop out on the Network menu e Click anywhere on the Network Layout View to drop the Label The Create Label dialog box will appear e Set the Label s text colour and Font e Click OK to create the Label Editing a Label A Label can be edited by double clicking with the mouse and changing its settings as described in Adding Labels to the Network Layout View above Currently dynamic data fields cannot be used in labels Repositioning a Label A Label can be repositioned by selecting it with the mouse and then dragging either the centre of the Label move the whole Label or one of the red handles at the end of the Label to change the Labels orientation Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 136 View Reference 4 3 15 Displaying and Using Timing Dials Timing Dials allow the signal timings for a Stage Stream to be displayed and changed directly on the Network Layout View This is useful with larger Networks when there is insufficient screen space to view both the Network Layout View and the Signal Timings View at the same time It also provides a concise overview of signal times for all Stage Streams when printed on the Network Layout View ZF Network Layout View H hloka t aR alelelelelal siel IS SIS l amp SE Find Junction pg Find Arm Po nie g Raw X J jO os AS a Am5 0 S wer Arm 1 London Road NN A a ais WS Arm 2 High Street
336. llows the offsets between Stage Streams or Controllers to be locked together and optimised against other Stage Streams as a group as detailed below Display These Optimiser Settings Each Time you Optimise This setting is selected by default causing the optimiser settings dialog to be shown every time the optimiser is run partly to highlight the available settings and partly to confirm the current optimiser settings If this dialog becomes annoying it can be prevented from appearing at every optimisation by deselecting this option It can however still be displayed by choosing Optimiser Settings from the Optimiser pop out menu on the Modelling menu if settings require changing Managing Offset Optimiser Groups Controllers and or Stage Streams can be managed into Offset Optimiser Groups as follows Controllers and or Stage Streams can be added to Offset Optimiser Groups by selecting the Controller or Stream in the Ungrouped Controllers Streams list and clicking the right arrow to move the Controller across to the right Groups list New Offset Optimiser Groups can be created by clicking Create Group This will create a new empty Offset Optimiser Group Controllers can be moved between Groups by clicking Up One Group or Down One Group as appropriate Controllers can be removed from a Group by selecting the Controller in the right Groups List and clicking the left arrow 4 12 3 5 Monitoring the Op
337. lly best to refer to a Lane as a combination of its Arm and Lane for example Lane 1 2 refers to Lane 2 on Arm 1 Where the Network contains multiple Junctions it is necessary to also include the Junction to fully reference the Arm within the entire Network For example Junction 3 Arm 6 Lane 2 would be referred to as J3 6 2 Lane Type Each Lane s type is indicated by the colour of the Lane number circle The different possible Lane types are O i A Lane showing a yellow Lane number circle is a standard signal controlled Lane which does not give way to other traffic A Lane showing a green Lane number circle is an unsignalled Lane which does not give way to other traffic They are typically used for through traffic on major roads at priority junctions and exit Lanes This type of Lane is sometimes referred to as a bottleneck Unsignalled Lanes can either be unconstrained with effectively an infinite saturation flow or a saturation flow can be specified A Lane showing a blue Lane number circle is an unsignalled Lane which gives way to other traffic They are typically used for minor arms of priority junctions and unsignalled left slips within signal junctions A Lane showing a yellow and blue Lane number circle is a signalled Lane which also gives way to other traffic They are typically used for right turning lanes within a signal junction although they may also be used in more specialised situations such as signal amp gi
338. lly without any additional information Right click on each Link with the mouse and choose Accept Lane Structure to split the Link into Lanes Correct Illegal Lane Structures If the Link is highlighted in red LinSig cannot interpret how to split the Link without further help The two most likely reasons for this are o It is ambiguous which Long Lane a Short Lane should be associated with This can be clarified by right clicking on the Short Lane and choosing Feeder Lane on Left or Feeder Lane on Right as appropriate o LinSig 2 could model Links containing several Short Lanes but had the restriction that all Lanes had to have the same green times and turning movements LinSig 3 s more sophisticated Short Lane blocking model can model independent control and turning movements on each Lane but currently can only model a single Short Lane attached to a single Long Lane This caters for the majority of common cases other cases involving multiple flares attached to a Long Lane can be modelled by making simplifying assumptions as was the case in LinSig 1 amp 2 When any issues have been resolved the Link will be highlighted in orange and can be split as described above Add Exit Arms in the Network Layout View Add Lane Connectors Join Lanes with Lane Connectors in the Network Layout View For a single junction from a LinSig 1 file the Lane Connectors will usually be Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 12 LinSig Basics
339. lows as well as Lane Based Flows when in Lane Based Flow Mode The Route Flows can be displayed by e Right clicking on the Network Layout View and choosing Show Route Flows in Lane Based Flow Entry Mode from the pop up menu e Choosing the Show Route Flows button from the Network Layout View s toolbar Route Flows are displayed prefix by R to distinguish them from Lane Based Flows As Route Flows are defined for a Scenario not a Flow Group Route Flows are only available if the selected Flow Group is used by the currently selected Scenario This ensures that only compatible Lane Based and Route Flows are displayed at any one time Displaying both Lane Based Flows and Route Based Flows is particularly useful when joining too different Network regions which define flows in different ways 4 3 9 4 Managing Lane Based Flows using Graphical Drag and Drop Lane Based Flows are edited graphically using Lane Based Flow Mode on the Network Layout View Lane Based Flow Mode can be entered by one of the following methods e Choosing the Lane Based Flow button from the Network Layout View s toolbar Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 107 aA fe ALAIZA AK AE Lane 6 Show All Layers shown for F e Right clicking on the Network Layout View and choosing Lane Based Flow Entry Mode from the pop up menu e Click the Lane Based Flow Entry Mode button on the Edit Lane dialog box When the Network L
340. lows menu Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 14 Turning Counts View 213 3 Turning Count View 4 E AM Peak Current Scenario Display Diff GEH after count value H aa vlla SS _S 2 28 8 Total Counted Traffic Counted Traffic Entering Junction on Exiting Junction Turning this Arm Count so 740 724 aro ar Totals The Flow Group for which Turning Counts are displayed can be selected in the Turning Counts View toolbar The selected Flow Group is linked with the selected Flow Group used by the Matrix Estimation View so both Views always show traffic flow information for the same Flow Group 4 14 1 1 Turning Counts The Turning Counts View displays each Junction s Turning Counts The information displayed includes e Turning Counts for each Junction Turning Counts for each Junction are displayed showing counts values in PCU e Difference and GEH for each Turning Count The Difference and GEH can optionally be displayed alongside each Turning Count value Counts whose GEH is greater than 5 0 will be displayed in red This option can be selected by ticking the Display Diff GEH after count value tick box on the Turning Counts View toolbar e Junction Arm Inflow Totals The total incoming counted flow is displayed for each Arm entering the Junction This helps with locating poor quality or inconsistent counts e Junction Arm Outflow Totals The total outgoing counted flows is displayed f
341. lthough ANPR developments are making this increasingly more feasible Although LinSig provides a facility to estimate a matrix from traffic turning counts it can be onerous for an unfamiliar user to produce a sufficiently robust OD matrix for a large Network if traffic counts are of poor quality Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 2 Network Structure amp Defining Traffic Flows in LinSig 41 e In larger Networks with significant opportunities for rerouting the number of possible Routes through the Network can be very large Although the number of Routes can often be substantially reduced by judicious removal of unfeasible Routes a large number of valid Routes can often remain which can make fine tuning of traffic routing by manually adjusting Route Flows unfeasible e When traffic routes through the Network using criteria other than delay eg signing significant manual Route Flow changes and or Route locking may be required when calibrating to ensure the OD Matrix and Route Flows match traffic counts Advantages of Lane Based Flow Methods include e The entry of flow information is much more direct and avoids more complex concepts such as Routes and delay based assignment e As the level of detail is much less than Matrix Based Methods models will run faster and larger models can be built The speed advantage with smaller models will be much less and will be less important than other factors when choosing which method to use e Existing coun
342. m or de allocated if already allocated by double clicking with the mouse If the Phase is already allocated to a different Stage Stream LinSig will not allow it to be allocated to another Stage Stream without first removing it from its current Stream Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 8 Intergreen View 171 4 8 Intergreen View The Intergreen View is used to display and edit each Controller s Phase Intergreens It is opened by choosing Intergreen View from the LinSig Controllers menu Each Intergreen View shows the Intergreens for a single Controller The View displays Intergreens as a matrix with the terminating Phase on the Rows and the starting Phase on the columns Intergreen View Controller 2 East Controller Em All Streams The Intergreens represent the safe clearance interval in seconds between the time a phase terminates and the time another phase starts Advice on calculating Intergreens can be obtained in the DfT Advisory Leaflet TAL 1 06 4 8 1 Selecting which Controller to View It is possible to have one or more Intergreen Views open in a LinSig model at any one time Each Intergreen View shows the Intergreens for a single LinSig traffic Signal Controller The Controller being displayed is set using each View s Controller Selector drop list as follows e LinSig always has a Current Controller which is used by several Views to ensure they are all displaying information for the same Controller The Current Contr
343. markings mean that traffic will always share equally between the two physical lanes e Advanced his tab is always available and includes a number of advanced settings which may not always need changing e Lane Based Flow Summary The Lane Based Flow Summary tab is only present if Lane Based Flows are defined on a Lane with two or more Layers This tab summarises the Lane Based Flows across all Layers and allows Layers to be managed Details of how to use this tab are provided in the Working with Lane Based Flows section below e Lane Based Flow Layers A separate tab is shown for each Lane Based Flow Layer using the Lane The tab allows the total flow and incoming and outgoing flows to be Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 72 View Reference specified for the layer Note that it will normally be more convenient to use the drag and drop Lane Based Flow editing than this tab This tab is provided principally for editing Lane Based Flow details not available through the drag and drop method Details of how to use this tab are provided in the Working with Lane Based Flows section below e Movement Tabs A separate tab is provided for each turning movement leaving the Lane Each tab allows settings relating to that turning movement to be set e Storage in Front of Stop Line This tab is only available if the Lane is signal controlled and one or more movements on the Lane give way to other Lanes The tab includes settings relating to var
344. mes in both Matrix and Lane Based Network regions e Pedestrian Link Pedestrian Links represent fixed time signal controlled pedestrian crossings Currently non signalled crossings cannot be modelled in LinSig e Pedestrian Link Connector Pedestrian Link Connectors represent pedestrian movements between crossings at the same junction Typically a pedestrian island would be represented by one or more Pedestrian Link Connectors defining the possible movements between crossings using the island e Pedestrian Zone Pedestrian Zones represent origins or destinations for Pedestrians Each Pedestrian Zone corresponds to a point where pedestrians step off the kerb to start walking through the junction e Pedestrian Route A Pedestrian Route consists of a sequence of Pedestrian Links and Link Connectors and represents the path a pedestrian would take through the Junction between two Pedestrian Zones e Matrix Based Network A Matrix Based Network is a LinSig Network in which all traffic flows are defined using an Origin Destination Matrix assigned to Routes This defines traffic flow information in the greatest level of detail but requires an OD Matrix to be defined for the entire Network which may be onerous to build and lead to longer signal optimisation run times for larger Networks This was the only option available prior to LinSig 3 1 e Lane Based Network A Lane Based Network uses Lane Based Flows throughout to specify traffic flows A Lane
345. mitted Routes currently applies to Traffic Routes only Routes can be specified as non permitted in two ways e Manually by explicitly setting the Route as non permitted as described below e By Permitted Route Policy which allows Routes conforming to one of several polices such as U turning and spiral Routes to be automatically set to non permitted These policies will filter out many Routes avoiding the need to manually set large numbers of Routes to non permitted manually Policies can always be overridden The Edit Permitted Routes dialog box is used for both methods e Inthe Route List View click Edit Permitted Routes The Edit Permitted Routes dialog box opens This lists all Traffic Routes in the Network a copy of key Route identification information and the Route s permitted status E Edit Permitted Routes Permitted Org Lane Lock Route Flow Use Policy Allow A Iti J2 5 1 150 Unlocked t Use Policy Allow A Ji if 73 52 29 Unlocked Use Policy Allow A J4 4 4 13 6 1 103 Unlocked 7 Use Policy Allow E J2 3 1 J1 3 1 Unlocked Use Policy Allow E J2 3 2 J3 5 2 Unlocked Disallow B J2 3 2 J3 5 2 Unlocked Use Policy Allow E J2 3 2 J3 6 1 5 Unlocked Disallow J2 3 2 13 6 1 Unlocked Use Policy Allow J3 2 1 Ji 2ji Unlocked Use Policy Allow 33 2 2 Ji 2 1 Unlocked e Use Policy Allow 13 2 2 12 5 1 Hi Unlocked Disallow J3 2 1 J2 5 1 Unlocked Use Policy Allow J3 2 2 13 6 1 is0
346. mmy with Red Amber The same as a Dummy Phase but operates as though the Phase has a dummy Red Amber period o Cycle Phase Identical to a Traffic Phase but with a green lamp with a cycle symbol o Bus Phase Identical to a Traffic Phase but with a green lamp with a bus symbol o LRT Tram Phase Same as a Traffic Phase but with no starting red amber period and controls LRT signals rather than normal traffic signal lights o Filter with Closing Amber This Phase type is for use in the Republic of Ireland and other locations which allow similar signalling This Phase should not be used in the UK as its behaviour does not conform to the Traffic Signs Regulations This type of Filter Phase can be set as a Lane s Arrow Phase but may start and end independently of the Lanes s Full Green Phase due to its Closing Amber and therefore does not require an associated Phase The Lane will run if either its Filter or Full Green Phase is at Green This type of Phase is usually configured in the Controller as a normal Three Aspect Phase e Controlled Lanes If the Phase controls any Lanes the phase type cannot be altered LinSig shows the controlled Lanes which must be disconnected from this Phase before the Phase Type can be altered e Associated Phase If this Phase is a Filter or Indicative Green Arrow enter the associated Three Aspect Phase If the Associated Phase does not yet exist you will need to return to this Phase after creating the Associ
347. mn headings and choose Customise from the pop up menu The Select Columns dialog box will be opened Select Columns For Display Columns For Display Turners In Intergreen pa W Total Delay pcuHr iw Av Delay Per Veh s p Mean Max Queue pou iw Average Excess Queue p Position In Filtered Route Nurm Greens Start Green End Green s Arrow Green 5 Entering pou Cancel e Tick or Un tick columns in the Select Columns dialog box as appropriate e Select a column and click Move Up or Move Down to change the order of columns e Click OK to finish customising the columns After the columns have been customised the set of columns can be saved as described above so they can be quickly redisplayed if any changes are made to columns lf necessary columns can be reset to default selection and order by right clicking on the column headers and choosing Reset to Default Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 240 View Reference Show Full or Abbreviated Columns Heading LinSig can show either full or abbreviated headings for each column show in the Results List The full headings provide a clearer explanation of what each column shows but take up a lot of space The abbreviated headings are much more concise but can also be a little cryptic for new users It is suggested that abbreviated headings are used most of the time switching to full headings if you aren t sure what
348. n can now be modelled with separate signalling on the Short Lane and separate modelling of traffic on each Lane Issues such as queuing ahead traffic preventing left turners getting to the Short Lane even though its filter arrow is running are automatically dealt with The new models in LinSig 3 also remove the need to use LINSAT e Short Opposed Right Turn Lanes Although LinSig 2 4 and above could model right turn bays and their effect on adjacent Lane capacity the facility was limited to a subset of special cases LinSig 3 allows short right turn Lanes either opposed or separately signalled unopposed to be modelled directly and intuitively simply by defining the appropriate Lanes and specifying signalling turning movements etc separately for the Short Lane If you require any advice on how to model a particular situation please do not hesitate to contact JCT Software Support Short Lane Modelling and Lane Groups LinSig 3 allows Lane arrangements to be specified in much more detail then previous versions As described above many settings such as Controlling Phase which would previously have been specified for a group of Lanes via a Link can now be specified for individual Lanes However where Short Lanes are used the Short Lane and its adjacent Long Lane will interact as traffic in one Lane may block traffic in the other Lane For example the arrival of a large platoon of ahead traffic at the beginning of red may prevent left turners using a
349. n the Show Routes pop out menu is selected on the same pop up menu and that the graph isn t showing a single Route Profile e Choose Show Route Components when Aggregated from the pop up menu e The graph will be shown with each Route Component as a separate layer Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 256 View Reference Highlighting a Single Route Layer When a Lane has many Routes it is sometimes difficult to determine which Route Layer is which in the graph A Route Layer can be identified as follows e Ensure the Route List View the Network Layout View and the Flow Profile View are all visible e Select a Route passing through the Lane in the Route List e The Route will be highlighted in the Network Layout View and the Route Layer will be highlighted in each of the Flow Profile Graphs Highlighting Route Layers is very useful when examining the effects of platooning and working out which movements queue and which get good green progression lal Flow Profiles View Diagram Size __ iS Route List View Eee Route Filter Origin Zone All v Arm All Lane All Contains Junc All Arm All 4500 Destination Zone All v Arm All v Lane All v R em Traffic Mode A r a Bais Show All Routes Edit Permitted Routes Lane J2 2 2 Flows Route f O Zone D Zone O Lane D Lane Flow Locked Joumey Delay Total Total P
350. n the Network Layout View to indicate which Pedestrian Links it is feeding traffic to or accepting it from 4 3 12 2 Repositioning Pedestrian Zones A Pedesirian Zone can be repositioned by dragging it to its new position with the mouse 4 3 12 3 Editing Pedestrian Zones Pedestrian Zones are edited as follows e Select the Pedestrian Zone with the mouse e Choose Edit Pedestrian Zone from the Pedestrian Zones pop out menu on the Network Menu e The Edit Pedestrian Zone dialog box is displayed which is similar to the Create Pedestrian Zone dialog described in Creating Pedestrian Zones above e The Pedestrian Zones settings can be changed in the same way as described above in Creating Pedestrian Zones Disconnecting a Pedestrian Zone from its associated Pedestrian Links will delete all Pedestrian Routes starting from or ending at the Pedestrian Zone Any Pedestrian flow Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 130 View Reference allocated to Pedestrian Routes which are deleted will be de allocated and the Actual Pedestrian Flows Matrix in the Traffic Flows View will show a flow deficit reflecting this The flow on Pedestrian Routes through the disconnected Pedestrian Zone Connector should be reallocated to the new Pedestrian Routes created when the Pedestrian Zone is reconnected possibly to a different Pedestrian Link This can be done using the Pedestrian Route List in the Route List View More information is given in the s
351. nal text Cancel A Phase has the following parameters e Phase Letter The letter used to reference the Phase in the Controller The Phase can be relabelled by changing the Phase letter in the drop down List Other Phases will be renumbered accordingly Phases must be contiguous with no gaps in the Phase sequence e Phase Type A phase can exist as one of eight different tyoes These are o Three Aspect Traffic Phase This is a standard phase used for most normal traffic movements Although the signals will in reality Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 166 View Reference show periods of amber and red amber LinSig models the signals as green or not green o Indicative Arrow Phase Generally used to provide an unopposed period for right turning traffic which turns in gaps in the opposing traffic for part of its cycle IGA phases are often mistakenly called Right Filters True Right Filters are relatively uncommon in the UK o Filter Phase Usually used to control left turning traffic which starts before the main movement Also very infrequently used to control right turning traffic as a true Right Filter o Pedestrian Phase Used to control Pedestrians Again LinSig models the signals as green or not green with any blackout periods being subsumed into the not green period o Dummy Phase Dummy Phases are phases which exist only in the signal controller s software and do not control any lights or other equipment o Du
352. nation Lane LinSig will display the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box which allows detailed settings for the Lane Flow being entered to be specified Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 108 View Reference Specify Lane Based Flow Details Flow Details Upstream Lane J2 1 1 General Traffic 0 FECU not yet assigned to destination Downstream Lane J2 4 1 I General Traffic Additional Flow PCU lw Also add same flow to Upstream Lane total flow lf Also add same flow to Downstream Lane total flow LinSig will again intelligently guess at most of the settings and for most typical situations little or no data entry will be required In this case as only a single Layer is defined LinSig will set both Source and Destination Layers In this case all that is required is to specify the amount of traffic travelling between the two Lanes in PCUs for example in this case 100 PCU The settings available are O Source Lane Layer The Layer on the Source Lane from which traffic is leaving Destination Lane layer The Layer on the Destination Lane to which traffic is travelling This will be the same as the Source Lane layer apart from unusual advanced situations where multiple Layers are being merged Also add same Flow to Source Lane Total Flow If this option is selected the flow being added is also added to the Source Lane s Total stop line flow for the Source Layer Also add same Flow to Destination Lane Total Flo
353. nce between the arrows shown on Phases and Lanes For example Phase B in the diagram above is a Three Aspect Phase controlling both ahead and right turn Lanes hence it shows both ahead and right turn arrows Phase F is an Indicative Right Turn Arrow controlling just the right turn and shows only the right turn arrow Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 7 Phase View 165 4 7 2 2 Creating New Phases A new Phase can be created as follows e Choose Add Phase from the Phases pop out menu on the Controllers menu or right click in the Phase View with the mouse and choose Add Phase from the pop up menu e A new Phase is created and can be dropped in an appropriate position using the mouse e The Edit Phase Dialog box is shown and can be used to configure the Phase s properties as described below in Editing Phases e The Phase can be repositioned if necessary by dragging the centre of or circular handles at each end of the Phase with the mouse 4 7 2 3 Editing Phases Phases can be edited by selecting the Phase and choosing Edit Phase from the Phases pop out menu on the Controllers menu or by double clicking with the mouse The Edit Phase Dialog Box shown below is used to edit the Phase s settings eager Phase Phase Type Indicative Arron Phase Type cannot be changed J322 as the following lanes are controlled by this phage Associated Phase Street Phase Minimum d Phase Name additio
354. nd results in a standard format for auditing o Compare two LinSig files displaying Auditing information for both files and intelligently highlighting differences Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 3 The LinSig User Interface 21 e Audit History View The Audit History View allows auditors comments to be irreversibly logged in the LinSig file e Cycle Time Optimisation View The Cycle Time Optimisation View displays the performance of the Network over a range of cycle times e Time Distance Diagrams View The Time Distance Diagrams View displays time distance diagrams for selected Routes through the network This can be used for examining coordination and progression through the Network e Phase Based Design Tool The Phase Based Design Tool graphically implements the advanced technique of Phase Based Design which can often lead to a much more efficient Stage design The technique involves designing a signal sequence based purely on Phases without regard to Stages This can be carried out graphically in the Phase Based Design Tool which assists by advising of and where necessary enforcing constraints such as intergreens and minimums LinSig then analyses the resulting Phase structure to determine what Stages are required to implement the signal sequence in the Controller e Multiple Interstages View The Multiple Interstages View allows a number of Interstage diagrams to be laid out on a page and printed This is particularly useful for pre
355. nd the Actual Flows Matrix in the Traffic Flows View will show a flow deficit reflecting this The flow on Routes through the deleted Lane should be reassigned either to Routes through other Lanes or to Routes through any new Lanes replacing the deleted Lane This can be done by re running the traffic assignment by choosing Assign OD Flows to Routes based on current Scenario from the modelling menu More information is given in the section on the Traffic Flows View For a Lane in a Lane Based Flow Network region the flow on the Lane and its incoming and outgoing connectors will be lost Any consequential flow inconsistencies can be viewed using the Network Layout View s Flow Consistency Mode These can be corrected by adding flow to other Lanes to add back the lost traffic flow Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 71 4 3 6 3 Configuring Lane Settings Lane settings are configured using the Edit Lane dialog box This is opened for a Lane by selecting the Lane and choosing Edit Lane from the Lanes pop out menu on the Network menu or by double clicking the Lane It is advisable to specify Lane turning movements using Lane Connectors as described below before editing Lanes or some options such as specifying give way movements may not be available These settings can of course always be returned to later after Lane Connectors have been added iS Edit Lane 1 1 J j Lane Control a Controller Full Green Pha
356. ndependently control a junction or portion of a junction Each Controller may have more than one Stage Stream to allow it to control more than one junction Each Stage Stream will have its own Stage Sequence made up of Stages from that Stream s set of Stages e Stage Sequence A Stage Sequence is the sequence of Stages running on a single controller If a Controller has several Stage Streams the Stage Sequence defines the order of Stages running for all Streams by providing a separate order of Stages for each Stream Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 1 Definitions 9 e Network Control Plan A Network Control Plan specifies Stage Sequences for all Controllers in the Network This allows the staging arrangement for the entire Network to be specified and stored in one place Each Network Control Plan can be used in one or more Scenarios e Bonus Green An extension or shortening of the effective green period available to traffic Bonus Greens are often used to model underutilised green time or demand dependency e Scenario A Scenario describes all the information needed to fully define a single LinSig model run This includes the Traffic Flow Group the Route Flows the Network Control Plan and the cycle time stage times and offsets Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 10 LinSig Basics 2 2 Working with LinSig Files LinSig stores all the information relating to a Network in a single file LinSig 3 introduces a new file format different to p
357. ndom Delay box omits Random delay from the Lane which may lead to a more realistic estimation of queuing and delays Please note it is down to you as the engineer to make the judgement on whether a Lane has sufficiently non random Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 82 View Reference characteristics to make it justifiable to ignore Random Delay If in doubt it is more conservative to leave the box unticked e Queue De Sliver Threshold PCU A Sliver Queue is defined as a queue which contains a very small amount of traffic but whose back of queue extends a long way back from the stop line Sliver queues are a side effect of the type of traffic model used in LinSig and often occur when the traffic flow feeding a Lane is similar to the Lane s Saturation flow During the green period nearly as much traffic is adding to the back of the queue as is leaving the front leading to a slowly decreasing number of PCU in the queue but a rapidly extending back of queue Where this is particularly severe as is for example common at signal roundabout circulatory stop lines the sliver queue may lead to reporting of unrealistically long mean max queues and over severe application of Optimiser Queue Constraints LinSig is in effect modelling vehicles driving up to the back of the queue at cruise speed joining the queue for a fraction of a second before moving off again In reality drivers would touch their brakes to avoid having to stop and join the queue This le
358. ne from the pop up menu If this menu option is unavailable it is because converting the Lane to a Long Lane would create an illegal Lane arrangement e LinSig converts the Lane to a Long Lane making a intelligent guess regarding Lane Connectors Lane Connectors should be checked and adjusted if incorrect e Edit the Lane to set the Lane length and any other settings which may be different for the Long Lane Editing Lane Settings Each Lane has many different settings which can be edited using the Edit Lane dialog box The Edit Lane dialog box can be opened for a Lane either by selecting the Lane and choosing Edit Lane from the Lanes pop out menu on the Network menu or by double clicking on the Lane A detailed explanation of Lane Settings is given below in Configuring Lane Settings Deleting Lanes A Lane can be deleted by selecting it and choosing Delete Lane from the Lanes pop out menu on the Network Menu If a Long Lane has an attached Short Lane the Long Lane cannot be deleted until the Short Lane has been first deleted Deleting a Lane also deletes the following e Any Lane connectors entering or leaving the Lane e Any Routes passing through the Lane e Any Lane Based Flows defined on the Lane or its connectors e Any graphs or other graphical items associated with the Lane For a Lane in a Matrix Based Network region any traffic flow assigned to Routes through the Lane which are deleted will be lost a
359. ne with default settings will be created adjacent to the existing selected Lane Creating a New Short Lane Select the Long Lane which will feed traffic into the new Short Lane From the Network Lanes Add Lane menu choose Add Short Lane to Left or Add Short Lane to Right as appropriate A new Short Lane will be created attached to the adjacent selected Long Lane The Short Lane will have a default length which can be changed as described below Newly created Lanes are obviously not connected to any other Lanes yet and therefore do not show any directional arrows Converting a Long Lane to a Short Lane A Long Lane can be converted to a Short Lane as follows Select the Long Lane with the mouse Right click on the Lane Choose Convert to Short Lane with Lane on Left or Convert to Short Lane with Lane on Right as appropriate from the pop up menu If either menu option is unavailable it is because converting the Lane to a Short Lane would create an illegal Lane arrangement LinSig converts the Lane to a Short Lane moving Lane Connectors as necessary Edit the Lane to set the Short Lane length and any other settings which may be different for the Short Lane Converting a Short Lane to a Long Lane A Short Lane can be converted to a Long Lane as follows Select the Short Lane with the mouse Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 70 View Reference e Right click on the Lane Choose Convert to Long La
360. ned the objective is to determine traffic flows on individual Lanes possibly disaggregated by traffic type traffic movements passing through the lane or some other criteria The traffic flow on each Lane can then be used by LinSig to calculate results The two available methods of defining traffic flows are e Matrix Based Flows Matrix Based Flows are similar to the method of defining traffic flows in LinSig prior to LinSig 3 1 The following information is used to determine traffic flows on Lanes o An Origin Destination Matrix Each Traffic Flow Group defines an Origin Destination OD Matrix which specifies the total traffic flow for this Flow group between pairs of Zones o Route Flows The OD Matrix only specifies the total traffic flow travelling between a pair of Zones not the route or routes taken When using Matrix Based Flows each LinSig Scenario defines a set of Route Flows which specify the Routes taken by traffic travelling between each Zone pair A Route Flow can either be entered manually or can be estimated by LinSig using a standard traffic assignment user equilibrium algorithm to distribute traffic between Routes based on calculated delays Different Route Flows are stored for each Scenario reflecting the fact that the same OD Matrix can be assigned to the Network in many ways depending on signal timings and other scenario specific issues Using Matrix Based methods LinSig can obtain a fully disaggregated breakdown of traf
361. ng Multiple Stage Streams with the Phase View Multiple Parallel Stage Streams are a feature of traffic signal controllers which allow more than one junction or independent parts of a single Junction to be operated in parallel by a single traffic signal controller As it is used in only a small proportion of junction designs LinSig allows the feature to be switched off simplifying the interface By default Multiple Stage Streams are switched off Every valid LinSig Controller must contain at least one Stage Stream The maximum number of Stage Streams allowed depends on the controller type being used but is typically in the range four to eight with some newer controllers potentially allowing more Remember that using multiple Stage Streams is usually associated with complex designs and the stream structure requires careful thought 4 7 3 1 Switching on Multiple Stage Streams Multiple Stage Streams are switched on as follows e Select the Controller in the Controller List View e Click Edit in the Controller List View to edit the Controller s settings e Tick Allow Multiple Stage Streams in the Controller Settings This enables this Controller to support multiple Stage Streams The Phase View will now be displayed as shown in the next section below Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 168 View Reference 4 7 3 2 The Multiple Stage Stream Phase View When Multiple Stage Streams are switched on the Phase View displays an additional panel
362. ng of dorii lane flows using drag and drop Incoming Flows Oautnoing Flows in the Network Layout View BE Flows General Traffic g tgoing B Flows Buses Movmt to 72 4 1 Ahead 31 3 1 Ahead 12 4 1 Ahead add Total incoming 0 Total outgoing 10000 Consistency Check This page displays the total Lane Based Total Flow 100 Total incoming o Flows for all layers Each layer on this lane can be edited individually by selecting the Uniform Flow 0 Total entering downstream flow 100 ag a tia aay eee Ta Tie anme bi 1 allows you elect whi Apparent flaw loss 100 Flow from this lane leaving network D mist piacan jage eee Mn lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Summary Information displayed on this tab but not available for editing includes e Total Flow PCU The Total Flow is the total flow of traffic across the downstream stop line of this Lane summed over all Flow Layers on the Lane e Uniform Flow PCU The Uniform Flow displays the total Uniform Flow summed over all Flow Layers on the Lane e Incoming Flows PCU The Incoming Flow list lists all the Lane Connectors entering the Lane and shows the flow on each Lane Connector summed over all Flow Layers Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 117 e Outgoing Flows PCU The Outgoing Flow list lists all the Lane Connectors leaving the Lane and shows the flow on each Lane Connector summed over all Flow Layers e Co
363. ng on whether the Controller being displayed contains more than one Stage Stream 4 7 1 Selecting which Controller to View It is possible to have one or more Phase Views open in a LinSig model at any one time Each Phase View shows the Phases for a single LinSig traffic Signal Controller B Phases Current Selection H So lle le Current Selection T Lock To Controller 1 West Controller Controller 2 East Controller The Controller being displayed is set using each View s Controller Selector drop list as follows e LinSig always has a Current Controller which is used by several Views to ensure they are all displaying information for the same Controller The Current Controller is selected using the Controller List View or using the Controller drop down list on the main LinSig toolbar If the Controller drop down list on the Phases View s title bar is set to Current Selection the Phase View will display the Phases for the Current Controller as selected in the Controller List View If the Current Controller changes the Controller displayed in this View will also change to reflect the new Current Controller e In some instances you may wish to view the Phases for several controllers at the same time To allow this each Phase View may be locked to a particular Controller so its display does not change when the Current Controller is changed To lock a Phase View to a Controller drop down the Controller Select
364. nition indicate this by showing an icon to the left of the Fragment in the Available Fragments list The icons have the following meanings The Fragment must normally be within a Repeat Select Block using Scenario as its Repeat criterion The Fragment must normally be within a Repeat Select Block using Flow Group as its Repeat criterion Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 3 The LinSig Report Builder 289 The Fragment must normally be within a Repeat Select Block using Controller as its Repeat criterion The Fragment must normally be within two nested Repeat Select Blocks one using Scenarios and the other Controllers as their Repeat criteria When a LinSig model contains only a single Flow Group Controller or Scenario a Repeat Select Block is NOT strictly required for that criterion as the Report Builder knows that only one item e g Flow Group is available to use with the Fragment It is however recommended to include a Repeat Select Block around the Fragment to avoid having to change the Reports if further ttems e g Flow Groups are added at a later time or the Report Definition is saved as a Template Each Fragment which is dependent on any Repeat Select options being specified indicates whether these requirements have been fulfilled using the Fragment Dependencies section at the top of each Fragment This is illustrated below for the Stage Timings Fragment Fragment Dependencies Stage Timings Report Fragment
365. nnector e The 25 right turners can now be added in a similar manner Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 115 e Note that when specifying a turning flow as a percentage value in this manner it is not always necessary to begin with a flow value on the upstream lane If there is no flow value on the upstream lane the percentage turning proportion can still be added and then when the upstream lane flow is subsequently set the modelled turning flow and the stop line flow on the downstream lane if specified will be automatically updated accordingly Other Cases The above Lane Based Flow editing cases illustrate some of the main tasks which can be carried out using the drag and drop interface The interface is very flexible and many other cases exist but most are combination or parallels of the cases described above Deleting Lane Based Flows using Drag and Drop Lane Based Flows can also be deleted using drag and drop This can be carried out as follows e Click on the Lane Flow number to be deleted with the mouse e Start dragging the Lane Flow number A small bin icon will appear next to the Lane e Drag over the bin and release the mouse effectively dropping the Lane Flow number into the bin Drag Lane Flow A Number into Bin os a Remove all 200 PCU from Lane and remove in and out flows 16 ar F o O 5 I mm Arm J2 1 Main Road Eastbound T i as s Arm J24 Main Road Eastbound
366. nsistency e Significance A combined measure of absolute and percentage error similar to the GEH statistic for comparing flows is used This is the recommended setting The setting in effect scales the circles non linearly so small errors are not missed and large errors do not create large circle obscuring the background Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 122 View Reference Ste Flow Inconsistency Details Additional details of Flow Consistency errors can be obtained by hovering over the consistency error warning indicator with the mouse This displays a pop up table providing details of traffic flows at the point of the inconsistency warning LANE J2 1 1 OUTGOING LANE BASED FLOWS Flow Group 3 AM Peak Lane Based Flows Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 123 4 3 10 Working with Pedestrian Links Pedestrian Links are used in LinSig to represent and model pedestrian crossings Typically a Pedestrian Link is used to model each crossing in the Junctions being modelled Network Layout View H beea w aB El Ske ALLE SOR e SIS le aAA BE Find Junction Pe Te O mja E po Pedestrian Link NG Pedestrian X Link Connector oe w w ajja Naa Arm 1 London Road N e u kn Arm 2 High Street p hos Bast a oc ISRO A G High St London Rd Park St PRC 26 0 Total Traffic Delay 19 4 pcuHr Pedestrian zone Ave Route Delay Per Ped 63 6 s Ped FOS MEd E Wy Route Filter
367. nsistency Check The consistency check table provides various totals of flows entering and leaving the Lane providing a quick check for flow consistency The Flow Consistency Mode of the Network Layout View provides a much more comprehensive graphical check of flow consistency The settings available on this tab are e Selected Flow Group The Selected Flow Group sets which Traffic Flow Group is displayed in the Lane Edit dialog boxes Lane Based Flow tabs This setting is the same as the Selected Flow Group Setting on the Network Layout View s toolbar It is provided here for convenience as it allows Flow Groups to be changed without closing the dialog box e Manage Layers Available to This Lane This setting opens a dialog box which can I 1 B General Traffic if 2 BBuses Select the layers to use on this lane and un select those layers that you no longer wish te use on this lane OK Cancel The dialog lists all available Flow Layers showing the Layers available ticked Layers can be ticked or unticked to make them available or remove them from the Lane If a Layer is removed from a Lane all Lane Based Flows on that Layer are deleted When editing flows using the graphical method Layers are automatically added to Lanes when flows are added This method is only required when manual changes to Layers used by Lanes are required Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 118 View Reference Lane Based Flow Layer The Lane Based Flow Layer t
368. o Park any LinSig licences please contact JCT Software Support who will be happy to guide you through the process You will require access to the PC being deactivated during the call Transferring a Licence Directly to a new PC If you have access to both the old PC and its replacement it is possible to directly transfer the LinSig licence from the old PC to the new PC without needing to contact JCT To carry out this transfer please follow the procedure below This will deactivate the licence on the old PC and provide an Activation Code to activate the new PC You must have access to both the old and new PCs to carry out this procedure On the new PC 1 Install LinSig as normal 2 Follow the instructions in Activating LinSig for the first time up to the point where LinSig provides an installation ID This Installation ID would normally be sent to JCT Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 311 who would supply an Activation Code Do not send this code to JCT the old PC being deactivated will use the new PCs Installation ID to provide the Activation Code for the new PC 3 Make a careful note of this Installation ID for use in the next step On the Old PC 1 Choose About LinSig from the Help menu 2 Click the Transfer Licence button 3 Enter the Installation ID from the new PC as provided above 4 An activation code for the new PC is provided Make a note of this activation code
369. o retain the default colours unless a good reason to change them arises as this will avoid confusion between different users This User Guide assumes that colours are set to default when referring to the colour of ttems and objects Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 2 Using International Options 53 4 2 Using International Options LinSig includes a number of features to make it easier to use outside of the UK These include e Drive on the Right Graphical Views When the Drive on the Right option is set LinSig displays graphical Views using Drive on the Right logic e SCATS Based Terminology LinSig can display Traffic Signal Controller based views using terminology and labelling consistent with the SCATS adaptive traffic control system developed by New South Wales Roads and Traffic Authority e SCATS Controller specification LinSig allows you to specify input data for SCATS controllers in a form consistent with the SCATS system e Level of Service indicator LinSig can display a Level of Service indicator for Lanes Junctions and the entire Network e SCATS Flow Import LinSig can import traffic flows from detector data output by the SCATS Traffic Reporter program e SCATS Daisy Chain offsets LinSig can display controller offset timings relative to a master controller for easy extraction into the SCATS system 4 2 1 Using Drive on the Right for Graphical Views LinSig can be set to
370. of automatically identifying Routes which excessively weave backwards and forwards between Lanes This can be used as follows e In Network Settings check that the option Allow use of Weaving Connectors is selected e On each Lane Connector which carries weaving traffic set the Mark as Weaving Connector option in the Edit Lane Connector dialog box Weaving Lane Connectors are shown dotted Weaving Connectors 7 32 41 fF J3 1 1 Of A J2 4 2 Sy Sa J3 1 2 2 nce Arm J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Arm J3 1 Main Road Eastbound Arm J3 4 Main Road Westbound O J2 2 2 uume mea J3 4 2 O pez Oo BM J3 4 1 e Set a weaving penalty sec per PCU in the assignment options dialog box This penalty is added to the assignment journey time of all traffic using this connector This acts as a deterrent for traffic using this connector and discourages traffic from choosing Routes containing a high proportion of Weaving Lane Connectors The weaving penalty only effects the journey time used for assignment purposes and does not affect any reported journey times or delays Arm J2 2 Main Road Westbound _________s Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 58 View Reference 4 3 3 Specifying Network Information Information regarding the Network being built can be entered using the Network Information dialog box This is opened by choosing Network Information from the Network menu E Netwo
371. oint for matrix estimation or Network validation is a robust set of traffic counts LinSig allows a set of turning counts for each Traffic Flow Group to be entered for each Junction or for the Network as a whole A Traffic Turning Count in LinSig is defined as a measured amount of traffic moving from one Arm from Arm to another Arm to Arm Usually both Arms will be at the same Junction but they do not have to be as long as Lanes on both Arms are directly connected with Lane Connectors Currently it is not possible to specify Lane to Lane counts in LinSig Traffic Counts can be entered in three ways These are e Using a Turning Count Matrix in the Network Layout View Counts can be entered using the Edit Junction Turning Count Dialog box which can be opened by right clicking on a Junction in the Network Layout View and choosing Edit Junction Turning Counts This is described in more detail in the Network Layout View section Edit Junction Tuming Counts Juncton Turning Counts are used for Matris Estimation andor for validating assigned turing Flows Enter Turning Counts here for use in Matix estimation and or assignment validation Turning Counts are for currently selected Flow Group Flow Group being edited F1 AM Peak Change the Flow Group being edited by changing selected Flow Group Count Modelled Flow Difference Origin Destination J2 4 J2 5 J2 1 Main Road Eastbound 500 150 650 J2 2 Main Road Westbound 220
372. oint in the cycle shown on the Animation Control Toolbar Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 33 Animating LinSig Views 275 4 33 4 Viewing Animation in the Stage Sequence View The Staging Plan View highlights the Stage running for each Stage Stream at the current animation time displayed in the Animation Control Toolbar If the current animation time falls in the interstage between two Stages both stages will be highlighted 4 33 5 Viewing Animation in the Signal Timings View The Signal Timings View shows the current animation time within the cycle This makes it very easy to see where in the cycle the animation is which Stage or Interstage is running and which Phases are about to start or terminate Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 276 Detailed Controller Background 5 Detailed Controller Background This section provides additional information on various traffic signal controller issues It is intended to assist with understanding controller issues affecting LinSig modelling and is not intended to replace a thorough knowledge of controllers and their configuration 5 1 1 Phase Minimums LinSig uses two types of Phase Minimum This section explains how the minimums are defined and how they are used in LinSig The Phase Minimum types are e Street Minimum The Street Minimum is the minimum time that a phase must be observed to run for on the street to comply with relevant standards For a traffic phase the Street Minimum is usually
373. oller is selected using the Controller List View or using the Controller drop down list on the main LinSig toolbar If the Controller drop down list on the Intergreen View s title bar is set to Current Selection the Intergreen View will display the Intergreens for the Current Controller as selected in the Controller List View If the Current Controller changes the Controller displayed in this View will also change to reflect the new Current Controller e In some instances you may wish to view the Intergreens for several controllers at the same time To allow this each Intergreen View may be locked to a particular Controller so its display does not change when the Current Controller is changed To lock a Intergreen View to a Controller drop down the Controller Selector drop list in the Intergreen View s title bar and choose which Controller to lock the Intergreen View too Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 172 View Reference 4 8 2 Managing Intergreens 4 8 2 1 Displaying Intergreens for Individual Stage Streams If multiple Stage Streams are enabled in the Controller being edited the Intergreen View can show the Intergreens just for Phases within a Stage Stream rather than for all Phases This allows the Intergreen View to be more concise The drop down list in the Intergreen View s toolbar can be used to choose a Stage Stream for which to display Intergreens or to choose the normal Intergreen View showing all Phases 4 8 2 2 Intergreen
374. ollows e On the File menu pop out the Print Layout menu and choose Create a new Print Page from the pop out menu e The Print Page Settings dialog box will appear This allows settings relating to scaling and layout of the print page to be changed These can be changed at any point so for now click OK to accept the defaults e A light grey rectangle is displayed indicating the current extents of the Print Zone corresponding to the new page The Print Zone can be repositioned and resized using the mouse 6 1 1 2 Editing Print Zones Print Zone Settings are edited using the Print Page Layout dialog box This can be opened by selecting a Print Zone and choosing Edit Print Zone from the Print Layout pop out menu The settings for each page are independent of the settings for other pages Print Page Layout Print Page Number 1 k Page Scaling f Scale To Fit Print Zone to Page f Choose Specific Scale 1 00 W Crop To Print one Page Onentation C Portrait f Landscape Title Block Position Right Page Title PO Indicate scale on tithe block Title Block width 600 Title Block Height 200 OF Cancel The main settings are e Page Number When more than one page is defined pages can be renumbered by choosing a new page number in the drop down list Other pages will be renumbered to create a gap in the numbering sequence if required Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 2 Printing Multiple
375. om a Template Browse for a Template Delete Selected Template Template Description Basic Results Summary A Basic Summary of Model Results Full Input Data And Results A report showing all input data followed by the results LinSig V1 style report A report producing output similar to a LinSig V1 report Signal Configuration Data A report showing just the signal configuration data Signal Timings A Report showing the current signal timings for each Traffic Data A Report showing traffic flow data used in the model Full Input Data And Results A report showing all input data followed by the results LinSig V1 style report A report producing output similar to a LinSig Vi report Signal Configuration Data A report showing just the signal configuration data i A Report showing the current signal timings for each A Report showing traffic flow data used in the model OK Cancel C Create a blank Report Definition Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 3 The LinSig Report Builder 285 e A new Report Definition can be based either on a previously defined Report Template or can be created as a blank Report Definition e To create a new Report based on a Template select the Create a new Report Definition from a Template option The Template List lists all of the Templates currently installed in either o The System Templates Folder The Templates in this folder are listed in brown The folder is located at LinSig Install Folder Rep
376. om delay component is calculated using standard formulae and is added to the uniform and oversaturated delay to give the total delay on the Lane In reality traffic arriving at a stop line from an approach which has no signalled junctions will have a very high random component where as arrivals from within a dense network of signals will have a much lower random component The random delay component in the calculations is assumed to be a combination of the two situations Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 1 The LinSig Traffic Model 37 3 1 1 5 Queuing The queue lengths calculated by cyclic flow profile models are often misunderstood and it is important to understand the different queue components and how they are used to predict queue lengths Queues are inherently difficult to model accurately regardless of the quality or level of detail used in the model Predicted queue lengths are extremely sensitive to small changes in input data For example looking at a typical Lane in a LinSig model with a flow of 600 PCU its predicted queue at a degree of saturation of 90 is 19 PCU Increasing the flow by 10 gives a degree of saturation of saturation of 100 and a queue of 29 PCU an increase of over 50 in the queue length Due to the variability of queues and sensitivity to small changes in conditions both in models and in reality we recommend avoiding directly calibrating models to measured queues as unless done with extreme care and highly deta
377. ommended to allocate Phases to Stage Streams as soon as possible in the design as this will assist LinSig with error checking when working in other Views particularly when defining which Phases run in which Stages in the Stage View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 170 View Reference 4 7 3 4 Managing Stage Streams using the Phase View Although the Controller List View is the main place to manage Stage Streams the Phase View can also be used as follows Selecting Stage Streams and the Current Stage Stream When carrying out an action on a Stream LinSig needs to know which Stream to use The Stage Stream panel allows a Stage Stream to be selected highlighting it in red This selected Stage Stream will be used in all situations where an action is performed on a Stage Stream for example when adding a Stage in the Stage View it will be added to the Current Stage Stream The current Stage Stream can also be set using the Stage Stream dropdown list on the main LinSig toolbar Creating a new Stage Stream To create a new Stage Stream choose Add a Stage Stream from the Stages Menu A new Stage Stream will be shown in the Stage Stream panel This will initially have no Phases allocated to it Deleting Stage Streams To delete a Stage Stream select the Stream you wish to delete and choose Delete Stage Stream from the Stages Menu or right click pop up menu Allocating Phases to a Stage Stream Phases are allocated to a Stage Strea
378. on the Desired Origin Destination matrix LinSig uses standard traffic routing algorithms to automatically assign the OD Matrix to Routes based on delays calculated by the traffic model Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 194 View Reference lt is of course possible to use a combination of the above methods using automatic assignment initially and refining manually where desired 4 12 2 2 Automatic Assignment Methods LinSig can assign traffic using two different methods These are e Delay Based Assignment Delay based assignment is new to Version 3 and is the now the preferred method for assigning flows to Routes in most cases LinSig uses delays calculated from the LinSig network model to assign traffic to Routes using a standard equilibrium assignment method In basic terms LinSig distributes traffic between competing Routes such that no traffic can achieve a quicker travel time between two Zones by transferring to a different Route This method is widely used in large area transport modelling software packages such as SATURN or TRIPS however LinSig is the only small area model of its type which assigns traffic in this way whilst modelling delays due to traffic signals in such a high level of detail e Network Entry Arm Lane Flow Balancing LinSig assigns traffic to Routes by attempting to achieve equal Lane flows on Network Entry Arms No account is taken of flow distribution on arms other than the first Arm on a Route This method is an alte
379. one All Arm All r Lane All Contains Junc All Arm All Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 296 Examples aH Edit Lane 1 1 Movement Give Way Data Flow wh ffi d Flow when sing trathe is sto lw This movement gives way e Use Data Specified Below f Use Lane Saturation Flow Value MM Flows General Traffic Movmt to 4 1 Left Maximum Flow while Giving Way pcu Hr 715 Use Custom Value pcu Hr Minimum Flow while Giving Way pou Hr 0 Opposing Lanes 2 Allopposing To 4 1 Ahead 2 I Al opposing To 4 1 Right lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Points to note are The Lane settings are identical to those for the long give way Lane above Only the fact that the give way Lane Is created as a Short Lane is different LinSig will model any queue build up in the give way Lane and its effect on the traffic in the Ahead Lane LinSig will model any Lane starvation effects caused by traffic queuing in the Ahead Lane preventing left turners reaching the left turn Lane Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 297 7 1 5 Example 5 Right Turn Opposed Movement at Signals A signal controlled junction where a right turn is controlled on a give way basis opposed In this example the right turners must give way to two movements Lane 2 1 and Lane 2 2 It is assumed that three right turners can store in front of the stop line and that two right turners will clear during
380. onstraints The Optimiser Queue Constraints can be used to help with modelling queue blocking back from one Lane to an upstream Lane No input is required if excess queuing is not occurring The constraints allow the LinSig Stage length optimiser to be discouraged from producing stage lengths which lead to queues on Lanes exceeding the Queue Limit For example if a Lane between two junctions was a single lane of 100m this provides space for approximately 100 6 16 PCU Because the vertical queuing model used in LinSig more details are in the Modelling Background Section does not model blocking back from Lanes so depending on the other Lane data LinSig may model a queue of 20PCU which obviously extends beyond the end of the Lane Setting a queue optimiser constraint of 16 PCU encourages the optimiser to choose a longer green time reducing the queue on the Lane to below 16 PCU The individual parameters are o Excess Queue Limit PCU The queue length beyond which LinSig will try to reduce the queue This is normally set to approximately three quarters of the queuing space on the Lane but Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 81 can also be set to less to force the optimiser to be more aggressive in reducing the queue Beware of being too aggressive as this may prevent the optimiser from finding a meaningful answer o Degree of Saturation Weighting This value is only used when optimising for Practical Reserve Capacity PRC
381. ontrol Plans to specify the Stage Sequence running on each Controller Network Control Plans avoid the need to re specify each Controllers Stage Sequence for every Scenario Typically a Network Control Plan will be created for each different Network wide signal sequencing strategy e Define Modelling Scenarios A Scenario associates together a Traffic Flow Group Network Control Plan Cycle Time and signal timings providing LinSig with all the information it needs to calculate model results Providing there are no errors in the model LinSig will always display model results for the current Scenario which can be selected from the main toolbar or in the Scenario View LinSig will initially use Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 5 The LinSig Modelling Process 25 arbitrary Stage Lengths but these can easily be changed for the current Scenario either manually using the Signal Timings View as detailed below or automatically using the optimisation facilities LinSig will then recalculate the model results for the new Stage Lengths The Scenario View can also be used to optimise a number of Scenarios at once as a batch e Changing Signal Times using the Signal Timings View and Timing Dials The initial results displayed by LinSig will be calculated using an initial arbitrary set of Stage Lengths for each Controller or Stage Stream The current Stage times being used can be displayed using the Signal Timings View which also shows the duration of Phases and d
382. oosing Delete Junction from the Junction pop out menu Deleting a Junction also deletes all items associated with the Junction such as Arms Lanes Lane Connectors graphs etc Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 63 4 3 5 Working with Arms An Arm in LinSig is a one way section of road forming part of the LinSig Network Arms take no part in modelling and are principally for grouping Lanes to allow them to be graphically manipulated as a single unit Arms always contain at least one Lane The figure below shows a typical Arm just after it has been created and contains only a single Lane which is not yet connected to anything else The colour of the Lane number circle shows how the lane is controlled as described in the Lanes section below Lane Lane Lane Entry Number Point amp Contral Arm 1 West St Arm 4 3 5 1 Creating New Arms New Arms can be created in the Network Layout View as follows e Choose Add Arm from the Arms pop out menu on the Network menu A new Arm will be created which can be dragged into its desired position and dropped by clicking with the mouse If necessary the Arm can be rotated and repositioned more accurately after it has been created as described below in Moving and Repositioning Arms e When the Arm is dropped the Edit Arm dialog box is displayed This allows the Arm s settings to be entered Edit Arm Am Mo 1 Junction West St London Hoad
383. or each Arm leaving the Junction These values can be compared with Inflow totals to assist with detecting inconsistent counts Note that if you have entered Counts for turning movements that pass through more than two Arms these will not be displayed in the Turning Counts View 4 14 1 2 Zone Totals Each Zone in the Network graphically displays the total counted Origins and Destinations As in the Matrix Estimation View the Zone Totals can be implied by adding nearby Turning Counts or can be explicitly entered values Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 214 View Reference 4 14 1 3 Editing Turning Counts and Zone Totals Turning Counts and Zone Totals can be edited in the Turning Counts View by double clicking with the mouse and entering the new count value in PCU This will update the Count which will also be reflected in the Matrix Estimation View and the Junction Turning Counts Matrix Further information on using Counts is provided in the Matrix Estimation View section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 15 Signal Timings View 215 4 15 Signal Timings View Each Signal Timings View is used to display and adjust the Stage and Phase timings for the Current Scenario The View is opened by choosing Signal Timings View from the Stage Sequences menu EE Signal Timings View fq fo le e Display Cycle Time Maintain Cycle Time Allow Edit Timings Double Triple time Reduce To Min Optimise For Delay Optimise For PRC Time in cycle sec
384. or hidden Defining a Column Set A column set can be defined by selecting the columns for display as detailed below and clicking save next to one of the column sets Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 22 Network Results View 239 Displaying a Column Set A Column Set can be displayed by clicking on Use next to one of the Column Sets View Type The View Type allows the Network Results View to be displayed as a hierarchal Tree View the default or as a Flat View showing all Lanes at one level The Flat View is primarily to allow all Lanes to be sorted by one column for example Degree of Saturation irrespective of its parent Junction 4 22 1 2 The Results List The Results List displays numerical data and results for the items selected using the Route Filter The Results List is hierarchal allowing the amount of information displayed to be managed by expanding or collapsing sections of the list to display more or less information Expanding and Collapsing the Results List ltems on the results list can be expanded or collapsed by clicking on the or adjacent to each item The List adjusts the number of columns displayed so that only relevant columns are displayed when the list is fully or partially collapsed Customising the Data Columns Displayed The Results List can be customised by adding or removing columns from the Results List The columns shown can be changed as follows e Right Click on the Results List colu
385. or drop list in the Phase Views title bar and choose which Controller to lock the Phase View too Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 164 View Reference 4 7 2 Single Stage Stream Use The Phase View shows the current layout of Phases defined in the Controller Each Phase is colour coded to indicate its phase type Phases show directional arrows based on the Lanes they control and therefore arrows are only shown when a Phase controls one or more Lanes vy Tipas Current Selection sa ale ES H Bla alale LE elel eB 4F L2 2 2 4 7 2 1 Using the Phase View The Phase View can be zoomed and panned as described above in General View Features This section also describes how to change other visual settings how to print the Phase View and how to export its layout to other graphics software The Phase View shows the following Each Phase is displayed as an arrow indicating the traffic movements controlled by the Phase Phases are colour coded depending on Phase type Phases can be rotated lengthened shortened by dragging the circular handles at each end of a Phase The whole phase can also be relocated by selecting it and dragging Directional arrows are shown on the Phase only after one or more Lanes have been defined as being controlled by the Phase It should be remembered that Phases may control several Lanes and that Lanes may be controlled by more than one Phase so that there will not always be a one to one corresponde
386. or mix both methods in one model using different methods in different regions of the Network 2 3 3 Important LinSig User Interface Components The LinSig user interface consists of the main program window which contains the following ltems More detailed explanations of many items including each View are included in the Views Reference section of this User Guide Main Menu The main menu is located along the top of the LinSig main Window and is the primary method for carrying out tasks in LinSig Unless otherwise stated all tasks in LinSig are carried out by choosing the relevant command from this menu If a menu command is shown in grey this means it is not currently possible to carry out the command For example the Edit Zone command is shown in grey if no Zone is currently selected as LinSig does not know which Zone to edit Status Bar The Status Bar is shown along the bottom of the main window and displays useful information about the current LinSig model View Arrangements Manager The View Arrangements Manager allows arrangements of the different LinSig Views to be defined and saved Different arrangements of views can then be recalled at any time depending on the current task being undertaken For example one View arrangement may be defined Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 3 The LinSig User Interface 17 positioning the Views to allow easy entering of traffic flows whilst another may arrange the signal editing Views
387. or the number of Stops down o Optimiser Delay Degree of Saturation Weighting This weight allows the Delay or Degree of Saturation calculated by the traffic model for this Lane to be factored up or down when used by the optimiser Delay is used when optimising for minimum delay and degree of saturation is used when optimising for maximum PRC A value of 100 will have no effect a value greater than 100 will factor the Delay or Degree of Saturation up and a value of less than 100 will factor the Delay or Degree of Saturation down o Degree of Saturation Limit The Degree of Saturation Limit prevents the optimiser from finding signal timings which produce a degree of saturation on a Lane which exceeds this limit This can be useful in prioritising the main road on an arterial corridor study Whether to include the effects of Stops in the optimiser and the valuation of Stops relative to delay are set in the Optimisation Settings dialog box e Random Delay On some Lanes the assumptions used on the level of Random Delay used by LinSig may be unrealistic for the particular conditions on the Lane The most common example is a signal roundabout circulatory Lane As the distance between an entry and circulatory stop line is often only a short length traffic platoons arriving at the circulatory stop line are often very regular and non random leading to an overestimation of Random Delay at higher degrees of saturation Ticking the Ignore Ra
388. ort Templates This is usually C Program Files JCT Consultancy LinSig 3 Report Templates This folder contains all the pre defined Templates supplied with LinSig Although there is no reason not to save your own Templates here you may find that your system s permissions have made the program files folder read only o Custom Templates Folder The Templates in this folder are listed in black The folder is located at My Documents LinSig Report Templates If desired the folder can be changed using the LinSig Program Options to a shared network drive to allow users to share Templates Select the desired template and click OK to create the new Report Definition from the selected Template and return to the main Report Builder e Alternatively select the Create a blank Report Definition option and click OK to create the Report Definition and return to the Report Builder e The new Report Definition is listed in the Report Definitions List in the Report Builder Deleting a Report Definition A Report Definition can be deleted at any time by selecting the Report Definition in the Report Definitions List and clicking Delete current Report Definition This will only delete the Report Definition from the current LinSig file and will not affect any template files from which the Report Definition may have been created Saving a Report Definition as a Template A Report Definition can be saved as a LinSig Report Template
389. osed Lane receives a green arrow signal per cycle This is only applicable for Lanes controlled by an Indicative Green Arrow or Filter Phase Bonus Green Indicates whether Bonus Greens are present on the Lane Demand Flow PCU The total Traffic Flow in the current Flow Group wishing to travel on the Lane The Demand Flow assumes all traffic reaches the Lane and does not reduce the Flow on the Lane where upstream Lanes are overcapacity and hold back traffic Saturation Flow PCU hr The Saturation Flow on the Lane Capacity PCU The Capacity of the Lane is the amount of traffic which can exit the Lane assuming infinite arriving traffic flows in the same turning proportions as the arriving demand traffic flows Degree of Saturation The Degree of Saturation of the Lane This is defined as the ratio of Flow to Capacity for the Lane Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 22 Network Results View 241 e Entering Flow PCU The total traffic flow entering the Lane from upstream Lanes This may be lower than the Demand Flow if traffic is held up on upstream oversaturated Lanes e Leaving Flow PCU The total traffic flow leaving the Lane This may be lower than the Entering Flow if the Lane is oversaturated e Turners in Gaps PCU The total flow exiting a Give Way Lane during gaps in the opposing traffic e Turners When Unopposed PCU The total turning flow turning during a Give Way Lane s unopposed period normally when an ind
390. ow Matrix will automatically be assigned to Routes using the current Traffic Flow Assignment Options This will overwrite any existing route flows you may have If Auto Assion is not enabled the Desired Flows will not he assianed to Routes until the Assian The Traffic Flows View is split into two panels These are e The Traffic Flow Group List The Traffic Flow Group List shows the different Traffic Flow Groups defined in the LinSig model The list also shows Flow Group currently being displayed and edited in rest of the Traffic Flow View and the Flow Group currently being used by the current Scenario for traffic model calculations e The Origin Destination OD Matrices The matrix displays the traffic or Pedestrian OD flow matrices for the currently selected Flow Group As explained below only the Desired Flows matrix can be edited the other matrices being used to display information calculated from the Network s Route Flows 4 4 1 Defining Traffic Flows in LinSig LinSig 3 1 provides a new alternative method of defining traffic flows as well as the existing Matrix based method Detailed information on both methods including their relative advantages and disadvantages is given in Flow Definition Methods in the Essential Background section 4 4 2 Defining Pedestrian Flows in LinSig The use of pedestrian flows in LinSig is optional LinSig can still model pedestrian delays without pedestrian flow data however flow data i
391. ow is involved in this action and has insufficient information to make a guess The Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box is therefore displayed to request details of the action In this case it is desired to add 200 PCU from the Source Lane to the first Destination Lane The 200 PCU is entered into the dialog box and Add Lane Flow clicked All other options have been anticipated correctly 200 PCU is added to the Source Lane Total Flow the Lane Connector and the Destination Lane Total Flow Drag with the mouse from the same Source Lane to the second Destination Lane As the current Source Lane Total Flow is all allocated to outgoing Lane Connectors LinSig anticipates that flow is being added rather than propagated from the Source Lane as in Case 2 As new flow is being added and LinSig doesn t know how much flow is being added the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box is displayed to allow this to be entered 100 PCU is entered as moving between Source and Destination Lanes Additionally as LinSig has anticipated that flow is being added rather than propagated the options in the dialog box have both defaulted to adding the new flow to both Source and Destination Lanes When Add Lane Flow is clicked LinSig adds the 100 PCU to the Source Lane s Total Flow to give a new Total Flow of 300 PCU and adds 100 PCU to the Lane Connector and the Destination Lane s Total Flow Case 4 Single Flow Layer Splitting Exi
392. ows for this Random queuing using a standard formula to estimate the level of Random queuing on each Lane assuming random arrivals This is then added to the Uniform and Oversaturated Queues to give the Lane s Total Queue Although this technique allows the Lane to be modelled using a single typical cycle reducing the modelling load it can lead to inaccuracies in some cases for example when a Lane is in the middle of a dense network of closely spaced signal junctions arrivals will often be very tightly platooned and non random leading to an overestimate of Random Queuing This is especially apparent on Short Lanes which although highly saturated are completely coordinated with upstream Lanes for example a circulatory Lane on a signal roundabout Although the tight coordination allows all traffic through in the green time with no queuing the random delay predicts a queue even though the non random behaviour of traffic in this case means no Random Queuing would occur in practice LinSig therefore allows the Random Delay Queue calculation to be switched off on selected Lanes This should only be used in cases where it can be easily justified It should not be seen as a convenient way of reducing the queue on an inconvenient Lane Mean Max Queue The Mean Max Queue is the sum of the Maximum Back of Queue in the modelled typical cycle and the calculated Random amp Oversaturated Queue The Mean refers to the fact that it is the mean over a num
393. paring documentation for use in Controller Factory Acceptance Tests FAT e Stage Minimums View The Stage Minimums View displays the stage minimums for all possible combinations of preceding and succeeding stages This information is useful when configuring remote monitoring and in some SCOOT applications e SCOOT Data Preparation View The SCOOT Data Preparation View assists with the preparation of a SCOOT Database The View allows SCOOT Stages to be defined in terms of one or more Controller Stages LinSig then analyses all possible combinations of Controller Stages which affect SCOOT Interstage and Stage minimums and reports the limits for Interstages and minimums for the controller which SCOOT may encounter e VISSIM Interface View The VISSIM Interface View allows links to be set up between LinSig and a VISSIM model This allows LinSig to import signal information from an existing LinSig model and also to update signal information in the VISSIM model after changes have been made in LinSig e Error View The Error View Lists all current Errors and Warnings in the LinSig model together with their location Errors indicate a fatal problem somewhere in the model whereas Warnings indicate only a possible problem which it would be wise to check e Cyclic Flow Profiles View The Cyclic Flow Profiles View allows Lane Flow Profile graphs to be laid out on a page to be viewed or printed Both Flow and queue profiles can be displayed and profiles can
394. pecified in the Network Information dialog box Please note that JCT are not responsible for the availability of this service and Google in no way endorses LinSig Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 59 4 3 4 Working with Junctions A LinSig Junction is a grouping of Arms Lanes and other items which are associated with a real junction It is used to graphically manipulate these items as a group and to structure and aaay results and other junction related information ar Network Layout View A o eee fs se xal BERERE Sle SUL SSIS fe a elel Aaaale B14 GIES m os Cl E _ 51 a o 4 Arm 5 Arm 2 High Street _ _ _ _ __ Sf Ao rs we Pi ri wes ms g is tet IN ie td ANY X p 1 4 1 mt j n 2 1 i BIS W 3 High St London Rd Park St _ wo PRC 26 0 y a Total Traffic Delay 19 4 pcuHr o Ave Route Delay Per Ped 63 6 s Ped z 5 5 N gt fo O Junction Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All v Arm All v Lane All w Contains Junc All v Arm All Lane All v Connector All v Destination Zone The information shown by the Junction includes e Junction Name This is a name which identifies the Junction e PRC The Practical Reserve Capacity of the Junction e Traffic Delay The total traffic delay on all Lanes associated with the Junction in PCUh e Pedestrian Delay The delay per Pedestrian in
395. ped the rate of egress would be the Lane saturation flow which in this case would be wrong e In order for LinSig to know the time at which traffic from Lane 2 1 and Lane 3 1 is passing the give way entry a clear conflict time is added for each of the opposing Lanes The clear conflict time relates to the cruise time for vehicles travelling between the stop line and the give way point for each movement e In this case there is only a single movement on each Opposing Lane therefore the Opposing Movements part of each Opposing Lane entry is set to All Opposing for each Opposing Lane In more complex examples only certain movements leaving each Opposing Lane may oppose In this case the All Opposing box should be unticked and each individual movement s box ticked if it opposes Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 295 7 1 4 Example 4 Left Turn Give Way from a Short Lane This example is identical to Example 3 but the left turn Lane is short with the potential to block back into the ahead Lane The left turners must give way to two movements Lane 2 1 and Lane 3 1 Assuming an Intercept of 715 and coefficient of 0 22 the parameters are entered into the left turns Movement tab of the Lane 1 1 Edit Lane dialog box as shown below Clear Conflict SF Network Layout View Hw fo le e Sle alela Bl 2 21 2 2 OS alre SSX OS Bl Find Junction ag Find Arm See Route Filter Reset Origin Z
396. plates to get you started however you may find it useful to develop a series of standard Report Definitions which can be distributed within your organisation to ensure a consistent Report design by all users 6 3 2 Quickly Printing a Default Report LinSig comes with a number of pre built Report Templates which can be used to quickly run a report if you haven t yet had chance to develop your own Report templates To create a report based on a default template e Open the Report Builder by choosing Report Builder from the LinSig Reports menu e Click the Add New Report Definition button The Create a New Report Definition Dialog Box will open as shown below The Standard Report Templates supplied with LinSig are shown in brown Any User Defined Report Templates are listed in black E Create A New Report Definition 2s f Create a new Report Definition from a Template Browse for a Template Delete Selected Template Template Description Basic Results Summary A Basic Summary of Model Results Full Input Data And Results A report showing all input data followed by the results LinSig V1 style report A report producing output similar to a LinSig V1 report Signal Configuration Data A report showing just the signal configuration data Signal Timings A Report showing the current signal timings for each Traffic Data Report showing traffic fow data used in the model Full Input Data And Results A report showing all input data follo
397. porting amp Merging LinSig Networks section 4 12 1 6 Managing Cycle Times Cycle times are managed slightly differently depending on whether multiple Controller Sets exist within the model Managing Cycle Times for a Single Controller Set Model The Scenario s cycle time can be changed by either clicking on a Scenario s existing cycle time and entering a new one or by selecting the Scenario and entering a new Network cycle time in the main LinSig toolbar Managing Cycle Times for a Multiple Controller Set Model Where multiple Controller Sets exist the cycle times can be managed as follows e Click on either a Scenario s existing cycle time or the cycle time on the main LinSig toolbar This will open the Controller Set Cycle Time Management dialog box Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 192 View Reference E Edit Controller Set cycle times scenario AM Peak Current Controller Set Cyde Time Default Controller Set Western Area Current Enter the Cycle times for each Controller Set in the selected Scenario The cycle time will set for all controllers in that Controller Set Cancel e The Controller Set Cycle Time Management dialog box allows the cycle time of each Controller Set for each Scenario to be changed More information is provided on cycle time management in the Signal Timings View section 4 12 1 7 Controlling Recalculation of Model Results When an item of data affecting model resul
398. previous versions of LinSig groups of Lanes called Links were used extensively to define the Network structure In LinSig 3 data entry has been simplified and modelling capabilities have been extended by a move to Lane based modelling In LinSig 3 most data is entered Lane by Lane instead of some for Lanes and some for Links As well as making data entry more straightforward many settings such as controlling signal Phase can be specified for individual Lanes rather than the Link as a whole as was required in LinSig 2 This allows a number of situations to be modelled in more detail and with fewer simplifying assumptions than in LinSig 2 This is described in more detail later in the User Guide Multiple Traffic Signal Controllers LinSig 3 allows multiple traffic signal Controllers to be defined and edited Generally Controller based views such as the Phase View or Stages View show information for one Controller at a time The Controller being displayed can either be set to the current edited Controller or locked to a particular Controller Changing the current edited Controller will change the Controller being displayed and edited in all Controller based views set to Current Controller Multiple Traffic Flow Definition Methods LinSig 3 1 and above provide two different ways to define traffic flows Using and OD Matrix and Routes as in LinSig 2 and LinSig 3 0 and Lane Based Flows Each LinSig model can use either method across the whole Network
399. quence and to change its name Alternatively the Stage Sequence Name can be edited directly by clicking on a Sequence name in the Stage Sequence List Deleting a Stage Sequence A Stage Sequence can be deleted by selecting the Stage Sequence in the Stage Sequence List and choosing Delete Stage Sequence from the Stage Sequences Menu After deleting a Stage Sequence the next Sequence is automatically selected When a Stage Sequence is deleted any Network Control Plans using the deleted Stage Sequence will become invalid Additionally any Scenarios using invalidated Network Control Plans will become invalid and will no longer be available for modelling until their Network Control Plans are corrected or a new Network Control Plan chosen 4 10 2 2 The Stage Sequence Display The Stage Sequence Display shows the Stage order configured for the current Stage Sequence Stages can run in any order and can if necessary be repeated The Stage Sequence shows a Stage diagram for each time a Stage runs in the Stage Sequence Each Stage diagram shows the Phases running in the Stage and other information about the Stage This includes Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 182 View Reference e The Phases running in the Stage are displayed The Stage Sequence View toolbar provides options on how Phases are displayed e The Interstage duration between a Stage and its preceding Stage is shown in the bottom left corner of the Stage This is only shown for the S
400. r and when traffic in the Short Lane blocks traffic in its adjacent Long Lane e A Right Turn Storage Area The Right Turn Storage Area is the space within the centre of a junction where right turning tratfic can wait in front of the stop line to turn in gaps in the oncoming traffic This graph shows traffic storing within the Storage Area and is useful for assessing how right turning traffic blocks ahead traffic in an adjacent Long Lane 4 27 5 1 Creating Storage Graphs Uniform Queue Graphs are created as described above and selecting Storage Graph as the Graph Type Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 28 Error View 259 4 28 Error View The Error View brings together all error and warning messages for the whole LinSig model It acts like a checklist of errors requiring fixing avoiding the need to trawl the model looking for errors and reducing the likelihood of accidentally missing a problem which could be causing results to be incorrect The Error View can be opened by choosing Show Error View from the View Menu or by double clicking the Error Warning on the Status Bar at the bottom of the Main Window Error View A Eee i Likl Flow Group AM Peak 4027 Warning Desired Flows do not match the Actual Route Flows The Error View shows three main pieces of information e The Error s Location This describes where in the LinSig model the error occurs e Code A numeric code identifying the error type e
401. raffic Layer Drag from the Source to the Destination Layer but avoid the current General Traffic numbers LinSig will again be unable to guess which Layer is being used and show the Specify Lane Based Flow Details to allow the Layer to be specified This time select the red Bus Layer and enter 50 PCU for the flow The flow is displayed in Red as it is on the Bus Layer Flow on Bus Layer Flow on General Traffic Layer _ ________________ Arm J2 1 Main Road Eastbound Arm J2 4 Main F Arm J2 6 Main Road Westbound 4 7 Arm J2 2 Main R 7 m J2 2 Main R t wo es Each Lane displays each Layers Total Flow The Total Stop Line Flow across all Layers is displayed in front of the Lane Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 113 Case 6 Multiple Flow Layers Existing Flows on Source Layer When existing flows exist on multiple Layers on the Source Lane LinSig allows each number to be dragged to another Lane to allocate traffic for that Layer to Lane Connectors By dragging the individual numbers rather than just dragging from the Layer LinSig can guess more information and reduce the amount of data entry For a Lane with two Flow Layers General Traffic and Bus Traffic 200 PCU Total Flow already exists on the General Traffic Layer and 50 PCU exists on the Bus Layer e Drag the black 200 PCU from the Source Lane to the Destination Lane e As traffic on the General Traffic Lay
402. raphical Items LinSig can display a grid and snap the cursor to the grid when dragging The grid is controlled from the View menu The grid size is controlled on the Graphical Settings tab of the File Settings dialog box which is opened from the File Menu 4 3 5 3 Editing Arm Settings An Arm can be edited by selecting the Arm with the mouse and choosing Edit Arm from the Arms pop out menu on the Network Menu This displays the Edit Arm dialog box which can be used to change the Arm s settings as described in Creating New Arms above 4 3 5 4 Deleting Arms An Arm can be deleted by selecting the Arm and choosing Delete Arm from Arms pop out menu on the Network menu It is important to remember that deleting an Arm also deletes any Lanes belonging to the Arm Undo is of course available in case of accidental deletion Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 65 4 3 6 Working with Lanes LinSig uses Lanes to define how road space is used on an Arm The number of Lanes on the Arm and whether they are Long Lanes or Short Lanes is used to specify how the Arm operates Lanes are shown in the Network Layout View as shown below Arm 1 London Road Each Lane is numbered with its number being shown in the coloured Lane number circle in front of the Lane Lanes are always numbered from nearside to offside that is left to right In the UK and other drive on the left regions It is usua
403. rately whilst allowing for interaction between traffic in each Layer Matrix Based Network regions use a similar method to separately model flows on different Routes through the Network With Matrix Based regions all of the Layers are automatically created invisibly in the background from Routes and do not require any manual data entry or configuration Lane Based Flow Layers allow selective disaggregation of important movements or important traffic types eg Buses They should not be used to model a Network which requires extensive separation of traffic movements such as a signal roundabout as if this level of detail is required it can be achieved much more efficiently using Matrix Based Methods Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 42 Essential Background For simple Networks where it is not important to separate out different traffic types it will be sufficient to use a single Layer for the whole Network 3 2 3 Using both Matrix Based and Lane Based Methods in the same Model LinSig 3 1 allows Matrix Based and Lane Based Flow definition methods to be mixed in the same model This has the advantage of allowing important areas of the Network which require detailed modelling to be defined using Matrix Based methods whilst the rest of the Network is modelled using Lane Based Flows Lane Base Flows will usually be sufficiently accurate where flow patterns are simple for example an arterial road with little side road traffic relative to the main road
404. re discussed later is used Lane Connectors within a Junction define which turning movements can take place from an Entry Lane to an Exit Lane at the same Junction Lane Connectors between Junctions specify which Lane changes can take place between junctions Lane Connectors are added in the Network Layout View by dragging with the mouse from one Lane to another Lane e Set Cruise Times on Lane Connectors For each Lane Connector set a cruise time Where multiple Lane Connectors between Arms all have the same cruise time they can be edited in one step by selecting all the Lane Connectors between the Arms right clicking on the Lane Connectors and choosing Edit Multiple Lane Connectors from the pop up menu e Set Lane Lengths amp Saturation Flows For each Lane in turn edit the Lane s length on the Lane Details tab and the saturation flow on the Sat Flow Data tab Saturation Flows can either be manually entered or calculated from the Lane s geometry e Add Zones LinSig uses Zones for routed Networks or routed regions of Network to specify how traffic will enter and exit the Network or routed region Each Zone specifies a Network Entry Arm and a Network Exit Arm to define how traffic will enter or leave the Network from the Zone The Zones are also used by Traffic Flow Origin Destination OD matrices to specify traffic flows wishing to travel through the routed regions of the Network Zones are added in the Network Layout View by choosing
405. re no longer fully specified will be removed from the Zone totals panel If new Counts which are to be added will not re specify the Zone total a Zone total should be manually entered as detailed below Importing and exporting Count values Counts can be Imported and Exported to a CSV file This allows the Count values to be manipulated outside of LinSig and then subsequently imported into LinSig CSV files can be edited using a simple text editor or alternatively can be edited using spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel The format of the CSV file is straightforward Each line in the CSV file corresponds to a single Count value The first value in the line is the value of the Count in PCUs The subsequent values in the line are the identifiers of the LinSig Arms that the counted traffic turns through The following snippet provides an example of the CSV file format The first line contains a Count of 513 PCUs turning from Arm J2 1 to Arm J2 4 The second line contains a Count of 152 PCUs turning from Arm J2 1 to Arm J2 5 Counted traffic turning through multiple Arms Sometimes traffic is counted making a movement that is represented in the LinSig model as a path through multiple Arms For example the right turn of a roundabout may pass through an entry Arm and two circulatory Arms before finally exiting the roundabout at an exit Arm LinSig allows you to enter Count values for these type of movements by using the CSV import facil
406. reate a Pedestrian Zone e Choose Create Pedestrian Zone from the Pedestrian Zones pop out menu on the Network menu e Position the Pedestrian Zone in the Network Layout View and drop it by clicking with the mouse e The Create Pedestrian Zone dialog box is displayed to configure the new Pedestrian Zone e LinSig will automatically connect the Pedestrian Zone to the nearest possible Pedestrian Link Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 129 Create Pedestrian fone Pedestrian Zone Number 3 Pedestrian Zone Name C Associated Pedestrian Link P4 Peds Across Park St Eastside Link attachment point Right Associated Pedestrian Link None e The Create Pedestrian Zone dialog box allows the following settings to be specified o The Zone s Name Number Pedestrian Zones are always named as a letter Pedestrian Zones can be named in any order but there can be no gaps in the sequence of Pedestrian Zone names If a Pedestrian Zone is given the same name as an existing Pedestrian Zone the new Pedestrian Zone is inserted in the sequence and Pedestrian Zones later in the name sequence are renumbered o Associated Pedestrian Link The Pedestrian Link into which the Pedestrian Zone feeds Pedestrian traffic o Pedestrian Link Attachment Point Specifies which end of the Pedestrian Link the Zones attaches to e Click OK to create the Pedestrian Zone The Pedestrian Zone displays dotted Zone Feeds i
407. reated from splitting multi Lane Links e Review lengths of Short Lanes LinSig 3 s traffic model takes into account issues which have sometimes previously been modelled by reducing the modelled Lane length using LINSAT In LinSig 3 the physical lane length should always be used If further fine tuning of Short Lane usage is required the Custom Occupancies can be adjusted e Review Signalling on Lanes Any LinSig 3 Lanes created by splitting LinSig 2 multi Lane Links will by default be created with the same signal control on each Lane LinSig 3 allows different control on each Lane e Review Movement Settings Any LinSig 3 Lanes created by splitting LinSig 2 multi Lane Links will by default be created with the same movement settings for each Lane The movement settings should be reviewed using the Movements tabs of the Edit Lane dialog box to check whether each Lane would be better modelled with more specific settings e Separate Streams to new Controllers LinSig 2 could only model a single Controller To model multi junction Networks in LinSig 2 multiple Stage Streams were often used aS a compromise alternative to multi Controllers As LinSig 3 fully supports multi Controllers Stage Streams should be moved from the LinSig 2 multi Stream single Controller to new Controllers in LinSig 3 to reflect how the Network is signalled in reality e Reassign Flows to Network When any Network modifications are complete the Origin Destination
408. red and Actual origin destination flows They provide a check on whether the Desired Flows Matrix has been correctly assigned to the Network with no missing or excess traffic due to Route Flow errors e Turning Count The traffic flow counted on a turning movement at a junction These are used to estimate a origin destination traffic matrix for the model e Controller A Controller represents a traffic signal controller A LinSig Network can contain several controllers with each controller controlling one or more junctions e Controller Set A group of Controllers all running at a common cycle time LinSig models full coordination between junctions controlled by Controllers in the same Controller Set e Phase A Phase in LinSig is the same definition as a traffic signal controller Phase which is a group of Signal heads all showing the same aspects to traffic or pedestrians This is the UK definition of a Phase not the US Australasian definition which confusingly is the same as a UK Stage e Stage A Stage in LinSig is the UK definition of a Stage that is a group of Phases running together A UK Stage is broadly equivalent to the US Australasian definition of a Phase Although the Stages are numbered they do not have to be run in numerical order The sequence of Stages actually run for each Controller is defined using Stage Sequences e Stage Stream A Stage Stream is a separate set of Stages stored on a Controller which can be used to i
409. red in the LinSig file so they are used whenever the file is opened by any user e Default Settings for New Files The Default Settings for new files are located on the Defaults for New Files and Graphical Defaults for New Files tabs of the Defaults for New Files dialog box This is opened by choosing Defaults for New Files from the File menu These settings only apply to new files created in LinSig and once set avoid the need to setup your preferred File Specific Settings in each new file e User Graphics Settings These settings are located on the Graphics Options and Colour Options tabs of the Graphics Settings dialog box This is opened by choosing Graphics Settings from the File menu The User Graphics Settings affect display issues such as colours line thicknesses and font sizes which do not affect the Junction Layout and can therefore be specified by personal preference rather than being tied to each file Each LinSig file opened will be displayed using the User Graphics Settings e Program Settings These settings are located in the Program Options dialog box which is opened by choosing Program Settings from the File menu The Program Settings affect a number of aspects regarding the way LinSig operates such as Auto updates and Auto save The Colours Font Text Sizes and other visual settings can usually be altered for items displayed in Views Generally it is recommended t
410. revious versions of LinSig which allows the large amount of extra information used in LinSig 3 to be stored To distinguish a LinSig 3 file from files from previous versions a file extension of Isg3x is used LinSig 3 can open files from previous versions of LinSig but can only save in LinSig 3 format due to the large number of new features Don t forget that each LinSig 3 licence allows a copy of LinSig 2 to be installed on the same PC to provide a facility to edit files for older projects which don t require upgrading to LinSig 3 format 2 2 1 Creating a new LinSig File A new LinSig File is created by choosing New from the LinSig File menu This closes any current file open in LinSig before creating a new empty model The file is not actually saved on disk until saved using Save As as described below 2 2 2 Opening an existing LinSig 3 File An existing file can be opened by choosing Open from the File menu If a different file is already open in LinSig it will be first closed and you will be prompted to save any changes to the file as described below LinSig provides a dialog box that can be used to locate the file you wish to open either on the local computer or on a network Once the LinSig file is open LinSig will not change the file on disk unless you explicitly choose to save it using Save or Save As as described below 2 2 3 Saving LinSig Files The LinSig File currently being edited can be saved to d
411. rinting allows a set of diagrams to be printed quickly without having to set up a specific Report Either View can be printed as follows e Open the View and create the diagrams required as described in the View s section in the View Reference e Choose Print from the LinSig File menu LinSig will display the Print dialog box e f necessary select the desired printer from the drop down list e Select the desired layout of diagrams on the printed page LinSig will fit the layout of diagrams to the printer s current paper size e If necessary click on Properties to display and change any printer specific settings such as paper size colour or print quality e Click OK to send to the printer 6 3 The LinSig Report Builder The LinSig Report Builder allows detailed reports to be designed and generated as Rich Text Format RTF files The RIF format is supported by most modern word processors including Microsoft Word Corel WordPerfect and the free to download OpenOffice Reports can then be edited and enhanced for example with company logos before being printed from within the word processor The Rich Text Format is particularly suited to this task as it allows graphics and tables to be easily integrated into reports as well as providing comprehensive support for different page sizes and orientations LinSig no longer generates HTML reports due to the lack of flexibility of modifying and customising HTML based repo
412. rk Control Plan from the drop down list e Cycle Time This is described in more detail below in Managing Cycle Times Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 12 Scenario View 191 The Scenario Time Period cannot be changed as it is inherited from the Scenario s Flow Group If necessary the time period can be changed for the Flow Group using the Traffic Flows View 4 12 1 4 Deleting a Scenario A Scenario can be deleted by selecting the Scenario and choosing Delete Scenario from the Scenarios pop out on the Modelling menu Deleting a Scenario does not delete the Scenario s associated Flow Group or Network Control Plan however the Signal Timings and Traffic Routing contained within the Scenario are lost 4 12 1 5 Copying a Scenario s Traffic Flows to Turning Counts By choosing Copy this Scenario into Turning Counts a copy of the Scenario and a copy of its Flow Group will be created The Turning Counts data of the new Flow Group will automatically be set to match the traffic flows consisting of both Route Flows and Lane Based Flows in the original Scenario and Flow Group This can be useful when merging simple Networks which contain no Tuning Counts into a larger Network as it is useful for the larger merged Network to contain Turning Counts These can be used in the merged Network to estimate a combined matrix More detail is provided in Re Estimating a Combined Matrix for Merged Matrix Based Networks in the Im
413. rk Information Network Details Project name LINSIG User Guide Example Title Example Model Notes This is an example of a typical single Junction LinSig model User Details User name Paul Moore Company organisation name ICT Consultancy Ltd Address LinSig House Deepdale Enterprise Park Netteham Lincol Network Location Location Lincoln Latitude aot Y Longitude 0 517412 Zoom is Settings Select an item to set its properties Reset to defaults The following information can be specified Project Name The name of the Project for which the Network is being built Title A title for the Network Notes Any general notes for example to provide information on modelling assumptions User Details The Users Name Company and Address This can be used in reporting etc if desired It is recommended to set defaults for these settings using the Defaults for new Files dialog box opened from the File menu Network Location The place name Latitude and Longitude of the Networks location can be specified This is then used by LinSig to display an aerial view of the Network s area using Google Maps 4 3 3 1 Displaying the Junction in Google Maps If you have access to Google Maps from your computer LinSig can display Maps and or aerial photography of the area around the Network by choosing Google Maps from the Network menu This will open Google Maps in your default browser and jump to the location s
414. rk as a whole The table can be sorted by clicking on any column header and columns can be added removed and resized by right clicking on a column header The amount of information shown in the Network Results View can be controlled by expanding and collapsing different Junctions using the plus and minus buttons next to each Junction in the Network Results View e Check Lane Flow Profile Graphs As part of the Traffic Model Calculations LinSig calculates detailed traffic flow profiles of platoons passing through each Lane The flow profiles can be displayed either using the Cyclic Flow Profiles View or embedded on the Network Layout View The Lane Graphs are extremely useful in studying how traffic is using a Lane and can assist with identifying any areas of the model where traffic isn t being modelled correctly 2 5 3 Modelling Combinations of Matrix Based and Lane Based Flows When both Matrix Based and Lane Based Flows are used in the same model each of the above two sequences should be carried out for each of the different Matrix based or Lane Based model regions Issues such as routing etc should then be checked for the Network as a whole Modelling a Network with multiple regions using different flows types requires a good understanding on modelling techniques such as traffic assignment matrix estimation routing etc Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 30 LinSig Basics Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 1 The LinSig Traffic Model 31 3
415. rk must be configured to allow the Licence Server and Workstation to communicate using TCP on the port selected in the activation configuration Please also note that the LinSig Licence forbids the forwarding of broadcasts from the Licence Server to segments of a network geographically located outside of the LinSig Site Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 7 1 Arm Structure Examples 313 A 5 Obtaining and Installing Updates to LinSig Users with current software support have free access to LinSig updates via the software Support section of our web site www jctconsultancy co uk Updates will generally include bug fixes minor requested enhancements and documentation updates To download updates please access our software support section of our web site www jctconsultancy co uk where full instructions are provided for downloading and installing LinSig updates In the vast majority of cases updates will not require the LinSig licence to be reactivated A 5 1 1 Automatic Update Notification If desired LinSig can automatically notify you when updates to the software are available to download from the JCT Consultancy Web Site In order to respect any concerns for privacy LinSig installs with automatic update notification switched off and asks whether you would like to enable this when LinSig is run for the first time Updates can easily be switched on at any time using the Program Settings and Defaults dialog box accessed from the LinSig File
416. rn Factor In extreme cases it is possible that no movement across the stop line can take place at all during the green arrow period If the right turn storage for example is 5 cars and a minimum arrow time of 4 seconds is in operation then the end of green will have occurred before the fifth car moves off from its waiting position just in front of the stop line In such cases there may be little point in providing a right turn indicative arrow With LinSig it is easy to try out sequences with or without a green arrow and to examine the effect of re locating the stop line so as to alter the number of right turners able to wait in front of it When using other computer or manual methods of calculation the above effect is not normally recognised and the situation is treated as if no right turners were allowed to wait in front of the stop line LinSig will therefore calculate shorter green arrow times than other methods The validity of this can easily be confirmed by observations of traffic behaviour at existing signals in your area The default value of Right Turn Factor is 0 5 It is unusual to have to change this value but if a change is proposed it should be carefully justified using site observations Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 48 Essential Background Right Turn Move Up In order to ensure that right turning tratfic has reached a position in the junction to accept a gap a right turn move up parameter is specified This is the time taken for
417. rnative method to delay based assignment and may be useful in some cases for single Junction models and signal roundabouts lt is recommended to use delay based assignment unless good specific reasons exist to use entry Lane flow balancing 4 12 2 3 Principles of Delay Based Equilibrium Assignment When Delay based Assignment is selected LinSig uses the long established technique of equilibrium assignment to distribute zone to zone traffic volumes as defined in the OD Matrix between Routes During the assignment process LinSig shifts traffic from Routes with longer travel times to Routes with shorter travel times LinSig then recalculates Route travel times for the changed Route flows before repeating the process many times When no traffic can be moved to a Route with a shorter travel time the assignment has converged and is complete In practice for medium and large networks it is impractical to attempt to achieve perfect convergence as LinSig will soend substantial time shuffling small amounts of traffic between routes which in practical engineering terms will be inconsequential It is important to remember that LinSig or any other equilibrium based assignment model is assigning traffic on the assumption that delay is the main determinant of route choice In some networks this may not be true for example where traffic signs direct traffic to take illogical longer routes In these cases local knowledge of routing behaviour manual adjus
418. roller specification sheet This is covered further in the Controller Background section o Allow Multiple Stage Streams This setting specifies whether LinSig will allow multiple Stage Streams to be edited on this Controller If a Controller will contain only a single Stage Stream the user interface can be simplified by leaving this box unticked LinSig will then hide user interface elements for this Controller related to editing multiple Stage Streams o Allow Non Standard Filters This setting specifies whether LinSig will allow non standard filters to be specified on this controller If this box is ticked LinSig allows the termination type to be set on a Filter Phase allowing it to be terminated either on the start of its associated Phase as normal or when the associated Phase terminates as is sometimes used o Notes A note which allows any information relevant to this Controller to be added o Controller Set This setting allows the Controller s Controller Set to be changed The Controller Set can also be changed by dragging the Controller into a new Controller Set in the Controller List View e Click OK to finish creating the Controller 4 6 3 3 Editing Controller Settings A Controller s settings can be edited by selecting the Controller in the Controller List View and clicking the Edit button on the Controller List View s toolbar This opens the Edit Controller dialog box allowing settings to be edited as described in
419. rotile 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 Graphs Lane 1 2 Flows Lane 1 2 Storage In Front 5 5 Storage 1800 Graph 1500 1200 900 600 300 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 Graphs can only be viewed if traffic model results are available If any errors exist preventing the traffic model from calculating results the Graphs will display an error message Further details of how the Graphs are calculated and their interpretation is given in the modelling section Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 252 View Reference 4 27 3 Flow Profile Graphs The Flow Profile Graphs show the traffic flow into and out of a Lane over a typical signal cycle As LinSig assumes all traffic queues vertically at the stop line rather than spread out along the Lane all flows relate to traffic crossing the stop line as opposed to joining or leaving the queue somewhere along the Lane Flow Profile Graphs can be shown for the following items Long Lane A Flow Profile Graph for a simple Long Lane with no associated Short Lane shows traffic entering and leaving the Lane over the stop line Combined Lane Group When a Long Lane has an associated Short Lane the two Lanes are modelled as a combined pair to allow all the blocking and interaction between the two Lanes to be modelled The Combined Lane Group graph shows the inflow and outflow of traffic over the stop line for the combined pair of Lanes If necessary individual OD movements
420. row Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 46 Essential Background Right turning traffic across gaps in the oncoming traffic LinSig uses the give way model described above to model the capacity of the right turn during the period it is opposed by oncoming traffic Common practice in the UK for many years has been to use Tanners formula to calculate the amount of traffic turning in gaps This can be closely approximated in LinSig 3 by using 1440 for Intercept and 1 09 for slope in the give way model Unopposed movement when opposing traffic is stopped The Capacity during the time when the right turn is unopposed possibly whilst an Indicative Green Arrow is running is calculated using the value of Saturation Flow when Unopposed defined for the give way Lane This may be lower than the Lane s Saturation flow if the right turners share the Lane with Ahead traffic as the Lane s Saturation Flow relates to the Ahead movement Stationary traffic turning right during the Intergreen Vehicles waiting in the junction at the end of the main road stage can turn right during the Intergreen The Intergreen clearance depends upon the geometric nature of the junction In the example above it is assumed that the two yellow vehicles stored in front of the stop line will clear during the Intergreen period Any other vehicles waiting behind the stop line will wait for the next cycle Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 3 3 Give Way Lanes in LinSig 47
421. rrent Controller is changed To lock a Stage Sequence View to a Controller drop down the Controller Selector drop list in the Stage Sequence Views title bar and choose which Controller to lock the Stage Sequence View too 4 10 2 Single Stage Stream Use The Stage Sequence View is comprised of two panels e The Stage Sequence List down the left hand side of the View lists all the stored Stage Sequences for the Controller e The Stage Sequence panel on the right shows the Stage order of the currently selected Stage Sequence and also displays timing information for the Stage Sequence such as Stage durations and minimums f Stage Sequence View majaz m S Bale All alale No Stage Sequence Sequence 1 All Stages Current 1 2 3 4 Stream 1 2___ No Peds 1 2 3 Stream 1 Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 10 Stage Sequence View 181 4 10 2 1 The Stage Sequence List The Stage Sequence List lists all of the Stage Sequences defined in the Controller currently being viewed in the Stage Sequence View The following information is shown for each Stage Sequence e The Stage Sequence Number A unique reference number for each Stage Sequence e The Stage Sequence Name A descriptive name for the Stage Sequence such as All Stages or With IGA e Sequence The Stage order for the Stage Sequence as a numerical list e The Selected Stage Sequence The Selected Stage Sequence is highlighted in red The
422. rs are displayed as follows o Coloured by Phase Type using the same colours as the Phase View Displayed in yellow if the Phase is running to minimum Displayed in red if abnormally the Phase Minimum is being violated LinSig will normally prevent this but some obscure uncommon scenarios can cause a Phase Minimum to be violated LinSig will also include an error message in the Error View and traffic model results will not be available o Shaded by intensity of Outflow controlled by the Phase Right Click on the Signal Timings Panel and choose Show Out Flow to select this Phase bar display mode LinSig will shade the Phase bar in proportion to the level of traffic flow crossing the stop line If the most saturated Lane controlled by the Phase is at Saturation the Phase bar will be 100 shaded If however no flow is crossing the stop line the Phase bar will be shown transparent This display Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 218 View Reference allows a rapid assessment to be made of the efficiency of green time use e Stages Each Traffic Signal Stage is displayed using a blue cursor above the main Phase Bars area to show each Stage Change point The exact time of the Stage Change Point is shown above the Stage Change Point Cursor Stage Change points can be dragged with the mouse to change Stage lengths LinSig will ensure constraints such as Intergreens and Phase minimums are not violated e Interstages Interstages between Stages
423. rts using standard word processing software Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 282 Reporting and Printing 6 3 1 Report Definitions and Templates A LinSig Report is defined using a Report Definition A Report Definition specifies information such as a Report s title page size and most importantly the layout of the Report The Report s layout is specified as a sequence of Report Fragments Each Report Fragment represents a Report item such as a table or diagram LinSig includes over 30 different Report Fragments representing items such as Network Layout Diagrams Lane input data tables intergreen matrices Stage diagrams and Network Results tables A Report Definition can be as complex or as simple as desired and any number of different Report Definitions can be defined in each LinSig file Any Report can be rerun at any point and will be completely regenerated using the current state of the LinSig model This allows Reports to be defined once and quickly updated as a LinSig model evolves In many cases a Report Definition developed as part of one LinSig file could be useful for a number of LinSig files LinSig therefore allows Report Definitions to be exported using Report Templates Each Report Template is a file containing a detailed definition of the Report This file can be imported into any LinSig model by any user to allow the Report to be reproduced based on the LinSig file it is imported into LinSig is supplied with a number of default tem
424. s Allows a choice to be made between a slower more precise assignment and a faster less precise one The faster assignment may be useful when doing initial testing of a larger model o Behaviour The Behaviour setting governs the initial route flows LinSig uses to start the assignment process e Normal Normal simply starts each assignment run with zero route flows The first assignment iteration will then carry out an all or nothing assignment which will provide the initial Route Flows e Use Current Flows This option starts the assignment using the current assigned flows for this Scenario This is very useful for speeding up the assignment process for larger Networks when Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 12 Scenario View 197 only minor changes have been made to the Network for example revising signal timings As the final assigned flows are likely to be similar to the previous assigned flows the assignment process starts with route flows near to the final route flows potentially leading to a big reduction in assignment run time e Wider Flow Spreading This option spreads traffic between two Zones equally between all allowed routes between the Zones This option will sometimes give a more realistic assignment when many similar routes exist between Zones but will slow down the assignment process o Advanced Settings The advanced settings affect the speed precision and realism of the assignment and are intended to be used for d
425. s Exit Arms are used to pass traffic on to the next downstream Junction using Lane Connectors to define possible lane changing or weaving movements between the two Junctions Although Exit Arms are not strictly necessary and may not be present in some models built in LinSig 2 they make network layout and manipulation of junctions within the network much easier and are strongly recommended LinSig internally models Exit Arms in a lightweight manner so adding Exit Arms does not necessarily increase model run times Zones A Zone represents an origin and or destination for traffic entering or leaving a Matrix Based Network region Zones may either be External Zones which represent Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 1 Definitions 7 traffic entering or leaving the Network at the end of an Arm Internal Zones which represent traffic entering or leaving the Network along an Arm for example from on street parking or Bus Zones which represent the starting and end points of Bus Routes through the Network e Routes A Route represents a unique path through the Network from one Zone to another As each Route is comprised of a sequence of individual Lanes and Lane Connectors a number of different Routes can exist between any two Zones Each of the Routes represents a different choice of Lanes for drivers travelling between two Zones Routes are used both to define how traffic flow routes through Matrix Based Network regions and also to calculate journey ti
426. s for the Current Controller as selected in the Controller List View If the Current Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 216 View Reference Controller changes the Controller displayed in this View will also change to reflect the new Current Controller In some instances you may wish to view the signal timings for several controllers at the same time To allow this each Signal Timings View may be locked to a particular Controller so its display does not change when the Current Controller is changed To lock a Signal Timings View to a Controller drop down the Controller Selector drop list in the Signal Timings View s title bar and choose which Controller to lock the Signal Timings View too 4 15 2 The Stage Stream List The Stage Stream List allows the following options and settings to be controlled for the Stage Stream Display This controls whether the Signal Timings are shown for this Stage Stream This is permanently on when Multiple Stage Streams are disabled Cycle Time This displays the current Cycle Time for a Stage Stream using the current Scenario This will usually be the same as the Network Cycle Time set on the main toolbar or the Stage Stream s parent Controller Sets cycle time where multiple Controller Sets are being used It may however be different from its parent Controller Set s cycle time when o Constraints such as the Stage Stream s minimum Cycle Time would be violated if the Controller Sets Cycle Time was applied to
427. s Modelling Reports Window Help eB bh S re Bm ak ll EL Ee Controller Stage Stream Text Format View Arrangements ta H bade aleeseen Se ALLE S OAS e aa Ea E l lmm a e g e mA Creating Customised Text Display Formats New Text Display Formats can be defined using the Text Display Format Manager This is opened by choosing Manage Lane Text Display from the View Menu or by clicking the button to the right of the Text Display Format drop down list Manage Text Display Formats _ Available Formats Flows Filtered Demand Flow E Flows Inel Lane Connectors Filtered Flows Incl Lane Connectors Lane Geometry Delete Lane Sat Flow Flow DegSat and MMO d Del ZAR Lane Display Format Back OF Lane Middle OF Lane Front OF Lane Lane 4rnmnLane Humber Flow Demand In Flow Lane Full and Arrow Phases On Lane Lane Connector Display Format Demand Flow ha Pedestrian Links This Side of Crossing Both Directions This Side of Crossing Link Full Phase On Link OF The Text Display Format Manager lists the available Text Display Formats allows them to be copied or new ones created and displays the layout of data and result items on Lanes Lane Connectors and Pedestrian Links for the Text Display Format being edited Creating a New Text Display Format To create a new Text Display Format click the Add New button to the right of the Avai
428. s OK After Interstage Optimisation Overlapping Phases in Interstage Where Interstages allow terminating and starting Phases to overlap LinSig will only optimise the Interstage up to the point the Phases would overlap A design decision is required whether to overlap the Phases in the Interstage or whether to create a new Stage based on the overlapping Phases The diagram below shows a different Interstage with Phases A and C overlapping E B Interstage View lt Previous 1 gt 3 Next gt Edit Critical Phase Order Optimise Find Spare Green Prohibited Moves Interstage Diagram Stage Change 1 gt 3 Phase Delays C Show Phase Delays for selected Stage Change only Show Phase Delays for all Stage Changes Term Start Cont Value Stage Stage Phase Type Value Type Sms Losing Losing Losing Losing nn e peee cr T Time in Interstage sec Stage Change is OK Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 230 View Reference Setting the Critical Phase Order for Interstage Optimisation The Critical Phase Order for Interstage Optimisation is set using the Critical Phase Order dialog box which is opened by clicking Edit Critical Phase Order on the Interstage View toolbar The Critical Phase order governs the priority with which LinSig optimises the separation of terminating and starting Phases Critical Phase Order 2S Traffic Phases Traffic Traffic bt More Critica
429. s and Pedestrian Zones are added using the Network Layout View Remember that each Junction has its own separate Pedestrian Network If it is not required to model pedestrian delay it is not necessary to add Pedestrian Links etc but timing constraints such as Pedestrian Phase Minimums and Intergreens should still be modelled by including Pedestrian Phases in the Controller model e Add Pedestrian Flow Information Pedestrian Flows are specified in the Traffic Flows View using a separate Pedestrian Origin Destination Matrix for each Junction Remember that even if pedestrian flow information isn t available it is still possible to partially model pedestrian delays by entering estimated relative flow weights in the Pedestrian OD Matrices e Review the LinSig Routes LinSig uses Routes to define how OD Flows are assigned to the Network A Route in LinSig is defined as a path of Lanes between two Zones LinSig automatically creates all possible Routes through the Network and lists them in the Route List View The Route List View can be used to examine Routes to check for sensible routeing patterns and either automatically or manually disallow any Routes which are unfeasible or undesirable e Add Intergreens to each Controller The Phase Intergreens should now be added to each Controller using the Intergreens View e Add Stages to each Controller Phases can now be grouped into Stages using the Stage View Stages created in the Stage View represent S
430. s opened by right clicking on a Junction and choosing Edit Junction Turning Counts e Add Traffic Signal Phases to each Controller The Phase View can be used to add Traffic Signal Phases to each LinSig Controller Each Phase should be given an appropriate Phase Type and Indicative Arrow and Filter Phases must have their associated Phases specified The Street Minimum specified for the Phase refers to the desired minimum observable on the street which may be different from the Controller minimum given in the Controllers specification which will exclude Phase Losing Delays As the Phases do not yet know which Lanes they are controlling the Phases will not yet show any directional arrows e Edit Lanes to Connect to Phases Now Phases exist for each Controller each signal controlled Lane can be edited to specify its controlling Phase The Phases will now show directional arrows based on the turning movements allowed in Lanes controlled by the Phase e Edit Lanes to specify Give Way Movements Each Lane s give way turning movements are specified by ticking This Movement Gives Way on the Lane s movement tabs in the Edit Lane dialog box and entering give way settings for the movement Further information on modelling give way movements is provided in the Network Results View section and the Modelling Background section e Add Pedestrian Network If pedestrian delay is being modelled Pedestrian Links Pedestrian Link Connector
431. s required if estimates of overall aggregate level of delay is required Pedestrian flows in LinSig are entered and managed in a similar way to traffic flows The main difference is that pedestrian flows are entered as an OD matrix for each Junction as opposed to a single OD matrix for the entire Network as with Traffic This is because e It simplifies the specification of pedestrian flow data e Counting a pedestrian OD matrix for a large network is very difficult and expensive Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 142 View Reference e The benefits of modelling pedestrians moving between junctions is not great as pedestrian platoons tend to disperse rapidly as pedestrians cross the road between junctions walk at different speeds stop between junctions etc e Where detailed pedestrian modelling is important other more complex and significantly more expensive specialist modelling tools exist As well as using pedestrian OD matrices in a similar way to traffic OD matrices LinSig also uses Pedestrian Routes in a similar manner to traffic Routes A Pedestrian Route is defined as a single path between two Pedestrian Zones Pedestrian OD Flows are manually assigned to Pedestrian Routes using local knowledge of Pedestrian movements at each Junction This is not usually an onerous task as each Junctions Pedestrian Network is usually quite small 4 4 3 Managing Flow Groups using the Traffic Flow Group List The Traffic Flow Group List displays th
432. s which cannot run together due to Intergreens etc O O O O Os O e Stage Sequence View The Stage Sequence View is used to create and edit Stage Sequences for each Controller Each Stage Sequence defines the sequence of Stages being modelled for all Stage Streams on the Controller As many Stage Sequences as desired can be created and quickly switched between The Stage Sequence View can be used to carry out the following tasks Create and delete Staging Plans Define the Stage Sequence for each Stage Stream by dragging Stages from the Stage View o Enter the Stage Sequence for each Stage Stream by typing a numerical list of Stages in the Sequence column of the Stage Sequence List o Change the Stage Sequence for a Stream by reordering Stages with the mouse e Network Control Plans View The Network Control Plans View allows Network Control Plans to be created and Stage Sequences selected for each Controller The View can be used to carry out the following tasks o Create delete and copy Network Control Plans o Edit Network Control Plans to specify a Stage Sequence for each Controller e Interstage View The Interstage View allows a number of items relating to interstages on each Controller to be viewed and edited The View can be used to carry out the following tasks o View Prohibited Stage Changes including ones prohibited automatically by LinSig Manually prohibit Stage changes View the Interstage duration matrix Vie
433. sandsdentonevoncions 247 4 26 Cycle Time Optimisation VIEW assistaient a 248 4 27a GYGIC FIOW PONIES VIGW 2 sc255 siete a5 tions baat ea heahei antes n N E 250 4 27 1 Creating Graphs and Controlling their LayOut cccccccceecceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 250 42ra 9 eG 8 een ee eee a eee ee 251 ATS FOW PrO Ca Ol Stet decscctd es ete decsect ht ele E dec sactd carte cack Sei 252 4 2 7 4 Unformnm Quee Graphs ensa a 256 4 215 Storage GIA DNS esaseiiiaei i ia a e a a a iiini 258 2o E TOL Wl OW cines an a E a edt enna enatatewgtsene 259 4 29 Importing amp Merging LinSig NetworkS ccccsececeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseueeseeesseeesaeeeaes 261 4 29 1 Points to Consider before Merging Networks cccccccecseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeees 261 4 29 2 Importing a LinSig Network into an existing Model ccccsseeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 262 4 29 3 Joining Imported Network ReGIONS cccceeecneeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeneeesaeeess 264 430 IMAPOMING THANE 2 FIGS vine cbr Sesishenh ici cvetbelesiteranes aa 269 A lt S kemping WARING Vil Files gate atoeteriete elena oa tiee cletieet s aheal cc ieieal satieatelateeet satis 270 4 31 1 Importing Version 12 and earlier Files into LINSIQ cccccceeeseeeseeeseeeseeeees 270 4 31 2 Importing TRANSYT 13 Files into LINSIQ ccccceccsseeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeens 270 4 32 VISSIM Interface VIOW ccccccscccssccceeeceeeeceeeseuceceueeceecsu
434. scharge regardless of the level of opposing flow This should only be used if it is felt that LinSig is underestimating the amount of traffic able to discharge under high levels of opposing flow LinSig uses the above relationship together with the flow on the opposing Lane in each time slice to model the capacity of the give way Lane in each time slice 3 3 1 1 Typical Values of Give Way Parameters Typical values of Slope and Intercept for common situations include Right turn at Signals Equivalent to Webster amp Cobbe 1439 1 09 The values for the right turn as signals are designed to give as close as possible correspondence with the Webster amp Cobbe give way model used in earlier versions of LinSig and generally accepted in the UK for many years 3 3 2 The LinSig Right Turn Model The majority of signal controlled junctions allow right turning traffic to turn in gaps across oncoming traffic when the signals are green However there are a number of additional issues to consider compared with a simple give way described above 3 3 2 1 Right Turn Capacity Components The capacity of a right turning traffic stream is comprised of a number of components These are e Right turning traffic across gaps in the oncoming traffic e Unopposed movement when opposing traffic is stopped e Stationary traffic turning right during the intergreen e A bonus effect from vehicles waiting in the junction prior to the start of an indicative ar
435. se Edit Controller Set This will open the Edit Controller Set dialog box Edit Controller Sei Controller Set Number 2 Controller Set Name Controller Set 2 Scenario Cyde Times Cyde Time AM Peak Current PM Peak e The Edit Controller Set dialog box allows the following settings to be changed o Controller Set Number The Controller Set Number defines the order Controller Sets are listed in the Controller List View o Controller Set Name The Controller Set Name allows the Controller Set to be given a name for reference and reporting purposes o Scenario Cycle Times The Controller Set s cycle time can be set independently for each Model Scenario The cycle time will be used for all Controllers in the Controller Set If different cycle times are required the Controller Set should be split into two or more Controller Sets Cycle times can also be managed from the Scenario View and on the main toolbar e Click OK to update the Controller Set with the new settings 4 6 2 3 Deleting a Controller Set A Controller Set can only be deleted when all Controllers in the Controller Set have been deleted or moved into other Controller Sets A Controller Set can be deleted by right clicking on the Controller Set in the Controller List View and choosing Delete Controller Set from the pop up menu 4 6 2 4 Moving Controllers between Controller Sets A Controller can be moved to a different Controller
436. se Accept Lane Structure to split the Link into Lanes Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 2 Working with LinSig Files 13 e Correct Illegal Lane Structures If the Link is highlighted in red LinSig cannot interpret how to split the Link without further help The two most likely reasons for this are o It is ambiguous which Long Lane a Short Lane should be associated with This can be clarified by right clicking on the Short Lane and choosing Feeder Lane on Left or Feeder Lane on Right as appropriate o LinSig 2 could model Links containing several Short Lanes but had the restriction that all Lanes had to have the same green times and turning movements LinSig 3 s more sophisticated Short Lane blocking model can model independent control and turning movements on each Lane but currently can only model a single Short Lane attached to a single Long Lane This caters for the majority of common cases other cases involving multiple flares attached to a Long Lane can be modelled by making simplifying assumptions as was the case in LinSig 1 amp LinSig 2 When any issues have been resolved the Link will be highlighted in orange and can be split as described above e Review Lane Connectors LinSig attempts to deduce the correct Lane Connectors from LinSig 2 Link Connectors These will usually be appropriate for LinSig 3 but should be checked e Add Additional Lane Connectors Add Lane Connectors for any Lanes which have been c
437. se Arrow Phase Lane Details Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed i Lane ls Signal Controlled C1 Lincoln Road N ort A ka Sat flow data MB Flows General Traffic Give Way Summary Movmt to 5 1 Ahead Movement Giving Way Mum Opposing Lanes To 5 1 Ahead No Thiz lane does not hawe storage in front of the stopline lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel The Edit Lane dialog box contains a number of tabs The available tabs for a Lane are listed on the left side of the dialog box A tab can be selected by clicking an entry in this list The available tabs are e General This tab contains basic settings which apply to all Lanes e Lane Details This tab is always available and allows more detailed settings such as Lane Length and custom Short Lane occupancies to be set e Entry Lane Cruise Time Speed This tab is only available for Entry Lanes at the edge of the Network Normally cruise speeds are specified on a Lane s incoming Lane Connectors As Entry Lanes have no incoming Lane Connectors the Entry Lane Cruise Speed Time tab is used to specify cruise speeds times e Saturation Flow Data This tab is always available and allows saturation flows to be entered either directly or by estimation from lane geometry using the RR67 method e MultiLane The MultiLane tab allows wide LinSig Lanes containing one or more identical physical Lanes to be defined This is useful for two Lane corridors where traffic flows and lane
438. sed use the Inherit Cyclic Flow Profile from Upstream Exit Lane setting in the Edit Lane dialog s Advanced tab on Lanes being fed by Zones at the region boundary to ensure traffic crossing the region boundary is correctly profiled It is important to ensure that Lane Based Flow regions and Matrix Based regions only overlap if this is being deliberately modelled Where a Lane defines both Lane Based Flows and Matrix Based Flows LinSig will add these together to give a total Lane Flow This is sometimes useful in advanced situations but can be confusing and is best avoided Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 44 Essential Background 3 3 Give Way Lanes in LinSig LinSig models two main types of Give Way Lane These are e Anun signalised Give Way Lane such as at a priority junction or a left slip e A Right Turn Lane which gives way to opposing traffic for part of its green period LinSig uses its give way model to model the first scenario and uses the give way model plus other Right Turn Model components to model the second scenario 3 3 1 The LinSig Give Way Model e The capacity of an un signalised Give Way Lane is modelled using an assumed relationship between the capacity of the movement giving way and the rate of flow on Lanes opposing the Give Way Lane LinSig assumes a linear relationship as shown in the graph below The linear relationship is specified using the following parameters e The Intercept Fo is the maximum flow when th
439. seseeessueessueseeeessusessessaas 271 4 32 1 VISSIM Version Compatibility ccccccccccsececeecesseeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesaaees 271 4 32 2 Importing Traffic Signal Information from VISSIM ccccceeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeens 271 4 32 3 Mapping an Existing LinSig Model to a VISSIM Model cccceneeeeeeeees 271 4 32 4 Injecting Signal Timings into VISSIM ccccccsececeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseesaeees 272 4 33 Animating LinSig VICWS cs s icazcieusc susvadadaus icant SetleeaxSaealcuadssinesharsudant deteaxSauald statins 273 4 33 1 Controlling the Animation sssrini 273 4 33 2 Viewing Animation in the Network Layout VICW ccccccseeeseeeseeeneeeneeeneeenes 274 4 33 3 Viewing Animation in the Phase VICW cccccceccsseeceeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeneeenes 274 4 33 4 Viewing Animation in the Stage Sequence VIEW cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 275 4 33 5 Viewing Animation in the Signal TIMINGS VIEW cccccseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeaeeees 275 5 Detailed Controller Background ccsscceseeesseeeeeeeeeeseneeeenees 276 Dele k ik Ma Se MININUM See a a senda acensanne onde cacensasiiaisaecaaeaniienas 2 6 5 1 2 Phase INTEKOFECM Sista sctoncira sac sin doreetrabnnubindorecnetea acu bin ietasnctwy cacy bam letatcteaeadu bem etabeeien 277 6 Reporting and Printing cccccceseseseseneeesseneeeeseeneeenseoeseeeeeoeees 279 6 1 Printing Graphical Layout
440. set Network Control Layout Phase Intergreens Matrix Phase Delays Prohibited Stage Changes Scenario Phases in Stage i Show Scenario dependent elements Stage Diagram Interstage Diagram E andvuidths Stage an M Show Barndwidths E Display Results Block Block position has not yet been set Add Fragment to Curent Report Add Repeat Select Options tor m Definition selected fragmentis The Network Layout Diagram displays all or part of the Network Layout and can include a range of text and graphical data digplays This fragment can be used a number of times in a report with each fragment displaying different data Preview Final Save and aes Save his Cetinition as Wiel i a Template Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 284 Reporting and Printing The Report Builder consists of two main panels e The Report Building Panel The left panel of the Report Builder provides tools to create new Report Definitions manage Report Definitions and to define the content of the current Report Definition The panel contains the following items o The Report Definitions List The Report Definitions List at the top of the panel lists the Reports defined in the current LinSig data file The list allows a current Report to be selected The current Report can then be run or edited using the rest of the Report Builder o The Report Page Size The Page size the Report s layout will be designed for The Report Title The title of the current Repor
441. so manually using the Phase View if desired 4 6 4 3 Moving a Stage Stream to another Controller A Stage Stream can be moved to another Controller as follows Select the Stage Stream in the Controller List View Using the mouse drag the Stage Stream over its new Controller in the Controller List View Drop the Stage Stream on its new Controller This will remove the Stage Stream and associated items such as Phases Stages etc from their previous Controller and add them to their new one Phases etc are renumbered to be compatible with their new Controller The Stage Stream is always added at the end of the Stage Stream List in the new Controller but can be reordered as described above 4 6 4 4 Deleting a Stage Stream A Stage Stream can be deleted as follows Select the Stage Stream in the Controller List View Choose Delete Stage Stream from the Stage Streams pop out menu on the Controllers menu The Stage Stream together with its Stages and Stage Sequences are deleted Phases allocated to the Stage Stream are not deleted but are unallocated making them available for inclusion in other Stage Streams Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 7 Phase View 163 4 7 Phase View The Phase View is used to display and edit each Controller s traffic signal Phases It is opened by choosing Phase View from the LinSig Controllers menu Each Phase View shows the Phases for a single Controller and works slightly differently dependi
442. ssociated with a single Short Lane This means that situations such as a Long Lane feeding a Short Lane which in turn feeds an even shorter Lane cannot be directly modelled as such and require simplifying assumptions in a similar way to previous versions of LinSig The need to use simplifying assumptions will be less common than in previous versions Advice on how to model such situations is given later in this User Guide e A Long Lane can only have a Short Lane attached to one side Long Lanes with a Short Lane on both sides currently also require simplifying assumptions as in previous versions of LinSig For example where an Arm contains a single Long Lane with a left and a right Short Lane a lightly trafficked short right turn Lane would be modelled as a separate Long Lane allowing the left turn Lane and Long Lane to modelled with full accuracy Alternatively if the right turn was critical the left turn Lane could be ignored especially if very short allowing more critical right turn issues to be accurately modelled Advice on how to model such situations is given later in this User Guide Even with the above rules LinSig 3 imposes significantly less restrictions and provides more intuitive model construction than previous Link based versions of LinSig Common situations which previously required simplifying assumptions but can now be modelled directly include e Short left Lanes running on a separate Phase or filter arrow This common situatio
443. st LinSig Networks all or a very high proportion of junctions will be counted LinSig has a much better chance of estimating a good matrix than much larger models where there are many more unknowns within the model Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 204 View Reference 4 13 3 Working with the Matrix Estimation View The Matrix Estimation View displays information relating to traffic counts used for matrix estimation and also statistics which can be used for validating assigned flows against counts Matrix Estimation View m on Select the modelled Flow Group AM Peak Current Scenario 2 Import counts Export counts mamaria Traffic Routes Bus Routes Lane based Zone Totals PCU Zone Org Tot Dest Tot Traffic Counts J1 Ped Crossing Ji 1 gt J2 1 630 625 J1 Ped Crossing J1 3 gt J1 2 625 650 0 96 B 587 372 J2 West Junction J2 1 gt J2 4 513 500 1 03 C 520 624 J2 West Junction J2 1 gt J2 5 152 150 1 01 D 497 450 J2 West Junction J2 2 gt J2 5 220 220 1 00 J2 West Junction J2 2 gt J1 3 447 450 0 99 J2 West Junction J2 3 gt J2 4 367 250 147 J2 West Junction J2 3 gt J1 3 220 200 1 10 J2 West Junction J2 4 gt J3 1 740 750 0 99 J3 East Junction J3 1 gt J3 5 424 450 0 94 J3 East Junction J3 1 gt J3 6 300 300 1 00 J3 East Junction J3 2 gt J3 4 370 370 1 00 J3 East Junction J3 2 gt J3 6 150 150 1 00 J3 East Junction J3 3 gt J3 4 297 300 0 99 J3 Eas
444. start the animation running stop the animation pause the animation and close the animation Control Toolbar e The Step Buttons These allow the animation to be stepped forwards and backwards one second at atime e The Time in Cycle Display The central section displays the Stage Sequence for each Stage Stream and the animation s current time within the cycle The time in cycle slider can be used to manually change the current animation time Each Stage Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 74 View Reference is shown in white with its Interstage in grey If the Network contains more than one Controller the currently selected Controller is displayed in the Animation Control e The Animation Speed Slider The animation speed is controlled by the vertical slider to the right of the Animation Control Toolbar The animation speed can be increased by slider the slider down or decreased by sliding the slider up The animation speed can be varied between real time and 40x real time e Queue Display Settings This section controls whether to display animated queues in the Network Layout View and queue scaling settings 4 33 2 Viewing Animation in the Network Layout View The Network Layout View displays the animation in several ways These are e The Lanes are coloured red or green depending on whether the Lane s Controlling Phase is running at the current point in the cycle 3 cr Network Layout View A e w Sle Asl B12 2
445. starting Lane e Edit the new Arm and Lane as appropriate o AA New Tear ae Off Arm Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 92 View Reference 4 3 7 2 Editing Lane Connectors Lane Connectors can be edited using the Edit Lane Connector dialog box which can be opened by e Selecting a Lane Connector with the mouse and choosing Edit Lane Connector from the Lane Connectors pop out menu on the Network Menu or by e Right clicking on the Lane Connector and choosing Edit Lane Connector from the pop up menu The Edit Lane Connector dialog box provides two tabs for editing Lane Connector settings These are e General The General tab allows common Lane Connector settings to be changed e Flow Detail The Flow Detail tab provides access to the traffic flow components on the Connector e Overrides The Overrides tab provides fine control over cruise speed times on the Connector General The General tab allows information on cruise speeds times to be edited General Fow Detail Overrides From Lane pa m To By W Allow Routes to use this Connector Default cruise time through this Lane Connector These defaults will be used for all How Groups and all Routes and Layers through this Lane Connector unless otherwise ovemidden on the Overnides page O i Mean Cruise as C Speed km Hr 129 Use custom lane length for cruise timespeed Custom Lane Lengthim 20 E calculations on this Connector D
446. sting Flows on Source Lane between Multiple Outgoing Lane Connectors Where a Source Lane has an existing Total Flow and multiple outgoing Connectors LinSig will assist with splitting the Source Lane s Total Flow between the outgoing Lane Connectors For a Lane with an existing Total Flow of 400 PCU it is desired to split this flow between two outgoing Lane Connectors with 300 on the first Lane Connector and 100 on the second Click on the 400 on Source Lane the traffic is leaving from Drag with the mouse to one of the Destination Lanes where traffic is moving to Release the mouse button while pointing at the Destination Lane LinSig does not know how much of the flow is to be allocated to the first Lane Connector so guesses that all of the 400 PCU will be used This is wrong in this case so instead of confirming the action Change Flow Details is chosen to open the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box In the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box change the flow from 400 PCU to the 300 PCU which is to be allocated to this Lane Connector As we are allocating flow rather than adding flow the option to add the flow to the Source Lane s Total Flow is not required as LinSig has anticipated To add the remaining 100 PCU to the second Lane Connector drag the 400 from the Source Lane to the second Destination Lane LinSig will recognise that there are 100 PCU unallocated on the Source Lane and guess that
447. t The Available Fragment List The Available Fragment List lists all the fragments which can be added to the current Report Definition Clicking on any Fragment in the list displays a description of the Fragment and its use in the yellow hint box immediately below the list Fragments which can be repeated using Repeat Select options are shown with an icon to their left describing the type of Repeat Select options available Any Fragments which cannot be added to the report for any reason are shown grey o The Report Definition The Report Definition lists the Report Fragments contained in the current Report Definition e The Fragment Options Panel The right panel of the Report Builder displays options for the Report Fragment currently selected in Report Definition in the left panel Each fragment has a different set of options with the number of options available reflecting the complexity of the fragment 6 3 3 1 Managing Report Definitions Each LinSig file can contains several Report Definitions each of which is used to define the layout of a LinSig Report A Report can be produced or rerun at any time based on any of the Report Definitions Creating a new Report Definition A new Report Definition can be created as follows e Click the Add New Report Definition in the Report Builder The Create a New Report Definition Dialog Box will open as shown below a Create A New Report Definition f Create a new Report Definition fr
448. t In LinSig 3 the Non Blocking Storage is always less than or equal to the right turn storage 4 3 6 4 Displaying Numerical Information on Lanes The Network Layout View can display numerical information relating to Lanes and Lane Connectors As LinSig uses far more input data and results than can be displayed at once different Text Display Formats are used to display different sets of information at different times LinSig provides a range of pre defined Text Display Formats but it is also possible to create any number of user defined Text Display Formats Each Lane can display up to three data or result items one at each end and one in the middle as illustrated below Each Text Display Format specifies which data or results appear in each position A single data item can also be displayed on Lane Connectors Where short Lanes are used some data and result items apply to the Lane Group consisting of the Short Lane and its adjacent Long Lane rather than individual Lanes These values are shown on the Lane Groups Long Lane in italics An example of a typical display is shown below Junction Arm amp Lane Number Flow Controlling Phases J1 1 1 800 J1 1 2 300 E Arm J1 1 London Road Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 89 Choosing the Text Display Format The Text Display Format can be selected using the drop down list of Text Display Formats in the toolbar ige Sequences Network Control Traffic Flow
449. t Junction J3 3 gt J3 5 200 200 1 00 J3 East Junction J3 4 gt J2 2 670 670 1 00 Turning Zone Counts List Totals List Controlling the Traffic Counts Displayed The Matrix Estimation View displays traffic count information for a single Traffic Flow Group at any time The Traffic Flow Group used can be selected in the Matrix Estimation View s toolbar The toolbar also allows the graphical Turning Counts View to be opened The Turning Count List The Turning Count List is located on the left side of the Matrix Estimation View and lists Turning Counts for the selected Traffic Flow Group The List also displays statistics comparing the goodness of fit between the counts and the assigned flows in the Current scenario The Turning Count List displays the following columns Junction The Junction the counted traffic is passing through For counts that pass through multiple Junctions this will show the Junction where there counted traffic starts Arms The Arms through which the counted traffic passes through Count The amount of counted traffic on this movement in PCU Assigned The total assigned flow on this turning movement in the Current Scenario Balancing Factor A measure of how much the matrix estimation process has changed OD matrix movements through this count Diff The percentage difference between the count and the total assigned flow on this turning movement in the Current Scenario Positive values are displayed with a red
450. tage Sequence associated with the Current Scenario as other Stage Sequences do not store signal timings e The duration of the Stage in this Stage Sequence is shown in the bottom centre of the Stage This is for display only the Stage duration can be changed in the Signal Timings View This is only shown for the Stage Sequence associated with the Current Scenario as other Stage Sequences do not store signal timings e The Stage Minimum of the Stage is shown in the top right corner of the Stage The Stage Minimum shown is the particular Minimum for the Sequence of Stages in the Stage Sequence Other Sequences of Stages may result in different Stage Minimums See the Stage Minimums View for more information Some of the above data items are only available when the Stage Sequence is valid If the Sequence is invalid as described below some items may not be shown Changing the Way the Stage Sequence is displayed The Stage Sequence View toolbar includes a number of buttons which control the way the Stage Sequence is displayed Options include e Non Running Phases can be omitted e The display of Stage durations minimums and Interstages can be omitted Stage Sequence Validation LinSig checks Stage Sequences to ensure they are valid A Stage Sequence is valid if the Stage order does not contain any Prohibited Stage Changes all Stages containing filters or indicative arrows are terminated correctly and no other problems exist in the sequence
451. tage Sequence menu or by right clicking on the Stage and choosing Remove Selected Stage from Stage Sequence from the pop up menu Removing a Stage from a Stage Sequence does not delete the Stage itself 4 10 3 Using Multiple Stage Streams with the Stage Sequence View Multiple Parallel Stage Streams are a feature of traffic signal controllers which allow more than one junction or independent parts of a single Junction to be operated in parallel by a single traffic signal controller As it is used in only a small proportion of junction designs LinSig allows the feature to be switched off simplifying the interface By default Multiple Stage Streams are switched off Every valid LinSig Controller must contain at least one Stage Stream The maximum number of Stage Streams allowed depends on the controller type being used but is typically in the range four to eight with some newer controllers potentially allowing more Remember that using multiple Stage Streams is usually associated with complex designs and the stream structure requires careful thought 4 10 3 1 Switching on Multiple Stage Streams Multiple Stage Streams are switched on as follows e Select the Controller in the Controller List View e Click Edit in the Controller List View to edit the Controller s settings e Tick Allow Multiple Stage Streams in the Controller Settings This enables this Controller to support multiple Stage Streams The Stage Sequence View will now
452. tages configured in the Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 28 LinSig Basics Controller and do not need to be in the order actually run Phases can be added or removed from a Stage by double clicking LinSig will prevent Phases from being added to a Stage if doing so would create a conflict between Phases Where more than one Stage Stream is being used on a Controller Phases must first be allocated to a Stage Stream by double clicking the Phase in the Stream Box to the left of the Stage View e Add Prohibited Moves for each Controller Using the Interstage View add any Prohibited Stage changes for each Controller by double clicking on the Stage change to be prohibited in the Prohibited Moves Matrix e Add Phase Delays Again using the Interstage View add any Phase Delays for each Controller e Create Stage Sequences for each Controller A Stage Sequence represents an order of Stages to run on a Controller Several alternative Stage Sequences can be created for each Controller with the one being used for modelling being selected in the Network Control Plan Stages can be added to a Stage Sequence by dragging Stages from the Stage View Stages within the Stage Sequence can also be reordered by dragging with the mouse Alternatively and more quickly a numerical Stage Sequence can be entered into the sequence column of the Stage Sequence List e Add Network Control Plans Using the Network Control Plans View create Network Control Plans to specify
453. tailed information on Phase Minimums The Controller Minimum can be derived in two ways o lf the Treat Phase Minimums as Controller Minimums option is chosen in the Edit Controller Dialog the Controller Minimum is taken as the Phase Minimum Value set for the Phase o Ifthe Treat Phase Minimums as Street Minimums option is chosen the Controller Minimum is calculated from the supplied Street Minimum The Degree of Saturation The Degree of Saturation of the worst Lane controlled by the Phase The Number of Runs This shows the number of times this Phase runs each cycle in the current Network Control Plan s Stage Sequence for this Controller The Total Green Time This shows the total time this Phase is green each cycle The Phase Data View is for display purposes only and is not used to edit Phases All Phase Editing is carried out in the Phase View Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 234 View Reference 4 20 Stage Minimums View The Stage Minimums View provides a detailed analysis of the Stage Minimum times for all possible Stage orders on a Controller The way Stage minimums differ for different stage orders especially the minimum possible value of Stage Minimum for all stage orders is important when configuring parameters for fault monitoring and UTC systems The Stage Minimums View can be opened by choosing Stage Minimums View from the Controllers menu The Controller for which the Stage Minimums View displays information
454. ted traffic flows or turning flows output from a strategic model can be directly entered This avoids the need to produce an OD matrix and assign it to the Network and also avoids any calibration needed to ensure the assignment matches the original counts or flows Disadvantages of Lane Based Flow Method e Less detailed traffic flow information is available for LinSig to use for modelling a Lane s queues delays and capacities Although in many cases this lack of detail will only cause minor insignificant differences in results for some more complex junctions such as signal roundabouts or closely soaced staggered T junctions the inaccuracies may be more significant e In simple Networks where delay based assignment is quick and accurate using Lane Based Flows will often require significantly more data entry than using Matrix Based methods e When changes are made to the Network for example banning a right turn which will lead to reassignment of traffic it is necessary to manually determine new Lane traffic flows externally from LinSig This can involve significant effort if no established methods such as a strategic traffic model exist 3 2 2 2 Lane Based Flow Layers Lane Based Flow Layers can be used to separate out different traffic tyoes or movements in a Network or region of Network defined using Lane Based Flows For example bus traffic or traffic between two points in the Network can be separated out LinSig models each Layer sepa
455. than just comparing the text of two Model Audit Views To compare two LinSig Models Ensure the Audit Compare with another File option is selected in the Model Audit View toolbar Click the Compare button on the Model Audit View toolbar and locate the LinSig file you are comparing the current model with Select the Scenarios you wish to compare in the Current Model and the Comparison Model LinSig will display the comparison of the Scenarios from the two files in the Model Audit View Differences between the two models will be highlighted It is possible to step through the differences using the lt and gt buttons and also to go directly to any particular difference by entering its position in the list of differences and clicking the Go button It is also possible to use the lt lt and gt gt to go directly to the first or last difference Remember that the comparison is of the Model Audit information which includes all important engineering data It does not include minor settings such as assignment or optimisation settings so an identical Model Audit Comparison means the traffic engineering behind Scenarios is the same but does not necessarily mean that the files are identical Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 25 Audit History View 247 4 25 Audit History View The Audit History View allows comments and notes to be logged in the LinSig file as a permanent record of changes to the mo
456. the Routes to be assigned traffic flows and managed in other ways Assigning the Origin Destination Matrix to Routes Traffic flows can be assigned to Routes in two ways These are e Manually assigning a Traffic Flow to each Route This method provides more flexibility and control as the flow patterns can be refined to a high level of detail It can however be time consuming with larger Networks e Automatically assigning Traffic Flows to each Route based on the Desired Origin Destination Matrix This method is significantly faster than manually assigning flows but is by its nature more systematic and assumes acceptance of standard traffic routing algorithms lt is of course possible to use a combination of the above methods using automatic assignment initially and refining manually where desired Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 5 The Route List View 157 The Traffic Flows View monitors the total aggregate amounts of traffic allocated to Routes in the Actual Flows Matrix and provides a check that the flows allocated to Routes match the Desired Origin Destination matrix Manually assigning Traffic Flows to Routes Traffic flows can be assigned to each Route independently by editing the traffic flow on each Route as described in Editing a Route Flow above It is your responsibility to ensure that the sum of Route Flows between any two Zones equals the total desired Zone to Zone flows specified in the Traffic Flow View s Desired Flows
457. the Current Controller changes the Controller displayed in this View will also change to reflect the new Current Controller e In some instances you may wish to view the Phases for several controllers at the same time To allow this each Phase View may be locked to a particular Controller so its display does not change when the Current Controller is changed To lock a Phase View to a Controller drop down the Controller Selector drop list in the Phase Views title bar and choose which Controller to lock the Phase View too 4 9 2 Single Stage Stream Use The Stage View displays the Stages defined for the Controller currently being viewed in the Stage View Each Stage shows which Phases run in that Stage FH Stages View w fo e e Haa o B22 ale Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 9 Stage View 175 4 9 2 1 Stage View Layout Phase Display Phases are colour coded to indicate which are running and also to indicate any Phases which cannot be run for any reason The layout of Phases in each Stage is provided by the Phase View so the position of Phases can be changed if necessary using the Phase View Phases are displayed as follows e Green showing directional arrows The Phase runs in the Stage with the directional arrows indicating which movements the Phase controls e Red with no Arrows The Phase cannot run in the Stage due to either a conflict with a Phase already running or with a phase delay already defined The conflict
458. the Intergreen The Right Turn Factor is assumed to be 0 5 Clear Conflict 2 seconds Storage Area The mechanism of what happens with respect to the right turning traffic is directly dependant on the method of control However the parameters entered into LinSig are the same and LinSig uses them as appropriate depending on the method of control used TAA i 1 2 i i Arm 1 London Road i The above settings are entered in the Movement and Storage in Front of Stop Line tabs of the right turn Lane s Edit Lane dialog box 98 Edit Lane 1 2 Movement Give Way Data iV This movement gives way Flow when opposing traffic is stopped Use Maximum Flow while Giving Way Value Wi Flows General Traffic Maximum Flow while Giving Way pcujHr 1439 Use Custom Value pcu Hr Movmt to 6 1 Right Minimum Flow while Giving Way pcu Hr 0 Storage in front of Stopline Opposing Lanes Use Lane Saturation Flow Value l tane cosffaent ct confici Movements Movement 2 1 2 1 1 09 2 All opposing To 6 1 2 2 2 1 09 2 Allopposing T lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 298 Examples Points to note on the Movement tab include e In this case there is only a single movement tab as all the traffic on the Lane turns right There is therefore only a single movement the right turn leaving the Lane e The give way settings used
459. the LinSig Version 3 User Guide This User Guide aims to provide you with detailed information on learning and using the software The User Guide is structured as follows 1 Introduction Provides an overview of the software improvements in the latest version and information on training and software support 2 LinSig Basics Provides preliminary information on a range of LinSig issues including important definitions a suggested sequence of working and a summary of the user interface It is suggested that as a minimum new users read this section before using LinSig For those users upgrading from earlier versions of LinSig this section is recommended as a concise introduction to the features that are new to LinSig Version 3 3 Essential Background Provides more in depth background on some of the most important LinSig modelling concepts 4 LinSig Views Reference Provides detailed information on each LinSig View and how to use it This section should be used both to gain detailed knowledge of LinSig and for quick reference to specific facts and details 5 Detailed Controller Background Provides further detail and background on some characteristics of traffic signal controllers relevant to LinSig 6 Reporting and Printing Describes how to produce reports and printed output from LinSig 7 Examples A number of examples showing how to code different junction and Arm types into LinSig Appendices A Installation and Setup Provid
460. the optimiser Ignoring Random Delay The Ignoring Random Delay column indicates if Random Delay is being ignored for the Lane 4 22 1 3 Network Summary The Network Summary shows summary results for the entire Network broken down by Controller and Stage Stream The following information is shown for each Controller and or Stage Stream Practical Reserve Capacity This shows the Practical Reserve Capacity PRC for each Stage Stream The PRC is calculated from the maximum degree of saturation on a Lane controlled by the Stage Stream and is a measure of how much additional traffic could pass through a junction controlled by the Stage Stream whilst maintaining a maximum degree of saturation of 90 on all Lanes Total Delay PCUHr This shows the total aggregate delay on all Lanes controlled by each Stage Stream The following information is shown for the whole Network Total Delay for all Lanes PCUHr This is the total delay for all Lanes in the Network including Exit Lanes This may differ from the sum of the total delay for each Stream if the Exit Lane s saturation flow is set too low and leads to delay on the Exit Lanes Practical Reserve Capacity PRC over All Lanes This is the PRC calculated from the Lane with the worst Degree of Saturation in the entire Network Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 23 Travel Time Delay Matrix View 243 4 23 Travel Time Delay Matrix View The Travel Time Delay Matrix View displays a matri
461. time period Internal Zones should be used sparingly where they are required Overuse of unnecessary internal Zones in Networks which are wholly Matrix Based or contain large Matrix Based regions will lead to a much slower model To represent the boundary between two Matrix Based Network regions or one side of the boundary between a Matrix Based region and a Lane Based Flow region LinSig models traffic on Routes in the Matrix Based region which finish at the boundary Zone In reality this traffic is continuing across the boundary to an adjacent Network region Normally the cyclic flow profile shape of traffic terminating at a Zone is lost when traffic enters the Zone In this case however the profile shape can be passed across the region boundary to an origin Zone or Lane Based Flow if the Inherit Cyclic Profile from Upstream Exit Lane setting is set for Lanes immediately downstream of the region boundary This setting can be found on the Advanced tab of the Edit Lane dialog box Internal J Zone 4 J24 605 J31 307 CZA CZE J242 150 J312 446 J T Arm J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Arm J3 1 Main Road Eastbound Arm J2 2 Main Road Westbound Arm J3 4 Main Road Westbound 219 J e Bus Zones Bus Zones are new in LinSig 3 1 and allow start and end points of a Bus Route to be defined Bus Zones can be set to only generate Routes to other Bus Zones which are defined as Bus Routes Bus Routes are modelled using the Bus modellin
462. timiser to assume all Pedestrian and non traffic Phases always run to minimum and should therefore always be locked at their minimums throughout the optimisation process This option is provided for compatibility with future facilities and should currently always be selected Stops Valuation for Delay Ticking Stops Valuation for Delay includes the effects of vehicle stops within the optimisation process This will have the effect of producing signal times which trade off small increases in overall traffic delay for larger decreases in the number of PCUs having to stop at signals The stops valuation for delay specifies an assumed cost of a stop in delay terms When optimising LinSig uses this value to determine how much increase in delay to accept for a decrease in stops The higher the value the more important stops become relative to overall network delay The default value is derived from regularly used values for the monetary cost of delay and stops used in many other models This should only be changed if a good reason exists to do so The importance of Stops on an individual Lane can also be weighted using the Stops and delay degree of saturation weights on the Advanced tab of the Edit Lane dialog box Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 200 View Reference Grouping of Controllers and or Stage Streams when Optimising Offsets This setting allows Controllers and or Stage Streams to be grouped together when optimising signal offsets This a
463. timisers Progress For a small model the Optimiser runs almost instantaneously but for a larger or more complex model the optimiser may take from several seconds up to several tens of seconds to run with very large models taking up to a few minutes The progress of the optimiser can be monitored using the Optimiser Progress dialog box E Optimiser Progress scenario 1 Approx PRC 7 1 Approx Delay 356 7pcuHr Estimated 49s remaining Elapsed 22s Lo Keep views updated optimisation slower Abort with no changes to this scenario Abort keeping progress so far The Optimiser Progress dialog shows the following The Scenario Being Optimised The Best Results So Far The PRC and Network Delay for the best signal timings found so far within this optimisation Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 12 Scenario View 201 e Run Time Estimate LinSig provides an estimate of how long the optimisation will take to complete LinSig reviews this estimate as the optimisation runs so the remaining time estimate can go up or down during the optimisation e Keep Views Updated This setting causes LinSig Views to be updated during the optimisation process This provides feedback on what the optimiser is doing but will substantially slow down the optimiser e Abort with No Changes to this Scenario Clicking this button aborts the optimisation process with no changes to the Scenario s signal settings e Abort Keeping Progress so far Clicking
464. tination Zone All vA Ready No Results Due To Errors Errors Exist Click Here To Show Error View When Errors or Warnings exist in the Error View LinSig will highlight this by displaying a red or amber Error Indicator in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Main Window The Error View can be opened by double clicking the Error Indicator 4 28 1 1 Correcting Model Errors LinSig assists with correcting Errors by guiding you to the source of the Error whenever possible Double clicking on an error will jump to the View or Dialog Box which LinSig thinks is the best place to fix the error As some errors have complex causes LinSig can not always work out the best location to fix the error for all errors but can usually do so for the most common ones 4 28 1 2 Hiding Warnings and Information Entries In a larger model a number of warnings and Information Entries may accumulate which after investigation are determined to be irrelevant or inconsequential to a model These warnings can be hidden to keep the Error List tidy and avoid missing other more important errors Full Errors always indicate that something serious is wrong and cannot be hidden Hiding an Individual Warning An individual Warning or Information Entry can be hidden by selecting the Warning in the Error List and clicking the Hide this Item in the Error View s toolbar If desired a comment can be added to the Warning to record why the warning was hidden Hiding al
465. ting the appropriate settings e Stopline Flows Select the Stopline Flows tick box to delete lane based at the stop line If you choose not to delete stop line flows only the Lane Based Connector flows will be deleted e Layer Select the Lane Based Flow Layer from which to delete flows You can also select all Lane Based Flow Layers e Junction Select the Junction from which to delete Lane Based Flows You can also select all Junctions e Flow Group Select the Flow Group from which to delete Lane Based Flows You can also select all Flow Groups Defining Flow Groups using Formulae Traffic Flow Groups are often built up by combining a number of component sets of traffic data to form a new composite set of traffic flows For example in a development context a Flow Group may be defined as a set of base traffic flows plus development generated traffic flows A more complex example may involve growthing the base traffic to a future year before combining it with development flows from a number of different and usually ever changing development scenarios LinSig allows Traffic Flow Groups to be defined as combinations of other previously defined Flow Groups Formulae are used to combine Flow Groups in any combination For example if the base traffic is Flow Group 1 F1 and Development scenario A is Flow Group 2 F2 a new combined Flow Group 3 F3 could be defined using the Formula F3 1 06 F1 F2 This will factor up the base traffic by 6
466. tion Settings A Junction s settings can be edited by selecting the Junction and choosing Edit Junction from the Junction pop out menu on the Network menu This will open the Edit Junction dialog box Junction settings can then be edited as described above in Creating New Junctions 4 3 4 4 Editing Junction Turning Counts Traffic Turning Counts in LinSig can be used for the following purposes e Estimating a Traffic OD Matrix e Validating a traffic assignment If neither of these processes is being carried out it is not necessary to enter Turning Counts Traffic Counts are entered using either a turning count matrix for a Junction or using the Matrix Estimation View Edit Junction Turning Counts Junction Turning Counts are used for Mate Estimation andor for validating assigned turning Flows Enter Turing Counts here for use in Matrix estimation andor assignment validation Turning Counts are for currently selected Flow Group Flow Group being edited F1 2006 Friday AM Peak Change the Flow Group being edited by changing selected Flow Group Count Modelled Flow e Difference Origin Destination 4 5 6 Total 1 London Road 800 300 2 High Street 600 200 800 3 Park Street 400 200 600 Total 1000 1000 500 2500 For comparison with Counts the Modelled Flow does not include Lane Baged flow or Bus Flor ma A Junction s Turning Count Matrix can be edited as follows e Select a Junction with the mouse
467. tion of cycle times V for which optimised timings have been calculated Cycle Time sec 4 26 1 1 Using the Cycle time Optimisation View The Cycle Time Optimisation View displays a graph of Practical Reserve Capacity PRC and Network Delay for the current Scenario with optimal Stage Lengths over a range of cycle times LinSig deliberately does not pick and suggest an optimal cycle time as it is far more appropriate for the engineer to decide the cycle time taking into account issues such as pedestrian safety UTC requirements and adjacent junctions as well as the cycle time graph in the Cycle Time Optimisation View LinSig 3 only builds the cycle time graph when the Start button is clicked This is because the more sophisticated traffic model the more thorough signal optimiser and the larger potential model size means that LinSig takes longer to build the cycle time curves The Cycle Time Optimisation View displays the following e The Graph Settings The Graph Settings are shown in the left panel and allow the maximum cycle time to be graphed and the axis labelling to be set The maximum cycle time should be selected carefully as having too long a cycle time can slow LinSig s calculations down significantly e The Cycle time Range The range of cycle times is shown on the bottom axis This range extends from the minimum cycle time for the current Staging Plan to a user defined maximum cycle time e The Practical
468. tions to be set or the Fragment is inserted into the wrong place these problems can be corrected by moving the Fragment up or down the list as described below Removing a Fragment from a Report Definition A Fragment can be removed from a Report Definition as follows e Select the Fragment to be removed in the Report Definition e Click the button between the Available Fragment List and the Report Definition The Fragment will be removed from the Report Definition e Once the Fragment has been removed all custom options for that Fragment are lost and would need to be reset if the fragment was reinserted into the Report Definition Changing the Order of Fragments in a Report Definition The Fragments in a Report Definition can be reordered to customise the layout of tables and graphics in the Report The Fragments are reordered as follows e Select the Fragment to be moved in the Report Definition Several Fragments can be selected and moved together by holding control or shift down whilst selecting e Click either the up or down arrow buttons to the right of the Report Definition to move the selected Fragment up or down relative to other Fragments in the report e As the Fragment is moved it may turn red indicating in its current position it has Repeat Select errors This can be ignored unless occurring when the Fragment is in its final position in which case the Repeat Select options should be corrected as described below 6 3 3 3
469. tment of Route flows and Route flow locking should be used to achieve a more appropriate assignment In addition you can positively or negatively weight routes that use a specific Lane Connector by setting the Delay Based Assignment Cruise Time Weighting on the Lane Connector 4 12 2 4 Carrying out a Traffic Assignment in the Scenario View Traffic flows can be assigned for any Scenario as follows e Select the Scenario you wish to use to assign flows to be the Current Scenario by clicking on it in the Scenario View The Current Scenario is shown outlined in red and is also shown in LinSig s main toolbar drop down Scenario list e Choose Assign OD Flows to Routes based on Current Scenario from the Traffic Flows menu The Traffic Flow Assignment Options dialog box is displayed This Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 12 Scenario View 195 allows various options relating to how the assignment is carried out to be specified The different options are described below e After setting the required options if any click OK LinSig will carry out a full delay based assignment of the entire network The time taken to assign flows will vary from instantaneous to several minutes depending on the size of Network number of Routes level of traffic and level of Route choice in the Network LinSig will display a progress dialog box which monitors the assignment s progress Delay Based Assignment DelayBased Assignment Scenario Scenario
470. to Stages using the Stage View Stages created in the Stage View represent Stages configured in the Controller and do not need to be in the order actually run Phases can be added or removed from a Stage by double clicking LinSig will prevent Phases from being added to a Stage if doing so would create a conflict between Phases Where more than one Stage Stream is being used on a Controller Phases must first be allocated to a Stage Stream by double clicking the Phase in the Stream Box to the left of the Stage View e Add Prohibited Moves for each Controller Using the Interstage View add any Prohibited Stage changes for each Controller by double clicking on the Stage change to be prohibited in the Prohibited Moves Matrix e Add Phase Delays Again using the Interstage View add any Phase Delays for each Controller e Create Stage Sequences for each Controller A Stage Sequence represents an order of Stages to run on a Controller Several alternative Stage Sequences can be created for each Controller with the one being used for modelling being selected in the Network Control Plan Stages can be added to a Stage Sequence by dragging Stages from the Stage View Stages within the Stage Sequence can also be reordered by dragging with the mouse Alternatively and more quickly a numerical Stage Sequence can be entered into the sequence column of the Stage Sequence List e Add Network Control Plans Using the Network Control Plans View create Network C
471. to estimate an improved matrix for the whole merged model If any component Networks do not include Turning Counts these can be calculated from Route Flows in the component model as detailed below in Re Estimating a Combined Matrix for Merged Matrix Based Networks 4 29 2 Importing a LinSig Network into an existing Model The process of importing a LinSig Network adds the new Network to the old Network as an isolated piece of Network It does not join the two Networks together This is carried separately as described below Network Layout View a EX sR aal Sle mlle SEIS fs SIS elel Aaaa Find Junction Pa Find Arm zl ma S t Amm Ji K ks ane an E indians Route Filter Reset Origin Zone All Arm All Lane All Contains Junc All Arm All Lane All Destinat Separate LinSig Models after Importing Right Network into Left Network A separate Network can be imported into another Network as follows Open the base Network in LinSig Choose Import File into Current Model from the Network menu Click Next to start the File Import Wizard Select the File to import Map Scenarios in the existing and imported model to define new combined Scenarios Where Scenario names match in the base and imported models LinSig will automatically create new Scenarios matching these Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 29 Importing amp Merging LinSig Networks 263 Fle Import Wizard Map Scenarios F
472. to the left of the main Phase layout showing Stage Streams and the Phases allocated to each Stage Stream This panel is similar to that shown in the Stage View when multiple Stage Streams are in use As well as using the Controller List View the Stage Stream panel of either View can be used to add and delete Stage Streams and to allocate Phases to Streams a P Phases Current Selection hd fo le sz w SIB Selo FE elel olele ela Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 7 Phase View 169 4 7 3 3 The Stage Stream Panel Each Stage Stream shows a reduced size copy of the Phase layout on the Controller Phases are colour coded to show whether they are allocated to the current Stage Stream or are unallocated or allocated to a different Stage Stream a Phases feu Ssa ELE eller ee Phases are displayed as follows e Phases allocated to a Stage Stream are shown in black and have directional arrows e Phases not allocated to any Stage Stream are shown in grey with no arrows e Phases allocated to a different Stage Stream are shown in blue with no arrows When more than one Stage Stream is defined e The set of Phases defined for the Controller are shared across all the Stage Streams e Each Phase can only be allocated to a single stage stream e A Phase can only run ina Stage in the Stage Stream to which it is allocated e A Phase cannot be removed from a Stage Stream if it is running in a Stage in that Stream lt is rec
473. tor and to the Destination Lane s Total Flow However as the 200 PCU on the Source Lane was not used on any outgoing Lane Connectors LinSig anticipated that the desired action was to propagate the 200 PCU in the Source Lane to the Downstream Lane rather than add an additional 200 PCU and the flow is not added to the Source Lane s Total Flow If the Specify Lane Based Flow Details dialog box had been opened this would have been reflected by the Also add same flow to Source Lane Total Flow option being unticked If this had been wrong it could of course of being changed by choosing to open the Specify Lane Based Flow Details instead of just confirming the action and changing the option Case 3 Single Flow Layer No Existing Flows on Source Lane with Multiple Outgoing Lane Connectors Where a Source Lane has multiple outgoing Connectors LinSig will allow flows to be added to each Lane Connector in turn summing them to obtain the Total Flow on the Source Lane For a Lane with two outgoing Lane Connectors it is desired have a Total Flow of 300 PCU split between 200 PCU on one outgoing Connector and 100 on the other e Click on the Source Lane the traffic is leaving from Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 111 Drag with the mouse to one of the Destination Lanes where traffic is moving to Release the mouse button while pointing at the Destination Lane As in Case 1 above LinSig does not know how much fl
474. ts is changed for example a Saturation Flow being altered LinSig will need to recalculate model results for each Scenario affected The Scenario View can be used to control when this recalculation takes place Recalculation is controlled using the Automatically Recalculate Results for drop down list in the Scenario View s toolbar s Scenarios View AM Peak All Demands Assign 2 PMI Peak PMI Peak All Demands Assign 3 AM Peak 2012 Am Peak 2012 All Demands Assign 4 PI Peak 2012 PI Peak 2012 All Demands Assign Clow Larmu The options available are e Automatically Recalculate Results for all Scenarios LinSig will immediately recalculate results for all Scenarios listed in the Scenarios View when model input data changes This should be the normal setting and should only be changed if a large number of Scenarios or a large modelled Network is causing unacceptably long recalculation times e Automatically Recalculate Results for Current and Marked Scenarios LinSig will immediately recalculate results for the current Scenario and any Scenarios with the Mark column in the Scenarios View ticked This allows recalculation of any Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 12 Scenario View 193 Superseded or redundant Scenarios to be avoided Obviously results will not be displayed in the Scenarios View for any non calculated Scenarios which will show a status of Not Calculated in the Status column Selecting a Scenario
475. ueue graphs cannot currently show the queue layered for different Route Flow Components on the Lane as Flow Profile Graphs can do Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 258 View Reference 4 27 5 Storage Graphs Storage Graphs are new in LinSig 3 and show the amount of traffic in Lane segments such as Short Lanes or Right Turn Storage Areas They can be used to assess when Short Lanes or other Storage Areas begin to influence or block traffic in adjacent Long Lanes Storage is similar but not the same as a queue It is generally only used for Short Lane segments where traffic within the Lane segment is preventing traffic from entering from upstream but may not be forming a queue with a distinct front and back as modelled on a normal Long Lane For most purposes especially for Short Lane segments such as occurring when flared Lanes or Right Turn Storage is modelled it is usually sufficiently accurate to think of storage as the same as a queue Storage Graphs can be shown for the following Items e A Long Lane within a Long Lane Short Lane Group This graph shows traffic storing within the Long Lane of a Lane Group in front of the point where traffic splits into the Short Lane It is useful for assessing whether and when traffic in the Long Lane blocks traffic in its adjacent Short Lane e A Short Lane within a Lane Group This graph shows traffic storing within the Short Lane in a Lane Group Similar to above this graph is useful for assessing whethe
476. ult for aubomatent rf d ise separate capacities for long and short lanes e Traffic Flow Aesigrme Allow use of Weaving Connectors Experimental F Controller Default Phase minimum 7 seconds Default Phase minimum for Arrow Phases Warn if Phases don t terminate together in the interstage F settings Tick this box to make use of separate capacities and degrees of saturation for long and short lanes Reset to defaults Modelling Short Lanes using the LinSig 2 Method LinSig 3 1 reintroduced the ability to model short Lanes as a simple stepped saturation flow profile as was used for all short Lanes in LinSig 2 In nearly all cases the new LinSig 3 method will be superior however the old method has been included for completeness and compatibility with existing LinSig 2 models LinSig 2 style short Lanes are edited on the MultiLanes tab as detailed below All references to short Lanes in this User Guide refer to LinSig 3 type short Lanes unless explicitly stated otherwise Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 69 MultiLane Arm 1 London Road 4 3 6 2 Creating and Managing Lanes LinSig Lanes always belong to an Arm They can be created and managed as follows Creating a New Long Lane select a Lane adjacent to the desired position of the new Lane From the Network Lanes Add Lane menu choose Add Long Lane to Left or Add Long Lane to Right as appropriate A new Long La
477. unts If inconsistent counts are used large errors can be introduced into the estimated matrix Where counts are inconsistent LinSig will generally try to produce a matrix which will reproduce counts as well as possible when assigned to the network but by definition it will not be able to match all counts The following types of inconsistency can occur e Junction In Out Inconsistency The total of counted traffic entering a Junction is different from the counted traffic leaving a Junction Where only turning counts are entered this cannot occur in LinSig but where counts between Junctions are used Junction Inconsistency is possible e Inter Junction Inconsistency The total counted traffic entering a road between two Junctions is different from the counted traffic entering the next downstream junction This can be caused by a number of issues including o Counts at each Junction being carried out at different times or even on different days Count inaccuracies and miscounting Traffic turning off or entering the network between the Junctions On street parking between the two Junctions The first two issues should be corrected by careful examination of counts and selection of the most accurate ones omitting the least accurate of inconsistent counts The second two issues if significant can be explicitly modelled using internal Zones as described below If inconsistent counts are used in LinSig for matrix estimation LinSig will attempt to pro
478. unts using the Junction Turning Counts Matrix As described in the Network Layout View section the Junction Turning Counts Matrix can be used to validate Counts and modelled flows at a Junction as well as enter Turning Counts The Junction Turning Counts Dialog displays the following matrices e Desired Counts Matrix The Desired Counts Matrix displays and allows editing of Turning Counts at a Junction This is described in more detail in The Network Layout View section e Actual Flows Matrix The Actual Flows Matrix shows the modelled flows for the Current Scenario corresponding to each Count These are calculated from Route flows through each Count position e Difference Matrix The Difference Matrix shows the difference between the Desired Counts Matrix and Actual Flows Matrix Only the absolute difference between Counts and modelled flows is given 4 13 6 3 Resolving Validation Problems The following provides suggestions on how to improve a Networks Validation It is not intended to be exhaustive but provides some starting points to consider e Check cruise times are realistic as incorrect Route times will lead to LinSig assigning traffic to incorrect Routes Route travel times provide a good check on assignment routing decisions e Check Lane Connectors allow traffic Routes which exist in reality Missing Lane Connecters can lead to LinSig assigning traffic incorrectly e Check missing Counts haven t forced LinSig into estimating un
479. up The Traffic Flow Group used by the Scenario e The Scenario Network Control Plan The Network Control Plan used by the Scenario Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 190 View Reference e The Scenario Time Period The Time Period covered by the Scenario This is inherited from the Scenario s Flow Group and is edited in the Traffic Flow Group View e The Scenario Cycle Time The cycle time or cycle times used by this Scenario This is described in more detail below in Managing Cycle Times e The Scenario Results Summary Summary results including the Practical Reserve Capacity PRC and Delay are shown for the Scenario These are based on the Scenarios current signal times and traffic routing e The Scenario Status Displays the status for the Scenario This includes whether model results have been calculated since the last change to the model and whether the Scenarios green times have been optimised e Mark Allows a Scenario to be selected as requiring calculation or optimising when the Scenario View is set to only calculate or optimise selected Scenarios 4 12 1 1 Creating a New Scenario To create a new Scenario choose New Scenario from the Scenarios pop out on the Modelling menu or click the New Scenario button in the Scenario View s toolbar This creates a new Scenario with a default name a default Flow Group and Network Control Plan arbitrary signal times and flows unassigned to Routes The Scenario Name Flow
480. ur PC 4 32 1 VISSIM Version Compatibility Currently the LinSig VISSIM Interface works with versions of VISSIM up to and including Version 5 10 Later versions of VISSIM which introduced VISSIG are not compatible with LinSig 3 1 at the time of release An update to LinSig will be issued shortly to provide compatibility with the latest version of VISSIM VISSIM 5 3 at the time of LinSig 3 1 release 4 32 2 Importing Traffic Signal Information from VISSIM The signal control aspects of a VISSIM model can be imported into LinSig as follows e Create an empty LinSig Model e Open the VISSIM model you wish to import into LinSig in VISSIM e In LinSig in the VISSIM Interface View click Import from VISSIM e LinSig will display a dialog box listing all the signal controllers in the VISSIM model which LinSig can import Select the Controllers to be imported and click OK e LinSig will import the VISSIM controller data and construct a LinSig Controller Model from this data e Using LinSig Controller Views check the imported model to ensure it correctly represents the VISSIM control logic e Save the LinSig Model The LinSig Model now contains one or more Controllers which replicate the control logic in the VISSIM model The model also contains mappings between LinSig Controllers and VISSIM controllers and LinSig Phases and VISSIM Signal Groups 4 32 3 Mapping an Existing LinSig Model to a VISSIM Model lf a LinSig Model already e
481. ve way left slips Each Lane also shows the possible turning movements in the Lane and also optionally display Lane input data or results as text Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 66 View Reference Lane Length Lanes can also be Long Lanes or Short Lanes as shown above These are defined as follows e Long Lane A Long Lane extends back to the previous upstream junction and can receive traffic from upstream Lanes via Lane Connectors Long Lanes can generally supply a constant saturation flow for the full green period As with previous versions of LinSig and with other similar traffic models the Cyclic Flow Profile model used in LinSig does not constrain the queue to the length of a Long Lane e Short Lane A Short Lane only extends part of the way back to the previous upstream Junction Short Lanes can only receive traffic from an adjacent Long Lane and cannot receive traffic directly from Lane Connectors LinSig models the queue build up in a Short Lane constraining it to the available space If a Short Lane fills up the queue will block back into the adjacent ahead Lane reducing its capacity Long Lane Arm 2 Hidh Street Short Lane Where signalled Short Lanes are relatively long and are unlikely to empty during a typical green period they can generally be modelled as a Long Lane which can sometimes be useful in simplifying complex Lane arrangements LinSig 3 1 reintroduces the ability to model simple short lanes in a sim
482. vel of detail to show to be easily controlled The following Items can be shown in the list Network Aggregate performance statistics for the entire Network Junctions Aggregate Performance statistics for each Junction Lanes Performance statistics for individual signal or give way controlled traffic Lanes Short Lanes are shown grouped with their associated Long Lane Lanes can be further broken down to show Route Layers o Pedestrian Links Performance statistics for individual Pedestrian Links Pedestrian Links can be further broken down by direction of movement Each item can be expanded and collapsed as appropriate to manage the amount of information shown How many and which data columns are displayed are also fully customisable e The Network Summary This includes a summary of the performance of each Stage Stream and of the Network as a whole Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 238 View Reference 4 22 1 1 Display Settings The Network Results View Display Settings control which results are shown and how they are displayed Results Filter The Results Filter allows the Results List to be filtered by a range of criteria to reduce the amount of information shown The filter criteria are e All Shows all the available Lanes or other Items e Stream Shows all the Lanes or other Items controlled by a specified Stage Stream e Lane Shows all the Routes passing through a specified Lane e Route Shows all the Lanes along a sp
483. ver has not yet been set up yet or cannot be discovered automatically the Licence Servers IP address can be entered manually If you do not know the correct IP address please consult your IT Department or the person responsible for installing and setting up the LinSig Licence Server 4 Click Connect to attempt to connect to the LinSig Licence Server If the connection is successful LinSig will display details of its licence If the Workstation cannot connect to the Licence Server ensure that the Licence Server is running and the Workstation can access the Licence Server across the network without interference of firewalls or similar security software Centralised Configuration of Workstations Workstations can also be configured to use a particular Licence Server by using a third party Software Deployment System such as Microsoft SMS or Operations Manager to deploy additional configuration information to the registry of Workstations at installation If you wish to use this feature please obtain the Advanced Configuration User Guide from JCT Consultancy This describes in detail the registry entries required to fully customise the licensing of Workstations on Unlimited Networked PC Sites A 4 3 4 Technical Note for IT Administrators Please note that the Licence Server must be visible to the client PC over the network to allow the Unlimited Networked PCs Licence to function correctly To use the Unlimited Networked PCs Licence the netwo
484. w If this option is selected the flow being added is also added to the Destination Lane s Total stop line flow for the Destination Layer This assumes that the traffic entering the Lane all reaches the downstream stop line Switch PCU Percent value LinSig allows you to enter Lane Based flows as relative percentage values This is explained in further detail in Case 7 below e Click Add Lane Flow to add the Lane Flow to the selected Flow Group e LinSig will add the following Flow items to Lanes O O As the Also add same flow to Source Lane Total Flow setting was left selected 100 PCU flow crossing the stop line on the upstream Lane is added to the upstream Lane s Total Flow 100 PCU flow is added to the Lane Connector between the Source and Destination Lane As the Also add same flow to Destination Lane Total Flow setting was left selected 100 PCU flow is assumed to reach the stop line on the downstream Lane and is added to the downstream Lane s Total Flow Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 109 O e These flow items are displayed on each of the Lanes and the Lane Connector Case 2 Single Flow Layer Existing Flows on Source Lane When existing flows exist on the Source or Destination Lane LinSig will make an intelligent guess on the most likely way they should be used whilst adding additional flows Where these guesses are incorrect they can be overridden to specify the intended flow
485. w drag and drop method of editing Lane Based Flows to be used Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 119 Adding Lane Based Flows when using a Single Flow Layer When using a single Flow Layer the Lane Based Flow Summary tab is not shown and a single Lane Based Flow Layer tab for the default Layer 1B Edit Lane J2 1 1 a i Lane Based Flows Applies to this Lane Based Flow Groupi AM Peak Lane Based Flows WB General Traffic Total Flow 100 Manage Layers Available Lane Based Flow Entry Mode Move to another To This Lane m when Shiai Fi pis F S Uniform Flow 0 m viewing and direct editing o Layer lane flaws using drag and drop Flows General Lcis Incoming Flows Outgoing Flows in the Network Layout View Movmt to J2 4 1 Ahead Wia ineaminatian BE 32 4 1 Ahead General Traffic Add Total incoming o Add Total outgoing 100 Consistency Check This page displays Lane Based Flows for Total Flow 100 Total incomin o this lane If you need to enter data for other layers as well click the Manage Uniform Flow 0 Total entering downstream flow 100 ering a Apparent flaw loss 100 Flow from this lane leaving network D lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel TT a 1 Lane Based Flows can be added using the Edit Lane dialog box as follows e Double Click a Lane which requires flows to be added This will open the Edit Lane dialog box for this Lane e As onl
486. w the detailed structure of an Interstage Create edit and delete Phase Delays in the Phase Delays table Graphically add change or delete Phase Delays by dragging the start and finish points of Phases with the mouse o Automatically optimise the Interstage using a user defined critical Phase order O OF O O e Signal Timings View The Signal Timings View is an important view which shows each Controllers Stage amp Phase timings and Interstage structure for each Stage Stream The View can be used to carry out the following tasks o View the Start and Finish times of Phases throughout a Signal Cycle Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 3 The LinSig User Interface 19 o View Stage Change Points and change them by dragging with the mouse Manage Stage Stream cycle times Optimise Stage length for individual Stage Streams View Intergreens and Interstage Structures e Lane Timings View The Lane Timings View is similar to the Signal Timings View but displays signal green times for each Lane rather than each Signal Phase Each Lane s start and end of green can be adjusted to allow for effects such as underutilised green and demand dependency The Lane Timings View can be used to o Show green times for each Lane at each Junction o Adjust the start and end points of each Lane s green time using Bonus Greens e Network Control Layout View The Network Control Layout View shows the signal control structure for the whole Networ
487. wed by the results LinSig V1 style report A report producing output similar to a LinSig V1 report Signal Configuration Data A report showing just the signal configuration data Signal Timings A Report showing the current signal timings for each Traffic Data A Report showing traffic fow data used in the model OK C Create a blank Report Definition Cancel e Check that the Create a new Report Definition from a Template option is selected Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 6 3 The LinSig Report Builder 283 Select a Report Template from the list as desired and click the OK button The Report Definition defined in the Template is loaded into the LinSig file and added to the file s Report Definition List The Report s contents are shown in the Report Builder Further information on changing the standard reports and working in the Report Builder is given later in this section Click Preview at the bottom of the Report Builder To avoid polluting your main data folders with lots of preview files LinSig saves a copy of the Report in the Windows temporary files folder and opens the Report in your default word processor lf desired the Report can be edited in the word processor before printing As you previewed the Report you will need to specify where you wish to save the Report when saving it from your word processor Alternatively you can click Final Save and View which allows you to save the file straight to the
488. with Zone E Default cruise time between these zones ho Select the two Zones to merge Zones can be on a different Junction or on the same Junction The only restriction is that you cannot merge a zone with itself Also select the default mean cruise time between the merged zones This will be used on any new Lane Connectors created by this Wizard and the values can be comected later by editing these Lane Connectors lt Back Canc e Enter the two Merge Zones Each Zone must be from a separate unconnected part Network e Enter a default cruise time for the new Lane Connectors which will replace the existing pair of Zones This can be adjusted later if required e Click Finish to complete the Zone Merge e LinSig will carry out the merge generating new Routes based on combining Routes in each of the existing part Networks at the merge point This can lead to large numbers of new Routes in some cases If feasible the Routes in the new merged Network should be examined using the Route List View and any unlikely or undesirable Routes marked non permitted After the Zone Merge Wizard is complete further Networks can be imported and merged into the new Network if desired lt Network Layout View Lo es fe Sia xalx Be 2 e1 ell SO ALE SIO SIS elel aaa eea BIOS Find Junction ind arms Fe Ma S fd A ul 2f71 a l J1 1 2 e s Arm J2 4 DAROE pr Arm J1 5 Arm J2 2 High St WB a _ Arm Jt t
489. with any Word Processor or Viewer related problems it may sometimes be quicker to contact your Word Processor Vendor or Helpdesk to assist with purely Word Processor related problems Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 290 Reporting and Printing You should ensure the software you wish to use to view LinSig Reports is set up as the default application for opening RTF files Sometimes other applications can hijack the RTF extension leading to Reports inadvertently opening in an incorrect application To correct this use your Word Processor or Windows settings to re associate the RIF extension with your Word Processor of choice Once a Report has been defined the Report can be viewed in several ways using the buttons at the bottom of the Report Builder s left pane These are e Preview This creates the report file in a temporary location avoiding polluting the main data folder with a large number of report files as the Report is refined If desired the Report can be edited in the word processor but if so it should be saved to a folder other than the temporary folder e Final Save and View When you are happy with your Report use Final Save and View to specify where the file will be saved before opening the file in your word processor This allows you to ensure the file is saved in your preferred location e Save This saves the Report file without viewing and is intended for the quick preparation of a number of reports for later
490. wnstream flow 150 Tin Hiren tes ar Lara Galion allows you to move the flow data on this Apparent flow loss 0 Flow from this lane leaving network 0 EIS ah i ial Genie Normally the graphical method will be used to enter the majority of traffic flow information with the Edit Lane dialog box being used to drill down and adjust detail where necessary Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 3 Network Layout View 103 4 3 9 2 Using Lane Based Flow Layers Lane Based Flow Layers can be used to separate out different traffic tyoes or movements in a Network or region of Network defined using Lane Based Flows For example bus traffic or traffic between two points in the Network can be separated out LinSig models each Layer separately whilst allowing for interaction between traffic in each Layer If multiple Layers are used Traffic Flows are entered separated into Layers Bus Layer General Traffic Layer EG 20 150 20 150 zo Se Sa 45 Arm 34 3 Arm J2 1 Main Road Eastbound 2 i e Arm J2 4 Main Road Eastbound Each of the above entry methods support Lane Based Flow Layers If it is not required to disaggregate Lane Based traffic flows in any way it is unnecessary to use multiple Lane Based Flow Layers and the default General Traffic Layer provided can be used for all traffic flows Managing Lane Based Flow Layers Lane Based Flow Layers are defined using the Edit Lane Based Flow Layers dialog wh
491. x of average travel time between Zones in the model The View can be opened by choosing Travel Time Delay Matrix View from the Modelling menu Travel Time Delay Matrices al Matrix Display Mic F f Average Journey Time s Show Journey Time Delay Average Undelayed Time s incurred by Average Delay per PCU s All Traffic Copy To Clipboard The Travel Time Matrix shows journey times between Zones based on one of the following critera e Overall Average Journey Time s The average time for traffic to travel between Zones Where more than one Route exists between the Zone LinSig weights the delay based on the traffic using each Route e Average Undelayed Time s The average travel time between Zones based on cruise times with no queuing delay e Average Delay s The average queuing delay encountered by traffic travelling between the two Zones 4 23 1 1 Refining the Travel Time Matrix The time shown in the Travel Time Matrix can be further refined by choosing one of the following options e All Traffic Displays the travel times experienced by all traffic travelling between the Zones e Routed Traffic Only Displays the travel times experienced by traffic travelling between Zones on Routes Delays experienced by any Lane Based Traffic are not included This option is useful for displaying delays to buses on Bus Routes where general traffic is specified using Lane based Flows e Lane Based Flow Traffi
492. xists it is possible to manually map the LinSig Signal Control items to VISSIM signal control items This is carried out as follows e Check the LinSig model to ensure there is a one to one mapping between LinSig Controllers and VISSIM controllers e In the VISSIM Interface View select each LinSig Controller in turn and enter the mapping between LinSig Phases and VISSIM Signal Groups Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 2 2 View Reference 4 32 4 Injecting Signal Timings into VISSIM A LinSig Controller Model imported from VISSIM or mapped manually with VISSIM from an existing LinSig Model can be used to edit signal timings and inject these timings back into VISSIM This can be carried out as follows e Signal timings can be edited in the LinSig model using standard techniques described elsewhere in this User Guide The only restriction is to avoid changing LinSig Phases in a way which would invalidate the mapping with VISSIM Signal Groups e When the desired timings have been set up in LinSig these can be injected into the VISSIM model by clicking Inject VISSIM with Current Timings button in LinSig s VISSIM Interface View If the matching VISSIM model is not already open in VISSIM the model name will be requested e LinSig will inject the timings into the VISSIM model which can then be re run using the new signal timings Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 4 33 Animating LinSig Views 273 4 33 Animating LinSig Views several of the
493. y a single Flow Layer is being used LinSig automatically enables this Layer on a Lane when it is first edited e Select the Flow tab for the single Flow Layer e Enter the Total stop line flow on the Lane in Total Flow e Check the Incoming Flows and Outgoing Flows lists As every Incoming Flow is also an Outgoing Flow for another Lane some entries may already exist in either list that were entered earlier when editing other Lanes e Click on Add for Incoming or Outgoing Flows as appropriate This opens the Specify Incoming Flow dialog box allowing either an incoming or outgoing turning movement to be added As only a single Flow Layer is being used LinSig presets the Source and Destination Layers for the incoming movement to the default Layer e Assuming that an Incoming Flow is being added the Specify Incoming Flow dialog box allows the Source Lane for the Incoming Flow and the amount of flow in PCU or as a percentage to be entered e The new Lane Based Flow movement is displayed on the Network Layout View if it is set to Lane Based Flow entry mode Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 120 View Reference Adding Lane Based Flows when using Multiple Flow Layers When using multiple Flow Layers a Lane Based Flow Summary tab is shown as well as a separate Lane Based Flow Layer tab for each Flow Layer 1a Edit Lane J2 1 1 Lane Based Flows Applies to this Lane Based Flow Groupi AM Peak Lane Based Flows WB General Traff
494. y accurate however in some more unusual situations or in cases where site conditions indicate this assumption is not correct it is possible to specify custom occupancies for each Short Lane Ver 3 2 10 January 2013 74 View Reference In LinSig 2 it was possible to specify Expected Usage for a Short Lane This allowed situations such as short left turn only Lanes to be modelled more accurately by restricting the average expected usage of the Short Lane to a lower value than its physical length This was necessary in some case to reflect the fact that traffic in the Long Lane may prevent turning traffic from filling up the flare leading to partial flow starvation The external free tool LINSAT was often used to estimate the expected usage in many common situations LinSig 3 s new traffic model automatically takes into account many of the issues which previously required Expected Usages to be set however some flare modelling situations may still arise in which it is useful to be able to override the amount of traffic using the Short Lane LinSig 3 therefore allows custom occupancies to be set Where a custom occupancy is specified for a Lane it will be used instead of the Lane s physical length in all modelling Remember custom occupancy is NOT the same as Expected Usage in LinSig 2 The Lane s Default Short Lane Occupancy is used for all Flow Groups unless a custom value if specified for a particular Flow Group Entry Lane Cruise Spee
495. y input data for SCATS controllers in a form consistent with the SCATS system e Level of Service indicator LinSig can display a Level of Service indicator for Lanes Junctions and the entire Network e SCATS Flow Import LinSig can import traffic flows from detector data output by the SCATS Traffic Reporter program e SCATS Daisy Chain offsets LinSig can display controller offset timings relative to a master controller for easy extraction into the SCATS system How to use the SCATS related features is described in the SCATS specific version of this User Guide 2 5 The LinSig Modelling Process Although LinSig models can be built up in any order it is recommended when new to LinSig to follow the editing sequences described below This will avoid inadvertently missing out any crucial steps or becoming lost within the modelling process The following is intended to be a quick review of how to build a LinSig model Much more detail on the aspects covered is found later in this User Guide The modelling sequences below assume the model will be built up with each step being carried out for all Junctions or Controllers It would be equally valid to complete all steps for each Junction in turn if this is preferred LinSig 3 1 introduces a new way of defining traffic flows using Lane Based Flows For models which only use Lane Based Flows this allows a significantly simpler modelling sequence to b
496. y simple Networks it will often be unnecessary to use matrix estimation as it will usually be possible to work out and enter an OD matrix by taking values directly from Junction Turning Counts This becomes increasingly complex for larger networks and is unfeasible for networks with 4 or more Junctions 4 13 1 Obtaining an Origin Destination Matrix The Origin Destination Matrix specified in each Traffic Flow Group when using Matrix Based Flows is a critical part of a Matrix Based LinSig model or Matrix Based region of a larger model LinSig uses the detailed information contained in an OD matrix to model queues delays and capacities with significantly more accuracy than is possible with just Lane or turning flows The use of an OD matrix also means that techniques such as automatic delay based assignment is possible which can dramatically speed up the specification and entry of Network Traffic flows when changes and made to the Network More in depth discussion of the benefits and costs of using Matrix Based Flows in LinSig is provided in the Essential Background section The main drawback with using an OD matrix is how to count or otherwise derive a sufficiently detailed and accurate flow matrix For a typical LinSig sized network the two main techniques are e Direct Measurement of OD movements Direct measurement using video or increasingly Automatic Number Plate Recognition ANPR is the most accurate but also the most expensive technique A

LinSig Version 3 user Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents